96121E

Ladder Support Software

KV STUDIO Ver.6

User's Manual
Please read this Manual before use.
Keep this Manual in a safe place for later reference.
Preface
"KV STUDIO" is an easy-to-use powerful ladder software.
This manual describes how to use KV STUDIO and its functions.
Be sure to carefully read and fully understand this manual before installation. In addition, please keep
this manual is an easy-to-reach place so that you can use it from time to time.

■ KV STUDIO related manuals

Please read the following manual when using KV STUDIO.

Manual Name Description

This manual describes the composition/ specification, CPU

KV-5500/5000/3000 Series
internal function, ladder programming method of "KV-5500/
User's Manual
5000/3000 Series".
KV-5500/5000/3000/1000 Series This manual describes various instructions available in ladder
Instruction Reference Manual program.
KV-5500/5000/3000/1000 Series This manual describes the script programming method and
Script programming manual available operators, control statements and functions, etc.
KV STUDIO User's Manual This manual describes how to operate KV STUDIO.
KV-5500/5000/3000/1000 Series This manual describe the system macros available for the
System Macro Manual "KV-5500/5000/3000/1000 Series" .
Guide manual for the import of "KV-1000". please carefully
KV-1000 Series Introduction Manual
read the manual for first time use.
KV-1000 Series This manual describes the specifications, integrated functions
User's Manual and operating method of the KV-1000 PLC.
KV-1000 Series This manual describes how to make ladder programs using
Programming Manual the KV-1000 PLC, and modules/macros and local devices.
KV-700 Series Describes the specifications, integrated functions and
User's Manual operating method of the KV-700 PLC.
KV-700 Series
Describes the instructions used in "KV-700" .
Instruction Reference Manual
KV Series Describes the specifications, integrated functions and operating
User's Manual method of the KV-10/16/24/40PLC.
KV-P Series Describes the specifications, integrated functions and
User's Manual operating method of the KV-P16 PLC.
Safety Precautions
This Manual details how to use KV STUDIO and warnings that you should pay attention to. For proper
use of KV STUDIO, please read this manual carefully and fully understand this manual before you use the
product.

Please keep this manual in an easy-to-reach place so that you can use it from time to time.
Please provide this manual to the end users of KV-1000 Series.

■ Symbols
To prevent personal hazard and equipment damage, the following types of warning symbol are given in
this manual:

Danger
Indicates that death or severe personal injury will result if proper precautions
are not taken.

Warning
Indicates that death or severe personal injury can result if proper precautions
are not taken.

Caution Indicates that damage to property can result if proper precautions are not
taken.

Important
Indicates that an undesirable result or status can occur if the relevant notice is
ignored.

Note
Describes cautions for easily mistaken operations.

TIP Indicates useful information or information that aids understanding of text descriptions.

Indicates a reference item or page to be referred to in this manual and other manuals.

- KV STUDIO96121E
Ver.6 User’s Manual - 1
 ■ General precaution
• Verify that the KV Series function correctly when using the KV STUDIO.
• Verify that this device functions correctly before the start of work and when operating the device.
• Provide a safety circuit that bypasses PLC to enable failsafe operation of the entire system in the event
that the PLC fails.
• Output circuit or internal circuit malfunctions sometimes prevent control from being performed
normally.Be sure to provide a safety circuit in control systems where circuit malfunction may lead to
fire or other serious accidents.
• Proceed with care when modifying the KV-1000/700 Series, or when using it in a manner that falls
outside of the ranges indicated in its specifications, since KEYENCE is unable to guarantee device
functionality or performance in such situations.
• Use this product in combination with other devices only after careful consideration, since the product
may fail to satisfy its functionality and performance capabilities as a result of the conditions and
environment in which it is used.
• Do not use the product with the purpose of protecting human beings.

■ Notes
When using this device under the following conditions or operating environments, please consult with
your KEYENCE agents in addition to implementing safety measures such as product operation that
allows redundancy with respect to ratings and functions and use of failsafe provisions.
• Use of the product under conditions and environments not described in this manual;
• Use of the product in nuclear power control, railroad facilities, aviation facilities, vehicles, combustion
devices, medical equipment, entertainment machinery, safety equipment, etc.;
• Use of the product in applications that may have a significant impact on human life or property, or that
place a high priority on safety.

2 - KV STUDIO Ver.6 User’s Manual -

Software License Agreement
NOTICE TO USER: PLEASE READ THIS SOFTWARE LICENSE AGREEMENT (THIS
"AGREEMENT") CAREFULLY. BY USING ALL OR ANY PORTION OF THE [KV STUDIO] (THIS
"SOFTWARE"), YOU ARE AGREEING TO BE BOUND BY ALL THE TERMS AND CONDITONS OF
THIS AGREEMENT. IF YOU DO NOT AGREE TO ANY TERMS OF THIS AGREEMENT, DO NOT
USE THIS SOFTWARE.

1. Definition
1.1 "use" or "using" means to access, install, download, copy, or otherwise benefit from using the
functionality of This Software.
1.2 "This Software" means the software and all associated documentation provided by KEYENCE.

2. Grant of License.
Conditioned upon compliance with all of the terms and conditions of this Agreement, KEYENCE
grants you a nonexclusive and nontransferable license to install this Softwareon all computers used
in a single business address (factory, division, office) in order to use the KEYENCE product. You will
require user registration to use the software. Without registration, only one license is available for
one computer. You may make one copy of this Software for backup or archive purposes only.

3. Restrictions.
3.1 Except for installation of updates or new functions provided by KEYENCE,you may not modify
or add any function to this Software.
3.2 You may not reverse engineer, decompile or disassemble this Software.
3.3 You may not create derivative works based on this Software.
3.4 Other than expressly stated by KEYENCE, you may not resell, retransfer, rent or otherwise
redistribute this Software to any third parties.

4. Intellectual Property Rights.

Except as expressly stated herein, KEYENCE reserves all right, title and interest in this Software,
and all associated copyrights, trademarks, and other intellectual property rights therein.

5. Disclaimer.
Keyence is licensing this Software to you "AS IS" and without any warranty of any kind.
In no event will KEYENCE or its suppliers be liable to you for any damages, claims, costs or any lost
profits caused by using this Software.

6. Termination.
6.1 Your license under this Agreement will terminate automatically if you destroy this Software and
the copy of this Software in your possession or voluntarily return this Software to us.
6.2 Your license under this Agreement will terminate automatically without any notice from
KEYENCE if you fail to comply with any of the terms and conditions of this Agreement.
Promptly upon termination, you shall cease all use of this Software and destroy all copies, full or
partial, of this Software in your possession or control.
6.3 You will compensate KEYENCE for costs or any lost profits caused by your violation or breach
of any term of this Agreement.

7. Governing Law.
7.1 This Agreement will be governed by and construed in accordance with the substantive laws of
Japan without regards to the principles of conflicts of law.
7.2 If any part of this Agreement is found void and unenforceable, it will not affect the validity of the
balance of this Agreement, which shall remain valid and enforceable according to its terms and
conditions.

- KV STUDIO Ver.6 User’s Manual - 3

 KV STUDIO RECORDER and KV STUDIO PLAYER include software licensed
on the basis of GNU General Public License, version 2.

Key point of GNU General Public License, version 2

For more information, please visit the following URL.

For target module and its configuration of GPL, please mail to

([email protected]).
4 - KV STUDIO Ver.6 User’s Manual -
KV STUDIO adopts Softfloat.

- KV STUDIO Ver.6 User’s Manual - 5

 MEMO

6 - KV STUDIO Ver.6 User’s Manual -

How This Manual Is Organized
1
1 BEFORE USING Describe packaging content confirmation, product function,
Chapter computer connection methods and general operating methods.

2
Chapter 2 PROJECT
MANAGEMENT
Describe project management.
3
Chapter3 UNIT EDITOR
Describe "Unit editor" configured for the connection unit, 4
compilation and transfer unit.

5
Chapter4 FILE AND PRINT Describe file management and print function.
6
Chapter5 EDIT
Describe the function of editing Ladder using editor.
7
8
Chapter6
Describe display method of various function windows,
DISPLAY
command or macro command entry method.
9
Chapter7 MODULE/MACRO 10
Describe module or macro edit window.

11
Chapter8
Describe functions such as Ladder conversion, invalid
CONVERT
operand and dual coil check, etc.
12
Chapter9 A
MONITOR/ Describe application of monitor and simulator functions.
SIMULATOR

Chapter10
Describe the function of debugging program using monitor
DEBUG
and simulator.

Chapter11
Describe tools calling tools of Unit Editor, logging setting,
TOOL
location parameter setting function, etc.

Chapter12 SCRIPT Describe script entry and edit method.

Error Codes table, fault processing method and shortcut

APPENDICES
keys list, etc.

- KV STUDIO Ver.6 User’s Manual - 7

 Contents
Safety Precautions ••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• 1
Software License Agreement ••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• 3
How This Manual Is Organized •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• 7
Contents •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• 8
Conventions Used In This Manual••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••20
Terminology•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••20
About Symbols •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••20

Chapter 1 BEFORE USING

1-1 Check the Package Contents •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• 1-2

1-2 KV STUDIO Overview ••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• 1-3
Operating Environment and System Configuration ••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••1-3
KV STUDIO Function ••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••1-4
1-3 About Data Compatibility •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• 1-5
How to Use a Ladder Program Generated by KV BUILDER •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••1-5
KZ Ladder Program ••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••1-8
1-4 Software Installation••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• 1-9
Preparing for Installation ••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••1-9
Precautions in WindowsXP/2000 •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• 1-10
Precautions in Windows Vista/7 ••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• 1-10
Installation •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• 1-10
Uninstall ••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• 1-10
1-5 USB Driver Installation••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• 1-11
Install In the Windows Vista Environment•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• 1-11
Install In the Windows XP Environment •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• 1-11
1-6 Safety Precautions ••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• 1-13
1-7 About Basic Operation••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• 1-14
Ladder Programming Procedure and Mode ••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• 1-14
About Screen •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• 1-15
Mode screens ••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• 1-15
About current window ••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• 1-15
About Help ••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• 1-16
1-8 About Editor•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• 1-19
Editor Function Overview•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• 1-19
Names and Functions of Editor Screen •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• 1-20
About Ladder Editing Window •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• 1-22

Chapter 2 PROJECT MANAGEMENT

2-1 Project Management ••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• 2-2

About Project Folder •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••2-2
Create a Project Folder ••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••2-2
About User Data File •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••2-3
File Manipulation ••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••2-4

Chapter 3 UNIT EDITOR

3-1 Overview ••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• 3-2

8 - KV STUDIO Ver.6 User’s Manual -

 Functional Overview••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••3-2
Unit Editor Settings •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••3-2
3-2 Menu list in Unit Editor••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• 3-4
File •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••3-4
Edit•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••3-4
Convert •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••3-4
Setup Slave ••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••3-5
View •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••3-5
Options••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••3-5
Window •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••3-6
Help••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••3-6
3-3 Menu List in Slave Setup Window••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• 3-7
File •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••3-7
Edit•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••3-7
Convert •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••3-7
View •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••3-7
Window •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••3-8
Help••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••3-8
3-4 Names and Functions of Different Parts of Screen •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• 3-9
Names and Functions of Different Parts of Unit Editor ••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••3-9
Unit configuration area •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• 3-10
Select unit tab••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• 3-10
Setup unit tab ••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• 3-11
Refresh setting tab ••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• 3-11
Message area••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• 3-12
3-5 Basic Operation of Unit Editor•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• 3-13
System Configuration Procedure •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• 3-13
3-6 Operation of Unit Editor ••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• 3-15
Start Unit Editor ••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• 3-15
Exit Unit Editor••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• 3-15
Display Window ••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• 3-16
Unit Configuration••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• 3-16
Delete a Configured Unit •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• 3-17
Copy/move a Configured Unit •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• 3-17
Auto Assign Unit Relay/DM •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• 3-18
Manually Assign Unit Relay/DM ••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• 3-18
Batch Relay Number Assignment ••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• 3-20
Check System Relay/DM Assignment •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• 3-21
Unit Setting Details ••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• 3-22
Set up Configuration Unit•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• 3-22
Display Unit Monitor •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• 3-23
Display Customize Monitor.••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• 3-23
Display Buffer Memory Monitor •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• 3-24
Import Unit Setting Info and Unit Comments •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• 3-25
Read Unit Configuration from PLC •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• 3-26
Enter Comments •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• 3-26
Reserve /Unreserve ••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• 3-27
Jump to Error Line •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• 3-27
Display the "Slave Setup" Window •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• 3-28
Import Slave Information •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• 3-28
Copy KL Unit Information•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• 3-29
Paste KL Unit Information ••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• 3-29
Start KL-N20V Setup(KL Address Setup) Software•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• 3-30
Change the Display Mode of Bitmap•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• 3-30

- KV STUDIO Ver.6 User’s Manual - 9

 Display Help ••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• 3-30
3-7 Use the Slave Setup Window •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• 3-31
Names and Functions of Different Parts of Slave Setup Window ••••••••••••••••••••• 3-31
Slave Configuration Area ••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• 3-31
Select unit tab••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• 3-32
Setup unit tab ••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• 3-32
Setup address tab ••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• 3-33
Display the "Slave Setup" Window •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• 3-33
Close the "Slave Setup" Window •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• 3-33
Switch Over Cursor Position•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• 3-34
Slave Configuration••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• 3-34
Delete a Slave That has Been Configured••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• 3-34
Copy/move a Configured Slave •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• 3-35
Automatic Address Assignment•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• 3-35
Manual Address Assignment ••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• 3-35
Check Address Assignment of System ••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• 3-36
Import Slave Information •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• 3-36
Input Comments •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• 3-37
Reserve Unit / Slave Unreserve Unit / Slave •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• 3-37
Jump to Error Line •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• 3-37
Display Help ••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• 3-38
3-8 Environment Setting•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• 3-39
About Environment Setting of Unit Editor ••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• 3-39
View Setting ••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• 3-39
Color setup •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• 3-40
Device assignment setting ••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• 3-41
Setting of EtherNet/IP device •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• 3-42
Set unit color •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• 3-43
Other Settings••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• 3-44

Chapter 4 FILE & PRINT

4-1 Various File Instructions ••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• 4-2

New Project ••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••4-2
Open Project •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••4-3
Close Project ••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••4-3
Save Project •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••4-3
Save Project As •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••4-3
Save Compact Project •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••4-4
Verify Project ••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••4-4
Project Property •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••4-5
Import Module/macros •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••4-7
Import Comments/labels ••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••4-7
Import Logging Information •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••4-8
Import Device Default ••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••4-8
Import File Register Setting •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••4-8
Import CPU Positioning Parameters ••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••4-9
Save/read Memory Card ••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••4-9
VT Ladder Monitor File Output ••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• 4-11
Save Device Comments in Text Format•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• 4-12
Read Text Format Comments •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• 4-12
Save Mnemonics List •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• 4-13
Read Mnemonics List •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• 4-14

10 - KV STUDIO Ver.6 User’s Manual -

 Output CSV Files (Unit Specifications) ••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• 4-15
Output File in CSV format (Cross ref info) •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• 4-15
Change Model ••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• 4-16
Auto-save••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• 4-17
Auto-read ••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• 4-18
Exit••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• 4-18
4-2 Print ••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• 4-19
Print•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• 4-19
Print Preview••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• 4-21
Printer Setup••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• 4-21

Chapter 5 EDIT

5-1 About Edit Functions ••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• 5-2

Undo•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••5-2
Redo•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••5-2
Cut/Copy/Paste •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••5-2
Select a range •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• 5-3
Cut •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• 5-4
Copy •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• 5-4
Paste•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• 5-4
Multiple Paste••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••5-4
Search Device •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••5-6
Replace Device •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••5-7
Search / Replace Instruction••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••5-8
NO/NC Contacts •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• 5-10
Search Rung Comments •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• 5-11
Search/Replace Text ••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• 5-12
Batch Replace ••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• 5-13
Cross Reference •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• 5-14
Jump •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• 5-15
Rung/step No.••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• 5-15
Top/bottom •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• 5-16
Previous/next block •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• 5-16
Previous/next symbol•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• 5-16
Home/end•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• 5-17
Change previous/Next block ••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• 5-17
Open target modules/macro ••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• 5-17
Contact/Coil ••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• 5-17
Insert •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• 5-18
Cell •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• 5-18
Empty rung •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• 5-18
Rung comment ••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• 5-18
Loopback ladder•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• 5-19
Deleting Rungs •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• 5-20
Set Disabling Rungs and Cancel Disabled Rungs ••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• 5-20
Rung Setting •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• 5-21
Width•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• 5-21
Height••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• 5-21
Auto-adjust •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• 5-21
Bookmark••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• 5-22
Insert•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• 5-22
Setting •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• 5-23

- KV STUDIO Ver.6 User’s Manual - 11

 Remove •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• 5-23
Hyperlink•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• 5-24
Set/edit ••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• 5-24
Delete••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• 5-24
List •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• 5-25
Edit Mode••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• 5-26
Expanded Ladder Mode •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• 5-26
Connection line Edit Mode ••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• 5-27
Edit Connection Line •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• 5-28
Input connection lines ••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• 5-28
Delete connection lines ••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• 5-28
Ladder Arrangement ••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• 5-29
Edit List ••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• 5-29
Display and edit mnemonics list ••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• 5-29
Mnemonics list format •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• 5-30
Change Operands ••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• 5-31
Edit Device Comment •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• 5-32
Change device comment ••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• 5-32
Delete all device comments •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• 5-32

Chapter 6 DISPLAY

6-1 About View Functions•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• 6-2

Toolbar/Status Bar••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••6-2
Workspace •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••6-3
"Project" tab. •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• 6-5
"Macro" tab •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• 6-10
"Monitor" tab •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• 6-11
Output Window •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• 6-12
Module Library••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• 6-13
Enter Instruction••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• 6-14
Displaying the Device Comment Edit Window ••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• 6-17
Displaying the Label Edit Window •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• 6-21
Device Use List•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• 6-26
Display Use Status ••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• 6-27
Display CPU System Setting •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• 6-28
Mnemonics List•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• 6-29
Zoom in/Zoom out •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• 6-29
Auto Zoom ••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• 6-30
Displaying Labels •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• 6-30
Display the Label Comments •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• 6-30
Displaying Comments•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• 6-30
Displaying Unit Devices •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• 6-31
Local Assignment Destination Display During Monitor ••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• 6-32
Display Ladder Monitor Value in Hex ••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• 6-32
Clear Changed Background Color••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• 6-32
6-2 Entering and Deleting Instructions •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• 6-33
Entering Instructions ••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• 6-33
Entering from the Instruction/Macro/Pack/Palette ••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• 6-34
Directly Entering Instructions Using Mnemonics •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• 6-36
Enter instruction from tool bar (editing symbol 1) •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• 6-37
Enter instruction from tool bar (edit symbol 2). ••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• 6-38
Enter instruction from tool bar (edit symbol 3). ••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• 6-39

12 - KV STUDIO Ver.6 User’s Manual -

 Enter instruction from tool bar symbol for (CPU positioning) •••••••••••••••••••••••• 6-40
Enter instruction from the device comment edit window, etc. ••••••••••••••••••••••• 6-41
Deleting Instructions ••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• 6-42
Specifying the Default Suffix ••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• 6-42
6-3 CPU System Setting ••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• 6-43
Program Settings ••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• 6-43
Execution sequence of modules setting ••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• 6-43
Fixed period execute and user interrupt setting •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• 6-44
Scan time related setting ••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• 6-46
Protection setting••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• 6-47
System Setting •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• 6-48
Entire assignment of local device ••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• 6-48
Setup module/macro device ••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• 6-52
CPU unit buffer capacity setting ••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• 6-53
Power OFF hold setting ••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• 6-54
Action when error occurs ••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• 6-55
Upper limit of digital trimmer ••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• 6-56

Chapter 7 MODULE/MACRO

7-1 About Module/Macro ••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• 7-2

Create New Module ••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••7-2
Create New Macro••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••7-2
Open Module/macro •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••7-3
Close Module/macro •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••7-3
Delete Module/macro ••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••7-3
Module/macro Property••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••7-4
Macro Argument Settings •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••7-5
Convert Unit Devices•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••7-6
Module Execution Sequence Setting •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••7-6

Chapter 8 CONVERT

8-1 About Conversion Functions ••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• 8-2

Conversion ••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••8-2
Converting Individual Modules and Macros •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••8-3
Check Device Confliction••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••8-3
Clear Invalid Operands ••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••8-4
Duplicate Coil Check •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••8-5
Local Devices by Module/macro Setting •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••8-6
Entire Assignments of Local Devices Setting •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••8-6

Chapter 9 MONITOR & SIMULATOR

9-1 About Monitor/Simulator Functions ••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• 9-2

Preparation Before Monitoring •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••9-2
Returning to Editor••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••9-4
Communication Setting ••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••9-4
Communication setting•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• 9-4
Global device comment transfer range setting ••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• 9-18

- KV STUDIO Ver.6 User’s Manual - 13

 Comment transfer setup •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• 9-19
Monitor Mode •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• 9-20
Transfer to PLC -> Monitor Mode•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• 9-20
Read from PLC -> Monitor mode •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• 9-26
Transfer to PLC ••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• 9-27
Read from PLC•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• 9-28
Verify/Synchronize PLC •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• 9-28
Verifying PLC •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• 9-31
Start Monitor ••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• 9-31
Stop Monitor ••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• 9-31
Online Edit ••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• 9-31
Simulator •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• 9-32
Set up Simulator •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• 9-32
Real-time Chart Monitor ••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• 9-33
High-speed Time Chart Monitor•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• 9-34
"Monitor/Simulator(N)" "High-speed Time Chart Monitor(H)"•••••••••••••••••••••••••• 9-34
Register monitor window •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• 9-34
Batch Monitor Window ••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• 9-35
Batch Change Window •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• 9-35
Display/hide Watch Window ••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• 9-36
Unit Monitor •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• 9-36
Custom Monitor ••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• 9-36
Command monitor •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• 9-37
9-2 Monitor Function •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• 9-38
Function Overview •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• 9-38
Restrictions ON Monitor ••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• 9-38
Communication with PLC ••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• 9-38
Precautions when Using Serial Ports ••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• 9-38
Precautions when Using USB Ports••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• 9-39
Various Monitor Functions •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• 9-39
Register Monitor •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• 9-39
Batch Monitor ••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• 9-39
Batch Change••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• 9-39
Watch Window•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• 9-39
Custom Monitor••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• 9-39
Command monitor ••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• 9-39
High-speed Time Chart Monitor ••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• 9-40
Real-time Chart Monitor •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• 9-40
Unit Monitor ••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• 9-40
Online Edit Function ••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• 9-40
Start and Exit Monitor •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• 9-40
Names and Functions of Monitor Screen •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• 9-41
Ladder Program Monitor •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• 9-41
PLC Setting and Operation ••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• 9-44
9-3 Register Monitor •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• 9-45
Register Monitor overview •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• 9-45
Display Register Monitor Window ••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• 9-45
Device Registration••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• 9-46
Change Current Value •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• 9-47
9-4 Batch Monitoring •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• 9-50
Overview•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• 9-50
Change Displayed Devices ••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• 9-50
Change Current Value •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• 9-51
9-5 Custom Monitor ••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• 9-53

14 - KV STUDIO Ver.6 User’s Manual -

 Features of Custom Monitor •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• 9-53
Display Custom Monitor ••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• 9-53
Registering Custom Monitors •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• 9-54
9-6 Real-time Chart Monitor ••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• 9-55
The Features of Real-time Chart Monitor •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• 9-55
Display the Real-time Chart Monitor •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• 9-55
The Composition of Real-time Chart Monitor•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• 9-55
"File (F)" Menu •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• 9-61
"Edit(E)" Menu••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• 9-64
"View(V)" Menu ••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• 9-68
"Communications setting (C)" Menu •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• 9-75
"Help (H)" Menu ••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• 9-77
9-7 High-speed Time Chart Monitor ••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• 9-78
Features of High-speed Time Chart Monitor •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• 9-78
Display High Speed Time Chart Monitor ••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• 9-78
Names and Functions of Parts in High-speed Time Chart Monitor ••••••••••••••••••• 9-78
9-8 Unit Monitor •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• 9-86
Features of Unit Monitor •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• 9-86
Displaying Unit Monitor ••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• 9-86
About the "Unit Monitor" window••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• 9-86
16-, 32- and 64-point Unit Monitor ••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• 9-87
9-9 Batch Change ••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• 9-88
About "Batch change" Window••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• 9-88
Create New CSV File •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• 9-88
Open CSV File •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• 9-89
Save CSV File ••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• 9-89
Save the CSV File by Another Name •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• .9-89
Read Memory Card••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• 9-90
Write Memory Card••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• 9-90
Close File••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• 9-91
Exit Window••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• .9-91
Cross Reference •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• 9-91
Undo••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• 9-92
Redo••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• 9-92
Select All•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• 9-92
Cut/Copy/Paste Selected Range •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• 9-93
Delete Rung•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• 9-93
Delete Selected Range. ••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• 9-93
Sort by Device Sequence •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• 9-93
Read All Items from PLC ••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• 9-94
Read Selected Range from PLC••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• 9-94
Write All Items to PLC•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• 9-94
Write Selected Range to PLC •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• 9-94
Batch Insert •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• 9-95
Insert Rung••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• 9-95
Increment Insert •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• 9-96
9-10 Online Edit•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• 9-97
Overview•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• 9-97
Online Edit Features ••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• 9-97
Cautions Upon Using the Online Edit Function ••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• 9-97
Start Online Edit••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• 9-98
Transfer Online Edit •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• 9-99
Setup Online Edit ••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• 9-100
9-11 Simulator••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• 9-101

- KV STUDIO Ver.6 User’s Manual - 15

 Overview•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• 9-101
Simulator Restrictions ••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• 9-101
Starting Up and Exiting Simulator ••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• 9-104
Starting up and Stopping Simulator •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• 9-105
Names and Functions of Screen Parts •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• 9-105
Executing Simulator ••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• 9-105
Scan Execution •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••9-105
Step execution •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••9-107

Chapter 10 DEBUG

10-1 About Debugging Functions •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• 10-2

Execute RUN/continuous Scan •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• 10-2
PROGRAM/stop •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• 10-2
Execute 1 Scan ••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• 10-3
Execute Continuous Step ••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• 10-3
Execute 1 Block •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• 10-4
Execute 1 Step •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• 10-4
Execute Reverse Continuous Step •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• 10-5
Execute Reverse 1 Block ••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• 10-5
Execute reverse 1 step •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• 10-6
Pause ••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• 10-6
Reset •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• 10-7
Device Break Setting ••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• 10-7
Device Break •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• 10-8
Rung break •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••10-10
Derivation monitor •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• 10-11
Forced Set/reset Register ••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• 10-12
Error Monitor Window •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• 10-13
Inhibit Input Refreshing •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• 10-14
Inhibit Output •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• 10-15
Scan Time Monitor ••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• 10-15
Performance monitor ••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• 10-16
Calendar Timer Setting •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• 10-17
Clear All PLC Devices ••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• 10-18
Clear CMs For KV-D30 •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• 10-19

Chapter 11 TOOL

11-1 About Tool Functions••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• 11-2

Unit Editor •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• 11-2
Switch Unit Configuration ••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• 11-2
Logging/tracing Setting •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• 11-3
Set Device Default Value•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• 11-4
File Register Add / change Setting ••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• 11-5
Mail Setting••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• 11-6
Mail Command Maker•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• 11-6
Simple PLC link setting •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• 11-7
FTP client setting ••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• 11-7
CPU Positioning Parameter••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• 11-7
CPU High-speed Counter Setting Wizard•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• 11-8
KV-DN20 Setup ••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• 11-8
KV-CL20 Setup•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• 11-8

16 - KV STUDIO Ver.6 User’s Manual -

 KV-L20 Setting(Protocol Builder) •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• 11-8
KV-H20S/40S/20G Setting (Motion Builder) ••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• 11-9
KV-H20S/40S/20G Setting(Simple Settings) ••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• 11-9
KV-ML/MC setting (KV MOTION+) •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• 11-9
KV-L20V Setting(PROTOCOL STUDIO) ••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• 11-10
MV-L40 Setting(MV LINK STUDIO) ••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• 11-10
KV-EP21V setting (EtherNet/IP setting) •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• 11-11
KV-EP21V setting (KV DATALINK+ for EtherNet/IP) •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• 11-11
Panel Editor •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• 11-11
KV-N20V Setting (KL Address Setting)••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• 11-11
KV STUDIO RECORDER ••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• 11-11
KV STUDIO PLAYER •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• 11-13
Check CPU function version•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• 11-14
Customize •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• 11-15
Shortcut keys ••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••11-15
Toolbar ••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••11-16
Option ••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• 11-17

Chapter 12 SCRIPT

12-1 Insert Script •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• 12-2

Insert Area Script ••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• 12-2
Insert Box Script •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• 12-2
Change Edit Method ••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• 12-3
12-2 Convert Script•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• 12-4
Convert Selected Script Only •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• 12-4
Convert All Scripts •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• 12-4
Set Warning Level of Script Conversion Error •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• 12-4
12-3 Display Converted Ladder Program •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• 12-5
Display Converted Ladder •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• 12-5
Display Entire Content of Converted Ladder ••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• 12-6
Fold Entire Content of Converted Ladder ••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• 12-7
12-4 Input Auxiliary Function •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• 12-8
Display Script Function List ••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• 12-8
Display Simple Format••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• 12-8

APPENDICES

1 Error Message Lists ••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••A-2

Errors That Occur on Editor•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• A-2
Errors/Warnings That Occur in Conversion••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• A-3
Errors at Start of Monitoring and Communications Errors ••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• A-5
Errors During Ethernet Communications •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• A-6
PLC Unit Errors •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• A-7
Errors That Occur on Unit Editor•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• A-9
2 List of Unavailable Characters•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• A-11
3 Shortcut Key List •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• A-13
Shortcut Keys Valid on Unit Editor ••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••A-13
Shortcut Keys Valid on Unit Editor "Slave Setup Screen"•••••••••••••••••••••••••••• A-13
Shortcut Keys Valid on KV STUDIO ••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••A-14
Shortcut keys valid in the initial screen •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• A-14
Shortcut keys valid in the Editor mode ••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• A-14

- KV STUDIO Ver.6 User’s Manual - 17

 Shortcut keys valid in the Monitor mode ••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• A-16
Shortcut keys valid in the Simulator mode •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• A-17
Shortcut keys valid during online editing •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• A-18
GPPQ/GPPA Mode Shortcut Key List ••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••A-19
CX Mode Shortcut Key List •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••A-20
How to use " / " key ••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••A-21
Input Instruction by Omission Method ••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••A-23
4 Remedies for Frequently Occurring Communications Errors••••••••••••••••••••• A-25
5 Index ••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• A-28

18 - KV STUDIO Ver.6 User’s Manual -

 MEMO

- KV STUDIO Ver.6 User’s Manual - 19

 Conventions Used In This Manual

Terminology
The following terminologies are used for description except for some contents in this manual.
Terminology Explanation
"KV-5500" Refers to KV-5500 Series programmable controller (PLC) from KEYENCE.
"KV-5000" Refers to KV-5000 Series programmable controller (PLC) from KEYENCE.
"KV-3000" Refers to KV-3000 Series programmable controller (PLC) from KEYENCE.
"KV-1000" Refers to KV-1000 Series programmable controller (PLC) from KEYENCE.
"KV-700/700+M" Refers to KV-700 Series programmable controller (PLC) from KEYENCE.
"KV-10(16)/24(40)" Refers to KV-10/16/24/40 Series programmable controller (PLC) from KEYENCE.
"KV-P16" Refers to KV-P16 Series programmable controller (PLC) from KEYENCE.
General name of program control system installed in basic unit, CPU unit, etc.
PLC
Represents the whole system.
PC Short name of personal PC.
"KV STUDIO" Refers to KV STUDIO ladder support software.
Ladder program Refers to the program generated with KV STUDIO ladder support software.
Refers to the version of the function added on CPU.
CPU function version
For more information, see KV-5500/5000/3000 Series User’s Manual.
KV-5000/3000 with "Ver.2.0" printed on the side serial sheet indicates CPU function
"KV-5000 Ver.2" version 2.0.
"KV-3000 Ver.2" It is used for differentiation from the KV-5000/3000 with CPU function version earlier
than 2.0.
KV-5000/3000 with "Ver.1.1" printed on the side serial sheet indicates CPU function
"KV-5000 Ver.1.1" version 1.1.
"KV-3000 Ver.1.1" It is used for differentiation from the KV-5000/3000 with CPU function version earlier
than 1.1.

About Symbols
Menus and buttons in this manual are indicated using the following symbols.
Terminology Explanation
"" Menu item, which can be selected from the menu bar.
[] Name of the dialog box and the item.
Buttons with text description in dialog box for various operations, such as execute or
〔〕
cancel.
Ctrl Keys on the keyboard.

20 - KV STUDIO Ver.6 User’s Manual -

1

BEFORE USING
BEFORE USING
The chapter describes packaging content confirmation, product function,
computer connection and installation methods and general operating
methods.

1-1 Check the Package Contents •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• 1-2

1-2 KV STUDIO Overview ••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• 1-3
1-3 About Data Compatibility •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• 1-5
1-4 Software Installation •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• 1-9
1-5 USB Driver Installation••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• 1-11
1-6 Safety Precautions ••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• 1-13
1-7 About Basic Operation ••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• 1-14
1-8 About Editor•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• 1-19

- KV STUDIO Ver.6 User’s Manual - 1-1

 1-1 Check the Package Contents
1 The package contains the following items. Before using, make sure that the package contains
everything that it is supposed to contain.
BEFORE USING

■ KV STUDIO Ver.6 CD-ROM

This CD-ROM contains the Installer of KV STUDIO Ver.6. Please keep it in a safe
place after installation.

Note
It is recommended that a backup of this CD-ROM be made to safeguard accidental
damage.

1-2 - KV STUDIO Ver.6 User’s Manual -

1-2 KV STUDIO Overview
This section describes the system configuration and operating environment of KV STUDIO, as well as 1
its features and functions.

BEFORE USING
Be sure to read this section before you start to use .

Operating Environment and System Configuration

The following environment is required for operation of KV STUDIO.

Make sure that the system you are using meets the following conditions and is equipped with the
required devices.
Monitor
Resolution 1024 x 768
Computer system supported High Color (16-bit) or more
Computer installed with Windows XP, Windows 2000, Printer
Windows Vista or Windows 7, equipped with RS-232C
Printer
or USB interface. Windows-compatible
printer (300 dpi or
more) that can be
CD-ROM drive connected to a PC

CPU
Windows XP/2000:
Pentium 800MHz or more KV series

(Pentium 1GHz or more recommended)

Windows 7/Vista:
Processor recommended by Microsoft Corporation.

Memory capacity
Windows XP/2000: Expanded memory 256 MB or more (512 MB or more recommended)
Windows 7/Vista: Expanded memory 512 MB or more (1 GB or more recommended)

Applicable OS
• WindowsXP (Not included 64-bit version) • Windows2000 (SP3 or more)
• Windows Vista (Not included 64-bit version) • Windows 7

Free Space Available on Hard Disk

950M bytes or more

(PLC)
KV STUDIO Ver.6 support the followingPLC.
• KV-5500
• KV-5000
• KV-3000
• KV-1000
• KV-700/700+M
• KV-P16
• KV-10/16/24/40

- KV STUDIO Ver.6 User’s Manual - 1-3

 1-2 KV STUDIO Overview

1 KV STUDIO Function
BEFORE USING

KV STUDIO Features

■ Unit Editor
• This is provided for the KV-5500/5000/3000/1000/700 series.
• Used to set up all the units and assign relays/DMs in the KV-
5500/5000/ 3000/1000/700 series.
• Unit structure diagram and settings list can be printed.

■ Editor
• Ladder programs can be compiled by using various ladder
language instructions.
• Structured programming can be performed by using module
macros and local devices.
• Device comments and label registration can be enable and
tranferred to PLC
• The generated ladder programs can be converted to codes
that can be read by every KV series.
• The lists of ladder programs, mnemonics, comment labels, and device use can be displayed and printed.

■ Simulation
• Off-line operation simulating is performed on every KV series.
Ladder debugging is also possible.
• Troubleshooting is easy by conducting continuous scanning,
single step scanning, and single step execution.
• Reversed one-step operation is also possible.

■ Monitoring
• Contact ON/OFF status can be real time monitored by using
compiled ladders
• Time curve can be displayed.
• Online edit is possible.

1-4 - KV STUDIO Ver.6 User’s Manual -

 1-3 About Data Compatibility
KV STUDIO Ver.6 supports the CPU units in KV series. 1
Due to automatic switching function, ability to read Ladder file generated, programming environment

BEFORE USING
can be easily transplanted.

* The supported PLCs include KV-5500, KV-5000, KV-3000, KV-1000, KV-700/700+M, KV-10/16/24/40,
and KV-P16.

How to Use a Ladder Program Generated by KV BUILDER

■ Notes about reading

The following points shall be noted when reading KV-700/700+m , KV-10/16/24/40, KV-P16, KZ-300 /
350 Ladder file (*.ldc) generated from KV BUILDER via KV STUDIO Ver.6.

• When KV STUDIO Ver.6 is used to read the KV-700/700+M, KV-10/16/24/40 and KV-P16-specific
ladder files (*.ldc), these files will be converted into the KV TUDIO file format (*.kpr). If these
converted files (*.kpr) are saved to the initial folder (the folder in which the *.ldc files are saved), they
will not be opened with the KV BUILDER. Please save them to other folder.
• When KV STUDIO Ver.6 is used to read KZ-300/350 ladders (*.ldc) , the KV-700 is read as the
support model.
• "Comment 1" and "Comment 2", and "label" can be read, but not "Comment 3".
• Circuit library is not supported.
• When using label, please confirm non-use of the following character strings.
Do not use a character string as the label name.
• ! " # $ % & ' ( ) * + , - . / : ; < = > ? @ [ ¥ ] ^ ` { | } ~ (area)
• Character unusable at the start part of label name: _0123456789*1
• Unusable character string: global *1 , (name identical to instruction), (device name)
• English letter, 1 character +R, or M+ digit
• Letter 1 character + number
• X+(A to F)
• Y+(A to F)
• The following key words are specified in KV script
IF, THEN, ELSE, END, SELECT, CASE, IS, TO, MC, MCR, FOR, NEXT, WHILE, DO, UNTIL, TYPE
• The following key words are specified in IEC61131-3
TRUE, FALSE
TIME,DATE,TIME_OF_DAY,TOD,DATE_AND_TIME,DT
BOOL, SINT, INT, DINT, LINT, USINT, UINT, UDINT, ULINT, REAL, LREAL, STRING, WSTRING,
BYTE, WORD,
DWORD, LWORD
ANY, ANY_DERIVED, ANY_ELEMENTARY, ANY_MAGNITUDE, ANY_NUM, ANY_REAL,
ANY_INT, ANY_BIT, ANY_STRING,
ANY_DATE
ACTION, END_ACTION,

- KV STUDIO Ver.6 User’s Manual - 1-5

 1-3 About Data Compatibility

1 ARRAY, OF,
AT,
BEFORE USING

CASE, END_CASE,
CONFIGURATION, END_CONFIGURATION,
CONSTANT,
EN, ENO,
EXIT,
F_EDGE,
FOR, TO, BY, DO, END_FOR,
FUNCTION, END_FUNCTION,
FUNCTION_BLOCK, END_FUNCTION_BLOCK,
IF, THEN, ELSIF, ELSE, END_IF,
INITIAL_STEP, END_STEP,
NOT, MOD, AND, XOR, OR,
PROGRAM, WITH, END_PROGRAM, R_EDGE,
READ_ONLY, READ_WRITE,
REPEAT, UNTIL, END_REPEAT,
RESOURCE, END_RESOURCE,
RETAIN, NON_RETAIN,
RETURN,
STEP,
STRUCT, END_STRUCT,
TASK,
TRANSITION, FROM, END_TRANSITION,
TYPE, END_TYPE,
VAR,VAR_INPUT, VAR_OUTPUT, VAR_IN_OUT, VAR_TEMP, VAR_EXTERNAL, VAR_ACCESS,
VAR_CONFIG,VAR_GLOBAL,
END_VAR,
WHILE, DO, END_WHILE
• Other (IEC61131-3 standard)
• 2 above continuous "_" are not allowed in label forename. "a_b_c" can be used, but, "a_bc" is
forbidden.
• It not case-sensitive. "aBc" and "abC" are treated as same label name.
• When reading Ladder containing label name inhibit character string, do not read character string
inhibit label, but display after replaced to device name.
*1 It can be used only when the models "KV-700/700+M, KV-10(16), KV-24(40), KV-P16" are selected

Note
When a ladder is transferred to KV-700/700+m, KV-10/16/24/40, KV-P16, label message
used will not be transferred (due to no label information storage area).
So, when reading Ladder from KV-700 / 700+M , KV-10 / 16 / 24 / 40 , KV-P16 by using
KV STUDIO Ver. 6, label application position will be replaced to device name before
displayed.

1-6 - KV STUDIO Ver.6 User’s Manual -

 1-3 About Data Compatibility

Important
1
• According to function, it can be divided into instruction to be set in Ladder, Ladder

BEFORE USING
setting and KV STUDIO setting, etc.
Besides, add/ change also exists in external input output relay (R), control relay
(CR) and control memory (CM), so, please see every CPU manual for confirmation.
Key points
• Logging function is replaced to the logging setting of KV STUDIO via Ladder
• Change of high-speed counter, frequency counter, cam switch function and
external input relay
• KV-L20 cannot be used in KV-5500/5000/3000/1000. Set up KV-L20V by using Unit
Editor There is no corresponding VT multi-link mode in KV- L20V. Please use VT2
multi-link. Besides, please modify and compile Ladder in KV-L20 and use it into KV-
L20V.
• QL cannot be used in KV-5500/5000/3000/1000. Please delete Ladder via QL .

■ Change Model
KV STUDIO Ver.6 can be used to switch over to a model that the ladder supports.
Only the models that are supported by the host model can be switched over.
For detail, see "Change Model", Page 4-16

● Precautions when changing KV-700 to KV-5500/5000/3000/1000 model

• CTH instruction operand of high-speed counter is automatically replaced according to following
method. Besides, relay device adds R before all Device No..
Before replace After replace
000040 -> R00010
000050 -> R00011

Note
R004- R007 used in the operand of other instructions (HSP instruction, etc.) cannot
be automatically replaced.

• The control relay set via external input break polarity, will be replaced automatically as follows.
INT0 to INT3 INT R00000 to INT R00003
(CR2700 to CR2707) (CR2600 to CR2607)

• "Pack" instruction is automatically replaced with usable system macro.

• Text transfer control memory, will be automatically replaced as follows.
Receive:CM1000 to CM1099 Receive: CM03000 to CM03099
Send : CM1100 to CM1199 Send : CM04000 to CM04099

• Symbol of SCMP instruction, will be replaced automatically as follows.

SCMP
SCMP

- KV STUDIO Ver.6 User’s Manual - 1-7

 1-3 About Data Compatibility

1 KZ Ladder Program
BEFORE USING

KV STUDIO Ver.6 can read KZ-300 / 350, KZ- A500 ladders. In reading KZ-300/350 (*.ldc) and KZ-
A500 files (*.ldx), the format is converted into KV STUDIO file format (*.kpr).

1-8 - KV STUDIO Ver.6 User’s Manual -

 1-4 Software Installation
This section briefly describes how to install KV STUDIO on the PC's hard disk. 1

BEFORE USING
Preparing for Installation

Check the following before you start to install it.

Note
We recommend backing up the CD-ROM using main CD in case it is damaged.

■ Free Space Available on Hard Disk

KV STUDIO can be installed only on hard disks 950M bytes of residual space shall be supplied on the
hard disk to be installed. If there is not enough free space, clean up the hard disk so that there is
enough space.

■ Windows Environment and Installation Directory

KV STUDIO should be installed and operate on Windows.
Make sure that Windows XP/2000/Vista/7 are installed and are operating normally on the PC when you
are using.

■ USB (USB port)

PC transfers ladder programs to KV-5500/5000/3000/1000/700 via USB port. USB port must be
enabled when Monitor starts up.For details on how to set the RS-232C port, refer to the manual for the
PC you are using.

■ Ethernet (Ethernet card port)

To transfer program from computer to KV-5500/5000 via Ethernet port and use monitoring function,
shall pre-set computer Ethernet port (LAN function) to enabled. For details on how to set, refer to the
manual for the PC you are using.

■ RS-232C (serial port)

To transfer program to KV series using RS-232C and use monitoring function, PC RS-232C (serial
port) must be set to enabled. For details on how to set, refer to the manual for the PC you are using.

■ Bluetooth communication
When using PC to transfer program to KV-5500/5000/3000 via Bluetooth unit KV-BT1, or when monitor
function is used, USB adapter (purchased separately) for Bluetooth connection must be installed on PC
in advance, and set to usable status. For the setting method, see operating instructions of USB adapter
for Bluetooth connection.

- KV STUDIO Ver.6 User’s Manual - 1-9

 1-4 Software Installation

1 Precautions in WindowsXP/2000
BEFORE USING

■ Access Right
When installing KV STUDIO to standard folder (C:\Program files\ keyence\ KVS6E\ ), please set
following access rights.
• Assign "Power User" rights or higher to users using KV STUDIO.

Precautions in Windows 7/Vista

■ Access Right
When installing KV STUDIO to standard folder (C:\Program files\ keyence\ KVS6E\ ), please set
following access rights.
• Assign "Standard User" rights or higher to users using KV STUDIO.

Installation

We will take following drive configuration as an example to describe how to install software on a PC.
C : Hard drive
E : CD-ROM drive

1 Start Windows, insert CD- ROM driver to "KV STUDIO Major Disk".
• The autorun function on the PC will start up the installer program.
If failed to start up the installer program, please select "Specified file name" from Start menu, and type
"e:\setup" in "Specified file name" dialog box, then click "OK".
• Please install according to the indication of installation sequence.

Note
When installing KV STUDIO on Windows 7/Vista/XP/2000, only the user with
"Administrator" rights can log in.

Uninstall

KV STUDIO can be uninstalled when KV STUDIO is not used.

Please click "add or delete program" in Windows control panel, uninstall KV STUDIO .

Note
Only the user with administrator rights can uninstall KV STUDIO under Windows 7/
Vista/XP/2000.

1-10 - KV STUDIO Ver.6 User’s Manual -

1-5 USB Driver Installation
When KV-5500/5000/3000/1000/700 is connected to PC via USB, USB driver must be installed in PC. 1
Mostly describe installation method of USB driver.

BEFORE USING
Install In the Windows Vista Environment

When installing Windows Vista and KV STUDIO, the USB driver is installed automatically.

Install In the Windows XP Environment

Connect KV-5500/5000/3000/1000/700 with Windows XP PC. When connecting to the PC for the first
time, the USB driver of KV-5500/5000/3000/1000/700 must be installed on the PC. During the 2nd or
later connection, due to automatic identification of USB, USB driver needs not to be installed again.

Here, describe the step to install KV-5500/5000/3000/1000/700 driver in Windows XP. Hardware test
must be conducted when installing USB driver of KV STUDIO.

Install according to the following step.

1 Only the user with system setting change power such as Administrator, etc. can start Windows XP.

2 Connect PC USB port and KV-5500/5000/3000/1000/700 USB port using USB cable.
"Found New Hardware Wizard" is displayed, and then the added hardware information is displayed.

3 After select "Install from a list or specific location(Advanced)" radio button, click the "Next" button.

- KV STUDIO Ver.6 User’s Manual - 1-11

 1-5 USB Driver Installation

1 4 Select "Search for the best driver in these locations" button and "Include this location in the
search" check box.
BEFORE USING

Then input "C:\Program Files\Keyence\KVS6E", click "Next" button.

Note
"C: \Program files\Keyence \ KVS6E" in above step, is the position where KV STUDIO
software is installed. Please read again according to the environment used.

5 When following dialog box is displayed,

click "Continue" button, continue
installation.

6 Click the "Finish" button.

So far, KV-5500/5000/3000/1000/700 USB driver has been installed.

TIP When installing in Windows 2000 system, please install USB driver according to the guide.

1-12 - KV STUDIO Ver.6 User’s Manual -

1-6 Safety Precautions
This section describes the notes when using KV STUDIO.Be sure to read carefully. 1

BEFORE USING
Confirmation of PC settings
Before using, please confirm that the system has been set to the status of using USB and RS-232C.
If these ports are not set, a communications error will occur during Monitor operation, and the Monitor
cannot be operated correctly.
For details on how to set the USB port, refer to the manual for the PC you are using.

When the monitoring feature is engaged

When operating Monitor, communication will be abnormal if KV series powers off or the connected
cable is pulled out. This abnormal operation is not allowed before exiting Monitor.

Monitoring after the ladder is changed

After changing Ladder, when operating with monitor, from the menu, select 'PLC transfer -> monitor
mode', transfer the program to PLC.

Display resolution
Please set display solution to a setting higher than 1024 x 768 pixels, High Color (16 bits), small
fonts.Also, it will be comfortable to operate if setting a higher display solution. (1280 * 1024 above image
recommended)

Precautions when using USB

USB can be directly connected to computer USB interface not via USB port, before used.
Communications may be disrupted if noise or other factors cause unstable communications.If
communications is disrupted, re-insert the USB cable.
For this, please use shielded cable and a common mode ferrite core with both wires and the cable
shield passing through the core.

- KV STUDIO Ver.6 User’s Manual - 1-13

 1-7 About Basic Operation
1 The programming flow and various modes, software start and closing method are described as follows,
before actual programming with KV STUDIO, shall master some basic operation contents.
BEFORE USING

Ladder Programming Procedure and Mode

KV STUDIO has 4 modes: "Unit Editor", "editor", "monitor" and "simulator". Actual programming step,
step operating mode, major mode setting, etc. are as follows.

1 System Configuration Set up the system configuration according to the design drawing. Set the
following contents with Unit Editor.

Editor
࡮Prepare unit configuration information of ࡮Set unit function
KV-5500/5000/3000/1000/700 system ࡮Set KL system
࡮Set unit relay/DM assignment

2 Ladder Programming Program ladder program according to PLC control project.

Editor
࡮Create modules……………………To create corresponding ladder program for each module.
࡮Create macro ………………………To create corresponding macros as required.
࡮Set execution sequence of modules

3 Conversion and Transfer of Ladder Program

Editor
Convert programmed ladder programs to codes that can be read by KV series.
After conversion, transfer to KV series.

4 Commission
Check the operation status such as device change.
Erroneous locations can be detected, and the ladder program can be fixed.
࡮To simulate a KV-1000 connected state and perform debugging, use "Simulator."
࡮To make an actual connection, write a program to the KV-1000 and perform debugging, use "Monitor."

Debug without the CPU Unit connected. Debug with the CPU Unit connected.
Simulator Monitor

5 Correction of ladder program and program transference

Editor
Ladder programs can be fixed and changed on Editor in addition to debugging on Monitor or Simulator.
Finally, when all debugging has ended, and it has been confirmed that a normal operating program has been
made, transfer and write the completed program to KV-1000.

1-14 - KV STUDIO Ver.6 User’s Manual -

 1-7 About Basic Operation

About Screen
1

BEFORE USING
Mode screens

KV STUDIO modes, relations as follows

Editor Monitor

Simulator Online Editor

Describes the name and function of every image on the next page.
"About Editor", Page 1-19
"9-2 Monitoring", Page 9-34
"9-10 Online Edit", Page 9-92
"9-11 Simulation" Page 9-96

About current window

Now, the selected current window is called "Current window".

When several screens are displayed, if you want to select the operation screen, you just click the
header line to be used as current screen.
In general, the color of title bar of counter window is different from other windows.

- KV STUDIO Ver.6 User’s Manual - 1-15

 1-7 About Basic Operation

1 About Help
BEFORE USING

Online help and PDF manual shall be also supplied in addition to document manual in KV STUDIO. For any
problem in operation, from tool bar, click button or from "Help(H)" menu, select HTML help or PDF
manual.

On the menu, click "Help (H)" drop down menu, select the following help and PDF manual.
The contents displayed in the dropdown menu will vary with PLC model being edited.

„ Select Menu of KV-5500/5000/3000

Name Format Content
Electronic manual in PDF format converted from "KV
KV STUDIO User's Manual PDF
STUDIO user manual".
"KV-5500/5000/ 3000/1000 series instruction reference
Instruction Reference Manual PDF
manual" PDF version.
"KV-5500/5000/3000/1000 series User's Manual" PDF
CPU Unit User's Manual PDF
version.
"KV-5500/5000/ 3000/1000 series script programming
Script programming manual PDF
manual" PDF version.
Electronic manual in PDF format converted from "KV-
System Macro Manual PDF
5500/5000/ 3000/1000 series System Macro Manual".
Electronic manual in PDF format converted from "KV-
KV-EP21V User's Manual PDF
FL20V User's Manual".
Electronic manual in PDF format converted from "KV-
KV-FL20V User's Manual PDF
FL20V User's Manual".
Electronic manual in PDF format converted from "KV-
KV-LE21V User's Manual PDF
LE21V User's Manual".
Electronic manual in PDF format converted from "KV-
KV-LE20V User's Manual PDF
Related LE20V User's Manual".
Manuals Electronic manual in PDF format converted from "KV-
KV-L20V User's Manual PDF
L20V User's Manual".
KV-SC20V User's Electronic manual in PDF format converted from "KV-
PDF
Manual SC20V User's Manual".
Electronic manual in PDF format converted from "KV-
KV-TF40 User's Manual PDF
TF40 User's Manual".
Electronic manual in PDF format converted from "KV-
KV-AD/DA User's Manual PDF
AD40/DA40/AM40V User's Manual".
Introduce HTML help of KV-5500/5000/3000/1000
Instruction help Help
instructions used in "KV STUDIO".
Introduce HTML help of script function used in "KV
Script function help Help
STUDIO".
Introduce HTML help of KV-5500/5000/3000
Shortcut key list Help
instructions used in "KV STUDIO".

1-16 - KV STUDIO Ver.6 User’s Manual -

 1-7 About Basic Operation

„ Select menu of KV-1000 1

Name Format Content

BEFORE USING
Electronic manual in PDF format converted from "KV
KV STUDIO User's Manual PDF
STUDIO user manual".
Electronic manual in PDF format converted from "KV-
Programming Manual PDF
1000 series Programming Manual".
"KV-5500/5000/3000/1000 series PLC instruction
Instruction Reference Manual PDF
reference manual" PDF version.
Electronic manual in PDF format converted from "KV-
CPU Unit User's Manual PDF
1000 series User's Manual".
Instruction Manual PDF "KV-1000 series PLC Guide Manual" PDF version.
"KV-5500/5000/3000/1000 series PLC script
Script programming manual PDF
programming manual" PDF version.
Electronic manual in PDF format converted from "KV-
System macro Manual PDF
5500/5000/3000/1000 series System Macro Manual".
Electronic manual in PDF format converted from "KV-
KV-FL20V User's Manual PDF
FL20V User's Manual".
Electronic manual in PDF format converted from "KV-
KV-LE21V User's Manual PDF
LE21V User's Manual".
Electronic manual in PDF format converted from "KV-
KV-LE20V User's Manual PDF
LE20V User's Manual".
Related Electronic manual in PDF format converted from "KV-
KV-L20V User's Manual PDF
Manuals L20V User's Manual".
KV-SC20V User's Electronic manual in PDF format converted from "KV-
PDF
Manual SC20V User's Manual".
Electronic manual in PDF format converted from "KV-
KV-TF40 User's Manual PDF
TF40 User's Manual".
Electronic manual in PDF format converted from "KV-
KV-AD/DA User's Manual PDF
AD40/DA40/AM40V User's Manual".
Introduce HTML help of KV-1000 instructions used in "KV
Instruction help Help
STUDIO".
Introduce HTML help of script function used in "KV
Script function help Help
STUDIO".
Introduce HTML help of KV-1000 instructions used in "KV
Shortcut key list Help
STUDIO".

- KV STUDIO Ver.6 User’s Manual - 1-17

 1-7 About Basic Operation

1 „ Select menu of KV-700/KV-700+M

Name Format Content
BEFORE USING

Electronic manual in PDF format converted from "KV

KV STUDIO User's Manual PDF
STUDIO user manual".
Electronic manual in PDF format converted from "KV-
KV-FL20V User's Manual PDF
FL20V User's Manual".
Electronic manual in PDF format converted from "KV-
KV-LE21V User's Manual PDF
LE21V User's Manual".
Electronic manual in PDF format converted from "KV-
KV-LE20V User's Manual PDF
LE20V User's Manual".
Related Electronic manual in PDF format converted from "KV-
KV-L20V User's Manual PDF
Manuals L20V User's Manual".
KV-SC20V User's Electronic manual in PDF format converted from "KV-
PDF
Manual SC20V User's Manual".
Electronic manual in PDF format converted from "KV-
KV-TF40 User's Manual PDF
TF40 User's Manual".
Electronic manual in PDF format converted from "KV-
KV-AD/DA User's Manual PDF
AD40/DA40/AM40V User's Manual".
Introduce HTML help of KV-700/700+M instructions used in
Instruction help Help
"KV STUDIO".
Introduce HTML help of script function used in "KV
Script function help Help
STUDIO".
Introduce HTML help of KV-700/700+M instructions used in
Shortcut key list Help
"KV STUDIO".

„ Select menu of KV-10(16)/KV-24(40)

Name Format Content
Electronic manual in PDF format converted from "KV STUDIO user
KV STUDIO User's Manual PDF
manual".
Introduce HTML help of KV-10(16), KV-24(40) instructions used in
Instruction help Help
"KV STUDIO".
Introduce HTML help of KV-10(16), KV-24(40) instructions used in
Shortcut key list Help
"KV STUDIO".

„ Select menu of KV-P16

Name Format Content
Electronic manual in PDF format converted from "KV STUDIO user
KV STUDIO User's Manual PDF
manual".
Instruction help Help Introduce HTML help of KV-P16 instructions used in "KV STUDIO".
Introduce HTML help of KV-KV-P16 instructions used in " KV
Shortcut key list Help
STUDIO".

1-18 - KV STUDIO Ver.6 User’s Manual -

 1-8 About Editor
Describe function overview in editor, image display in editor, etc. 1

BEFORE USING
Editor Function Overview

Editor is a tool applied to compile Ladder. In addition to instruction entry and comment registration,
various edition operations can be also conducted.
Use editor, can perform the following editions.
• Ladder can be compiled using various instructions of Ladder language.
• It can be transplanted to other projects via Ladder structurization.
• Can conduct copy and move operation, etc.
• Can register the comment to the device, and then transfer to PLC
• The compiled Ladder is converted and then transferred into PLC
• Can print the compiled Ladder, mnemonic symbol table, label comment and device status list, etc.

■ Notes About Ladder Program Editing

● Limit
(1) Maximal 950 module macros can be compiled in 1 project. *
(Max. 750 modules)
(2) Max. line number that every module / macro *can edit, when KV-5500, KV-5000, KV-3000, KV-
1000, 40000 rungs; when KV-700/700+M, KV-10(16), KV-24(40), KV-P16, 29998 rungs.
(3) The size of 1 program block is maximal 100 lines.
* Multiple modules and macros cannot be used for KV-700/700+M, KV-10(16), KV-24(40), KV-P16.

Note
For example, 950 module macros of 40000 lines can not be transmitted to CPU.
Finally confirm according to data size limit after conversion. So, shall confirm the
transmissible data size after "convert".
"Conversion", Page 8-2

● When KV STUDIO running speed is slow

When using KV STUDIO, if multiple application softwares are started at the same time, inadequate
system memory and resource may occur sometimes. So, frequent hard disk access, slow operating
speed will occur.
Please close other application software, add computer memory, etc., guarantee valid memory and
resource.

- KV STUDIO Ver.6 User’s Manual - 1-19

 1-8 About Editor

1 Names and Functions of Editor Screen

BEFORE USING

When starting KV STUDIO, main window is only displayed before Ladder edit window displayed.
Ladder edit window is only opened when creating new module and macro and opening the compiled
module and macro.

TIP Set auto-read function, when the set file has been started, will be auto-read and displayed.
"Auto-read", Page 4-18

Menu bar Header field Ladder editing window

Display menu for Display item name. Edit window of ladder program
executing different and macro.
functions. Display each module and
macro.

Toolbar
Arrange and display
buttons for executing
different functions.

Mode bar
Display current mode
of KV STUDIO.

Workspace
Arrange and display
buttons for executing
different functions.

Module library
Display registered module.

Output window Label edit window Comment edit window

Display search result Edit window of device Edit commented window.
or error and other label.
information.

Status bar Instruction/macro/pack pallet

Display description of Enter instruction and macro / PACK instruction into Ladder edit
the selected function window. Enter into Ladder edit window using drag method.
and key status, etc.

1-20 - KV STUDIO Ver.6 User’s Manual -

 1-8 About Editor

● Docking Navigator 1
When customizing edit image, drag workspace, output window, observation window, etc. and dialog

BEFORE USING
box, Docking Navigator of the specified configuration target will be displayed.
Place to Docking Navigator, the window will be combined to the specified position.
Besides, Docking position is displayed in grid form on image.

Docking Navigator type Description

Display the up and down, left and right position of image edited.
Release mouse button on the above mark, will dock to the up/down, left/
right position of the edit image.

Displayed when the mouse pointer is located on Ladder edit window.

Release mouse button on the up/down, left/right mark, will dock to up/
down, left/right position of the Ladder edit window.

Displayed when mouse pointer is located in workspace and output

window, etc.
• Release mouse button on the up/down, left/right mark, will dock to up/
down, left/right position of the Docking target window.
• When released to the central of Docking Navigator, the Docking
target window will be displayed as tab.

● Auto-hide function
It is a function to display workspace, output window, observation window, etc. if necessary.
Click the PIN icon displayed on the top right corner of up/down and left/right workspace, output window,
observation window, etc.

Icon Description

Display status of workspace, output window, observation window, etc.

Workspace, output window, observation window, etc., , will be displayed

as tab on up and down, left/right side of the edit image. Displayed when
moving mouse pointer to the tab or clicking the tab.

- KV STUDIO Ver.6 User’s Manual - 1-21

 1-8 About Editor

1 About Ladder Editing Window

BEFORE USING

Every module and macro can be displayed in Ladder compiler window.

Header field Column No.

Display module/macro name. Column No. of Ladder Program

Cursor
Select device and
other edit objects.

Connecting wire
Rung number Display instruction in
Line No. of Ladder symbol format.
Program

Instruction symbol
Step No. Display instruction in
Step No. of Ladder symbol format.
ProgramDisplayed
only after converted,
not displayed after
Ladder changed.

1-22 - KV STUDIO Ver.6 User’s Manual -

2

PROJECT MANAGEMENT
PROJECT MANAGEMENT
About project management.

2-1 Project Management ••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• 2-2

- KV STUDIO Ver.6 User’s Manual - 2-1

 2-1 Project Management
This chapter details project management.

2 About Project Folder

PROJECT MANAGEMENT

KV STUDIO processes various data files. Batch management of data file in every project folder.
The following tool support data exists in a project folder.
• KV STUDIO data · Unit Editor data
• CPU positioning parameter edit data · MOTION BUILDER/positioning unit simple setting data
• PROTOCOL STUDIO data · MV LINK STUDIO data
• KV-DN20Set up data · KV-CL20 Set up data
• Mail setting data · Device default value data
• File register setting data · Real-time chart monitor data
• High-speed time chart monitor data · Panel setting data
• Logging/tracing data · FLSetting tool data
Project Folder

KV STUDIO Unit Editor CPU positioning KV MOTION PROTOCOL MV LINK

data data parameter MOTION+ BUILDER STUDIO STUDIO
edit data data data data data
...
Ladder, Connection unit KV-5500/5000/ KV-ML16V/MC40V/ KV-H20S/ KV-L20V/R MV-L40
comment ect. setting, relay 3000/1000/700 MC20V Positioning/ H40S/H20G PROTOCOL MV LINK
assignment, KL CPU unit Simple motion unit Positioning STUDIO STUDIO
positioning function
slave setting ect. parameter parameter unit parameter parameter parameter

After compiling project in KV STUDIO, project folder and KV STUDIO data file will be automatically generated.
During tools start, unit editor, CPU positioning parameter edit, MOTION BUILDER, PROTOCOL STUDIO, MV
LINK STUDIO, KV MOTION+, and data for every support tool of MV LINK STUDIO setting tools will be generated.

Create a Project Folder

Project folder is created under the following cases by default.

Project folder is created in " PROJECT " subfolder, the installation target of KV STUDIO.
When installation target folder is not changed,

Windows 7/Vista: C:\Users\<User name>\Documents\KEYENCE\KVS6E\KVS\PROJECT

Windows XP/2000: C:\Documents and Settings\<User name>\My Documents\KEYENCE\KVS6E\KVS\

PROJECT

Example
When "USER" project folder is created in subfolder "PROJECT", the KV STUDIO
installation target.
Windows 7/Vista: C:\Users\<User name>\Documents\KEYENCE\KVS6E\KVS\PROJECT
Windows XP/2000: C:\Documents and Settings\<User name>\My Documents\KEYENCE\
KVS6E\KVS\PROJECT
User data files such as KV STUDIO data files, etc. are stored in "USER" folder.

2-2 - KV STUDIO Ver.6 User’s Manual -

 2-1 Project Management

About User Data File

Project folder stores KV STUDIO data file, user data file, etc.
2

PROJECT MANAGEMENT
Item
Extension Content
File name
name
KV STUDIO data file
Project name .kpr Project file
Module name .mod Module name
Macro name .mcr Macro file
Project name .cm1, .cm2 Comments file
Project name .lbl Label file
Project name .klg Recording setup file
Project name .mil Mail setting file
DevInit .dvi Device default value setting data
FR folder Store File Register setting file.
CpuMb .inf CPU positioning parameter setting file
MonEnv .kem Monitor File
WsTreeEnv .xml File to save workspace layout
Project name .cde Program file for conversion
Project name .dcm Comments file for conversion
UnitSet .ue2 Unit setting file
UnitSet .ue1
UnitSet2 .ue1 KV STUDIO Ver.3.07Use unit setting file for version above
UnitSet3 .ue1
Module/macro name .mnm Mnemonics list output file
Can save in positions
( user input) .csv Unit specification output file
other than project
( user input) .csv Reference information output file (verification)
folder
( user input) .csv Batch change output file
componentFolder Hold unit configuration switch information.
operand-history .txt Keep txt entry, complete backup.
Project name .pnl Hold panel information(only KV-P16).
Positioning unit simple setting / MOTION BUILDER data file
(user input) .mb2 Positioning unit file
PROTOCOL STUDIO data file
(user input) .psm PROTOCOL STUDIO communication macro file
MV LINK STUDIO MV-L40 parameter file
(user input) .mls MV LINK STUDIO MV-L40 parameter file
KV-DN20Set up data file
(user input) .d20 DeviceNetconnection setup file
KV-CL20 Set up data file
(user input) .c20 CC-Linkconnection setup file
KV MOTION+ Data file
(user input) .mul KV-ML16V setting data file
(user input) .muc KV-MC40V/MC20V setting data file
(user input) .mvl SV series MECHATROLINK-II setting data
(user input) .mvp SV series address/pluse input setting data
"Project compression save", can collect user data file in project folder and save in a "Project compressed file (*.kp Z)".
"Save Compact Project", Page 4-4

- KV STUDIO Ver.6 User’s Manual - 2-3

 2-1 Project Management

File Manipulation
2
■ Create a project
PROJECT MANAGEMENT

A new project is created for ladder porgram making.

For more information, please refer to "Various File Instructions", Page 4-2.

■ Change project folder name

1 Select "File(F)" -> "Open project(O)" in sequence from menu.

Other procedure • Click button.

• Press Ctrl key + O key

2 Select the folder whose project name to be changed, from right-click menu, select "name
change", enter filename.
Change folder name.

Note
In "changing Project names", only the project folder can be changed. After changing
project folder, data in folder will be not changed. To change data file name in folder, must
operate "Save project as" on edit image.
"Save Project As", Page 4-3

■ Delete project
To delete a project, select the folder where the project name is to be deleted, press the Delete key or
select "delete" from right-click menu.

Note
Once project folder is deleted, all data in project folder will be deleted.

■ Copy project
Select file project name, press Ctrl + C keys to copy and press Ctrl + V to paste, or right-click, then
from the menu, select according to " Copy", " Paste" sequence, and can copy the project.

■ Set up password
"Password setting" is a feature to inhibit reading unit setting message, program, comment and record
setting saved in KV-5500/5000/3000/1000/700.
Once a password is set, data cannot be read unless the correct password is entered.
Password can be set when reading program from KV-5500/5000/3000/1000/700 is not allowed.
For details, please refer to "Set password", Page 4-5.

Note
Password cannot be setup for KV-P16, KV-10 (16), and KV-24 (40).

2-4 - KV STUDIO Ver.6 User’s Manual -

3

UNIT EDITOR
UNIT EDITOR
This chapter describes the features of Unit Editor, and how to use these
features.

3-1 Overview•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• 3-2

3-2 Menu list in Unit Editor ••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• 3-4
3-3 Menu List in Slave Setup Window ••••••••••••••••••••••••• 3-7
3-4 Names and Functions of Different Parts of Screen••••• 3-9
3-5 Basic Operation of Unit Editor •••••••••••••••••••••••••••• 3-13
3-6 Operation of Unit Editor•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• 3-15
3-7 Use the Slave Setup Window •••••••••••••••••••••••••••• 3-31
3-8 Environment Setting•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• 3-39

- KV STUDIO Ver.6 User’s Manual - 3-1

 3-1 Overview
This section gives a high-level description of features of Unit Editor, and the cautions to follow when
using Unit Editor.
TIP Unit Editor cannot be used by KV-10 (16), KV-24 (40), and KV- P 16.

3 Functional Overview
UNIT EDITOR

To execute a ladder program, the units connected with KV-5500/5000/3000/1000/700 PLC series
should be registered in CPU.
Unit Editor is used to select and configure the units and transfer the configuration to KV-1000 PLC. In
addition, unit and KL slave station settings need to be done.
On conventional PLC models, hardware settings have to be made on each unit by setting the DIP
switches. With the KV-5500/5000/3000/1000/700, however, hardware settings are basically no longer
required, and units can be set up simply in Unit Editor. After you have built your system, you can
change set-tings without having to remove units.
Settings on Unit Editor

Unit Editor KV-5500/5000/

3000/1000/700
KV STUDIO series
Ladder program

Note
Unit Editor cannot be started up separately. You have to open the ladder file and start
it from KV STUDIO.

Unit Editor Settings

The following settings are required in Unit Editor.

■ Create unit configuration information of KV-5500/5000/KV-3000/KV-1000/

KV-700 system
A list of KV-5500/5000/KV-3000/KV-1000/KV-700 unit configurations is created and check to ensure all
the units act properly in system operation.
Also the "Auto-replace Devices" tab should be configured, whereby you can change relay/DM numbers in the
ladder simply by changing the corrsponding unit relay/DM numbers in Unit Editor. Since unit configuration
information is integrated with the ladder program, device configuration errors are then avoided.

Integration
Integra

Ladder file Unit Editor

3-2 - KV STUDIO Ver.6 User’s Manual -

 3-1 Overview

■ Unit relay/DM setting

For KV-5500/5000/ KV-3000 / KV-1000 / KV-700, the setting range for non-CPU unit relays/DMs is as follows:
Manual and Auto modes are available for relay/DM assignment.
Relay No. DM No.
KV-5500 R1000 to R99915 DM0 to DM65534 3
KV-5000 R1000 to R99915 DM0 to DM65534

UNIT EDITOR
KV-3000 R1000 to R99915 DM0 to DM65534
KV-1000 R1000 to R59915 DM0 to DM65534
KV-700+M R1000 to R59915 DM0 to DM39999
KV-700 R1000 to R59915 DM0 to DM19999

■ Unit setting
You can set up the functions of each unit.

Mistakes are possible as you set up units while reading the manual. Easy setup. Just select according to the menu.

■ Building/setting KL systems from Unit Editor

KL Link System using the KL Master Unit KL-N20V can be set on Unit Editor.

Switch setting is very tedious! With Unit Editor, master unit settings transfer
is an easy thing to do.

- KV STUDIO Ver.6 User’s Manual - 3-3

 3-2 Menu list in Unit Editor
The section descibes Unit Editor menus and icons. For more information, please see the relevant
pages.

File
3
The options for file operation and print are as follows:
UNIT EDITOR

Item Icon Description Page

Import Read unit settings and comments from other projects. 3-25
Read unit configuration from PLC - Read unit configuration information from PLC. 3-26
Close Exit Unit Editor, return to Ladder edit image. 3-15

Edit

The editing options are as follows.

Item Icon Description Page

Cut Cut the selected area. 3-17
Copy Copy the selected range. 3-17
Paste Paste the cut data on the cursor position. 3-17
Delete - Delete the selected area. 3-17
Display the "Unit comments" dialog box appears
Unit comments 3-26
and enter unit comments.
Edit Display the "Block comments" dialog box and enter
Block comments 3-26
comments block comments.
Display the "System comments" dialog box and
System comments 3-27
enter system comments.
Reserve nunit Reserve/unreserve a unit. 3-27
Manually set up the relay number of a connected
Batch input relay No. 3-20
unit in the list.

Convert

The relay/DM assignment-related options are as follows.

Item Icon Description Page

Jump to the unit position that corresponds to the error
Jump to error line 3-27
displayed in message window.
Auto-assign relay/DM Automatically Assign relay/DM. 3-18
Check to enture duplicated relay/DM settings are
Verify device 3-21
avoided.

3-4 - KV STUDIO Ver.6 User’s Manual -

 3-2 Menu list in Unit Editor

Setup Slave

The options for KL slave setting are as follows.

Note
The menu is displayed only when KL- N20V unit is selected in the unit configuration area.
3

UNIT EDITOR
Item Icon Description Page
Setup slave Open slave setup window. 3-28
Read unit setting message and comment of slave
Import slave information 3-28
station from other projects.
Copy unit information compiled using address setting
Copy KL information 3-29
software via KL.
Paste KL information Paste KL unit information 3-29
KL-N20V setup Start KL Address Setup Software
3-30
(KL address setup)

View

The items that are related to window display are as follows.

Item Icon Description Page

Toolbar - Display/hide the selection toolbar. -
Status bar - Display/hide the selection status bar. -
Message area - Display/hide the selection message area. 3-12
Display unit setting window of the unit selected by the
Display unit setting - 3-22
current cursor.
Switch between bitmap display/box display of the unit in
Display bitmap/with box 3-30
unit configuration area.
When KV STUDIO is in monitor / online editor mode,
Unit Monitor - the monitor of the selected unit is displayed in the unit 3-23
configuration area.
When KV STUDIO is in monitor / online editor mode,
Custom Monitor - 3-23
the customized monitor is displayed.
When KV STUDIO is in monitor / online editor mode, the
Buffer memory monitor - expansion buffer memory of the selected unit in unit 3-24
configuration area is monitored via batch monitor window.

Options

This menu groups together options relating to environmental settings on Unit Editor.

Item Icon Description Page

Setup options Environment setting of option setting Unit Editor. 3-39

- KV STUDIO Ver.6 User’s Manual - 3-5

 3-2 Menu list in Unit Editor

Window

The window navigation options are as follows.

3 Item Icon Description Page

Unit configuration area - Select a unit configuration area. 3-10
UNIT EDITOR

Select unit - Select a unit icon. 3-10

Setup unit - Select a unit setting icon. 3-11
Update setting - Select a refresh setting tab. 3-11
Message area - Select a message area. 3-12

Help

Display help information.

Item Icon Description Page

How to use Unit Editor Display the help information on operations of Unit Editor. 3-30

3-6 - KV STUDIO Ver.6 User’s Manual -

3-3 Menu List in Slave Setup Window
The section describes the slave setup menus and icons. For more information, please see the
respective pages.

File
3
The commands for file operation and printing are summarized as follows.

UNIT EDITOR
Item Icon Description Page
Import slave information Copy the slave setting information from other project. 3-36
Close slave setup window Close currently edited slave station setting window. 3-33

Edit

The options for unit editing are as follows.

Item Icon Description Page

Cut Cut the selected area. 3-35
Copy Copy the selected area. 3-35
Paste Paste the cut data on the cursor position. 3-35
Delete - Delete the selected area. 3-34
Display the " Unit comments" dialog box and edit unit
Edit unit/slave comments 3-37
and slave comments.
Reserve unit/slave Reserve a unit/slave. 3-37

Convert

The slave address assignment-related options are as follows.

Item Icon Description Page

Jump to the unit position that corresponds to the error
Jump to error rung 3-37
displayed in message window.
Auto assign adress Assign addresses automatically. 3-35
Check to ensure that duplicated slave station address
Check device 3-21
assignment is avoided.

View

The items that are related to window display are as follows.

Item Icon Model See

Page
Toolbar - Display/hide the selection toolbar. -
Status bar - Display/hide the selection status bar. -
Message area - Display/hide the selection message area. -
Open unit setting window of slave station selected by
Setup unit/slave property - -
the current cursor.

- KV STUDIO Ver.6 User’s Manual - 3-7

 3-3 Menu List in Slave Setup Window

Window

The items that are related to window display are as follows.

3 Item Icon Model See

Page
Slave Configuration Area - Select slave configuration area. 3-31
UNIT EDITOR

Select unit - Select unit selection icon. 3-32

Setup unit - Select unit setting icon. 3-32
Setup address - Select address setting icon. 3-33
Message area - Select message area. 3-12

Help

Display help information.

See
Item Icon Model
Page
How to use Unit Editor Display the help information on operations of Unit Editor. 3-38

3-8 - KV STUDIO Ver.6 User’s Manual -

3-4 Names and Functions of Different Parts of Screen
This section describe the screens displayed in Unit Editor.

Names and Functions of Different Parts of Unit Editor

3
Unit selection icon

UNIT EDITOR
Unit setup icon
Refresh setting tab.*
Select configuration unit, and
display, set, change the
Unit configuration area message of unit configured.
Display unit configuration.

Message area
Display error and action message in
operation of Unit Editor.

* When KV-5500/5000/3000 is selected, this is displayed when KV-FL20V (KV-FL20V mode) or KV-
5000 (FL-net mode) is selected via unit configuration area.

- KV STUDIO Ver.6 User’s Manual - 3-9

 3-4 Names and Functions of Different Parts of Screen

Unit configuration area

The configuration of unit set is displayed in Unit Editor.

Following operations can be conducted in unit configuration area
3 • Unit configuration, deletion, connection position change
• Selection of the unit with detailed setting
UNIT EDITOR

• Display of current consumption, weight and size of overall system

• Every unit assignment, relay address display
• Display unit configuration message

System information.
Displays the width (mm), height (mm), depth (mm), current consump-
tion (mA), and weight (g) of units in a linked connection for each stage.

Unit No.
Displays the connection No. of the
unit assigned as 0, 1, 2, 3, 4 and so
forth starting from the CPU.

Extension cable
Extension cables are displayed as a bro-
ken line when Extension Unit KV-EB1 is
used in a multi-stage configuration.

Unit cursor (red frame)

Unit information
Displays the currently selected cur-
Displays the model No. of placed units
sor position.
and assigned relay Nos.

Select unit tab

This is used for unit configuration. Select the unit to be configured fromthe Unit Selection window.

Indicates unit type.

Indicates unit model.

3-10 - KV STUDIO Ver.6 User’s Manual -

 3-4 Names and Functions of Different Parts of Screen

Setup unit tab

Display detailed settings such as the mode, assignment relay No. of the unit configured in unit
configuration area or the setting that can be changed.
3
Indicates setting item.

UNIT EDITOR
The project whose setting cannot be
changed is displayed in grey.

Indicates the setting content

corresponding to every project.
"*" is displayed in initial value of the
selected project.
"Set up Configuration Unit", Page
3-22

Refresh setting tab

When KV-5500/5000/3000 is selected, this tab is displayed only when KV-FL20V (KV-FL20V mode) or
KV-5000 (FL-net mode) is selected via unit configuration area.
KV-FL20V auto refresh setting and refresh cycle setting.

For details, please see "KV-FL20V User Manual".

- KV STUDIO Ver.6 User’s Manual - 3-11

 3-4 Names and Functions of Different Parts of Screen

Message area

Display error and conversion result in operation of Unit Editor.

3
UNIT EDITOR

Display conversion result and processing content message.

Indicates the position of message corresponding unit.

Display processing of Unit Editor.

Display processing result using icon.

Prompting message is displayed as per
following sequence.
: Error message
: Alarm information
: Normal processing information

3-12 - KV STUDIO Ver.6 User’s Manual -

3-5 Basic Operation of Unit Editor
This section describes how to use Unit Editor.

System Configuration Procedure

The following example describes the procedure for creating a new system using Unit Editor in the 3
following unit configuration.

UNIT EDITOR
K K K K K K K K
V V V V V V V V

—
—

End unit
U 3 C B B L H A
7 0 3 1 1 2 2 D
0 2 6 6 0 0 4
0 X T T V S 0
C C C

1 Select "File(F)" "New project(N)" from the KV STUDIO edit screen menu.
The [New project] dialog box is displayed.

2 Enter new project name, select corresponding type, click "OK" button. To change the save
directory, click the "reference" button, select the save directory and click the "OK" button.
The Unit Editor startup confirmation dialog box is displayed.
Click the "Yes" button. This starts up Unit Editor.

Item Explanation
"Yes" Start Unit Editor. Please set up unit configuration.
Display KV STUDIO editor image.
"No"
When setting unit composition, separately start the Unit Editor.
Read the unit setting information from CPU unit.
(Read Unit setting)
Please pre-set computer and CPU unit to communication enabled status.

3 Click "select unit(1)" label.

- KV STUDIO Ver.6 User’s Manual - 3-13

 3-5 Basic Operation of Unit Editor

4 From unit selection window, select the connected unit, drag it to unit configuration area.
Displayed in edit image.
Here, still take above unit configuration as an example, drag according to KV-U7->KV-c32xc->···KV-
AD40
3
UNIT EDITOR

TIP CPU unit and terminal unit have been configured during initial start of Unit Editor.

5 From the menu, select "Convert (P)" "Auto assign relay/DM (A)" (relay / DM automatic
assignment).
Auto-assign relay No. and its result are displayed in message window.

TIP Auto-assign relay / DM step is described here. When manually assigning relay no., please
see "Manually Assign Unit Relay/DM", Page 3-18．

6 From unit configuration area, double click on the unit where detailed setting will be made, set
with "Setup unit" tab.

TIP For setting method and content of every unit, please refer to related manual of every unit.

7 After setting up all the units, then click the "OK" button.
Saving the generated system, the KV STUDIO
screen is displayed.

3-14 - KV STUDIO Ver.6 User’s Manual -

3-6 Operation of Unit Editor
This section describes how to use Unit Configuration Area

Start Unit Editor

"Tool(T)" "Unit Editor(U)" Ctrl + U

3

UNIT EDITOR
Select "Tool(T)" -> "Unit Editor(U)" from the KV STUDIO editor menu.
Start Unit Editor.

TIP If project does not exist, Unit Editor cannot be started.

"Various File Instructions", Page 4-2

Exit Unit Editor

File(F) Close(S)

Select "File(F)" -> "Close(S)". The "Confirm" dialog box appears.

Item Explanation
Save unit configuration setting,
"Yes"
exit the Unit Editor.
Abandon unit composition setting,
"No"
exit the Unit Editor.
"Cancel" Return Unit Editor.

Note
To enable operation of KV-5500/5000/3000/1000/700 unit, the unit setting message
must be set up. To transfer the project to CPU unit during non-saved exit, please re-
compile unit setting message.

TIP Click the "OK" button and the confirmation dialog box will not displayed. Then save unit
configuration and exit Unit Editor.

- KV STUDIO Ver.6 User’s Manual - 3-15

 3-6 Operation of Unit Editor

Display Window

Window (W) Select unit(1) Alt + 1

3 Setup unit (2) Alt + 2

Refresh setting (3) Alt + 3

UNIT EDITOR

Three types of windows are displayed on the right side of Unit Editor: unit configuration window, unit
selection window, and unit setup window. These windows can be toggled to be displayed.
"Select unit tab", Page 3-10
"Setup unit tab", Page 3-11
"Refresh setting tab", Page 3-11

TIP When Unit Editor is started, the Unit Selection window will be displayed.
And the last-exited windows is displayed when Unit Editor is started next time.

Unit Configuration

Select the unit to be connected from the unit selection window, and drag-and-drop the unit to the edit
window.
The unit is placed at the drag-and-drop position.

Note
• CPU unit and terminal unit have been configured during initial start of Unit Editor.
• Power supply unit, error output unit, and Bluetooth unit can only be installed on
the left side.
• Only one CPU unit is allowed per system, and can be placed at the leftmost
position of the upper row or next to the Power Supply Unit.
• Extension Unit KV-EB1 is automatically placed when each unit is placed positions
on the lower row even if KV-EB1 is not placed.
• The maximum number of units that can be connected to a single system is 16
(excluding Power Supply Unit, CPU Unit and Extension Unit) per horizontal layer.
Three rows are provided.

3-16 - KV STUDIO Ver.6 User’s Manual -

 3-6 Operation of Unit Editor

Delete a Configured Unit

"Edit(E)" "Delete(D)" Delete

From the menu, select the unit to be deleted, click "Edit (E)" "delete (D)" or from right-click menu,
3

UNIT EDITOR
select "delete".

TIP • CPU unit and terminal unit cannot be deleted.

• To delete multiple units, select the multiple units with the mouse and then delete.
• The deleted section will be displayed in gray.

Note
If you delete the unit of a system already assigned relays/DMs, the relay/DM Nos. of
the units that were deleted from the ladder program are displayed in red as invalid
operands, and the program can no longer be transferred to the PLC.
Please clear invalid operand via Ladder edit image or compile Ladder again. Besides,
in "Tool (T)" -> "option (O)" of Ladder edit image, when "Device auto-convert mode
by changes to unit config" checkbox of "system settings" label is not selected, it
cannot be invalid operand.
"Clear Invalid Operands", Page 8-4

Copy/move a Configured Unit

"Edit(E)" "Cut(T)" Ctrl + X

"Copy(C)" Ctrl + C
"Paste(P)" Ctrl + V

1 To copy, select "Edit(E)" -> "Copy(C)" from the menu. To move, select "Edit(E)"-> "Cut(T)" from
the menu.

Other procedure Copy

Select the unit, right-click and select "Copy".
Move
Select the unit, right-click and select "Cut".

TIP The moved part is displayed in dark.

When moving the unit to lower segment for the first time, expansion unit KV- EB1 is
automatically configured (auto-configuration is set to ON).

- KV STUDIO Ver.6 User’s Manual - 3-17

 3-6 Operation of Unit Editor

Note
If you "cut" the unit of a system already assigned relays/DMs, the relay/DM Nos. of
the unit that was cut from the ladder program are displayed in red as invalid
operands, and the program can no longer be transferred to the PLC.
3 The relay/DM Nos. of the pasted unit will not be inherited even if "Paste" is executed.
Please clear invalid operand via Ladder edit image or compile Ladder again.
UNIT EDITOR

"Clear Invalid Operands", Page 8-4

Besides, in "Tool (T)" (tools) "option (O)" of Ladder edit image, when "Device
auto-convert mode by changes to unit config)" checkbox of "system settings" label
is not selected, it cannot be invalid operand.

2 Move the unit cursor to the unit paste position, right-click the mouse button, and select "Paste".

Other procedure Select "Edit(E)" "Paste(P)"

■ Moving a reserved unit to which relays/DMs are assigned

Select the unit, and drag-and-drop the unit to place where you want to move it to. When you do this, the
relays Nos. do not change even if the unit is moved after relays have been assigned.

Auto Assign Unit Relay/DM

"Convert(P)" "Auto assign relay/DM(A)" F5

From the menu, select "Convert (P)" "Auto assign relay / DM (A)" (relay / DM automatic
assignment).
Auto assign relays/DMs.

TIP Auto assignment rules can be set in option setting.

It is defaulted that relays are assigned from R300000 and DM from DM100000 from the
neighbouring position of CPU unit.
"Device assignment setting", Page 3-41

Manually Assign Unit Relay/DM

View(V) Display unit setting(R)

Assign relay/DM No. manually by the following steps.

1 From the menu, select the unit to be set, click "View (V)" "display unit setting (R)".
The setting of the unit selected in unit configuration area is displayed in the unit setting window.

3-18 - KV STUDIO Ver.6 User’s Manual -

 3-6 Operation of Unit Editor

2 Select "leading DM" of "Item" and "Setting value" of

"Leading input (Output) relay No.", and enter the setting
value.

UNIT EDITOR
TIP • It has the " Auto- replace function " that relay / DM No. can be also automatically changed
when relay/ DM No. of relay / DM system is changed.
• It has been set to automatic switching status in initial setting. When automatic switching
function is not required, in "Tool (T)" "Option (O)" of ladder edit image, do not select
the "device auto-convert mode by changes to unit config" checkbox of "system settings"
label and change corresponding settings.
"Device assignment setting", Page 3-41

Note
• Use channel unit to enter leading relay No. Channel no. refers to the part of every
relay No. except the final 2 bit.channels for relay R 10000.
• Assignable relay in every unit, DM is within global device range.
When specifying other than above range, error may occur in conversion. Please
confirm within global device range during setting.
"Entire Assignments of Local Devices Setting", Page 8-6
• An even number should be entered for the leading DM No.

- KV STUDIO Ver.6 User’s Manual - 3-19

 3-6 Operation of Unit Editor

Batch Relay Number Assignment

"Edit(E)" "Batch input relay No.(A)"

3 1 Select "Edit(E)" "Batch input relay No.(A)" from menu.

UNIT EDITOR

2 Click "Relay No." column, enter relay No. assigned via ch unit, click "OK" button.

TIP • It has the "Auto-replace function" that relay / DM No. can be also automatically changed
when relay/DM No. of relay/DM system is changed.
• It has been set to automatic switching status in initial setting. When automatic switching
function is not required, in "Tool (T)" "Option (O)" of Ladder edit image, do not select
the "device auto-convert mode by changes to unit config" checkbox of "system settings"
label and change corresponding settings.
"Device assignment setting", Page 3-41

Note
• Use channel unit to enter leading relay No. Channel No. refers to the part of every
relay No. except the final 2 bit. channels for relay R10000.

3-20 - KV STUDIO Ver.6 User’s Manual -

 3-6 Operation of Unit Editor

Check System Relay/DM Assignment

"Convert(P)" "Check device(C)" F6

Check whether unit configuration in Unit Editor and every unit relay / DM assignment are correct.
3

UNIT EDITOR
TIP When exiting Unit Editor, the device is automatically checked, in case of any error, its content
message will be displayed.

1 Select "Convert(P)" "Check device(C)" from the menu.

Start checking unit configuration and relay / DM assignment.

2 Inspection result is displayed in message area.

Error content, or related
message are displayed in
message area.
"Jump to Error Line",
Page 3-37

- KV STUDIO Ver.6 User’s Manual - 3-21

 3-6 Operation of Unit Editor

Unit Setting Details

View(V) Display unit setting(R)

3 Select the unit to be set, on the menu, select "View (V)" "Display unit setting (R)".
UNIT EDITOR

The setting of the unit selected in unit configuration area is displayed in the unit setting window.

The Unit Setup window of the selected unit is displayed.

According to the following step, display the unit selected in unit configuration area in unit setup icon.

Set up Configuration Unit

View(V) Display unit setting(R)

Conduct detailed setting of configuration unit in unit configuration area. For details about the setting
project and setting method of every unit, please see corresponding manual for every unit.

1 Select the unit to be set, on the menu, select "View (V)" "Display unit setting (R)" or select
"Display unit setting" from the right-click menu.
Select unit in unit configuration area displayed in the unit setting icon.

2 Click the item whose setting is to be changed, and enter the new set value.

When entering from the text box

The text box is displayed. Enter the desired numerical value.

When entering from the pull-down list

The pulldown list is displayed. Select the desired item.

3-22 - KV STUDIO Ver.6 User’s Manual -

 3-6 Operation of Unit Editor

Display Unit Monitor

View(V) Unit monitor(U) Ctrl + Alt + U

When KV STUDIO is in monitor status, unit monitor cannot be displayed from Unit Editor.
3

UNIT EDITOR
Select the monitor unit to be displayed, on the menu, select "View (V)" "Unit monitor (U)" or from
right-click menu, select "Unit monitor".
For details of unit monitor, please see user manual of every unit.

Display Customize Monitor.

View(V) Custom Monitor(M) Ctrl + Alt + M

When KV STUDIO is in monitor status, customized monitor cannot be displayed from Unit Editor.
To select CPU unit, on the menu, select "View (V)" "Custom monitor (M)" or from right-click menu,
select "Custom monitor".
For specific information related with customize monitor, please see "9-5 Custom Monitor", (Page 9-
53)..

- KV STUDIO Ver.6 User’s Manual - 3-23

 3-6 Operation of Unit Editor

Display Buffer Memory Monitor

View(V) Buffer memory monitor(B) Ctrl + Alt + R

3
When KV STUDIO is in monitor status, buffer memory monitor cannot be displayed from Unit Editor.
UNIT EDITOR

Select the buffer memory monitor unit to be displayed, on the menu, select "View (V)" "Buffer
memory monitor (B)" or from right-click menu, select "buffer memory monitor".
For detailed settings, please see "9-4 Batch Monitoring", (Page 9-50).

3-24 - KV STUDIO Ver.6 User’s Manual -

 3-6 Operation of Unit Editor

Import Unit Setting Info and Unit Comments

File(F) Import(I)

According to the following step, read the unit setting message and unit comment compiled via other
3

UNIT EDITOR
projects.

1 Select from menu "File(F)" "Import(I)".

“Import Unit" dialog box is displayed.

2 Specify the position where unit setting message file and unit comment are imported.

Item Explanation
Name of unit setting Display the storage position imported to unit setting message file and unit comment.
info file Click "browse" button, use (open file) dialogue, can select unit setting message file.
Unit list The list displays message related to unit composition to which the file to be imported.
Display Unit No. of unit setting message.
Unit No.
After selecting checkbox, change to import target.
Unit name Indicates unit name.
Position Display the number of sections of unit and unit connection position (No.).
Comments Display unit comments.
(select All) Set all Unit No. checkbox to ON.
(Unselect) Set all Unit No. checkbox to OFF.

3 Select import unit, click “OK" button.

Import unit setting info and unit comments.

- KV STUDIO Ver.6 User’s Manual - 3-25

 3-6 Operation of Unit Editor

Read Unit Configuration from PLC

From the menu, select "File (F)" "Read unit config from PLC (G)".

3 Read unit configuration information from PLC.

On the menu, select "File (F)" "Read unit composition from PLC (G)".
UNIT EDITOR

Note
• Please set KV STUDIO and PLC to communication enabled status.
"Communication Settings", Page 9-4
• Every unit setting of unit composition read out changes to initialization (unsetting)
status. Unit setting message cannot be read under read out status of unit composition.

Enter Comments

"Edit (E)" Edit cmnts (O) Unit cmnts (U) Ctrl + Shift + U

Block cmnts(B) Ctrl + Shift + B

System cmnts(S) Ctrl + Shift + S

Enter the comment into the unit configuration area.

Note
Up to 80 half-width characters (40 full-width characters) can be inputted for
comments.

■ Unit cmnts
Use unit configuration area, add comment on the selected unit.
On the menu, select "Edit (E)" "Edit cmnts (O)" "Unit cmnt
(U)".
"Unit comments" dialog box appears and input unit comments.

TIP Unit comment entered is displayed in hint (tool tip)

method on unit configuration area.

■ Block cmnts
Use unit configuration area, add comment on the block containing
the selected unit.
On the menu, select "Edit (E)" "Edit cmnts (O)" "Block
cmnt (U)".
"Block cmnts" dialog box appears and input block comments.

TIP Block comment entered is displayed under system

information of unit configuration area.

3-26 - KV STUDIO Ver.6 User’s Manual -

 3-6 Operation of Unit Editor

■ System comments
Add comment on to the system composition set.
On the menu, select "Edit (E)" "Edit cmnts (O)" "System
cmnts".
"System cmnts" dialog box appears and input system comments. 3

UNIT EDITOR
TIP The system comment entered will be displayed left-above
of unit configuration area.

Reserve /Unreserve

"Edit(E)" "Reserve unit(R)" Ctrl + R

Unreserve unit(R) Ctrl + R

• Select the unit to be reserved, on the menu, select "Edit (E)" "unit reserve (R)" or from right-click
menu, select "unit reserve".
• To increase preset unit, and to install, disassemble unit due to device category in same Ladder, can
use " Reserving " unit method to flexibly set Ladder unit.
Setting message of " Reserving (preset)" unit is not transmitted.
• To remove reserve, firstly select the unit reserved, on the menu, select "Edit (E)" "unit unreserve
release (R)" or from right-click menu, select "unit reserve release".

Jump to Error Line

"Convert(P)" "Jump to error line(E)" F4

Display the slave device concerned in error messages that are displayed when an address is assigned,
slave devices are added or deleted, etc.

1 Click the error message on the message area of Unit Editor.

The selected message
is displayed inverted.

- KV STUDIO Ver.6 User’s Manual - 3-27

 3-6 Operation of Unit Editor

2 Select "Convert(P)" "Jump to error line (E)" from the menu.

Other procedure Double click the selected message.

3 The cursor moves to the slave device on the slave placement area where the error occurred.
UNIT EDITOR

Display the "Slave Setup" Window

"Setup slave(K)" "Setup slave(N)" Ctrl + N

Select KL- N20V, set slave station to connect KL.

1 Select setting slave station KL- N20V, press menu, select "Setup slave (K)" (slave station setting)
"Setup slave(N)" (slave station setting).
The "Slave setup window" screen is displayed.

Other procedure Select setting slave station KL- N20V and right-click, select "Stave setup".

TIP For setting method of KL slave station units, please refer to related manual of every unit

Import Slave Information

"Setup slave(K)" "Import slave info(I)" Ctrl + K

Read slave device setup information created in other projects. For the system with same slave station
configuration, using "Import slave info" method, can directly read system message and simply set.

Read slave settings information by the following steps.

1 Select KL - N20V reading slave station message, on the menu, select "Slave station setting (K)"
"Import slave info (I)" or from right-click menu, select "Import slave info".

3-28 - KV STUDIO Ver.6 User’s Manual -

 3-6 Operation of Unit Editor

2 Specify the position where slave station setting message file is imported.

UNIT EDITOR
Item Explanation
Display the position where slave station setting message file is imported. Click
Name of slave setting info file
"preview" button, use (open) dialog box to select unit setting message file.
List Display unit (master) list
Select All Select all units (masters).
Unselect Deselect

3 Select the unit (Master Station) to which slave information will be imported, click "OK" button.
Slave setting information is imported.

Copy KL Unit Information

"Setup slave(K)" "Copy KL info(K)" Ctrl + Alt + C

Copies KL unit information created on the KL address setup software to the Clipboard. For details of
operation, refer to the "KL-N20V User's Manual".

Paste KL Unit Information

"Setup slave(K)" "Paste KL info(L)" Ctrl + Alt + V

Imports KL unit information pasted to the Clipboard by "Copy KL info" to the Unit Editor. For details of
operation, refer to the "KL-N20V User's Manual".

- KV STUDIO Ver.6 User’s Manual - 3-29

 3-6 Operation of Unit Editor

Start KL-N20V Setup(KL Address Setup) Software

"Setup slave(K)" "KL-N20V setup(KL adress setup)(E)" Ctrl + E

3
Start up the KL address setup software, and set the addresses of the KL-N20V. For details of operation,
UNIT EDITOR

refer to the KL-N20V User's Manual. "

TIP When using the KL address setup software for setting addresses, "Communications with
other KL master units" in the KL-N20V unit setup window is automatically set to "TRUE".

Change the Display Mode of Bitmap

View(V) Display bitmap(B)

In unit configuration area and slave station configuration area, change the bitmap display method of
configuration unit. Actual unit connection status is displayed in bitmap. The assignment relay No. can
be displayed in the box.

TIP The system saves setting content. It will directly enter setting status during the next start.

Display Help

"Help(H)" "How to use Unit Editor(H)" F1

Display the Unit Editor help information.

3-30 - KV STUDIO Ver.6 User’s Manual -

3-7 Use the Slave Setup Window
This section describe slave station setting window and operating method of every window.
For detailed setting method of KL slave station, please see "KL- N20V user manual".

Names and Functions of Different Parts of Slave Setup Window

3
When using KL series, the slave station to be connected must be set up in the slave station setting

UNIT EDITOR
screen.
Select " Setup slave" in the Unit Editor, and the slave station setting window will be displayed.
Slave station setting menu can be selected only when KL- N20V is selected.

Unit selection icon

Unit setup icon
Address setup icon
Select configuration slave station, and
display or set, change the message of
slave station configured.

Slave Configuration Area

Display slave configuration "Display the "Slave Setup" Window", Page 3-28

Slave Configuration Area

Display the slave configuration that has been set in "Slave setup window".
The slave configuration area can be operated as follows.
• Configurate or delete slaves or change connection position
• Selection of slave devices to be set in detail
• Display of current consumption and weight of overall slave system
• Display of assigned relay addresses for each slave device
• Display slave configuration message

System information.
Displays the current consumption (mA)
and weight (g) of the overall slave system.

Display a cursor (red box)

Indicates the currently selected
cursor.

Unit information
Displays the model No. of placed
slave devices and assigned relay
Nos. and addresses.

- KV STUDIO Ver.6 User’s Manual - 3-31

 3-7 Use the Slave Setup Window

Select unit tab

Used when configurating the slave unit in the slave configuration area.
Select to co figurate the slave unit from Unit Selection window.
3
UNIT EDITOR

Indicate slave type.

Indicates slave size

Setup unit tab

Unit Setup window allows to change settings and display of slave and master units configured in slave
configuration area.

Indicates setting item.

The project whose setting cannot
be changed is displayed in grey.

Indicates the setting content corresponding

to every project.
"*" is displayed in initial value of the
selected project.
"Set up Configuration Unit", Page
3-22

3-32 - KV STUDIO Ver.6 User’s Manual -

 3-7 Use the Slave Setup Window

Setup address tab

Address Setup window allows to display lists of detailed address assignment of the slave units
configured in slave configuration area, assign addresses manually and change settings, etc.

Enter slave station comment. 3

UNIT EDITOR
Indicates the assigned relay/
DM No..

It represents the status of slave

station assigned in every address.

"*" is displayed in slave station

of terminal settings.

Assignment address is the Can be set and changed

receiving address or sending manually.
address. It represents the
address assigned to every
slave station.

Display the "Slave Setup" Window

Select KL- N20V, set slave station to connect KL.
"Display the "Slave Setup" Window", Page 3-28

Close the "Slave Setup" Window

"File(F)" "Close Slave Setup Window(C)"

Select "File(F)" "Close Slave Setup window(C)"

from the menu. When slave station setting message is
updated but not saved, confirmation dialog box will
appear.

TIP When "Auto-assign Address" or "Address Check" is executed, the slave setup information at
that time is automatically saved. The above confirmation box will not be displayed when you
exit without saving changes to the slave setup information after you have executed "Auto-
assign Address" or "Address Check".

Note
The relay/DM assignments of KL Master Unit KL-N20V are assigned according to the slave
information set in the Slave setup screen. When the Slave setup screen has been exited
without saving the slave setup information, either create the slave setup information again or
manually set the addresses of KL-N20V when transferring the ladder program to the CPU Unit.

- KV STUDIO Ver.6 User’s Manual - 3-33

 3-7 Use the Slave Setup Window

Switch Over Cursor Position

Window(W) Slave contig area(U) Alt + C

3 Select unit (1) Alt + 1

Select unit (2) Alt + 2

UNIT EDITOR

Setup adress (3) Alt + 3

Message area(4) Alt + 4

Switch cursor position from the menu (active field, tab).

Slave Configuration

From the unit selection window, select the connected slave station, and drag it to edit image.

Delete a Slave That has Been Configured

"Edit(E)" "Delete(D)" Delete

Select the slave station to be deleted from the menu, and click "Edit (E)" "delete (D)" or select
"Delete" from right-click menu.

TIP • The deleted section will be displayed in gray.

• After deleting the slave that has been assigned addresses, its address will become
blank.The address must be set again when setting the embedded address.
"Automatic Address Assignment", Page 3-35

3-34 - KV STUDIO Ver.6 User’s Manual -

 3-7 Use the Slave Setup Window

Copy/move a Configured Slave

"Edit(E)" "Cut(T)" Ctrl + X

"Copy(C)" Ctrl + C 3
"Paste(P)" Ctrl + V

UNIT EDITOR
Copy, move, paste for the selected slave station.
Can also operate by right-clicking on the menu.

TIP The moved part is displayed in dark.

Note
After cutting the slave that has been assigned addresses, the address No.s of pasted
slaves will not be continuous even if "Paste" is performed.

■ Move a unit without changing its address

After selecting a slave, drag and drop it to the target position.In this case, after assigning addresses,
relay No. and address No. will not change even if moving the slave.

Automatic Address Assignment

"Convert(P)" "Auto assign address(A)" F5

Select "Convert(P)" "Auto assign address(A)" from the menu.

Auto assign address.

Note
Even if the address of relay / DM slave station assigned is changed, relay / DM No. in
Ladder is not changed.

TIP Address Auto-Assign rule is to assign address according to the sequence configured.

Manual Address Assignment

"Window(W)" "Setup address (3)" Alt + 3

1 Select the unit to be set, and select "Setup address tab".

The address setup of the unit selected in the Slave Device Setup
screen is displayed in the address setup window.

- KV STUDIO Ver.6 User’s Manual - 3-35

 3-7 Use the Slave Setup Window

2 Select the address of the slave device to be changed, and enter the address No. to be set.

3
UNIT EDITOR

Note
• Be sure to set only unique address to each slave.
• Even if the address of relay / DM slave station assigned is changed, relay / DM No.
in Ladder is not changed.

Check Address Assignment of System

"Convert(P)" "Check address(C)" F6

Verify the unit configuration set in Slave Setup screen and whether or not errors exist in the address
assignment of each unit.

TIP When exiting slave station setting image, address is automatically checked, in case of error,
its content message is displayed in message area of Unit Editor.

1 Select "Convert(P)" "check address(C)" from the menu.

Start verifying the unit configuration and address assignment.

2 The verified result is displayed in the message area of Unit Editor.

Error content, or related message are
displayed in message area.

"Jump to Error Line", Page 3-27

Import Slave Information

File(F) Import slave info(I) Ctrl + K

Read the slave information saved in other project files.For the system with same slave station
configuration, using "Import slave info" method, can directly read system message and simply set.
"Import Slave Information", Page 3-28

3-36 - KV STUDIO Ver.6 User’s Manual -

 3-7 Use the Slave Setup Window

Input Comments

"Edit(E)" "Edit Unit/slave cmnts (U)" Ctrl + Shift + U

3
1 Select the unit or slave station to be entered, on the menu, select "Edit (E)" "Edit Unit / slave

UNIT EDITOR
cmnts (U)" or select "unit/slave station comment edit" from right-click menu.
"slave comment (slave station comment)" dialog box pops up for slave station, "Unit comment" dialog
box pops up for unit.

2 Enter comment, click "OK" button.

Comments are input.

TIP • The input comments will be displayed in the slave

configuration area and address setup window.
• Up to 80 half-width characters (40 full-width characters) can be
inputted for comments.

Reserve Unit / Slave Unreserve Unit / Slave

"Edit(E)" "Reserve Unit/ slave(R)" Ctrl + R

Unreserve reset unit/slave(R)

• Select unit / slave station to be reserved, on the menu, select "Edit (E)" "Reserve unit / slave (R)"
or select "Reserve unit / slave" from right-click menu.
• To increase preset unit / slave station, and to install, disassemble unit / slave station due to device
category in same Ladder, can use " Reserving " unit/ slave station method to flexibly set Ladder unit /
slave station.
• To unreserve, firstly, select unit / slave station reserved, on the menu, select "edit (E)" "unreserve
unit / slave (R)" or from right-click menu, select "unreserve unit / slave".

Jump to Error Line

"Convert(P)" "Jump to error line (E)" F4

During address assignment, adding and deletion of slave station, etc., the corresponding slave station
with error message appears.

1 Click the error message in the message area of Unit Editor.

The message clicked will be displayed inversely.

- KV STUDIO Ver.6 User’s Manual - 3-37

 3-7 Use the Slave Setup Window

2 Select "Convert(P)" "Jump to error line(E)" from the menu of Unit Editor.

Other procedure Double click the selected message.

3 The cursor will move to slave station with error on slave station configuration field.
UNIT EDITOR

Display Help

"Help(H)" "How to use Unit Editor(H)" F1

Display the Unit Editor help information.

3-38 - KV STUDIO Ver.6 User’s Manual -

3-8 Environment Setting
Environment setting change method of Unit Editor is described as follows.

About Environment Setting of Unit Editor

"Option(O)" "Setup option(S)"

3

UNIT EDITOR
Display "Option Setup" dialog box, complete option setting of Unit Editor.
On the menu, select "Option (O)" "Setup option (S)", display "Setup option" dialog box.

Can set up the following contents.

Tab type Content
The unit displayed in unit configuration area and slave station configuration area
Setup display
displays multiplying power, font size and cursor movement unit
Setup color Font color and background color in Unit Editor
Device assignment
Auto-assign rule of relay/DM
setup
To set up device assignment rule used for cyclic (I/O) messages communication of
EtherNet/IP Setting
EtherNet/IP unit
Set unit color Every unit color displayed in unit configuration area and slave station configuration area
Other Settings Whether KL Master Station unit, KL-N20V manual address setting are conducted, etc.

The changed setting is saved to KV STUDIO, and immediately valid after setting.

View Setting

Item Description Default

Change unit display multiplying power displayed in unit
Scale of unit(slave) area 100%
configuration area and slave station configuration area.
Change font size of window other than unit configuration area
Font size 12
and slave station configuration area.
Set the cursor action method after pressing the cursor key in
Block-move cursor *1 None.
unit configuration area and slave station configuration area.

*1 Cursor move unit

- KV STUDIO Ver.6 User’s Manual - 3-39

 3-8 Environment Setting

Block-wise cursor movement

Cursor can be only moved in the block, and can not be moved outside the block.

3
UNIT EDITOR

System-wise cursor movement

Cursor can move in block, and move on the corresponding side of upper (lower) block.

Color setup

To change color, click "Color" button and select color.

TIP • The colors that you set here are saved to KV STUDIO and are enabled when KV STUDIO
is next started up.
• To return saved colors to their defaults, click the "Initialize" button.

3-40 - KV STUDIO Ver.6 User’s Manual -

 3-8 Environment Setting

Device assignment setting

Set automatic assignment rule of relay device in KV-5500/5000/3000/1000/700. If manually assigning a

No. before the no. of the defined relay/DM, when selecting "save after exit" or "device testing",
prompting message of error existing in relay/DM/address will be displayed without processing. To 3
change leading relay, DM No. assignable, please reset.

UNIT EDITOR
Item Description Default
Select relay setting in "batch Batch
Relay setting
setting / separate setting" . setting
Batch
Leading relay No.(in ch) Input leading relay No.. 300
setup
Relay Leading relay No. of input
Input unit leading relay No.. 300
setting(KV)*1 unit(in ch)
Leading relay No. of output
Setup I/O unit leading relay No.. 400
unit(in ch)
Leading relay No. of special
Input special unit leading relay No.. 500
unit(in ch)
Leading DM No. Input leading DM No.. 10000
DM setting (KV) "hook selection" is to assign DM in
Take 100 as unit to distribute DM in the unit Yes
unit using 100 unit.

*1 Batch settings refer to an method assigning according to horizontal sequence of CPU unit.
Separate settings refer to a method assigning according to horizontal sequence of CPU unit with
unit category (entry, output, specific).

- KV STUDIO Ver.6 User’s Manual - 3-41

 3-8 Environment Setting

EtherNet/IP Setting

To set up device assignment rule used for cyclic (I/O) messages communication of EtherNet/IP unit.

3
UNIT EDITOR

Item Description Default

Leading bit device Input leading bit device. B0000
Setup leading device
Leading word device Input leading word device. W0000
If checked, assign bit device to the
Assign bit device by 10CH devices of EtherNet/IP unit every Yes
10 channels.
Setup device assignment
If checked, assign word device to
Assign word device by 100 the devices of EtherNet/IP unit Yes
every 100 units.
Register or not Display a dialog to ask if register.
Setting of auto register to unit Never execute Not register. Register
list of sensor settings file Always register sensor Automatically update the sensor or not
settings file of scan list settings file of KV STUDIO.

3-42 - KV STUDIO Ver.6 User’s Manual -

 3-8 Environment Setting

Set unit color

In this case, the color set will change to the unit color of unit configuration area displayed in border and
the character color of relay, DM no.
3
To change color, click "Color" button and select color.

UNIT EDITOR
TIP • The colors that you set here are saved to KV STUDIO and are enabled when KV STUDIO
is next started up.
• To return saved colors to their defaults, click the "Initialize" button.

- KV STUDIO Ver.6 User’s Manual - 3-43

 3-8 Environment Setting

Other Settings

3
UNIT EDITOR

Item Description Default

Display slave
Slave station setting image is displayed before the Unit Editor. Initial
setting window
Window value is that slave station setting image is displayed before the Unit Yes
foreground in Unit
Editor window. *
Editor
Pop up
Confirmation message displayed during setting of auto-assign relay
confirmation
/ DM No. and address. Initial value is set to pop up the confirmation Yes
message when
message.
auto assign adress
KL-N20V address of KL Master Station unit can be manually set. In
Allow manual setup general, KL- N20V uses address in slave station setting image or
Yes
of KL-N20V adress "KL address setting software", to manually assign address, select
Other this project, and can manually enter setting in the unit setting image.
Automatic design function is effective.After auto design function is
Enable automatic enabled, the unit unusable in real system arranged in Unit Editor can
Yes
layout function be automatically identified and not configured. Initial value is
automation design function enabled.
Display comments Via unit configuration area, display various comments such as unit
in unit configuration comment, block comment, system comment, etc. After checkbox is Yes
screen. cancelled, all comments will be not displayed.

*"Window" setting is effected after the Unit Editor is restarted.

3-44 - KV STUDIO Ver.6 User’s Manual -

4

FILE & PRINT

FILE & PRINT
This chapter describes the functions of the file and how to print.

4-1 Various File Instructions ••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• 4-2

4-2 Print•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• 4-18

- KV STUDIO Ver.6 User’s Manual - 4-1

 4-1 Various File Instructions
This section describes instructions in "File (F)" menu.
For details on projects, modules and macros, refer to KV-5500/5000/3000 Series Programming
Manual.

New Project KV-5500/5000/3000 KV-1000 KV-700 KV-P16 KV-10/16/24/40

4 File (F) New project (N) Ctrl + N

FILE & PRINT

Select "File (F)" "New project (N)" from the menu, and create new project.

Item Explanation
Project name Inputs project name. (Within 32 half-width characters/16 full-width characters)
PLC model Selects the PLC type.
Position Specifies the project storage directory.
Comment Inputs the comment here. (Within 64 half-width characters/32 full-width characters)
Access Window Inputs the project name to display on the Access Window. (Up to 12 half-width
display comments*1 alphanumeric katakana characters)
Register special
When this checkbox is marked, special device comments are registered.
device cmnts

*1 Input ASCII codes 20 to 7E (HEX) and A1 to DF (HEX) due to restrictions in the characters that
can be displayed on the Access Window.

TIP For unusable characters in project name, please see "A-2 List of Unavailable
Characters", Page A-11.

4-2 - KV STUDIO Ver.6 User’s Manual -

 4-1 Various File Instructions

Open Project KV-5500/5000/3000 KV-1000 KV-700 KV-P16 KV-10/16/24/40

"File (F)" "Open project (O)". Ctrl + O

Select "File (F)" "Open project (O)" from the menu, specify the available project.
["Open project" dialog box pops up.
4
TIP * To open the files other than .kpr, use "KD " to specify extension name.

FILE & PRINT

Close Project KV-5500/5000/3000 KV-1000 KV-700 KV-P16 KV-10/16/24/40

File (F) Close project (C)

Select "File (F)" "Close project (C)" from the menu, and close the currently opened project.

Save Project KV-5500/5000/3000 KV-1000 KV-700 KV-P16 KV-10/16/24/40

File (F) Save project (S) Ctrl + S

Select "File (F)" "Save project (S)" from the menu, and save the project being edited.

Save Project As KV-5500/5000/3000 KV-1000 KV-700 KV-P16 KV-10/16/24/40

File (F) Save project as (A)

Select "File (F)" "Save project as (A)" from the menu, and save the opened file in other name.

" New Project", page 4-2

- KV STUDIO Ver.6 User’s Manual - 4-3

 4-1 Various File Instructions

Save Compact Project KV-5500/5000/3000 KV-1000 KV-700 KV-P16 KV-10/16/24/40

File (F) Pack/save project (J)

Select "File (F)" "Save compact project (J)" from the menu, and specify the saving position and

4 filename.

TIP • The packed project file is saved in.kpz format.

FILE & PRINT

• Use when the project is swapped via mail.

Verify Project KV-5500/5000/3000 KV-1000 KV-700 KV-P16 KV-10/16/24/40

File (F) Verify project (B)

Verify the currently open project against other projects.

Select "File (F)" "Verify project (B)" from the menu, and specify the project file to be verified.
Checking result is displayed in "Check" dialog box.

4-4 - KV STUDIO Ver.6 User’s Manual -

 4-1 Various File Instructions

Project Property KV-5500/5000/3000 KV-1000 KV-700 KV-P16 KV-10/16/24/40

File(F) Project property(F)

Select "File (F)" "Project property (F)" from the menu.

FILE & PRINT

Item Explanation
Project name Displays the project name.
Date created Displays the date when the project was created.
Date updated Displays the date that the project was last updated.
Date transferred Displays the date that the project was last transferred to the PLC.
This is the ID for the project. The project ID is automatically assigned by KV STUDIO
Project ID
when the project is created.
Set password*1 You can set a password to prevent unauthorized reading of the program from PLC
Save to The project's save destination is displayed.
Comment Inputs the comment here. (Within 64 half-width characters/32 full-width characters)
Inputs the name of the author here. (Within 64 half-width characters/32 full-width
Author
characters)
Access Window Inputs the project name to display on the Access Window. (Up to 12 half-width
display comments*2 alphanumeric katakana characters)

*1 • Cannot be set when KV-10 (16), KV-24 (40) and KV-P16 are used.
*2 • Cannot be set when KV-700/700+M, KV-10 (16), KV-24 (40) and KV-P16 are used.
• Due to limit of displayable character in Access Window, the input range must be between ASCII
code 20 to 7E (HEX) and A1 to DF (HEX).

■ Set password
The password setting disables reading of unit setup information, programs, comments/labels, logging
setup, mail setup (KV-5500/5000/3000 only) and device default setup (KV-5500/5000/3000 only) stored
in KV-5500/5000/3000/1000/700.
Once a password is set, data cannot be read unless the correct password is inputted. Password setting
can prevent programs from being read from the KV-5500/5000/3000/1000/700 by unauthorized
personnel.

1 Select "File (F)" "Project property (F)" from the menu, and click "Set password(P)" button in
"Project attribute" dialog box.
The "Set password" dialog box appears.
- KV STUDIO Ver.6 User’s Manual - 4-5
 4-1 Various File Instructions

2 Input the password, and click the "OK" button. To delete an already registered password, delete
the currently displayed password, and click the "OK" button.
Passwords up to six half-width alphanumerics long can be set.

4
FILE & PRINT

Caution
When you forget the registered password, the password can be cleared by
clearing all in the KV-5500/5000/3000/1000/700 Access Window or overwritting
the project. All settings and user programs will be cleared thereafter.
For the project with set password, project backup in advance is recommended
to avoid data loss in case you forget the password.

The protection ranges are as follows when a password has been set to a project that has been
transferred to KV-5500/5000/3000/1000/700.

Operation Protection Range

PC->
Overwrite is possible.
KV-5500/5000/3000/1000/700
KV-5500/5000/3000/1000/700->.
Password protection
PC
Memory Card -> PC
Overwrite is possible.
KV-5500/5000/3000/1000/700
KV-5500/5000/3000/1000/700->
Read is possible
Memory Card
PC->Memory card Overwrite is possible. -8
Memory card
Memory card->PC Password protection

Register sensor setting file KV-5500/5000/3000 KV-1000 KV-700 KV-P16 KV-10/16/24/40

File(F) Register sensor setting file(E)

From the menu, select "File" "Register sensor setting file" to specify the sensor setting file to access
（EDS file (*.eds、*.ez1)).
The Open File dialog box is displayed.

*Normally the EDS file extension name is“*.eds”. The extension name of our EtherNet/IP
TIP
device is“*.ez1”.
*The sensor setting file of our EtherNet/IP device can be downloaded from our
website“http://www.keyence.co.jp"

4-6 - KV STUDIO Ver.6 User’s Manual -

 4-1 Various File Instructions

Import Module/macros KV-5500/5000/3000 KV-1000 KV-700 KV-P16 KV-10/16/24/40

File (F) Import (I) Import modules/macro (M)

From the menu, select "file (F)" "import (I)" "import module / macro (M)", and specify the
module /macro to be imported.
4

FILE & PRINT

Item Explanation
Either sets the desired module type after an import, or selects from
Module type after importing
"Every-scan/Initialization/Standby/fixed cycle module*".
Import log info When this checkbox is marked, logging information is imported from other
projects.
When this checkbox is marked, CPU positioning information is imported
Import CPU positioning info
from other projects.
*Selectable only when KV-5500/5000/3000 is used.

TIP Module file extension : .mod

Macro file extension : .mcr

Note
*.ldc files can be imported from projects for KV-700 made on KV BUILDER. (Select
KVB ladder diagram files (*.ldc) at "Files of type").
For details on importing projects for KV-700 made on KV BUILDER, see KV-1000
Series Programming Manual, "5-6 Fully Utilizing KV-700 Data."

Import Comments/labels KV-5500/5000/3000 KV-1000 KV-700 KV-P16 KV-10/16/24/40

File (F) Import (I) Import cmnt/label (C)

Select "File (F)" "Import (I)" "Import cmnt/label (C)" from the menu, and specify the file to be
imported.
The comment or label that you specified is imported.
*.cm1 : Comment 1 file
*.cm2 : Comment 2 file
*.lbl : Label file

- KV STUDIO Ver.6 User’s Manual - 4-7

 4-1 Various File Instructions

Import Logging Information KV-5500/5000/3000 KV-1000 KV-700 KV-P16 KV-10/16/24/40

File( F) Import (I) Import log info (L)

Select "File (F)" "Import (I)" "Import log info (L)" from the menu, and specify the file to be

4 imported.
The logging information of the project file that you specified is imported.
FILE & PRINT

*.kpr: KVS Project file

Import Device Default KV-5500/5000/3000 KV-1000 KV-700 KV-P16 KV-10/16/24/40

File (F) Import (I) Import device default (D)

Select "File (F)" "Import (I)" "Import device default (D)" from the menu, and specify the file
whose device default to be imported.

The specified device default infor is imported.

Other procedure Select "import" from the "device default" right-click menu of the "project" tab in workspace

DevInit.dvi : Device default file

TIP Device default file is generated when default is set in "device default setting" dialog box.

Import File Register Setting KV-5500/5000/3000 KV-1000 KV-700 KV-P16 KV-10/16/24/40

File (F) Import (I) Import file register setting (F)

Select "File (F)" "Import (I)" "Import File Register setting (F)" from the menu, and specify the
file register setting file to be imported.
The specified file register setting infor is imported.

Other procedure Select "import" from the "file register setting" right-click menu of the "project" tab in workspace

FR***.frb : File register setting file( *** indicates the No. of file register.）

TIP File register setting file is generated in setting of "file register setting" dialog box.

4-8 - KV STUDIO Ver.6 User’s Manual -

 4-1 Various File Instructions

Import CPU Positioning Parameters KV-5500/5000/3000 KV-1000 KV-700 KV-P16 KV-10/16/24/40

File (F) Import (I) Import CPU positioning parameters (P)

Select "File (F)" "Import (I)" "Import CPU positioning parameters (P)" from the menu, and
specify the file to be imported.
The CPU positioning parameters of the project file that you specified is imported.
4

FILE & PRINT

CpuMb.inf : CPU positioning file
CpuMbPrm.inf : CPU positioning file (KVB)

Save/read Memory Card KV-5500/5000/3000 KV-1000 KV-700 KV-P16 KV-10/16/24/40

File (F) Memory card (M) Write (W)

Memory card (M) Read (R)

1 Connect memory card to PC.

KV-5500/5000/3000 Series User's Manual, "2-2 Memory Card"

2 From the menu, select "File (F)" "Memory card (M)" "Write (W)" or "Read (R)".
When saving a new file on memory card using KV STUDIO, be sure to create a new folder on the
"Memory card" dialog box, and save the file.

New a folder
1 "New" button is not displayed
Select drive to which when reading the memory card.
memory card is assigned ?

2
Select folder for saving
data.

Display file types

saved in the selected
folder.

Caution
When the original folder is selected for saving, the data will be overwritten,
and the previous data will lose.

- KV STUDIO Ver.6 User’s Manual - 4-9

 4-1 Various File Instructions

To save the data of KV-5000/3000 into memory card, if a function supported by CPU function version
2.0 and above is used, loading is unavailable on CPU unit with CPU function version below 2.0. For the
purpose of loading, memory card data that support CPU function version 1 must be created. If data that
support CPU function version 1 are selected, memory card data should be created after deleting the
functions that are only supported by CPU function version above 2.0.

4
FILE & PRINT

Note
Memory card data that support CPU function version 1 cannot be created in the following
situations.
• In case of command and script function supported by CPU function version above 2.0
• In case KV-5500 and KV-EP21V are contained in unit configuration
• In case double floating real number is used in command, macro argument, and label

TIP • When creating a new folder for saving, click the "New",
and input the folder name. The project folder will be
created.
• Data management on the memory card must be executed
by project folder.
• When the auto-loading function is used on the KV-5500/5000/3000/1000/700 CPU Unit,
name the project folder "autoload" when saving the data.
If auto loading function is used in KV-5500/5000/3000, the project folder name can be
"atload**" (** : 01 to 99). After saved with the project folder name "runload" or "runload**" (**
: 01 to 99), program can be read during PROG -> RUN.
For the autoloading function, please see User's Manual of every CPU.

4-10 - KV STUDIO Ver.6 User’s Manual -

 4-1 Various File Instructions

Output VT Ladder Monitor File KV-5500/5000/3000 KV-1000 KV-700 KV-P16 KV-10/16/24/40

File(F) Output VT ladder monitor file(D)

For outputting the files (VTLDR00.vlr) used for ladder monitor of VT3 series.
4
1 Select "File(F)" "VT ladder monitor file output(D)" from the menu, and then select the output

FILE & PRINT

folder of ladder monitor data.

2 "Output setting" dialog box appears after clicking "OK" button, select object data to be saved
and click "execute" button.
Output size is displayed and "execute" button is greyout after outputting VT ladder monitor file.

Note
For the commands of KEEP, ITVL, UDT, UDC, SFT, JOGX, JOGY, PID, output can't be
executed when the ladder returning to the input condition behind the second is used.

- KV STUDIO Ver.6 User’s Manual - 4-11

 4-1 Various File Instructions

Save Device Comments in Text Format KV-5500/5000/3000 KV-1000 KV-700 KV-P16 KV-10/16/24/40

File (F) Save device cmnts in text format (K)

Save ladder program comment currently opened as text format file (*.txt) or CSV formatted file (*.csv).
4 Select "File (F)" "Save device cmnts in text format (K)" from the menu, and specify comment
storage destination.
FILE & PRINT

Item Explanation
Save position Specifies the position where text format file or CSV formatted file are saved.
File name Inputs its saving filename.
Files of type Specifies "text format file (*.txt)" or "CSV formatted file (*.csv)".
Select the module/
Specifies the module / macro to be saved.
macro to save

Read Text Format Comments KV-5500/5000/3000 KV-1000 KV-700 KV-P16 KV-10/16/24/40

File (F) Read text format cmnts (Q)

Read comments saved in text format file (*.txt) or CSV format file (*.csv) to the currently opened ladder
program

Select "File (F)" "Read text format cmnts (Q)" from the menu, and specify the comment to be read.

4-12 - KV STUDIO Ver.6 User’s Manual -

 4-1 Various File Instructions

Item Explanation
Position Specifies the position where the comment is saved.
File name Inputs the file name.
Files of type Specifies "text format file (*.txt)" or "CSV formatted file (*.csv)".
Select the module/
Specifies the module/macro to read.
macro to read.
4

FILE & PRINT

Save Mnemonics List KV-5500/5000/3000 KV-1000 KV-700 KV-P16 KV-10/16/24/40

File (F) Mnemonics list (R) Save (S)

Save ladder programs to a mnemonics list. Mnemonics lists are regular text format files with the "mnm"
extension.

Note
• This menu is not available unless a project is opened.
• Module/macro ladder program containing script, PACK command can be saved to
mnemonics list, but cannot be read from mnemonics list.

1 Select File (F) Mnemonics list(R) Save (S) from the menu.
"Select comment type" dialog box is opened, select the comment added to the list.

- KV STUDIO Ver.6 User’s Manual - 4-13

 4-1 Various File Instructions

2 Click "OK" button, "Folder select" dialog box appears, and specify storage destination of
mnemonics list.

4
FILE & PRINT

TIP Save corresponding module / macro in filename (module / macro name).mnm format.

Read Mnemonics List KV-5500/5000/3000 KV-1000 KV-700 KV-P16 KV-10/16/24/40

File (F) Mnemonics list (R) Read (R)

Read ladder program from mnemonics list. Mnemonics lists are regular text format files with the "mnm"
extension.

Note
• This menu is not available unless a project is opened.
• Module/macro ladder program containing script, PACK command can be saved to
mnemonics list, but cannot be read from mnemonics list.

From the menu, select "File (F)" "Mnemonics list (R)" "Read (R)", and specify the file of
mnemonics symbol list to be read..
The module/macro of the same name as the file name is added to the project.

When a module/macro of the same name as the file name already exists in the project, the "Input
module/macro name" dialog box appears.
Input the module/macro name, and click the "OK" button.

4-14 - KV STUDIO Ver.6 User’s Manual -

 4-1 Various File Instructions

Output CSV Files (Unit Specifications) KV-5500/5000/3000 KV-1000 KV-700 KV-P16 KV-10/16/24/40

File (F) Output CSV file (U) Unit specifications (U)

Save the pin assignments of connected units and the list of comments as a CSV format file.

Select "File (F)" "Output CSV file (U)" Unit specifications (U) from the menu, and specify the
4
storage target of CSV file.

FILE & PRINT

Output file example

Output File in CSV format (Cross ref info) KV-5500/5000/3000 KV-1000 KV-700 KV-P16 KV-10/16/24/40

File (F) Output CSV file (U) Cross ref info (C)

Save cross ref info in CSV format.

Select "File (F)" "Output CSV file (U)" "Cross ref info (C)" from the menu, and specify the
destination to save CSV file.
Output file example

- KV STUDIO Ver.6 User’s Manual - 4-15

 4-1 Various File Instructions

Change Model KV-5500/5000/3000 KV-1000 KV-700 KV-P16 KV-10/16/24/40

File(F) Change model(L)

From the menu, select "file (F)" "change model (L)", model switch dialog box appears, and the

4 model can be changed .

Convertible PLC models are as follows.
FILE & PRINT

Convertible model
Model editing
KV-P16 KV-10(16) KV-24(40) KV-700 KV-700+M KV-1000 KV-3000 KV-5000 KV-5500
KV-P16 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
KV-10(16) ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
KV-24(40) ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
KV-700 - - - ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
KV-700+M - - - ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
KV-1000 - - - - - ○ ○ ○
KV-3000 - - - - - - ○ ○
KV-5000 - - - - - - ○ ○
KV-5500 - - - - - - ○ ○

TIP Click "Open file", select file format, and KZ300/350 and KZ-A500 ladder program can be
read. The KZ300/350 and KZ-A500 ladder program are read as KV-700 and KV-1000
respectively.
"1-3 About Data Compatibility", (Page 1-5)

4-16 - KV STUDIO Ver.6 User’s Manual -

 4-1 Various File Instructions

Auto-save KV-5500/5000/3000 KV-1000 KV-700 KV-P16 KV-10/16/24/40

File (F) Auto-save (Z)

After auto-save setting, when reaching the preset time, system will automatically generate backup.

Note
When KV STUDIO is started after the program quits due to an error, the file that was
4

FILE & PRINT

backed up by the auto-save function will be automatically loaded. If you exit KV
STUDIO without executing "Auto-save" to automatically make a backup file, the back
file will be lost.

TIP The following illustrates how to auto-save.

By setting time The backup file is automatically made in the AutoSave
Ladder file Backup folder in the BackUp file at preset time intervals.

• In case of normal exit

Ladder file Backup The backup file is automatically deleted.

Auto delete

• In case of abnormal exit

Ladder file Backup The backup file is automatically loaded when KV

STUDIO is started next time.
te
o dele
Aut

1 Select "File (F)" "Auto-save (Z)" from the menu.

"Setup auto-save" dialog box pops up.

2 Select "Auto-save" check box, and Input the auto-save interval.

3 Click the "OK" button.

The auto-save setting is enabled.

■ To cancel the auto-save function

1 Select "File (F)" "Auto-save (Z)" from the menu.

"Auto-save settings" dialog box pops up .

2 Deselect the "Auto-save" check box, and click the "OK" button.
The auto-save setting is disabled.

- KV STUDIO Ver.6 User’s Manual - 4-17

 4-1 Various File Instructions

Auto-read KV-5500/5000/3000 KV-1000 KV-700 KV-P16 KV-10/16/24/40

File (F) Auto-read (T)

The file to be auto-loaded when KV STUDIO is started can be specified.

4 1 Open the project to be set in auto-read.

FILE & PRINT

2 From the menu, select "File (F)" "Auto-read(T)", click "Yes" button.
Set the opened project to auto-load.

Note
To set the file of new project in auto-read, the project must be saved in advance.

■ To cancel the auto-read function

1 Open the project whose auto-load setting is to be canceled.

2 From the menu, select "File (F)" "Auto-read (T)", click "Yes" button.
Cancel auto-read of the opened project.

Exit KV-5500/5000/3000 KV-1000 KV-700 KV-P16 KV-10/16/24/40

File (F) Exit (X)

Save the project being currently edited and exit KV STUDIO.

4-18 - KV STUDIO Ver.6 User’s Manual -

4-2 Print
This section describes the print function contained in the "File (F)" menu.

Print KV-5500/5000/3000 KV-1000 KV-700 KV-P16 KV-10/16/24/40

File (F) Print (P) Ctrl + P

The corresponding environment for PC printing must be available. Please refer to Operation 4
Instructions of PC and set the PC in printable status.

FILE & PRINT

The following details can be printed:

• Front cover
• Logging/tracing setting*1
• Set logging *2
• CPU positioning parameter*3
• Select unit*3
• Setting unit*3
• Relay/DM list of units*3
• Mail setting*1
• Simple PLC link setting*1
• FTP client setting*1
• EtherNet/IP setting*1
• CPU System setting*1
• Module configuration
• Local device assignment*2
• Default setting*1
• Ladder
• Mnemonics list
• Comment
• Label
• Device application status
• Line comments
• Panel setting*4

*1 Display only when "KV-5500" "KV-5000" "KV-3000" (CPU) is used.

*2 Display only when "KV-1000" (CPU) is used.
*3 Display only when "KV-5500" "KV-5000" "KV-3000" "KV-1000" "KV-700" "KV-700+m" (CPU) are used.
*4 Display only when "KV-P16" (CPU) is used.

TIP When <print-break>(half-width) is inputted in a rung comment, the ladder is printed in next
line.

Before printing, the content to be printed must to be set in advance.

1 Select "File (F)" "Print (P)" from the menu.

"Print settings" dialog box pops up .

- KV STUDIO Ver.6 User’s Manual - 4-19

 4-2 Print

2 Set contents to be printed. Select the checkbox of desirable items.

Select desirable items.

Click and specifiy the

4 setting content of the

items whose setting can
FILE & PRINT

be changed.

TIP The font and font size to be used for printing can be specified. Click the setting item, and
specify the setting from the dropdown list that is displayed.

3 Click "Setup page" button, the "Setup page" dialog box is opened.

Item Explanation
Header Selects the check box, and the project date is printed at left top corner of each page.
Selects the check box, and the"print page/total pages" is printed at bottom of each
Footer
page.
Blank Sets printer paper margin.
Preview Display print position after change of margin value.
Initialize Restore all setting values in "page setup" dialog box to initial state.

4 Click "Print" button, and "Print" dialog box appears.

Press "OK" in " Print " dialog box, start printing.

TIP Click "Print preview" button, and "Print preview" window appears.

Note
After the setting is changed, click "Cancel" button, and the changed content will be
invalid.

4-20 - KV STUDIO Ver.6 User’s Manual -

 4-2 Print

Print Preview KV-5500/5000/3000 KV-1000 KV-700 KV-P16 KV-10/16/24/40

File (F) Print Preview (V)

Display print message.

1 Select "File (F)" "Print Preview (V)" from the menu. 4

"Print settings" dialog box pops up .

FILE & PRINT

2 Set contents to be printed. Select the checkbox of print project, click "Print preview" button to
display preview.

Select desirable items.

Click and specifiy the

setting content of the
items whose setting
can be changed.

TIP The font and font size to be used for printing can be specified. Click the setting item, and
specify the setting from the dropdown list that is displayed.

Printer Setup KV-5500/5000/3000 KV-1000 KV-700 KV-P16 KV-10/16/24/40

File (F) Printer setup (W)

Sets the size of the paper, printing direction (portrait/landscape), and other settings.

Note
The displayed contents may be different according to specific printers.

TIP For how to set, please refer to the Operation Instructions of printer.

- KV STUDIO Ver.6 User’s Manual - 4-21

 4-2 Print

MEMO

4
FILE & PRINT

4-22 - KV STUDIO Ver.6 User’s Manual -

5
EDIT

EDIT
The chapter describes various edit functions.

5-1 About Edit Functions ••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• 5-2

- KV STUDIO Ver.6 User’s Manual - 5-1

 5-1 About Edit Functions
This section describes functions contained in the "Edit (E)" menu.

Undo KV-5500/5000/3000 KV-1000 KV-700 KV-P16 KV-10/16/24/40

"Edit (E)" "Undo (U)" Ctrl + Z

Cancel the last operation and restore the previous state.

5 Note
The following operations can be undone:
• Entry of instructions ·Deletion of instructions ·Editing of operands·Cut
EDIT

• Paste ·Multiple paste ·Replacement of operands

• Text replace ·NO/NC contact conversion ·Insertion of empty rung·Deletion of rungs
• Insertion of rung comments
• Editing of rung comments ·Disabling of rungs ·Setting of rungs·Editing of connection rungs
• Insertion of loopback ladders ·Conversion of unit devices
• Insertion of area scripts
• Insertion of box scripts ·Conversion of scripts ·Insertion of PACK instruction

7,3 • When an operation cannot be undone, the button is displayed in gray and cannot be
selected.
• Device comment change, only return to the part edited via device comment edit window.

Redo KV-5500/5000/3000 KV-1000 KV-700 KV-P16 KV-10/16/24/40

"Edit (E)" "Redo (R)" Ctrl + Y

Ccancels an operation undone by "Undo (U)".

7,3 When an operation cannot be redone, the button is displayed in gray and cannot be selected.

Cut/Copy/Paste KV-5500/5000/3000 KV-1000 KV-700 KV-P16 KV-10/16/24/40

"Edit (E)" "Cut (T)" Ctrl + X

"Edit (E)" "Copy (C)" Ctrl + C
"Edit (E)" "Paste (P)" Ctrl + V

Select the range, and cut, copy or paste the selected range.

Those that can be cut, copied, pasted are,

• Cell unit
• Ladder labels of rung unit.

5-2 - KV STUDIO Ver.6 User’s Manual -

 5-1 About Edit Functions

Select a range

Select a range for cutting/copying/pasting.

There are two ways to select a range.

■ Select by the mouse

Select the range by the mouse.

1 Move the mouse to the first cell to select and click.

5
The cursor is displayed.

EDIT
2 Drag the cursor to the last position to select.
The selected range is displayed by a different color.

·Select in cell units

Drag to the desired cell. Any number of cells can be selected as desired.
To select all cells, click the top left corner of the ladder edit window screen.

Drag to the desired cell.

·Select in rung units

Click on the number of the desired rung. You can select multiple rungs by combining this operation
with the Shift key.

Other procedure • On the 1st cell, press Shift + ← key.

• On the 10th cell, press Shift key + → key
• Ctrl key＋ → key

7,3 • Multiple rungs can be selected by dragging on the rung No.

• To cancel a selection, click anywhere on the ladder.

- KV STUDIO Ver.6 User’s Manual - 5-3

 5-1 About Edit Functions

■ Select by arrow keys

1 Move to the first cell to select by moving the cursor with the arrow keys.

2 Move the cursor to the last cell to select by pressing ← → ↑ ↓ with the Shift key held
down.
The color of selected area is changed.

5
EDIT

7,3 • To cancel a selection, press the arrow keys again.

• To select in rung units, move the cursor to the top cell of the desired rung, and press the
Shift + End keys/ Ctrl + Shift + → keys/ Ctrl + → keys.
• To select all cells, move the cursor to the top cell (rung No. 00001, column No.1),
and press the Ctrl + Shift + End keys.

Cut

Cut selected cells.

Copy

Copy the selected unit.

Paste

Paste cut/copied cell to the specified position.

Multiple Paste KV-5500/5000/3000 KV-1000 KV-700 KV-P16 KV-10/16/24/40

"Edit (E)" "Multiple paste (D)" (Multiple paste） Ctrl + Shift + V

When Multiple paste is used, multiple ladder programs copied in rung units can be copied with device
No. shifted by an offset amount.
It is handy to make a program having multiple rungs in which only device No. differ.

5-4 - KV STUDIO Ver.6 User’s Manual -

 5-1 About Edit Functions

1 Select the rungs to copy, and select "Edit (E)" "Copy (C)" from the menu.
"Select a range", (Page 5-3)

Other procedure • Click button.

• Press Ctrl + C keys.
• Select "copy (C)" from right-clicking menu.

2 Move the mouse to paste position, from the menu, select "Edit (E)" "Multi paste (D )".
The "Paste selected" dialog box appears.
5
Other procedure Select "Multiple paste(D)" from the right-clicking menu.

EDIT
Item Explanation
When selecting checkbox, offset can be specified to each device
Set common offset for
type.
same device type
When deselecting, offset to the device can be specified separately.
Paste number Set the numbers of pastes.
(Clear offset) Reset all offsets set.
Row offset Display the rung position of corresponding device within copy range. *
Display the column position of corresponding device within copy
Column
range.*
Device Display copied device No. (or label). *
Offset Set the offset of set device No.

*When "Setting the offset of same device type to common", "-" appears.

Note
• Mutiple pastes can be conducted when copying with rung unit.
• When script rung, rung comment, PACK instruction (KV-700 ) are containd, mutiple
paste cannot be made.

Example R1000 offset is 5, DM1000, DM0001 offset is 10, the number of pastes is 2

- KV STUDIO Ver.6 User’s Manual - 5-5

 5-1 About Edit Functions

Search Device KV-5500/5000/3000 KV-1000 KV-700 KV-P16 KV-10/16/24/40

Edit (E) Search device( S) Ctrl + F

Select "Edit (E)" "Search (s)" from the menu. The "Search/Replace" dialog box appears.

5
EDIT

Item Explanation
Device
Label
Constant
Input the operand and module/macro to be searched. Click button,
Target Module/macro
and the last 10 searched records will be displayed in drop down menu.
Device Comment
Reserve/Disable
Invalid line
(Search) width *2 From inputted device No., set the value quantity device as search object.
*1 Specify the instruction to be searched at the same time with the project
Seach with instruction
specified by the object.
Entire project Take all modules / macros as the searched object.
Range
Module / macro *4 Take module / macro displayed currently as search object range.
Up Search upwards from current cursor position.
Direction
Down Search downwards from current cursor position.
Case sensitive *3 When selecting the checkbox, upper/lower case search will be executed.
*3 When selecting the checkbox, the project completely conformable to the
Search 100% match
Option input character is only searched/input.
Search
When selecting, only direct I/O device (DR) is searched.
direct device only *2 *5
Output target Select where to output the search/replace result, Search1 or Search2.
Search according to specified conditions, the result is displayed to
(List display)
output window in list form.
(Search) Start searching according to the specified condition, .
(Close) Search / replace close dialog box.
*1 Fail to be displayed when "module / macro" is selected.
*2 Displayed only when "device" is selected.
*3 Displayed only when the object is selected as any one of "label", "module / macro", "device
comment", "label comment".
*4 Valid only when the models "KV-5500", "KV-5000", "KV-3000" and "KV-1000" are used.
*5 Valid only when the models "KV-5500", "KV-5000" and "KV-3000" are used.

5-6 - KV STUDIO Ver.6 User’s Manual -

 5-1 About Edit Functions

Device Replace KV-5500/5000/3000 KV-1000 KV-700 KV-P16 KV-10/16/24/40

Edit (E) Replace device (I) Ctrl + H

Select "Edit (E)" "Replace (I)" from the menu, and the "Search/Replace" dialog box appears.

EDIT
Item Explanation
Input the operand before the replace is executed. When button
Before replace is clicked, a pulldown menu is displayed, and a list of the last ten
selected operandsare displayed.
Input the operand after the replace is executed. When button
Operand
After replace is clicked, a pulldown menu is displayed, and a list of the last ten
selected operands is displayed.
Input the replace width (range of number of operands to be
(Replacement) Width
replaced from the operand before the replace is executed).
Entire project Take all modules / macros as the replaced object range.
Replace
Module / macro *2 Take module / macro displayed as replacement object.
range
Selected range Take the selected range on editor as the replaced object range.
Up The replacement is operated upwards from current cursor position.
Direction The replacement is operated downwards from current cursor
Down
position.
When selecting the checkbox, the comment will be also transferred
Move device comments
to be conformable with the replaced operand .
Option Left source comment When selecting, comments of mobile sources will be reserved.
Search direct device
When selecting, only direct I/O device (DR) is searched.
only*3
Select where to output the search/replace result, Search1 or
Output target
Search2.
(Replace all) Batch-replaceobject device in specified range.
Search according to the specified condition. Replacement is not
(Search)
operated.
(Replace) Separately replace the object device in specified range.*1
(Close) Search / replace close dialog box.

*1 When replacement cannot be made, click "search", the cursor is moved to the next instruction.
*2 Valid only when the models "KV-5500", "KV-5000", "KV-3000" and "KV-1000" are used.
*3 Valid only when the models "KV-5500", "KV-5000" and "KV-3000" are selected.

- KV STUDIO Ver.6 User’s Manual - 5-7

 5-1 About Edit Functions

Search / Replace Instruction KV-5500/5000/3000 KV-1000 KV-700 KV-P16 KV-10/16/24/40

Edit (E) Search / Replace Instruction ( E )

After searching the specified instruction, all instructions will be displayed or replaced to other
instructions.
From the menu, select "Edit (E)" "Search /Replace Instruction (E)", and input the required project.

5
■ Search
EDIT

Search Ladder instruction.

Item Explanation
Input search instruction, *1 click button, and the last 10
historic records will be displayed in drop down menu.
·Specify multiple projects marked with "∣" using OR condition.
Search instruction to be searched
Example) "LD∣LDB"
·Postfix can be added when LDB is specified.
Example"ADD.F"
Replace with (the following instructions) Fail to search when searching.
Entire project Take all modules / macros as the searched object.
Range
Module / macro *2 Take module / macro displayed currently as search object range.
Up Search upwards from current cursor position.
Direction
Down Search downwards from current cursor position.
Select where to output the search/replace result, Search1 or
Output target
Search2.
Search according to the specified condition, all retrieval results
(List display)
are displayed to output window.
(Search) Search according to the specified condition.
(Close) Search / replace close dialog box.

*1 Wildcard character cannot be used in the instruction inputted. Besides, partial search cannot be
operated (only partial instruction inputted for search). Please utilize help to input correct
instruction.
*2 Valid only when the models "KV-5500", "KV-5000", "KV-3000" and "KV-1000" are used.

5-8 - KV STUDIO Ver.6 User’s Manual -

 5-1 About Edit Functions

■ Replace
Replace Ladder instruction..
After selecting "Replace to the next instruction", necessary projects appears when the replacement is
operated.

EDIT
Item Explanation
Input search instruction. *1Click button, last 10 historic records are
displayed in drop down menu.
Seach instruction to be searched
Can specify multiple instructions marked with " ∣" using OR condition.
(Example) "LD Ι LDB"
Replace with (the following When selecting, entry box appears, and input the instruction to be
instructions) replaced.
Entire project Take all modules / macros as the replaced object range.
Range Module / macro *3 Take module / macro displayed as replacement object.
Selected range Take the selected range on editor as the replaced object range.
Up The replacement is operated upwards from current cursor position.
Direction
Down The replacement is operated downwards from current cursor position.
When deselecting and replacing, postfix / differential is ignored, and
Option Replac Suffix/differential
only the instruction is replaced.
Output target Select where to output the search/replace result, Search1 or Search2.
Replace all Batch-replace object instruction in specified range.
Search according to the specified condition. Replacement is not
(Search)
operated.
(Replace) Separately replace the object instruction in specified range.*2
(Close) Search / replace close dialog box.

*1 Wildcard character cannot be used in the instruction inputted. Besides, partial search cannot be
operated (only partial instruction inputted for search). Please utilize help to input correct
instruction.
*2 When replacement cannot be made, click "search", and move the cursor to the next instruction.
*3 Valid only when the models "KV-5500", "KV-5000", "KV-3000" and "KV-1000" are used.

- KV STUDIO Ver.6 User’s Manual - 5-9

 5-1 About Edit Functions

NO/NC Contacts KV-5500/5000/3000 KV-1000 KV-700 KV-P16 KV-10/16/24/40

"Edit (E)" "Convert NO/NC contacts(A)"

Select "Edit (E)" "Convert NO/NC contacts (A) " from the menu, and "Search/Replace" dialog box
appears.

5
EDIT

Item Explanation
Input the operand to be converted. When button is clicked, a
Target operand pulldown menu appears, and a list of the last ten selected operands
are displayed.
Entire project Take all modules / macros as the converted object range.
Conversi
Module / macro *1 Take module / macro displayed currently as converted object range.
on range
Selected range Take the selected range on editor as the converted object range.
Up The conversion is operated from current cursor position upwards.
Direction
Down The conversion is operated from current cursor position downward.
Output target Select where to output the search/replace result, Search1 or Search2.
Replace all Batch-convert the object device in the specified range.
Search according to the specified condition.Do not operate
(Search)
conversion.
(Replace) Separately convert the object device in specified range.
(Close) Search / replace close dialog box.

*1 Valid only when the models "KV-5500", "KV-5000" and "KV-3000" and "KV-1000" are used.

5-10 - KV STUDIO Ver.6 User’s Manual -

 5-1 About Edit Functions

Search Rung Comments KV-5500/5000/3000 KV-1000 KV-700 KV-P16 KV-10/16/24/40

"Edit(E)" "Search rung cmnts(M)"

Select "Edit (E)" "Search rung cmnts (M)" from the menu, and the "Search/Replace" dialog box
appears.

EDIT
Item Explanation
Only initial 1 rung of rung comment of every Ladder rung is
Only display leading rung of comment displayed, when rung comment acrossing multiple Ladder rung is
contained in rung comment inside search range.
Entire project Take whole project as search range.
Search range
Module / macro *1 Take selected module/macro as search range.
Select where to output the search/replace result, Search1 or
Output target
Search2.
Search according to the specified condition, all results are
(List display)
displayed to output window. *2
(Close) Search / replace close dialog box.

*1 Valid only when the models "KV-5500", "KV-5000", "KV-3000", "KV-1000" are selected.
*2 When double-clicking a rung comment currently displayed in the list, the cursor moves to that
rung comment.

7,3 When specifying "module/macro unit" with " Search range", object module/ macro must be
set to current window in advance.

- KV STUDIO Ver.6 User’s Manual - 5-11

 5-1 About Edit Functions

Search/Replace Text KV-5500/5000/3000 KV-1000 KV-700 KV-P16 KV-10/16/24/40

Edit (E) Search/Replace text(K)

Select "Edit (E)" "Search/Replace Text(K)" from the menu, and the "Search/Replace" dialog box
appears.

5
EDIT

Item Explanation
Input the character string to be searched. When button is clicked,
Search string a pulldown menu appears, and a list of the last ten selected operands
is displayed.
Select when character string is replaced. Input the replacement
Replace with (the following strings)
character string into the poping up entry box after selecting.
Entire project Take all modules / macros as the searched/ replaced object range.
Take module / macro displayed currently as searched/ replaced
Module / macro *3
Range object range.
Take the cell selected on editor as the object range of search /
Selected range*1
replacement.
Up From current cursor position upwards, operate search / replacement.
Direction
Down Search/replacement is operated from current cursor position downwards.
Rung comment Rung comments are set as the search object.
Script Scripts are set as the search object.
Objects*3 Module/macro name Module/Macro names are set as the search object.
Take script character string value as search object. The in operation
String value
bit is included.
When selecting the checkbox, upper/lower case search/ replacement
Case-sensitive
will be executed.
Option
When selecting the checkbox, only the project completely
Search 100% match
conformable to the input character is searched/ replaced.
Select where to output the search/replace result, Search1 or
Output target
Search2.
(Replace all)*1 Batch-replace object character string in specified range.
Search according to the specified condition, all retrieval results are
(List display)*2
displayed to output window.
Search according to the specified condition. Replacement is not
"Search"
operated.
(Replace)*1 Separately replace the object character string in the specified range.
(Close) Search / replace close dialog box.
*1 Displayed when "replaced to the next character string" is selected.
*2 Displayed only when "replaced to the following character string" is not selected.
*3 Valid only when the models "KV-5500", "KV-5000", "KV-3000" and "KV-1000" are used.

5-12 - KV STUDIO Ver.6 User’s Manual -

 5-1 About Edit Functions

Batch Replace KV-5500/5000/3000 KV-1000 KV-700 KV-P16 KV-10/16/24/40

Edit (E) Batch replace (G)

Specify range, and replace the specified device.

Select "Edit (E)" "Batch replace (G)" from the menu. Input the required project.

EDIT
Item Explanation
No. Batch replace No..(No.1 to No.32)
Replace source Specify device No. of replacement source.*1
(Replace destination) Specify device No. of replacement source.*1
Number of points The value in replacement range is not specified. *2
The input format in "Point form" project can be selected from DEC/
Point form
HEX.
Replace content Display Ladder of content replacement.
Entire project Take all modules / macros as the searched object.
Module / macro *3 Take module / macro displayed as replacement object.
Range Select Take module / macro displayed as replacement object.
module
Selected range Take the selected range on editor as the replaced object range.
After selecting, device comment of the replacement source is moved
Move device comment.
to the device of replacement object when the replacement is operated.
Keep source comments After selecting, comment of mobile sources will be reserved.
"Execute" Batch-replace processing statement.
(Close) "Batch-replace device" close dialog box.

*1 When error device No. is specified, "-" will be displayed in "replacement content", indicating the
irreplaceable device.
*2 When the number of devices exceeding device range is specified, "-" will be displayed in "
replacement content", indicating range error.
*3 Valid only when the models "KV-5500", "KV-5000", "KV-3000" and "KV-1000" are used.

7,3 • When irreplaceable device and range are specified, click "operation" button, and
"irreplaceable" message pops up, then the cursor will be moved to error entry box.
• Copy and paste can be made to Microsoft Excel.
(Press Ctrl + C , Ctrl + V keys)

- KV STUDIO Ver.6 User’s Manual - 5-13

 5-1 About Edit Functions

Cross Reference KV-5500/5000/3000 KV-1000 KV-700 KV-P16 KV-10/16/24/40

Edit (E) Cross reference(X) Create operand list (O) (Space)

Create rung cmnts list (L) Ctrl + L

Previous (A) +
Next (B)

5 Where the operand to be used is specified, and a list is displayed in the output window.
EDIT

■ Making a cross-reference
Select creating cross reference operand, double click on the displayed project, the cursor will be
moved to operand of corresponding editor.
Select "Edit (E)" "Cross reference (X)" "Create operand list (O)" from the menu.
When making a cross-reference, where the specified operand to be used will be specified, and a list is
displayed in the output window.

Note
When selecting script, cross reference will not be created.

■ Create rung comment list

Slect "Edit (E)" "Cross reference (X)" "Creat rung cmnts list (L)" from the menu, and the rung
comment list in the project is displayed in output window.

■ Select previous cross reference

Select "Edit (E)" "Cross reference (X)" "Previous(A)" from the menu, the previous cross
reference will be selected.

■ Select next cross reference

Select "Edit (E)" "cross reference (X)" "Next (B)" from the menu, the next cross reference will
be selected.

5-14 - KV STUDIO Ver.6 User’s Manual -

 5-1 About Edit Functions

Jump KV-5500/5000/3000 KV-1000 KV-700 KV-P16 KV-10/16/24/40

Jump to any specified position such as a rung No. or step in a program, or jump to the start or the end
of a rung.

Rung/step No.

Edit (E) Jump (J) Rung /step No. (L) Ctrl + Shift + G
5

EDIT
Jump to any specified position such as a rung No. or step No. in a program by the following procedures.

1 Select "Edit (E)" "Jump (J)" "Rung / step No. (L)" from the menu.
"Jump to Specified Rung" dialog box pops up.

Other procedure From right-click menu, select "Jump (J)" "Rung /step No. (L)"

2 Input the rung No. or step No. of the jump destination. To jump a specified step No., select the
"Jump to step No." checkbox.
The specified rung or step is displayed. The cursor is also moved to the specified rung.

7,3 • To cancel a jump, click the "Cancel" button.

• When the specified No. is greater than the last rung No. or step No. of the ladder
program, the last rung or step is displayed.

Note
When performing a jump by a step No., the program must be converted in advance.

- KV STUDIO Ver.6 User’s Manual - 5-15

 5-1 About Edit Functions

Top/bottom

"Edit (E)" "Jump (J)" "Top (T)" Ctrl + Home

Bottom(B) Ctrl + End

■ Jump to the top rung

5 Select "Edit (E)" "Jump (J)" "Top (T)" from the menu.
The cursor is jumped to the top of the ladder.
EDIT

■ Jump to bottom
Select "Edit (E)" "Jump (J)" "Bottom (B)" from the menu.
The cursor is jumped to the bottom of the ladder.

Previous/next block

"Edit (E)" "Jump (J)" "Prev. block (P)" Ctrl + ↑

Next block (N) Ctrl + ↓

■ Jump to the previous network block

Select "Edit (E)" "Jump (J)" "Prev. block (P)" from the menu.

■ Jump to the next network block

Select "Edit (E)" "Jump (J)" "Next block (N)" from the menu.

Previous/next symbol

"Edit (E)" "Jump (J)" "Prev. symbol (W)" Shift + Tab

Next symbol (F) Tab

■ Jump to the previous symbol

Select "Edit (E)" "Jump (J)" "Prev. symbol (W)" from the menu.

■ Jump to the next symbol

Select "Edit (E)" "Jump (J)" "Next symbol (F)" from the menu.

5-16 - KV STUDIO Ver.6 User’s Manual -

 5-1 About Edit Functions

Home/end

"Edit (E)" "Jump (J)" "Home (H)" Home

End (E) End

■ Jump to the start of a rung

Select "Edit (E)" "Jump (J)" "Home (H)" from the menu.

■ Jump to the end of a rung 5

Select "Edit (E)" "Jump (J)" "End (E)" from the menu.

EDIT
Change previous/Next block

"Edit (E)" "Jump (J)" "Prev. changed block (O)" Ctrl + Alt + ←
Next changed block (Q) Ctrl + Alt + →

■ Jump to the previous program change block

Select "Edit (E)" "Jump (J)" "Prev. changed block (O)" from the menu.

■ Jump to the next program change block

Select "Edit (E)" "Jump (J)" "Next changed block (Q)" from the menu.

Open target modules/macro

Edit (E) Jump (J) Open target modules/macro(M)

Open the module / macro using the instructions/ functions of MDSTRT, MDSTOP, MCALL. MSTRT and
ECALL as object.
Select instructions/ functions of MDSTRT, MDSTOP, MCALL. MSTRT and ECALL, and select "Edit
(E)" "Jump (J)" "Open target module/macro (M)" from the menu.

Contact/Coil

Edit (E) Jump (J) Contact/Coil(R)

When select contact commands such as LD command or LDP command, jump to the corresponding
output command.
When select output commands such as OUT command or SET command, jump to the corresponding
the first initial contact command. For reexecution, jump to next contact command, when jump to the
last, return to the output command.
Select contact command or output command, select "Edit (E)" "Jump (J)" "Contact/Coil (R)" from
the menu.

Note
Command sentence corresponding to the contact/coil jump is shown below.
Contact command: LD, LDB, LDP, LDF, LDPB, LDFB, STP, STG command
Output command: OUT, OUB, SET, RES, KEEP, DIFU, DIFD, ONDL, OFDL, SHOT,
FLIK, ALT, TMR, TMS, TMH, TMU, C, CTH, RFSX, RFSY, SFT, JMP, W-ON,
W-OFF, W-UE, W-DE, FRSTM, FRLDM, PMOV, BSR, BSL, RCOM, CTC
command

- KV STUDIO Ver.6 User’s Manual - 5-17

 5-1 About Edit Functions

Insert KV-5500/5000/3000 KV-1000 KV-700 KV-P16 KV-10/16/24/40

Insert empty rungs and Rung comment in a ladder.

Cell

"Edit (E)" "Insert (W)" Cell (C) Ins

5 1 Move the cursor to the rung where the cell to be inserted.

2 Select "Edit (E)" "Insert (W)" "Cell(C)" from the menu.

EDIT

Insert the cell to the cursor position.

Other procedure Select "Insert cell(V)" from right-click menu.

Empty rung

"Edit (E)" "Insert (W)" Empty rung (E) Shift +

Shift + Ins

1 Move the cursor to the rung where the empty rung to be inserted.

7,3 To insert multiple empty rungs as a group, select the group of rungs where the empty rungs
to be inserted.
"Select a range", (Page 5-3)

2 Select "Edit (E)" "Insert (W)" "Empty rung (E)" from the menu.
An empty rung is inserted at the selected rung.

Other procedure Select "Insert empty rung (E)" from right-click menu.

Rung comment

"Edit (E)" "Insert (W)" Rung cmnt (H) Ctrl +

Insert rung comment in a ladder.
Rung comments are placed to make it easier to understand the content of each network block when
editing ladders.

Note
Rung comments are transferred to the KV-5500/5000/3000/1000/700.
Can't transfer to the PLC other than KV-5500/5000/3000/1000/700.

1 Move the cursor to the rung where the rung comment is to be inserted.

2 Select "Edit (E)" "Insert (W)" "Rung cmnt (H)" from the menu.
A new rung is added and is displayed on the ladder.

Other procedure Select "Insert rung comment (H)" from right-click menu.
5-18 - KV STUDIO Ver.6 User’s Manual -
 5-1 About Edit Functions

3 Input the comment on the keyboard.

Press the Ctrl + keys to confirm.
The comment can also be confirmed by pressing the Esc key

7,3 To edit an already inputted rung comment, either double-click on the rung comment or press
the key. F2 key.

Loopback ladder 5

EDIT
Edit (E) Insert (W) Loopback Ladder (K) Ctrl + Shift + F8

Compile simple folded ladder.

It is quite useful in compiling longer ladder
from busbar to output rung.

From the menu, select "Edit (E)" "Insert (W)" "Loopback ladder (K)". When selecting ON,
connecting rung of loopback ladder will be displayed.

When support model is "KV-5500/5000/3000/1000", return Ladder with return symbol can be
7,3
inserted in option setting.
"System setting", (Page 11-19)

Note
When insert folded ladder, select the cells from the third rails afterward from the menu.

- KV STUDIO Ver.6 User’s Manual - 5-19

 5-1 About Edit Functions

Deleting Rungs KV-5500/5000/3000 KV-1000 KV-700 KV-P16 KV-10/16/24/40

"Edit (E)" "Delete rung (Y)" Shift + Delete

1 Move cursor to the rung to be deleted.

To delete multiple rungs in one time, select all rungs to be deleted.

7,3
"Select a range", (Page 5-3)
5
2 From the menu, select "Edit (E)" " Delete rung (Y)".
EDIT

The selected rung is deleted.

Other procedure Select "Delete Rung (Y)" from right-click menu.

Set Disabling Rungs and Cancel Disabled Rungs KV-5500/5000/3000 KV-1000 KV-700 KV-P16 KV-10/16/24/40

"Edit (E)" "Disable rung (Q)" Setup (Q) Ctrl + Q

"Edi (E)" "Disable rung (Q)" Cancel (W) Ctrl + W

After processing ladder rung comment, part ladders of comment processing will not be operated during
conversion. In debug mode, temporarily set if the operation is not required.

1 Select range for setting invalid rung, or invalid rung canceled.

"Select a range", (Page 5-3)

2 Set or cancel disabling of rungs.

When a rung is disabled, the selected rung is turned into a comment. When the disabling setting is
canceled, the rung returns to the state before the ladder program was converted.
To set disabling to a new rung: Select "Edit (E)" "Disable rung (Q)" "Setup (Q)" from the menu.
To cancel disabling of a rung: Select "Edit (E)" "Disable rung (Q)" "Cancel (W)" from the menu.

Other procedure Set disabling of rungs

Select "Set rung disable(Q)" from right-click menu.
Cancel disabling of rungs
Select "Cancel rung disable(W)" from right-click menu.

Note
Ladders to which disabling of rungs is set are not transferred to the PLC.

5-20 - KV STUDIO Ver.6 User’s Manual -

 5-1 About Edit Functions

Rung Setting KV-5500/5000/3000 KV-1000 KV-700 KV-P16 KV-10/16/24/40

Adjust the column width and rung height of a selected range.

Width
"Edit (E)" "Rung setup (N)" Width (W)
Adjust the column width of the selected range.

1 Select "Edit (E)" "Rung setup (N)" "Width (W)" from the menu. 5
The "Column width" dialog box pops up.

EDIT
Other procedure Select "Rung setup(N)" "Width(W)" from the right-clicking menu.

2 Input the value.

The column width is adjusted to the specified width.

Height
"Edit (E)" "Rung setup (N)" Height (H)
Adjust the rung height of the selected range.

1 Select "Edit (E)" "Rung setup (N)" "Height (H)" from the menu.
The "Rung height" dialog box is displayed.

Other procedure Select "Rung setup (N)" "Height (H)" from the right-clicking menu.

2 Input the value.

The rung height is adjusted to the specified width.

Auto-adjust
"Edit (E)" "Rung setup (N)" Auto-adjust (D)
Automatically adjust the width and height of the selected range.

1 Select "Edit (E)" "Rung setup (N)" "Auto-adjust (D)" from the menu.
The width and height are automatically adjusted to the optimum values.

Other procedure • Select "Rung setting (N)" "D" from the right-clicking menu.
• Select the range, and double-click the boundary rung between cells.

- KV STUDIO Ver.6 User’s Manual - 5-21

 5-1 About Edit Functions

Bookmark KV-5500/5000/3000 KV-1000 KV-700 KV-P16 KV-10/16/24/40

When setting bookmark in rung comment, rung comment will be displayed in workspace.
When double-clicking the bookmark displayed in workspace, rung comment with set bookmark is
displayed.

Note
Bookmark cannot be set in script rung comment.

5
Insert
EDIT

Edit (E) Bookmark(H) Insert (I) Ctrl + Shift + Ins

Insert "With bookmark rung comment" into ladder.
When programing rung comment, bookmark will be automatically registered in workspace.

1 Move the cursor to the rung where the rung comment is to be inserted.

2 From the menu, select "Edit (E)" "Bookmark (H) " "Insert (I)".
A new rung is added and is displayed on the ladder.

Other procedure Select "Bookmark (H)" "Insert(I)" from right-click menu.

3 Input the comment on the keyboard.

Press the Ctrl + keys to confirm.
The comment can also be confirmed by pressing the Esc key

After confirmed, bookmark is automatically registered to workspace.

5-22 - KV STUDIO Ver.6 User’s Manual -

 5-1 About Edit Functions

Setting

Edit (E) Bookmark (H) Set (S) Ctrl + Shift +

Set bookmark in rung comment on Ladder.

1 Select the rung comment to which the bookmark will be set.

2 Select "Edit (E)" "Bookmark ( H ) " "setting(S)" from the menu. 5

The bookmark is registered in workspace.

EDIT
Other procedure Select "Bookmark (H)" "Setting (S)" from right-click menu.

Remove

Edit (E) Bookmark (H) Remove (D) Ctrl + Shift + Delete

Release rung comment bookmark.

1 Select the rung comment with bookmark.

2 From the menu, select "Edit (E)" "Bookmark (H) " "Remove (D)".
Bookmark is removed.

Other procedure • Select "Bookmark (H)" "Remove (D)" from right-click menu.
• Select [Remove the selected bookmark (D)] from right-click menu in work area

- KV STUDIO Ver.6 User’s Manual - 5-23

 5-1 About Edit Functions

Hyperlink KV-5500/5000/3000 KV-1000 KV-700 KV-P16 KV-10/16/24/40

To set up hyperlink where text in line comments and script can be linked to the folders or files in PC. It
is jumped to relevant folder or file by clicking the text with hyperlink.

Set/edit
5 Edit(E) Hyperlink(Z) Set/edit(A)
EDIT

1 Select the text to be hyperlinked in line comments or script.

2 Select "Edit(E)" "Hyperlink(Z)" "Set/edit(A)" from the menu.

Other procedure Select "Set/edit hyperlink(A)" from the right-click menu

Set up the file or folder to be linked in "Setup hyperlink" dialog box.

Set up link destination, and click "OK" button, a hyperlink will be created on the selected text.

Delete

Edit(E) Hyperlink(Z) Delete(B)

1 Select the text with hyperlink.

2 Select "Edit(E)" "Hyperlink(Z)" "Delete(B)" from the menu.

Other procedure Select "Delete hyperlink(B)" from the right-click menu

5-24 - KV STUDIO Ver.6 User’s Manual -

 5-1 About Edit Functions

List

Edit(E) Hyperlink(Z) List(L)

To list character strings with hyperlink in the projects.

1 Select "Edit(E)" "Hyperlink(Z)" "List(L)" from the menu.

EDIT
Item Description
Setup link destination Edit the selected hyperlink in "Hyperlink setting" dialog box.
Search/replace link Search/replace link destination folder name or file name of the hyperlink in
destination "Search/replace" dialog box.
Delete settings Delete the selected hyperlink setting.
Delete all settings Delete the setting of all hyperlinks.

Even if the projects are edited with different PCs, folder name of hyperlink destination can
7,3 be changed in batches with link destination search/replacement function.
Relative path can be used to designate link destination. Start of relative path is the project
folder being edited.

- KV STUDIO Ver.6 User’s Manual - 5-25

 5-1 About Edit Functions

Edit Mode KV-5500/5000/3000 KV-1000 KV-700 KV-P16 KV-10/16/24/40

Switch between expansion Ladder mode and connecting rung edit mode.

Expanded Ladder Mode

"Edit (E)" "Edit mode (B)" "Expanded ladder mode (G)"

5 In regular programming of ladders, only one OUT, TMR or other output instruction can be written to a
single rung of the ladder program. However, the number of rungs in the program can be reduced and
EDIT

the processing sequence made clearer by using the expander ladder mode.
For example, ON delay timers become as follows:

R000 #30 R000 #30 T0 R500

T0 T0

T0 R500

Regular ladder Expanded ladder

When the expanded ladder mode is selected and the output instructions is inputted, the cursor is not
automatically moved to the right edge, and instructions can be continuously inputted. In the regular
ladder programming mode, the cursor is automatically moved to the right edge when an output
instruction is inputted.
For example, the ladder program is as follows when the OUT instruction is inputted.

• When the expanded ladder mode is not selected

When the OUT instruction is inputted, the cursor is moved the right edge of the ladder.

7,3 The expanded ladder mode setting is automatically saved on KV STUDIO, and is enabled
when KV STUDIO is next started up.

Select "Edit (E)" "Edit mode (B)" "Expanded ladder mode (G)" from the menu. The expanded
ladder mode is enabled.
To disable the expanded ladder mode, repeat the above procedure.

Note MOV
Box-type instructions ( ) etc. are connected to the right power rail even in
the expanded ladder mode.

5-26 - KV STUDIO Ver.6 User’s Manual -

 5-1 About Edit Functions

Connection line Edit Mode

"Edit (E)" "Edit mode (B)" "Connection line edit mode (B)"

In this mode, connection rungs can be drawn or deleted using the mouse and arrow keys.
Perform the same to return to the normal edit mode from the connection rung edit mode.

1 Select "Edit (E)" "Edit mode (B)" "Connection line edit mode (B)" in that order from the
menu.
5
Other procedure Select "Edit connection line (F)" "Connection line edit mode (B)" from right-click menu.

EDIT
TIP When the connection rung edit mode is enabled, "Connection rung edit mode (B)" in the Edit
menu is preceded by a tick mark.

2 When inducing connecting rung, move the mouse cursor to the start location where connecting
rung will be induced.

3 Click the mouse, the cursor becomes a " pencil holding hand ", and drag the mouse from the
initial position of connecting rung to the final position of connecting rung.

To delete a connection rung using the arrow Shift keys, move the cursor with the arrow key for the
direction that you want to delete the connection rung with the Shift key pressed.

Other procedure • To draw a connection rung using the arrow keys, move the cursor with the arrow key for
the direction that you want to draw the connection rung with the Alt key pressed.
• To draw a connection rung using the arrow keys, move the cursor with the arrow key for the
direction that you want to draw the connection rung with the Alt key pressed.

- KV STUDIO Ver.6 User’s Manual - 5-27

 5-1 About Edit Functions

Edit Connection Line KV-5500/5000/3000 KV-1000 KV-700 KV-P16 KV-10/16/24/40

Right-click menu "Edit connection line (F)" "Enter vert. connection line (V)" F8
"Enter horiz. connection line (H)" F9

"Horizontal connection rung to end of line (-)" Alt + , Ctrl + Tab

"Delete vert. connection line (X)" Shift + F8

"Delete horiz. connection line (Y)" Shift + F9

5
EDIT

Input connection lines

There are three ways to input connection lines.

■ Press keys
F8 :Draw a vertical connection line downwards from the cursor position.
F9 :Draw a horizontal connection line rightwards from the cursor position.
Alt + ↑ ↓ ← → :Draw a connection line to the top/bottom/left/right according to the arrow key you press.
Alt + , Ctrl + Tab :Draw a connection line from the cursor position to the end of the rung.

■ Click icons
:Draws a vertical connection line downwards from the cursor position.

:Draws a horizontal connection line rightwards from the cursor position.

■ Use the mouse and arrow keys in the connection line edit mode
"Connection line Edit Mode", (Page 5-27)

Delete connection lines

There are three ways of deleting connection rungs.

■ Press keys
Shift + F8 :Delete the connection line to the left of the cursor position.
Delete :Delete the horizontal connection line at the cursor position.
Alt + ↑ ↓ ← → :Delete a connection rung to the top/bottom/left/right according to the arrow key you press.

■ Click icons
:Delete the connection line to the left of the cursor position.

:Delete the horizontal connection line at the cursor position.

■ Use the mouse and arrow keys in the connection line edit mode
"Connection line Edit Mode", (Page 5-27)

5-28 - KV STUDIO Ver.6 User’s Manual -

 5-1 About Edit Functions

Ladder Arrangement KV-5500/5000/3000 KV-1000 KV-700 KV-P16 KV-10/16/24/40

"Edit (E)" "Clean up ladder (V)" Ctrl + Shift + F

In order to make the ladder more understandable, please arrange the symbol position of the adder
following the procedures below.

1 Select "Edit (E)" "Ladder arrangement(V)" from the menu.

Ladder before arrangement 5

EDIT
Ladder after arrangement

Except conversion error position, whole project Ladder is arranged in good order.

Edit List KV-5500/5000/3000 KV-1000 KV-700 KV-P16 KV-10/16/24/40

"Edit (E)" "Edit list (L)" Ctrl + D

Display and edit mnemonics list

Display mnemomics lists for specified blocks and edit mnemonics lists to input instructions by the
following procedures.

1 Move the cursor to the block whose mnemonics list is to be

displayed or to the cell insert or replace edited details in the
mnemonics list.

- KV STUDIO Ver.6 User’s Manual - 5-29

 5-1 About Edit Functions

2 Select "Edit (E)" "Edit list (L)" from the menu.

The "List edit" window appears.

5
EDIT

3 Edit the mnemonics language in the "List edit" window.

Mnemonics list format

The format of mnemomics list are as follows.

Mnemonics Operand

Blank

Edit this part

Note
• Comment cannot be edited in mnemonics list.
• The programs thereafter (before rung feed) are not read.
• When rung leading character is, read as rung comment.
• The ladder program cannot be converted if the mnemonics list is in a different
format.

5-30 - KV STUDIO Ver.6 User’s Manual -

 5-1 About Edit Functions

Change Operands KV-5500/5000/3000 KV-1000 KV-700 KV-P16 KV-10/16/24/40

Edit (E) Change operand (O)

1 Select the cell containing the instruction whose operand/comment is to be changed.

2 Select "Edit (E)" "Change operand (0)" from the menu.

"Operand" dialog box pops up.
5

EDIT
7,3 • When selecting a cell to which an instruction is not inputted, and press the key, the
"Instruction/macro /pack pallet" window is opened.
• Select the cell without instruction inputted, input value using number key, and the device
No. can be directly changed using same device type.

3 Specify operand.

Item Explanation
Value Input device No.
Operand
Comment Input the device comment.
Types of devices that can be set to the currently
Type list
selected operand are displayed.
Display an explanation of the currently selected
Explanation of operand
operand.

7,3 When clicking the "OK" button without specifying an operand, unspecified operands are
indicated by "???." It is handy if you want to make only a ladder network beforehand when
relay assignments, etc. are not fixed.

- KV STUDIO Ver.6 User’s Manual - 5-31

 5-1 About Edit Functions

Edit Device Comment KV-5500/5000/3000 KV-1000 KV-700 KV-P16 KV-10/16/24/40

Edit device comments.

Change device comment

"Edit (E)" "Edit device cmnts (F)" "Change device cmnt (F)" Ctrl + M

5
1 Select the cell containing the instruction whose device comment is to be changed.
EDIT

2 Select "Edit (E)" "Edit device cmnts (F)" "Change device cmnts (F)" from the menu.
"Operand" dialog box pops up.

Other procedure Select "Change device comment (G)" from right-click menu.

3 Change device comment

For detail of operand edit dialog box, please see "Change Operands", (Page 5-31)

Delete all device comments

"Edit (E)" "Edit device cmnts (F)" "Delete all device cmnts (A)"

Select "Edit (E)" "Edit device cmnts (F)" "Delete all device comments (A)" from the menu, all
device comments under edition is deleted.

5-32 - KV STUDIO Ver.6 User’s Manual -

6
DISPLAY

DISPLAY
The chapter introduces various functions, commands input and deletion
method.

6-1 About View Functions •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• 6-2

6-2 Entering and Deleting Instructions••••••••••••••••••••••• 6-32
6-3 CPU System Setting ••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• 6-42

- KV STUDIO Ver.6 User’s Manual - 6-1

 6-1 About View Functions
This section describes each of the functions contained in the "View(V)" menu. .

Toolbar/Status Bar KV-5500/5000/3000 KV-1000 KV-700 KV-P16 KV-10/16/24/40

View(V) Toolbar(T)
"Status bar(S)"
Select View(V) Toolbar(T) or Status bar(S) From the menu, toggle display/hide of Toolbar/Status bar.
When the tool bar is marked by a tick : The tool bar is displayed.
When the tool bar is not marked by a tick: The tool bar is hidden.

6
Toolbar
DISPLAY

Status bar

TIP • Clicking "Tool bar(T)" displays a sub-menu that displays the types of available tool bars.
• Each time clicking of this option toggles between display/hide.

6-2 - KV STUDIO Ver.6 User’s Manual -

 6-1 About View Functions

Workspace KV-5500/5000/3000 KV-1000 KV-700 KV-P16 KV-10/16/24/40

View(V) Workspace （K） Alt + 1

Select View(V) Workspace(K) From the menu, toggle display/hide of workspace.

■ Switch shortcut column

The workspace includes "workspace" short-cut column displaying project setting and "related software"
short-cut column displaying related software list.
6

DISPLAY
Workspace Related sofware list

■ Switch the display by tab

● During editor mode
When edit mode of KV STUDIO is "editor", can select the "project" tab of display unit composition
content and Ladder module composition and display the "macro" tab of macro used and registered * .

"Oroject" tab selected "macro" tab

*Macro tab can be selected only when the models "KV-5500" "KV-5000" "KV-3000" "KV-1000" are
selected.

- KV STUDIO Ver.6 User’s Manual - 6-3

 6-1 About View Functions

● Monitor / online editor / simulator mode

In the mode of "Monitor", "Online Editor", or "Simulator", you can select the "Project" tab in which the
units and ladder modules are displayed and the "Monitor" tab in which macro/module status is
displayed.

6
DISPLAY

"Project" tab selected "Monitor" tab selected

*Monitor tab can be selected only when the models "KV-5500" "KV-5000" "KV-3000" "KV-1000" are
selected.

6-4 - KV STUDIO Ver.6 User’s Manual -

 6-1 About View Functions

"Project" tab.

The display status of " Item" tab selected in workspace is introduced below.

■ Unit configuration
Units set on Unit Editor and assigned relays/DMs are displayed.
The Custom Monitor and Unit Monitor also can be displayed.

TIP Unit configuration , is displayed only when the model is "KV-5000", "KV-3000", "KV-1000", "KV-
700", "KV-700+M".
6
● Right-click menu for unit setup

DISPLAY
The following menu is displayed by right-clicking on "Unit settings" or each of the currently set units.
Item Explanation
Start unit editor.
Unit Editor
"Part 3 Unit Editor" (Page 3-1)
Display device assignment Relay display method is changed to display device assignment.
Pop up "Edit CPU positioning Parameters" dialog box.
Edit CPU positioning parameters*3 "KV-5500/5000/3000 Series User's Manual", "2-12
Motor(positioning)Control"
CPU High-speed counter ForKV-5500/5000/3000 /1000,start high-speed counter setting wizard.
setup wizard KV-5500/5000/3000 Series PLC User's Manual, "2-8 High-speed count"
It pops up "Logging settings list" dialog box.
Setup logging *3
"KV-5500/5000/3000 series PLC User's Manual" logging/tracing
Display options*1 It displays "Setup display option of workspace" dialog box.
Display custom monitor.
Custom Monitor*3
Please see "9-5 Custom Monitor", (Pafe 9-53).
Display Unit Monitor.
Unit Monitor *2
Please see "9-8 Unit Monitor", (Pafe 9-86).
Positioning Unit/simple settings This is displayed when KV-H20/H20S/H40S/H20G are connected.
MOTION BUILDER This is displayed when KV-H20/H20S/H40S/H20G are connected.
PROTOCOL STUDIO This is displayed when KV-L20V/R is connected.
Setup mail This is displayed when KV-5000, KV-LE20V is connected.
Mail command Maker KV-LE20V User's Manual
EtherNet/IP setting
Sensor application
KV DATALINK+ for EtherNet/IP
Sensor I/O monitor It is displayed in case of KV-5500 and KV-EP21V.
Cyclic (I/O) messages KV-EP21V User's Manual
communication error monitor
Start connection
Stop connection
Simple PLC link setting It is displayed when the extended function of KV-5500, KV-5000 (above
Ver.1.1), KV-EP21V, and KV-LE21V is set to "Enable".
FTP client setting
KV-LE21V User's Manual
This is displayed when KV-DN20 is connected.
KV-DN20 setup
KV-DN20 User's Manual
- KV STUDIO Ver.6 User’s Manual - 6-5
 6-1 About View Functions

Item Explanation
This is displayed when KV-CL20 is connected.
KV-CL20 setup
"KV-CL20 User's Manual"
Start MV LINK STUDIO.
MV LINK STUDIO
MV LINK STUDIO User's Manual
KV-ML/MC setup
This is displayed when KV-ML16V/MC40V/MC20V is connected.
(KV MOTION+)
This is displayed when KV-5500/5000/3000 is connected.
Error monitor window
"Error Monitor", (Page 10-13)
This is displayed when KV-5500/5000/3000 is connected.
Scan time monitor
6 "Scan Time Monitor", (Page 10-15)
CPU unit with CPU function version above 2.0 supports this function.
Performance monitor
"Performance monitor", (Page 10-16)
DISPLAY

*1 Checkbox items that are marked in the "Workspace display

option settings" dialog box are displayed on the workspace.
*2 This is displayed when a unit other than the KV-5000 CPU
Unit is right-clicked.
*3 This is displayed when the CPU Unit is right-clicked.

● Unit configuration switching

The "Unit configuration switching" dialog box is displayed when "Unit configuration switching" is double-
clicked.
"Unit Configuration Switching", (Page 11-2)

TIP Unit configuration switching is applied only for equipments with different unit configuration.
Using the function, can conduct centralized managementon the project managed via device unit.

■ Device comment
Double click on "Device Comment", display "Device Comment Edit" window.
"Displaying the Device Comment Edit Window", (Page6-17)

■ Label
Double-clicking on "Edit labels", the "Edit labels" window pops up.
"Displaying the Label Edit Window", (Page6-21)

■ CPU system setting

Set various parameters related to the program and system.

CPU system setting. It is valid only when the models "KV-5500", "KV-5000", "KV-3000", "KV-
TIP
1000" are selected.

6-6 - KV STUDIO Ver.6 User’s Manual -

 6-1 About View Functions

● Program settings
Set up execute sequence of module
Execute sequence of modules
"Execution sequence of modules setting", (Page 6-43)

Fixed period execute and user interrupt

Fixed cycle module cycle setting and break priority setting.
"Fixed period execute and user interrupt setting", (Page6-44)

Scantime related
Set fixed scanning time operation and END processing time. 6
"Scan time related setting", (Page6-46)

DISPLAY
Protection setting
Set related settings of CPU protection.
"Protection setting", (Page6-47)

● System setting
Entire assigment setting of local device
For the assignment setup of global/local devices and local labels/script devices.
"Entire assignment of local device", (Page6-48)

Set module /macro type device

According to different modules / macros, set the number of Local Devices used.
"Setup module/macro device", (Page6-52)

CPU unit buffer

Set buffer capacity of logging / tracing of CPU unit.
"CPU unit buffer capacity setting", (Page6-53)

Power failure holding

Complete power-off holding setting of every device.
The devices that can set power off holding includes, R (relay), B (link relay), DM (Data Memory), EM
(expansion Data Memory), ZF (File Register consecutive number method), W (link register), C
(counter).
"Power-off hold setting" (Page 6-53)

Action when error occurs

For the setup of CPU unit action and erorr history in case of error.
"Action when error occurs", (Page6-55)

Upper limit of digital trimmer

Upper value setting of digital trimmer
"Upper limit of digital trimmer", (Page6-56)

- KV STUDIO Ver.6 User’s Manual - 6-7

 6-1 About View Functions

■ Ladder program
Manage module creation and deletion, etc.
And classify programmed modules.
For more information, please refer to the KV-5500/5000/3000 Series User Manual.

● Right click on the menu in Ladder

Right-click on "Ladder program" or a registered module, the following menu is displayed.

Item Description

6 Copy module/macro name list

Copy all module names and macro names to the clipboard.
It is displayed only when right-clicking the ladder program.
to clipboard
Copy module names according to execution sequence.
DISPLAY

Copy Copy the selected unit.

Paste*1 Paste the copied module.
Rename Rename the selected module.
New module*1 New a module.*3
*3
Open modules/macro Open the module selected.
*1 *3
Delete module/macro: Delete the selected module.
Set/cancel module/macro Disable selected module. Valid after operation again. The disabled module
disable *1 cannot be transmitted to CPU. *3

Setup module/macro local Set up the maximum number of devices that can be used by each module.
device *1 "Local Devices by Module/macro Setting", (Page8-6)
Setup module execute *3
Display "module operate sequence" of "CPU system setting" dialog box.
seguence*1
Display "fixed cycle operation and user interrupt setting" of " CPU system
Fixed peried execute and user *3
setting" dialog box.
interrupt setting*1
"Fixed period execute and user interrupt setting", (Page6-44)
Import module from other project.
Import modules/macro*1
"Import Module/macros", (Page4-7)
Change display*1 Via "display according to module category" / " display according to module
(made←→execute sequence) operation sequence", switch tree structure of Ladder as follows.
Start module*2 Set the stop module (standby) to start (operation status). *3
Stop module*2 Stop the module that is in operation.*3
*3
Module/macro property Display module attribute.
Display project attribute.
Project property
"Project Property", (Page4-5)
*1 It is displayed only when the models "KV-5500", "KV-5000", "KV-3000", "KV-1000" are selected.
*2 It is displayed only when the models "KV-5500", "KV-5000", "KV-3000" are selected.
*3 For more information, please refer to "About Module/Macro", (Page7-2)。

6-8 - KV STUDIO Ver.6 User’s Manual -

 6-1 About View Functions

■ Macro
Display the macro registered to the project being edited according to different categories, and conduct
macro related managements such as create and delete, etc.
For macro details, please see "KV-5500/5000/3000 series User's Manual".

● Right-click menu in macro.

Right-click on every macro registered, and the following menu will be displayed.
Item Explanation
Copy Copy the selected macro.
Paste
Rename
Pastes the copied macro.
Rename the selected macro.
6
New macro New a macro.*1

DISPLAY
*1
Open module/macro Open module/macro block.
Delete module/macro Delete the selected module. *1

Set/cancel module/macro Disables the currently selected macro. Valid after operation again.
disable Disabled modules or macros are not transferred to the CPU Unit *1
Sets the upper limit to the number of local devices that are used for each
Setup module/macro local
module/macro.
device
"Local Devices by Module/macro Setting", (Page8-6)
*1
Setup macro argument Reset the selected argument.
Import module/macro Import macro from other project.
"Import Module/macros", (Page4-7)
Import user macro of other
Import user macro created using tools other than current CPU unit.
mode
*1
Module/macro property Display macro attribute.
Display project attribute.
Project property
"Project Property", (Page4-5)

*1 For macro details, please see "About Module/Macro", (Page7-2).

■ Device default value

This is used for setup of device initial values read when the CPU unit is powered.
The device that can set initial value includes, R (relay), MR (internal auxiliary relay), B (link relay), DM (Data
Memory), EM (expansion data storage), W (link register), ZF (File Register consecutive number method).
"Device Defaults Setting", (Page 11-4).

■ File register setting

Register the message written into FM (File Register), when transferring data, save it to memory card of
CPU unit.
Up to 1,000 records can be read out. To read them from the memory card, use a file register-specific
instruction.
"Add/modify file register settings", (Page 11-5).

- KV STUDIO Ver.6 User’s Manual - 6-9

 6-1 About View Functions

"Macro" tab

Introduce the display status after the "macro" tab is selected in workspace.

TIP "macro" tab is only displayed when the edit mode of "KV-5500", "KV-5000", "KV-3000", "KV-
1000" is "editor".

■ Project
Display the macro registered to the project being edited according to different categories, and conduct
6 macro related managements such as create and delete, etc.
For macro details, please see "KV-5500/5000/3000 series User's Manual".
DISPLAY

"Right-click menu in macro.", (Page6-9)

■ Program library
Display the macro registered to the computer and being used. The library has " system " of
management system macro and "user" of management user registration macro.

TIP It is displayed only when the models "KV-5500", "KV-5000", "KV-3000", "KV-1000" are
selected.

● Right-click the menu in system

Right-click on "system" or every system macro, the following menu will appear.
Item Explanation
Copy Copy the selected macro.
Open macro Open module system macro module.

● Users
Right-click on "Users" or user registration macro, the following menu will appear.
Item Explanation
Copy Copy user registration macro selected.
Paste Paste the copied user register macro.
Open macro Open module user register macro module.
Delete Macro Delete the user registration macro selected.

6-10 - KV STUDIO Ver.6 User’s Manual -

 6-1 About View Functions

"Monitor" tab

Introduce display status of the "monitor" tab selected in workspace.

TIP The "Monitor" tab is displayed when the mode of "KV-5500", "KV-5000", "KV-3000", and "KV-
1000" is "Monitor". "Online Editor", or "Simulator".

■ Ladder program
Manage the operation/ stop of every module and macro created during monitor/ online editor/ simulator. 6
For macro details, please see "KV-5500/5000/3000 series User's Manual".

DISPLAY
● Right click on menu in Ladder
Right-click on every module / macro to be registered, the following menu is displayed.
Item Description
Open module/macro Open module/macro block.
Setup module/macro local Display "different module / macro device settings" of " CPU system setting".
device "Setup module/macro device", (Page6-52)
Setup module execute Display "module operation sequence setting" of " CPU system setting".
sequence "Execution sequence of modules setting", (Page6-43)
Start module*1 Start the selected module.
Stop module*1 Stop the selected module.
Module/macro property Display attribute of the selected macro.
Display project attribute.
Project property
"Project Property", (Page4-5)
*1 It is displayed only when the model "KV-5500", "KV-5000", "KV-3000" are selected.

- KV STUDIO Ver.6 User’s Manual - 6-11

 6-1 About View Functions

Output Window KV-5500/5000/3000 KV-1000 KV-700 KV-P16 KV-10/16/24/40

"View (V)" "Output window (O)" Press + 2

From the menu, select "Display (V)" "Output window (O)", switch display/hide of output window.
Switch the displayed image via the tab on the lower part of output window.

6
DISPLAY

Project (tab) Explanation

Display converted result of ladder program.
Convert
"Conversion", (Page 8-2)
After searching in search / replacement dialog box, click "display list" button, display
Search retrieval result, which can be used in cross reference.
"Cross Reference", (Page 5-14)
Display project verification result.
Verify
"Verify Project", (Page 4-4)
Communicate Display log of PLC communication status.
In ladder conversion, the number of local devices of individual modules and list of local
Local assignment
device assignment destinations are displayed.
BREAK log Display BREAK occurrence log.

In output window, right-click, selecting "Save in text format (K)", the content displayed in
7,3
output window can be saved in text format.

6-12 - KV STUDIO Ver.6 User’s Manual -

 6-1 About View Functions

Module Library KV-5500/5000/3000 KV-1000 KV-700 KV-P16 KV-10/16/24/40

View(V) Module library(M)

From the menu, select "View (V)" "Module library (M)", switch between display/hide of module
library.

DISPLAY
■ Right-click menu in module library
Right-click on module library to display following menu.
Item Description
Copy Copy the selected range.
Paste Paste the copied module.
New folder In current folder, create a folder.
Open the module / macro of the selected module.
Open module/macro
"Open Module/macro", (Page7-3)
Rename the selected module.
Rename
"Module/macro Property", (Page7-4)
Delete the selected module.
Delete
"Delete Module/macro", (Page7-3)
Import library Import the module library exported.
Export library Output module library.
Module/macro Display property of module / macro selected.
property "Module/macro Property", (Page7-4)

● Switch the display by tab

When the model (CPU unit used) is KV-5500/5000/3000, display "KV-5500/5000/3000" tab and "KV-1000"
tab.
you can also read a registered mdoule from either tab. To register a module, however, you can only
drag and drop it in the "KV-5500/5000/3000" tab.
When support model (CPU unit used) is KV-1000, only display "KV-1000" tab.

- KV STUDIO Ver.6 User’s Manual - 6-13

 6-1 About View Functions

■ Module registering and calling

Drag module between module library and workspace, can register and call module.
Recalling universal module after registration, can improve compiled program efficiency.

Workspace

6 Call
Register
DISPLAY

Module library

TIP • Macro used in module is automatically registered.

• Drag folder in module library to Ladder icon in workspace, can register all module, macros
in folder to the project.

Enter Instruction KV-5500/5000/3000 KV-1000 KV-700 KV-P16 KV-10/16/24/40

View(V) instruction / macro /pack pallet Ctrl + Shift + P

From the menu, select "view (V)" "instruction / macro / pack pallet (I)", and the instruction / macro
/ pack pallet is displayed.
Click "instruction" tab / "macro" tab / "pack" tab of instruction / macro / pack pallet, switch the displayed
image.

Other procedure • Select the cell to which the instruction is not entered in Ladder, press key.
• Move cursor to the cell to which not entered in Ladder and double click.

■ Instruction pallet
For instruction pallet details, please see "Entering Instructions", (Page 6-33).

6-14 - KV STUDIO Ver.6 User’s Manual -

 6-1 About View Functions

■ Macro pallet

TIP Macro pallet is displayed only when the models "KV-5500", "KV-5000", "KV-3000", "KV-1000"
are selected.

Macro list

DISPLAY
Item Description
Macro name/type Display the name and type of the macro selected.
Comment Display the entered content in displayed comment field in macro property.
Display the operand attribute of the selected macro.
Operand
Enter operand value.
Explanation of
Displays an explanation of the currently selected operand.
operand
ID No.
After selected, ID No. of macro can be set freely, so, execution bit can be used in Ladder.
("in excution")
(Help) Display help information of macro and macro instruction.
(Overwrite) Save macro instruction to editor.
(Close) Exit instruction / macro / pack pallet.

For macro details, please see "KV-5500/5000/3000 series User's Manual" 3-9 macro "".
7,3

- KV STUDIO Ver.6 User’s Manual - 6-15

 6-1 About View Functions

■ Pack pallet

TIP Pack pallet is displayed only when the models "KV-700", "KV-700+M" are selected.

6
DISPLAY

Item Description
Select unit Select from positioning module (KV-H20S / H40S / H40G) set using module editor.
Select PACK instruction.
Select pack
For details of PACK instruction, please see "KV-700 User's Manual" 9-3 positioning
instruction
module PACK instruction ".
Setup axis Select operation axis.
Set parameters.
Setup parameter
Parameters vary with the PACK instruction selected.
(Help) HTML help of PACK instruction starts.
(Overwrite) Save the PACK instruction to editor.
(Close) Exit PACK instruction pallet.

6-16 - KV STUDIO Ver.6 User’s Manual -

 6-1 About View Functions

Displaying the Device Comment Edit Window KV-5500/5000/3000 KV-1000 KV-700 KV-P16 KV-10/16/24/40

View(V) Device cmnt edit window(C) Ctrl + F7

From the menu, select "view (V)" "Device cmnt edit window(C)", and the device comment edit window
pop up.
The display screen can be switched by clicking the "Global" tab or the "Local" tab on the comment edit window.
("local" tab is displayed only when the model selected is "KV-5500" "KV-5000" "KV-3000" " KV-1000 ").
When the "Details" button is clicked, the display screen changes, and devices are displayed in detail.

Other procedure • Double click device comment in work area

• Select "Device cmnt edit window(K)" from the menu that appears by right-clicking the workspace. 6
TIP For comment display, please see "Displaying Comments", (Page 6-30).

DISPLAY
Item Description
Select device Select edition comment device.
Select unit Select edition comment unit.
Select module/macro*1 Select module/macro for editing comment.
"Register special devices" Comments has been defined for specific device registered.
"Register unit devices"*2 Select unit, register defined comment of the unit
"Detail" Switches to a detailed display.
"Closes detail" Closes the detailed display
All devices When this radio button is marked, all devices are displayed.
Display
Used When this radio button is marked, only devices currently used in the ladder program are displayed.
mode
Unused When this radio button is marked, only devices currently unused in the ladder program are displayed.
(Update) Updates the information to the latest information.
Comments/label register When this checkbox is marked, only devices currently registered with comments or label are displayed.
Label display When this checkbox is marked, only device list currently registered with labels are displayed.
When this checkbox is marked, a list of the use status of global and local devices is displayed.
Using status When a module is selected from the list, the device use status of the selected module is displayed.
When "----" is selected from the list, the device use status of the entire project is displayed.
Jump The cursor moves to the specified device No.
Device No. Displays a list of devices selected at [Select device], etc.
comment1, comment2 Display and enter comments here.
Local device comment 1
Display and enter local device comments here.
Local device comment 2
*1 It is valid only when the models "KV-5500", "KV-5000", "KV-3000", "KV-1000" are selected.
*2 It is valid only when the models "KV-5500", "KV-5000", "KV-3000", "KV-1000" "KV-700+M", "KV-700"
are selected.
TIP For prohibited comment characters, please see the "Appendix 2 List of prohibited Characters"

- KV STUDIO Ver.6 User’s Manual - 6-17

 6-1 About View Functions

■ Register device comments

Register device comments.
Register device comments in the device comments edit window.
Right-click "Comments 1""Comments 2" or "Local comments 1""Local comments 2", and input
device comments.
Input device comments of word device by "bit" (only supports CPU function version above 2.0).
Device comments of the following word devices can be registered by "bit"in the device comments edit
window.
• DM (data memory bit)
• EM (data memory bit)
6 • FM (file register bit)
• W (link register bit)
DISPLAY

• ZF (file register bit (continuous No.))

• TM (temporary memory bit)
• CM (control memory bit)

TIP Two register modes are available for device comments of word devices, one is by "word",
the other is by "bit".

6-18 - KV STUDIO Ver.6 User’s Manual -

 6-1 About View Functions

■ Right-click menu for comment1/2 and local comment1/ 2

The following menu is displayed when you right-click on "comment1", "comment2", "local comment1" or
"local comment2".
Item Description
Undo Cancel the previous operation.
Redo [restore ] (cancel) operation.
Cut Cuts the selected range.
Copy Copy the selected range.
Paste Pastes cut or copied data to the cursor position.
Delete Delete the selected range.
Move together with bit
comments in word
When moving device comments of word devices, the device comments
registered by "bit" are included. 6
Seach Searches for a text string in the comment edit window.

DISPLAY
Replace Replaces a text string in the comment edit window.
Cross reference Create cross reference.
Register unit device Register comments of the unit device.

TIP Comments can be copied and pasted between KV STUDIO and Microsoft Excel.
(Press Ctrl + C Keys\ Ctrl + V Keys)

● Searching for text strings

Search for a text string in the comment edit window.
Right-click on "comment 1", "comment 2", "local comment 1" or "local comment 2", select "search" (or
press key + key), the "device comment edit window search" dialog box pops up.
Search character string entered.

Item Explanation
Enter the text string to search. When the button is clicked, a
Search string pulldown menu is displayed, and a list of the last ten selected text strings
is displayed.
Case-sensitive When this checkbox is marked, a case sensitive search is performed
When this checkbox is marked, only items that completely match the
Search 100% match
entered text string are searched.
Half/full width Half-width characters and full-width characters are differentiated during search.
Search Entire project The entire project is set as the search range.
range Selected device The selected device is set as the search range.
Moves the cursor upwards, and displays the next instruction or operand
Up
Search that matches the search conditions.
direction Moves the cursor downwards, and displays the next instruction or
Down
operand that matches the search conditions.

- KV STUDIO Ver.6 User’s Manual - 6-19

 6-1 About View Functions

● Replacing text strings

Replace a text string in the comment edit window.

1 Right-click on "comment 1", "comment 2" , "local comment 1" or "local comment 2", select
"replace" (or press key + key).
The [Comment edit window(replace)] dialog box is displayed.

6
DISPLAY

Item Explanation
Enter the text string before the replace is executed. When the button
Search string is clicked, a pulldown menu is displayed, and a list of the last ten selected
text strings is displayed.
Enter the text string before the replace is executed. When the button
Replace string is clicked, a pulldown menu is displayed, and a list of the last ten selected
text strings is displayed.
Case-sensitive When this checkbox is marked, a case sensitive search is performed
When this checkbox is marked, only items that completely match the
Search 100% match
entered text string are searched.
Entire project The entire project is set as the replace range.
Replace
Selected device The selected device is set as the replace range.
range
Selected range The selected range is set as the replace range.

2 To replace individual text strings, click the "Execute" button. To batch-replace text strings, click
the "Replace all" button.

6-20 - KV STUDIO Ver.6 User’s Manual -

 6-1 About View Functions

Displaying the Label Edit Window KV-5500/5000/3000 KV-1000 KV-700 KV-P16 KV-10/16/24/40

View(V) Label edit window(L)

Select "View(V)" "Label edit window(L)" from the menu. Different dialog boxes will be displayed for
different models (CPU unit used).

● When the model is KV-5500/5000/3000

When the model is KV-5500/5000/3000, can register global label and local label, switch between
"global" tab and "local" tab, separately register. 6
"Global" tab

DISPLAY
Set global label registration.

Item Explanation
Label name Enter the label name here (within 32 1-byte characters/16 2-byte characters)
Data format Specify device data format assigned to global label.
Bit (BOOL) The postfix is processed as bit type data.
1-word unsigned
Process as 16 bits unsigned data (default postfix is U).
integer（UINT）
2-word unsigned
Process as 32 bits unsigned data (default postfix is D).
integer（UDINT）
1-word signed
Process as 16 bits signed data (default postfix is S).
integer(INT)
2-word signed
Process as 32 bits signed data (default postfix is L).
integer(DINT)
Floating number (REAL) Processed as floating real number (default suffix is F).
Double floating number (LREAL) Processed as double floating real number (default suffix is DF).
*1
Text string（STRING） The postfix is processed as text string data.
Timer Use timer.The devices other than timer device are not assigned.
Counter Use counter.The devices other than counter device are not assigned.
Array Process as "Global label arrangement " during use of script program. *2
Device/constant Specify device/constant assigned to global label.*3
Set comment of global label. Comments different from those of assigned
Label comment
devices can be specified. (within 32 1-byte characters/16 2-byte characters)
(Up) Move up the selected line. This button cannot be used when Assort is enabled.
Move down the selected line. This button cannot be used when Assort is
(Down)
enabled.
(sequencing function valid) Set the sequencing function under "label edit window" to valid.

(Import device comment) Current device or unit comments are imported into the label comments.

- KV STUDIO Ver.6 User’s Manual - 6-21

 6-1 About View Functions

*1 When character string is specified by Data Format, the " the

number of characters" dialog box appears, so, use byte unit to
set the number of characters entered.
*2 Process as "Global label arrangement " during programming script
program.Arrangement can not be used in creating ladder program.
KV-5500/5000/3000 Series Script Programming Manual
*3 The constant can be assigned to global label.Please specify constant in the specified range of data format.

TIP
The devi Range assigned to label is displayed on the
status bar of "label edit" window.

6 "Local" tab
DISPLAY

Set local label registration.

Item Explanation
Select module/macro Select module/ macro registered to local label.
Capture Capture unregistered label used by module / macro, then register.
Label name*1 Enter the label name here (within 32 1-byte characters/16 2-byte characters)
Data format Specify device data format assigned to local label.
Bit(BOOL) The postfix is processed as bit type data.
1-word unsigned
Process as 16 bits unsigned data (default postfix is U).
integer（UINT）
2-word unsigned
Process as 32 bits unsigned data (default postfix is D).
integer（UDINT）
1-word signed integer
Process as 16 bits signed data (default postfix is S).
(INT)
2-word signed integer
Process as 32 bits signed data (default postfix is L).
(DINT)
Floating number (REAL) Processed as floating real number (default suffix is F).
Double floating number (LREAL) Processed as double floating real number (default suffix is DF).
*2
Text string（STRING） The postfix is processed as text string data.
Timer Use timer.The devices other than timer device are not assigned.
Counter Use counter.The devices other than counter device are not assigned.
Array Process as "Local label arrangement" during use of script program. *3
Constant Specify constant assigned to local label. *4
Set comment of local label.
Label comment
(within 32 1-byte characters/16 2-byte characters)
(Up) Move up the selected line. This button cannot be used when Assort is enabled.

(Down) Move down the selected line. This button cannot be used when Assort is enabled.

(sequencing function valid) Set the sequencing function under "label edit window" to valid.
6-22 - KV STUDIO Ver.6 User’s Manual -
 6-1 About View Functions

*1 The same label name can be used in different modules/macros. When the name is the same as
the global label, the priority will be given to the local label.
*2 When character string is specified by Data Format, the "the
number of characters" dialog box appears, so, use byte unit to
set the number of characters entered.

*3 Process as "Local label arrangement " during programming script program.Arrangement can not
be used in creating ladder program.
KV-5500/5000/3000 Series Script Programming Manual
*4 The constant can be assigned to local label. Please specify constant in the specified range of data format.
6

DISPLAY
● When KV-1000/700 / 700+M / P16 / 10 / 16 / 24 / 40
When the model is other than KV-5500/5000/3000, global label can be only registered.

Item Description
Label name Enter label name (max. 16 half-width characters / 8 full-width characters).
Device Input device
Device Comment Display device comment.

TIP For prohibited comment characters, please see the "Appendix 2 List of prohibited Characters"
Right click on the menu in label edit window
Right-click on "Label Edit window", display following menu.
Item Description
Cut Cut the selected label.
Copy Copy the selected label.
Paste Paste the cut / copied label.
Batch-insert*1 Batch-insert label.
Row insert An empty rung is inserted at the selected rung.
Delete row Delete the selected row.
Register (Incremental register) the device obtained by executing "+1" offset
INC insert
of the above registered device additionally.
Batch-change data format*1 Batch-change data format.
No assort*1 Restore the sequenced label.
Rearrange label name as per ascending sequence. Arrange as per
Sort by label name ascending sequence, then arrange as per sequence of label name, and it
will be rearranged as per descending sequence.
Sort by data format*2Rearrange as per ascending sequence, then sequence
Sort by data format*1
as per data format and it will be arranged in descending sequence.

- KV STUDIO Ver.6 User’s Manual - 6-23

 6-1 About View Functions

Item Description
Arrange device as per ascending sequence. Rearrange as per ascending
Sort by device order sequence, arrange as per device sequence, and then arrange in descending
sequence.
Rearrange comment as per ascending sequence. Rearrange as per
Sort by comment ascending sequence, then arrange as per comment sequence and it will be
arranged as per descending sequence.
Search Find text string in label edit window.
Replace Replace text string in label edit window.
Corss reference Create cross reference.

6 *1
*2
It is displayed only when the support model "KV-5500/5000/3000" are selected.
Data format shall be sequenced as follows.
PRI: high Bit
DISPLAY

1-word unsigned integer

2-word unsigned integer
1-word signed integer
2-word signed integer
Floating number
Text string
Timer
Counter
Arrangement
PRI: low Double floating number

For label display, please see "Display the Label Comments", (Page 6-30).

TIP Copy and paste can be made to Microsoft Excel.

( Pres + C Keys\ Ctrl + V Keys)

● Searching for text strings

Find text string in label edit window.

Right-click on "Label Edit window" and select "Find".

"Label edit window(search)" pops up.

Other procedure Press key+ key

6-24 - KV STUDIO Ver.6 User’s Manual -

 6-1 About View Functions

Item Explanation
Enter the text string to search. When the button is clicked, a pulldown menu
Search string
is displayed, and a list of the last ten selected text strings is displayed.
Case sensitive When this checkbox is marked, a case sensitive search is performed
When this checkbox is marked, only items that completely match the entered
Search 100% match
text string are searched.
Search Label Sets labels as the search range.
target Device Sets devices as the search range.
Moves the cursor upwards, and displays the next instruction or operand that
Up
Search matches the search conditions.
direction Moves the cursor downwards, and displays the next instruction or operand
Down
that matches the search conditions.
6
● Replacing text strings

DISPLAY
Replaces a text string in the label edit window.

1 Right-click on "Label Edit window" and select "Replace".

"Label edit window(search)" pops up.

Other procedure Press key+ key

Item Explanation
Enter the text string before the replace is executed. When the button is
Search string clicked, a pulldown menu is displayed, and a list of the last ten selected text
strings is displayed.
Enter the text string before the replace is executed. When the button is
Replace string clicked, a pulldown menu is displayed, and a list of the last ten selected text
strings is displayed.
Case sensitive When this checkbox is marked, a case sensitive search is performed
Displace Entire project The entire project is set as the replace range.
range Select range The selected range is set as the replace range.

2 To replace individual text strings, click the "Execute" button. To batch-replace text strings, click
the "Replace all" button.

- KV STUDIO Ver.6 User’s Manual - 6-25

 6-1 About View Functions

Device Use List KV-5500/5000/3000 KV-1000 KV-700 KV-P16 KV-10/16/24/40

View(V) Device use list(Z) Ctrl + E

From the menu, select "display (Z)" "Device use list (Z)", display application status list of every
device.

6
DISPLAY

Item Explanation
Global (tab) Display use list of global device.
Local (tab) *1 Display use list of global device.
Select device Select a device.
Select this option when the device use list is displayed for a PLC exented/
Select unit special module.
When "----" is displayed, use list of all modules will be displayed.
"Register special devices" Register special device comment.
"Register unit devices" Register module device comment.
All devices Unrelated to use / unuse, display the specified device list.
Display mode Used Display the device list being used in Ladder.
Unused Display the unused device list in Ladder.
After checking, display the device whose comment has been registered in list
Reg comments
form.
Using status Cancel the check, display only Device No. and comment in list form.
Specify module / macro displaying the list used.
Select module/macro*1 When "----" is displayed, application list of all modules/ macros will be displayed
in list form.
"Update" Update device application list.
Jump Jump to display the specified device No..
Set detailed setting (specific device registration / module device registration /
"Close details" *2 display modes / comment registration / application status / module / macro
selection / update) to non-display.

*1 It is displayed only when the models "KV-5500", "KV-5000", "KV-3000", "KV-1000" are selected.
*2 After closing detail, hide " close detail " button, and " detail " button is displayed. Click "detail"
button, display detailed setting.
6-26 - KV STUDIO Ver.6 User’s Manual -
 6-1 About View Functions

• Ladder is editable while the device table is displayed.

7,3
• The meaning of the device list as follows.
Item Explanation
Device No. Device No. is displayed.
Indicates contact instruction. When 1 above contacts are used, is
displayed.
Indicates output instruction. When 1 above outputs are used, is
displayed.
Cnt The counting of output instruction programmed in the ladder.
Comment1，2 Display device comments.Also editable.

Display Use Status KV-5500/5000/3000 KV-1000 KV-700 KV-P16 KV-10/16/24/40

6

DISPLAY
View(V) Display use status(U)

Select "VIew(V)" "Display use status(U)" from the menu. The "Use status display" window is displayed.

Item Description
Select device Select the device whose use status to be displayed.
Specify module / macro displaying application status.
Select module/macro
When selecting "global", service status of all modules / macros is displayed.
Search Up Operate search upwards from current device position.
direction Down Operate search downwards from current device position.
Used Search against the device unused in Ladder.
Unused Search against the device unused in Ladder.
Search device
Conflict
Search against the device using race contention in Ladder.
ion
Searching is performed based on searing direction or device searching criteria. Clicking on
(Excute search)
this button, the cursor moves to the next search result.
"Update" Display device update information according to current step.
(Option) Display "Setup device usage option" dialog box * .
Jump Jump to display the specified device No..
* Can set " ignore ZRES instruction " in the "device service status option setting" dialog box.

TIP • Ladder can be edited while the " application status display " dialog box is displayed.

- KV STUDIO Ver.6 User’s Manual - 6-27

 6-1 About View Functions

• The devices programmed in script are not counted (the ladder devices in a unfolded script
are countered)
• Device No. are as follows.
When MR000 to MR015

6 • The values in the table represents countings of ladder use (including contact/output).
• "*" is showed when the use countings are over 100.
• The format for compiling file is as follows.
DISPLAY

Blue・devices used by Ladder (race contention unused)

White・devices unused by the ladder
Red・race contention devices used in the ladder

Display CPU System Setting KV-5500/5000/3000 KV-1000 KV-700 KV-P16 KV-10/16/24/40

View (V) CPU system setting (P)

From the menu, select "View (V)" " CPU system setting (P)", display the " CPU system setting" dialog
box.

For details of CPU system setting, please see "6-3 CPU System Setting", (Pafe 6-43).

6-28 - KV STUDIO Ver.6 User’s Manual -

 6-1 About View Functions

Mnemonics List KV-5500/5000/3000 KV-1000 KV-700 KV-P16 KV-10/16/24/40

View(V) Mnemonic list(N)

Open Ladder in current window, display in mnemonic list.

Note
The "Mnemonic symbol list" window can be selected from the menu only in Monitor or Simulator.

From the menu, select "View (V)" "Mnemonic list (N)", display mnemonic symbol list window.

Other procedure Double click rung No..

6

DISPLAY
TIP Click line number of Ladder edit window, move the cursor in mnemonic list to corresponding
line numbered position.

● Rung break setting

Double click every line in mnemonic list window, can set "Line
break" (can be set in multiple rungs).
The set line will display , as shown in right figure.

When the program execution proceeds to "Rung break", the

window on the right side is popped up and the program is paused.
"Rung break", (Page10-10)

Zoom in/Zoom out KV-5500/5000/3000 KV-1000 KV-700 KV-P16 KV-10/16/24/40

View(V) Zoom in (E) Ctrl + PageUp

View(V) Zoom out (R) Ctrl + PageDown

Ladder diagrams can be displayed in five sizes. The default is "100%" when KV STUDIO is started up.
From the menu, select "View (V)" "Zoom in (E)" or "Zoom out (R)" to enlarge display.

7,3 From the menu, select "Tool (T)" " Option (O)", open "Setup option" dialog box. Display
ratio can be also set in "Set display mode" label.

- KV STUDIO Ver.6 User’s Manual - 6-29

 6-1 About View Functions

Auto Zoom KV-5500/5000/3000 KV-1000 KV-700 KV-P16 KV-10/16/24/40

"View" (V) "auto zoom" (A)

Automaticity zoom Ladder display to proper window size.

From the menu, select "display" (V) "Auto zoom" (A).
When "Auto zoom" is selected, "Zoom in (E) " and "Zoom out (R) " become grey.

Displaying Labels KV-5500/5000/3000 KV-1000 KV-700 KV-P16 KV-10/16/24/40

6 View(V) Displaying Labels(G) Ctrl + Backspace

DISPLAY

Device name symbol is replaced with label.

From the menu, select "view (V)" "Display label (G)", and the device name is hidden and the label is displayed.
For Label Edit, please refer to "Displaying the Label Edit Window", (Page 6-21).

Display the Label Comments KV-5500/5000/3000 KV-1000 KV-700 KV-P16 KV-10/16/24/40

View(V) Display the label device(D) Ctrl + Backspace

To tile the device name with the symbol name.

Select "View (V)" "Display label and device(D)" from the menu to tile the device name and the
label.
For label edit, please see "Displaying the Label Edit Window", (Page 6-21).

Displaying Comments KV-5500/5000/3000 KV-1000 KV-700 KV-P16 KV-10/16/24/40

View(V) Display cmnts(F) Ctrl + Press

Toggle display/hide of device comments by the following procedure.

Select "View(V)" "Display cmnts(F)". Each click toggles display/hide.

TIP • From the menu, select "Tool (T)" " Option (O)", open "Setup option" dialog box. The "Setup
option" dialog box is displayed. Display/hide can be set also on the "Set display mode" tab.
Comments to display can also be selected from "comment1/comment2".
• For comment edit, please see "Displaying the Device Comment Edit Window", (Page
6-17).

6-30 - KV STUDIO Ver.6 User’s Manual -

 6-1 About View Functions

Displaying Unit Devices KV-5500/5000/3000 KV-1000 KV-700 KV-P16 KV-10/16/24/40

View(V) Display unit device (Y) Shift + （Space）

Display device names of symbols in the ladder program in device annotation for the unit.
With device annotation for units, relays/DMs assigned on Unit Editor can be expressed in the
annotation "nth relay/DM from the start of the unit connected to nth".
For example, the relay No. of the 5th input on the Input Unit next to the CPU becomes "R01_005". Also,
the 31st relay No. of 3rd Output Unit from the CPU becomes "R03_00115".

Unit No. Unit relay No. 6

DISPLAY
Unit No. : Connection No. of the unit assigned as 0, 1, 2, 3, 4 and so forth starting from the
CPU.
Unit relay No. : Relay No. assigned the number of relay points to be occupied from 00000

Unit No.
0 1 2 3 4 5

KV-U7 KV-DR1 KV-5000 KV- KV- KV- KV- KV-

B16X㧖 C32X㧖 B16T㧖 C32T㧖 H20S

00000 00000 00000 00000 00000 00000

Unit relay No.
~

~
~

01915 00015 00115 00015 00115 01215

3rd relay No. of KV-5000 (R30002) R00_002

5th relay No. of KV-B16X* (R32004) R01_004
17th relay No. of KV-C32T*(R32500) R04_100
603rd relay No. of KV-H20S R05_603

Note
CPU device other than KV-5500/5000 cannot be indicated using unit device mark.

From the menu, select "view (V)" "Display unit device(Y)", use module device mark to represent
device name on editor.

TIP From the menu, select "Tool (T)" " Option (O)", open "Setup option" dialog box. Unit device
display can be also set in "Setup display mode" (display mode setting) label.

- KV STUDIO Ver.6 User’s Manual - 6-31

 6-1 About View Functions

Local Assignment Destination Display During Monitor KV-5500/5000/3000 KV-1000 KV-700 KV-P16 KV-10/16/24/40

View (V) local assignment disfination (W)

From the menu, select "display (V)" "local assignment disfination (W)", Local Device, local label
and macro argument device are displayed with global device mark of destination assignment only in
monitor mode or simulator mode (only limited to KV-1000).
When KV-5500/5000/3000 is used, the macro argument device (P/V/UM/UM/UV) is displayed as
assignment destination memory (VM)/relay (VR).

6 TIP From the menu, select "Tool (T)" "Setup option (O)", open "Setup option" dialog box. Unit
device display can be also set in "Display mode" (display mode setting) label.
DISPLAY

Display Ladder Monitor Value in Hex KV-5500/5000/3000 KV-1000 KV-700 KV-P16 KV-10/16/24/40

View (V) Display Ladder monitor value in Hex (X)

From the menu, select "View (V)" "Display ladder monitor value in Hex(X)", current value on
Ladder is displayed as HEX only in monitor mode, online editor mode or simulator mode.

TIP From the menu, select "Tool (T)" "Option (O)", open "option settings" dialog box. Unit device
display can be also set in "Setup display mode" (display mode setting) label.

Clear Changed Background Color KV-5500/5000/3000 KV-1000 KV-700 KV-P16 KV-10/16/24/40

View(V) Clear changed background color(H)

Cells that have been edited by online edit are displayed with a light blue background. This indicates that
the program has been changed. Clear this display indication.
Select "View(V)" "Clear changed background color(H)" from the menu. The background color
indicating a change to the program is cleared.

TIP Set automatic clear by either of following procedures:

• Select "Monitor/Simulator(N)" "Start online edit(J)" from the menu.
"Setup Online Edit", (Page9-100)
• Select "Tool(T)" "Option(O)" From the menu, and set on the "Online edit setting" tab
in the "Setup option" dialog box.

6-32 - KV STUDIO Ver.6 User’s Manual -

6-2 Entering and Deleting Instructions
This section describes how to enter and delete instructions in ladder diagrams.

Entering Instructions KV-5500/5000/3000 KV-1000 KV-700 KV-P16 KV-10/16/24/40

Ladder symbols are automatically entered when an instruction is specified.

There are three ways of entering instructions.

• Select and enter instruction symbol, type and code from the "Instruction/macro/pack/palette".
"Entering from the Instruction/Macro/Pack/Palette", (Page6-34)

DISPLAY
• Enter the leading character of the instruction, and directly enter the instruction using a
mnemonic from the dialog box that is displayed.
"Directly Entering Instructions Using Mnemonics", (Page6-36)

• Directly enter from the tool bar (some instructions only)

"Enter instruction from tool bar (editing symbol 1)", (Page6-37)

- KV STUDIO Ver.6 User’s Manual - 6-33

 6-2 Entering and Deleting Instructions

Entering from the Instruction/Macro/Pack/Palette

Entering from the Instruction/Macro/Palette

You can enter instructions on the ladder edit window by dragging-and-dropping symbols that are
actually displayed from the [Instruction/Macro Palette] window, which means that you can enter
instructions as if you are writing or drawing a ladder diagram.

1 Move the mouse cursor to the cell on the ladder diagram to enter the instruction to and double-
click.

Other procedure • Select "View(V)" "Instruction/macro palette(I)" from the menu.

6 • Click button.
• Select a cell on the ladder edit window not containing an instruction, and press the
key.
DISPLAY

• Ctrl + Shift + P

TIP • This way, ladder programs can be made with the instruction/macro/pack/palette displayed at all
times.
• When you select a cell containing an instruction and press the key, the [Operand edit]
dialog box is displayed.
"Changing operands", (Page6-35)
• If you are still not familiar with making ladder programs or entering instructions, you can
enter instructions reliably and without any mistakes by entering from the "Instruction/
macro palette" window.

2 Specify the instruction.

Item Explanation
Displays the symbols to enter as a list together with a brief description of its
operation.
Displays the symbols to input in the form of a tree.

Displays the symbols to input in the form of a list.

Instructions to be displayed in the form of a symbol display list can be selected by individual
groups. Select from "All insts/Basic insts/Application insts/Operation insts/ Expanded insts".
Search instruction Enter the instruction in the right column and click the "Search (B)" button to search.
This item can be set when an instruction that can be set is selected. When an
Suffix/differential instruction that cannot be set is currently selected, this item is displayed in gray and
cannot be selected. The default suffix is "U".

6-34 - KV STUDIO Ver.6 User’s Manual -

 6-2 Entering and Deleting Instructions

Item Explanation
Explanation of
Displays an explanation of operation of the currently selected symbol.
instructions
Operand Enter values and comments here.
Type list Displays a list of devices that can be set to the currently selected operand.
Explanation of
Displays an explanation of the currently selected operand.
operands

3 Specify the operand.

Enter a valid operand to the instruction you specified.

4 Drag-and-drop the symbol selected in step 2 to place it the location to enter the instruction.
The symbol is entered. 6

DISPLAY
Other procedure Click the "Overwrite" button.

■ Changing operands
When you select a cell containing an instruction and press the key, the [Operand] dialog box is
displayed.

Other procedure From the menu, select "Edit" "Change operand(O)"

Item Explanation
Value Enter the device No.
Operand
Comment Enter the device comment.
The types of devices that can be set to the currently
Type list
selected operand are displayed.
Displays an explanation of the currently selected
Explanation of operands
operand.

When you change the value or comment, and click the "OK" button, the value or comment is changed.

TIP • For prohibited comment characters, please see the "Appendix 2 List of prohibited
Characters"
• When entering value on command symbol, Device No. can be only changed.

- KV STUDIO Ver.6 User’s Manual - 6-35

 6-2 Entering and Deleting Instructions

Directly Entering Instructions Using Mnemonics

Directly Entering Instructions Using Mnemonics

When an instruction is entered in the dialog box that is displayed, a symbol appears on the ladder
program.

TIP Instructions can be entered more quickly than when you use the "Instruction/macro/pack/
palette" window.

1 Select the cell to which the command will be entered in Ladder edit window, enter the starting
character of the command to be entered and the direct entry dialog box pops up.
6
Other procedure Press the Esc or key
DISPLAY

2 Enter the instruction on the keyboard.

Note
Enter instructions in mnemonic format with a 1-byte space between the instruction
and the device name (operand).

Input contact LD R1 input counter C 0 #3 R0 input timer T 0 #10

↑↑ ↑ ↑↑
↑
Blank Blank Blank
Blank

TIP • Some instructions can be abbreviated in the entry format. For details, see KV-5500/
5000/3000/1000 Series Instruction Reference Manual
• When inputting command in direct input dialog, the command can aslo be input via
function keys. For commands assigned to each function key, see "Shortcut keys valid
in the Editor mode", Page A-14.

3 Complete command and operand entry, click "save" button or "insert" button.
Click "overwrite" button, overwrite at the cursor position, click the "insert" button, insert at the cursor
position.

TIP If you click the "Overwrite" or "Insert" button without specifying an operand, unspecified
operands are indicated by "???"
The instruction can also be entered by function keys in direct input dialog box. For
instructions assigned to various function keys, see "Shortcut Keys Valid on Unit Editor",
Page A-13.

■ Correcting/changing an entered instruction

1 Move the cursor to the instruction to change and press the Esc or Key or key, display
when, display direct entry dialog box, correct command.

2 Click the "Overwrite" or "Insert" button.

6-36 - KV STUDIO Ver.6 User’s Manual -

 6-2 Entering and Deleting Instructions

Enter instruction from tool bar (editing symbol 1)

Entry N.O. contact F5

Entry N.C. contact Shift + F5

OR Enter of NO contact F4
OR Enter of NC contact Shift + F4
Enter coils F7

Enter NC contact coil Shift + F7

Enter NO contacts, NC contacts, NO contact ORs, NC contact ORs, and coils/NC contact coils.
6
1 Select the cell to enter the instruction to, Select the type of contact to enter from the tool bar (edit

DISPLAY
symbol 1).
It pops up "Operand" dialog box.

2 Specify the operand.

Item Explanation
Value Enter the device No.
Operand
Comment Enter the device comment.
The types of devices that can be set to the currently
Type list
selected operand are displayed.
Displays an explanation of the currently selected
Explanation of operands
operand.

TIP • For prohibited comment characters, please see the "Appendix 2 List of prohibited
Characters".
• If you click the "OK" button without specifying an operand, unspecified operands are
indicated by "???."

???
When 1st operand is unspecified in LD command

???
When the 1st operand is unspecified in OUT command

- KV STUDIO Ver.6 User’s Manual - 6-37

 6-2 Entering and Deleting Instructions

Enter instruction from tool bar (edit symbol 2).

SET Alt + F1 SET

RES Alt + F2 RES

TMR Alt + F3

TMS Alt + F5 T
S 0

C Alt + 0 C 0

DIFU Alt + F8 DIFU

DIFD Alt + F9 DIFD

6 MOV Alt + F10 MOV

LDA Alt + F11 LDA

DISPLAY

STA Alt + F12 STA

Entering set, reset, timers, counters, differential contacts, differential output, and data transfer
instructions

TIP Different PLC categories are selected for some models, some icons are hidden. The entry of
shortcut keys supporting command not displayed is invalid.

1 Select the cell to which the command will be entered, select the command to be entered from
tool bar (edit symbol 2).
It pops up "Operand" dialog box.

2 Specify the operand.

Item Explanation
Value Enter the device No.
Operand
Comment Enter the device comment.
The types of devices that can be set to the currently
Type list
selected operand are displayed.
Displays an explanation of the currently selected
Explanation of operands
operand.

TIP • For prohibited comment characters, please see the "Appendix 2 List of prohibited
Characters"
• If you click the "OK" button without specifying an operand, unspecified operands are
indicated by "???."
???
SET When the 1st operand is unspecified in SET command

MOV
DM0 ??? When the 2nd operand is unspecified in MOV command

6-38 - KV STUDIO Ver.6 User’s Manual -

 6-2 Entering and Deleting Instructions

Enter instruction from tool bar (edit symbol 3).

MEP Alt + Shift + F5

MEF Alt + Ctrl + F5

LDP Alt + F7

LDF Alt + Shift + F7

ORP Alt + Shift + F8

ORF Alt + Shift + F9

INV Alt + Ctrl + F10

6
Entering differential contact command.

DISPLAY
TIP • When selecting KV-P16, KV-10 (16), KV-24 (40), edit symbol 3 cannot be displayed.
• Different PLC categories are selected for some models, some icons are hidden. The
entry of shortcut keys supporting command not displayed is invalid.

1 Select the cell to which the command will be entered, select the command to be entered from
tool bar (edit symbol 3).
It pops up "Operand" dialog box.

2 Specify the operand.

Item Explanation
Value Enter the device No.
Operand
Comment Enter the device comment.
The types of devices that can be set to the
Type list
currently selected operand are displayed.
Displays an explanation of the currently selected
Explanation of operands
operand.

TIP • For prohibited comment characters, please see the "Appendix 2 List of prohibited
Characters"
• If you click the "OK" button without specifying an operand, unspecified operands are
indicated by "???."

???
When 1st operand is unspecified in LDP command

- KV STUDIO Ver.6 User’s Manual - 6-39

 6-2 Entering and Deleting Instructions

Enter instruction from tool bar symbol for (CPU positioning)

PLSX PLSX
PLSY PLSY
JOGX JOGX JOGY
CW CW
CCW CCW
JOGY HIGH HIGH
ORGX ORGX
ORGY ORGY
TCHX TCHX

6 TCHY TCHY
DISPLAY

Enter instructions for the CPU positioning function

Note
• It is valid only when the models "KV-5500", "KV-5000", "KV-3000", "KV-1000" "KV-
700/700+M" are selected.
• Positioning parameters must be set separately in addition to entering positioning
instructions in order to use the CPU's integrated positioning function.
"CPU Positioning Parameter", (Page11-7)

1 Select the cell to which the command will be entered, select the command to be entered from
tool bar (CPU positioning symbol ).
It pops up "Operand" dialog box.

TIP The "Operand" dialog box is not displayed for each of the JOGX, JOGY, ORGX, ORGY,
TCHX, and TCHY instructions as they do not have operands. These instructions are
displayed as symbols.

2 Specify the operand.

Item Explanation
Value Enter the device No.
Operand
Comment Enter the device comment.
The types of devices that can be set to the currently
Type list
selected operand are displayed.
Displays an explanation of the currently selected
Explanation of operands
operand.

7,3 • For prohibited comment characters, please see the "Appendix 2 List of prohibited
Characters"
• If you click the "OK" button without specifying an operand, unspecified operands are
indicated by "???."

???
PLSX When the 1st operand is unspecified in PLSX command

6-40 - KV STUDIO Ver.6 User’s Manual -

 6-2 Entering and Deleting Instructions

Enter instruction from the device comment edit window, etc.

From device comment edit window and "device use list" dialog box, enter command by dragging
(contact/ coil).

7,3 The devices that can be entered from device comment edit window or "device use list" dialog
box are only limited to Bit device (including bit device specifying of the word device).

■ Left-click, drag＆drop, enter

Right-click on Device No. to be entered in the device comment edit window and "device use list " dialog
box, and drag＆drop to any cell of Ladder edit window. 6
LD instruction is entered to the cell.

DISPLAY
Left-click drag

■ Right-click, drag＆drop, enter

Enter LD instruction using left-click＆drop, drag.Can select instruction using right-click, drag＆drop.

1 Right-click on Device No. entered using device comment edit window and " device use list "
dialog box, drag＆drop to any cell of Ladder edit window.

Right-click drag

- KV STUDIO Ver.6 User’s Manual - 6-41

 6-2 Entering and Deleting Instructions

2 Select command from the poping up menu.

Enter the selected command.

6
DISPLAY

7,3 The cell magnified, the command that cannot be entered, the menu changes to grey, cannot
be used.

Deleting Instructions KV-5500/5000/3000 KV-1000 KV-700 KV-P16 KV-10/16/24/40

Select the cell on the ladder edit window containing the instruction to delete, and press the Delete
key.

Specifying the Default Suffix KV-5500/5000/3000 KV-1000 KV-700 KV-P16 KV-10/16/24/40

When entering instructions, entry of the suffix can be omitted by specifying the default suffix
beforehand. The default suffix is set to "U (no suffix)".
For postfix details, please see "KV-5500/5000/3000 series PLC User's Manual".

Specify the suffix to set as the default from the "Suffix" pulldown list. This sets the
default suffix.

TIP Even if a default suffix has been set, it can be ignored and the desired suffix can be entered
by specifying the suffix during direct entry.

6-42 - KV STUDIO Ver.6 User’s Manual -

6-3 CPU System Setting
Set various parameters of CPU unit.
For display method of "CPU system settings" dialog box, please see "Display CPU System
Setting", (Page 6-28)

Note
CPU system setting. It is valid only when the models "KV-5500", "KV-5000", "KV-
3000", "KV-1000" are selected.

Program Settings KV-5500/5000/3000 KV-1000 KV-700 KV-P16 KV-10/16/24/40

Here, the global program setting operations such as module execution sequence and scanning time 6
will be introduced.

DISPLAY
Execution sequence of modules setting

To set up module execution sequence, select " Execution sequence of modules" on the left side of the"
CPU system settings ".
For display method from menu, please see "Module Execution Sequence Setting", (Page 7-6).

Operation serial No. can be set in case of multiple modules. The module operates in turn according to the
No. sequence preset.
Item Explanation
No. Module execution sequence.
Module name The name of every module registered to the project. (hide fixed cycle module)
Type Display module type.
Select checkbox, disable the module.
Disable
The disabled module can not be executed.
Up Move up module execution serial number.
Down Move down module execution serial number.

Note
• Initialize module cannot be moved to below every scanning module and standby module.
• Fixed cycle module is displayed on the uppermost part.

- KV STUDIO Ver.6 User’s Manual - 6-43

 6-3 CPU System Setting

Fixed period execute and user interrupt setting

During fixed cycle operation and user interrupt setting, select " fixed period execute and user interrupt
setting " in left side window of "CPU system setting" dialog box.

Note
"Fixed period execute and user interrupt settings" can be selected, only when the
models are "KV-5500", "KV-5000", "KV-3000".

6
DISPLAY

■ Settings of fixed period module

Set fixed period module.
For details of fixed period module, please see "KV-5500/5000/3000 series user manual" 3-8
module "".
Item Explanation
Cycle Set cycle time of fixed period module.
After selecting checkbox, during operation of CPU unit, fixed cycle
When operation begins set to module will be set to operation status.
executing state Cancel checkbox, fixed cycle module operates via MDSTRT
command.

6-44 - KV STUDIO Ver.6 User’s Manual -

 6-3 CPU System Setting

■ Set interruption priority

Set priority when multiple interrupts occur.
For interrupt function details, please see "KV-5500/5000/3000 series user manual" 3-5 Interrupt "".
Item Explanation
Item Items that can be interrupt processed.
*
Set priority in all interrupted projects.
Priority Priority can be divided into three levels, " high " means the highest priority and
"low" means the lowerest priority.

*If the priority is the same, the interrupt priority is as follows:

Priority: high Fixed period module
Input 0 INT R000
6
Input 1 INT R001

DISPLAY
Input 2 INT R002
Input 3 INT R003
Input 4 INT R004
Input 5 INT R005
Input 6 INT R006
Input 7 INT R007
Input 8 INT R008
Input 9 INT R009
High-speed counter comparer * 0 INT CTC0
High-speed counter comparer * 1 INT CTC1
High-speed counter comparer * 2 INT CTC2
High-speed counter comparer * 3 INT CTC3
Positioning Xaxis INT CR3013
Priority: low Positioning Yaxis INT CR3113

■ Whole setting of fixed period module and interrupt priority

Item Explanation
Enable interrupt in After selecting checkbox, even if commands of other modules are operated,
instruction excution break processing will also occur, operate fixed cycle module.
Save and restore Z1 to When the check box is selected, the index register Z1~Z10 is automatically
Z10 when interrupt starts stored in the memory upon interrupt initiation. After break program ends, the
and ends value of index registers saved in working memory will be restored to Z1 to Z10 .
Click "initialize" button, restore all projects in "fixed period operation and user
Initialize
interrupt setting" image to initial (default) status.

- KV STUDIO Ver.6 User’s Manual - 6-45

 6-3 CPU System Setting

Scan time related setting

To set related scan time, select" scan time related settings" in left window of the "CPU system setting"
dialog box.
For scan time details, please see "KV-5500/5000/3000 series user manual" 3-4 program
configuration and operation "".

6
DISPLAY

Item Explanation
After selecting checkbox, operate fixed scanning time. Please set the
setting value of scan time as per 100us .
Fixed scan time operation
After checking "enable END processing time setting", changes to grey
display, cannot be set.
Set fixed scanning time.
Setting value shall be set to a value greater than actual scanning time.
Scan time setting
If less than actual scanning time, it cannot be operated within fixed
scanning time.
After selecting checkbox, END processing time setting changes to enabled.
Please set the setting value of END processing time using 100s.
Enable END processing time
After checking "enable END processing time setting", changes to grey
display, cannot be set.
Set END processing time to any time.
END processing time
It is set in case of larger change in scanning time due to the factors other
setting
than Ladder record processing and communication processing.
Enable performance monitor If checked, performance monitor can be used.

For details of END processing time, please see "KV-5500/5000/3000 series user manual "3-
program composition and action "".
For more information about performance monitor, see"Performance monitor" (Page 10-16).

When the model is KV-1000, conduct combination setting of MEMSW command and CM
TIP
(control memory). For details, please see " KV-5500/5000/3000/1000 series command
reference manual".

6-46 - KV STUDIO Ver.6 User’s Manual -

 6-3 CPU System Setting

Protection setting

For protection setting, select "protection setting" in the window on left side of "CPU system setting" dialog box.

DISPLAY
Item Explanation
Add write protection for After selecting checkbox, write protection is adopted for Ladder stored in
programs in CPU CPU (fail to be written).
Add read protection for After selecting checkbox, read protection is adopted for Ladder stored in
programs in CPU CPU (fail to be read).

TIP When the model is KV-1000, set using MEMSW instruction.

For details, please see " KV-5500/5000/3000/1000 series instruction reference manual".

- KV STUDIO Ver.6 User’s Manual - 6-47

 6-3 CPU System Setting

System Setting KV-5500/5000/3000 KV-1000 KV-700 KV-P16 KV-10/16/24/40

Here, the global program setting operations such as local device assignment and power-off hold will be
introduced.

Entire assignment of local device

During entire assignment of local device, select " entire assignment of local device" in the window on

6 the left side of "CPU system setting" dialog box.

For display method from menu, please see "Entire Assignments of Local Devices Setting", (Page
8-6)
DISPLAY

For detail of Local Device, please see "KV-5500/5000/3000 series user manual" 3-10 Local
Device "".

● When support model is KV-5500/5000/3000

6 4 2 1 3 5

7 8

6-48 - KV STUDIO Ver.6 User’s Manual -

 6-3 CPU System Setting

Setup local device assignment

No. Item Explanation
Indicates the number of Local Devices preset of every device. It can also be
set.
1 Local dev Rsv nums
The number of Local Device reserved refers to the number of all Local
Devices.
Indicates the range that global device can be used, which is adjusted
2 Global device range
according to the reserved number of local devices.
Assignment status of every device is displayed via diagram. The number of
Display configration devices specified with Local device
3
ratio reserved quantity is displayed as "used local devices" + "unused local
devices". 6
Indicates total number of devices.

DISPLAY
4 Total Total number= the number of global devices + the number of Local Device
preset + the number of preset system devices
Click "initialize" button, restore the number of Local Devices retained to initial
5 Initialize
value (default).
Display "Workspace setting" dialog box.
6 "Setup workarea"
"Setup work area", (Page 6-50)

Display local assignment

No. Item Explanation
Indicates the number of Local Device assignable in project.
Assignable quantity This is set up from the "Local device
reserved quantity" option.
7
Used nums Indicates total number of modules / macros.
Indicates the number of surplus Local Devices that can be used.
Residual nums
" the number of residual"=" the number of usable-" the number of used "
Display assignment status of Local Device of every module / macro.
Display module/
8 "Setup module/macro device", (Page 6-52)When dechecking " automatic "
macro type device
checkbox, can execute assignment setting.

- KV STUDIO Ver.6 User’s Manual - 6-49

 6-3 CPU System Setting

Setup work area

6
DISPLAY

No. Item Explanation

Number of work
Set number of workspace for script processing character string function.
1 area for script text
Display local work used for words of local workspace.
string
Possible quantity
Display available number of local workspace in the project.
used
2 Used nums Display total used number of local work for each module/macro.
Display residual available number in local work.
Residual nums
" the number of residual"=" the number of usable-" the number of used "
Display module/ Display local work distribution condition of each module/macro.
3
macro type device After remove automatic check box, set the number of local work to be used.

6-50 - KV STUDIO Ver.6 User’s Manual -

 6-3 CPU System Setting

● When support model is KV-1000

4 2 1 5 3 6

DISPLAY
7 8

Setup global/local/script assignment

No. Item Explanation
Indicates the number of Local Devices preset of every device.
1 Local Rsv nums
The number of local preset refers to the number of Local Devices of whole project.
Indicates the range that global device can be used, which is adjusted according to the
2 Global device range
reserved number of local devices.
Assignment status of every device is displayed via diagram. The number of
Display configration
3 devices specified with Local device
ratio
reserved quantity is displayed as "used local devices" + "unused local devices".
Indicates total number of devices.
4 Total
Total numbers= the number of global devices + the number of Local Device preset + the number of preset system devices
5 Script Rsv nums Indicates the number of script work devices preset. It can also be set.
6 Initialize Click "initialize" button, restore the number of Local Devices retained to initial value (default).

Display local assignment

No. Item Explanation
Indicates the number of Local Device assignable in project.
Rsv local dev nums This is set up from the "Local device
reserved quantity" option.
7
Used nums Indicates total number of modules / macros.
Indicates the number of surplus Local Devices that can be used.
Residual nums
" the number of residual"=" the number of usable-" the number of used "
Display assignment status of Local Device of every module / macro.
Display module/
8 "Setup module/macro device", (Page 6-52)When dechecking " automatic "
macro typt device
checkbox, can execute assignment setting.

- KV STUDIO Ver.6 User’s Manual - 6-51

 6-3 CPU System Setting

Setup module/macro device

To set up a different module/macro device, select the "Set module/macro type device" option from the left
side in the "CPU system setting" dialog box.
For display method from menu, please see "Local Devices by Module/macro Setting", (Page 8-6).

6
DISPLAY

Item Explanation
Select module/macro Select module/macro
After selecting checkbox, the selected device will be automatically assigned.
Automatic The number of valid devices automatically assigned fails to be set. After
clicking "auto", testing of all devices can be ON/ OFF.
Set the number of Local Devices used in every module / macro.
Quantity
It cannot be set when checkbox is automatically changed to ON.
Clicking the "Initialize" button, the number is restored to the initial value
Initialize
(default).

For detail of Local Device, please see "KV-5500/5000/3000 series user manual" 3-10 Local
Device "".

6-52 - KV STUDIO Ver.6 User’s Manual -

 6-3 CPU System Setting

CPU unit buffer capacity setting

When setting buffer capacity of CPU unit, select "CPU unit buffer capacity" in the window on left side of
the "CPU system setting" dialog box.
For details of CPU unit buffer, please see "KV-5500/5000/3000 series User's Manual" 2-3 logging
/ tracing "".

DISPLAY
Item Explanation
Total Display total buffer capacity of CPU unit.
Free Display residual buffer capacity in current setting.
ID ID No. of logging / tracing.
Capacity（kB） According to ID No., set buffer capacity used in logging / tracing.
Number of sampling Display the number of logging / tracing samples.
Display module buffer capacity occupied by every sample of logging /
consumption per sampling
tracing in byte.

For logging / tracing details, please see "KV-5500/5000/3000 series User's Manual" 2-3 logging /
tracing "".

TIP When selecting KV-1000, CPU unit buffer capacity cannot be set.

- KV STUDIO Ver.6 User’s Manual - 6-53

 6-3 CPU System Setting

Power OFF hold setting

To set power off holding, select "power off holding setting" in left window of the "CPU system setting"
dialog box.
For power off holding details, please see KV-5500/5000/3000 series user manual, "3-6 device and
constant".

6
DISPLAY

Item Explanation
Battery-less working If checked, battery-less working will be executed.
Select device Select device setting power off holding * 1 .
Range Display possible range setting.
Select hold or clear.
Setting Holdduring power OFF, hold current value of the device within the range (status).
Clear: during power OFF, clear current value of the device within the range (status).

*1 The devices for which power off holding can be set are as follows.
Device name Range
R(Relay) R1000 to R99915
B（Link relay） B00 to B3FFF
DM (data memory) DM0 to DM65534
EM（Extended data memory） EM0 to EM65534
ZF (File Register: consecutive number method) ZF0 to ZF32766
W（Link register） W0 to W3FFF
C (counter)/ C0 to C3999/
CTC (high-speed counter comparator) CTC0 to CTC3

For more information about battery-less working, see "2-16 Battery-less working" in KV-5500/5000/
3000 User Manual.

Warning Please set power off holding against the relay assigned to IO module and
specific module. So, the program cannot normally work sometimes.

TIP When the model is KV-1000, set using MEMSW command.

For details, please see " KV-5500/5000/3000/1000 series command reference manual".
6-54 - KV STUDIO Ver.6 User’s Manual -
 6-3 CPU System Setting

Action when error occurs

To set up the action taken in case of error, select the "Action when error occurs" option from the left
side in the "CPU system setting" dialog box.

DISPLAY
Item Explanation
Error Display CPU unit registration error.
Select CPU action during CPU unit occur.
Stop (alarm): process as alarm, stop CPU operation.
CPU operation Continue (warning): process as warning, do not stop CPU operation,
continue working.
* the project whose background becomes grey, cannot be changed.
After selecting checkbox, error status will be written into error record.
Stored in error log
* the project whose background becomes grey, cannot be changed.
(Default setting) Click "initial setting" button, restore the project set to initial value (default).
Eliminate CPU error when power After selecting checkbox, when power is turned on or CPU operation
ON mode is switched from PROG to RUN, CPU error will be removed.

TIP When the model is KV-1000, conduct combination setting of MEMSW command and CM
(control memory). For details, please see "KV-5500/5000/3000/1000 series command
reference manual".

- KV STUDIO Ver.6 User’s Manual - 6-55

 6-3 CPU System Setting

Upper limit of digital trimmer

To set upper limit value of digital trimmer, select " upper limit setting of digital trimmer" in the left window
of the " CPU system setting " dialog box.
For details of digital trimmer, please see "KV-5500/5000/3000 series user manual", 2-1 Access
Window.

6
DISPLAY

Item Explanation
After selecting checkbox, upper limit value setting of digital trimmer is
Enable upper limit of digital enabled.
timer Cancel checkbox, upper limit value setting of digital trimmer becomes grey,
cannot be set.
Trimmer No. Trimmer condenser No. with upper limit value setting.
Set upper limit value of digital trimmer of trimmer condenser No.
Upper limit value setting
Setting range 0 to 4294967295

TIP When the model is KV-1000, conduct combination setting of MEMSW command and CM
(control memory). For details, please see " KV-5500/5000/3000/1000 series command
reference manual".

6-56 - KV STUDIO Ver.6 User’s Manual -

7
MODULE/MACRO
The chapter describes function and operation of module / macro.

MODULE/MACRO
7-1 About Module/Macro ••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• 7-2

- KV STUDIO Ver.6 User’s Manual - 7-1

 7-1 About Module/Macro
This chapter describes how to use the Module/Macro menu on KV STUDIO.
For more information about the module/macro concept, please refer to the KV-5500/5000/
3000Series Programming Manual.

Create New Module KV-5500/5000/3000 KV-1000 KV-700 KV-P16 KV-10/16/24/40

Modules/macros(M) New module(G)

1 Select "Modules/macros(M)" "New module(G)" from the menu.

The [New module] dialog box is displayed.

7 Other procedure Select New module (M) from the menu that appears by right-clicking the workspace.

2
MODULE/MACRO

Enter the name of the new module you are about to make, select the type of module and click the
"OK" button.
A new module of the type that you set is displayed on the currently open workspace.

Item Explanation
Enter the name of the new module that you are about to
Module name
make using up to 24 1-byte or 12 2-byte characters.
Select the module type from "Every-scan module/
Module type
Initialization module/Standby module/fixed cycle module*".
Auto-assign local If selecting the checkbox, the Local Device of the
devices module created newly will be automatically assigned.
* when the model is KV- 1000, cannot select.

TIP For prohibited comment characters, please see the "Appendix 2 List of prohibited Characters"

Create New Macro KV-5500/5000/3000 KV-1000 KV-700 KV-P16 KV-10/16/24/40

Modules/macros(M) New macro(M)

1 Select "Modules/macros(M)" "New macro(M)" from the menu.

The "New macro" dialog box is displayed.

Other procedure • Select "Edit macro(M)" "New macro(N)" from the menu that appears by right-clicking
the workspace.
• Select "New macro(R)" from the menu that appears by right-clicking the workspace.

7-2 - KV STUDIO Ver.6 User’s Manual -

 7-1 About Module/Macro

2 Enter the name of the new macro you are about to make, select the type of macro and click the
"OK" button.
This makes the new macro.

Item Explanation
Enter the name of the new macro that you are
Macro name about to make using up to 12 1-byte or six 2-byte
characters.
From "Sub-routine Type macro / Self-hold type
Macro type
macro", select macro type.
Auto-assign local After selected, Local Device of new macro is
devices automatically assigned.

TIP For prohibited comment characters, please see the "Appendix 2 List of prohibited Characters" 7

MODULE/MACRO
Open Module/macro KV-5500/5000/3000 KV-1000 KV-700 KV-P16 KV-10/16/24/40

Modules/macros(M) Open module/macro(E)

Select the module/macro to open or close on the workspace. Select "Modules/macros(M)" "Open
module/macro(E)"/"Close module/macro(L)" from the menu.
Select "Open module/macro (O)" from the menu that appears by right-clicking the workspace.
Other procedure • Double-click the module/macro to open on the workspace.

Close Module/macro KV-5500/5000/3000 KV-1000 KV-700 KV-P16 KV-10/16/24/40

Module/macro(M) Close module/macro(L) Ctrl + F4

In workspace, select the module / macro to be closed, From the menu, select "module / macro (M)"
"close module / macro (L)".

Delete Module/macro KV-5500/5000/3000 KV-1000 KV-700 KV-P16 KV-10/16/24/40

Modules/macros(M) Delete module/macro(D)

Select the module/macro to delete on the workspace. Select "Modules/macros(M)" "Delete

module/macro(D)" from the menu.

Other procedure • Select Delete module/macro (D) from the menu that appears by right-clicking the workspace.
• Select the module/macro to delete on the workspace and press the Delete key.

- KV STUDIO Ver.6 User’s Manual - 7-3

 7-1 About Module/Macro

Module/macro Property KV-5500/5000/3000 KV-1000 KV-700 KV-P16 KV-10/16/24/40

Modules/macros(M) Module/macro property(H)

Select the module/macro whose property are to be displayed on the workspace. Select "Modules/
macros(M)" "Module/macro property(H)" from the menu.
The "Module/macro properties" dialog box is displayed.

Module Macro

7
MODULE/MACRO

Item Explanation
Display module/macro name.The name of the module or macro can be
Module/macro name
changed in this field.
Display module/macro type.The type of the module or macro can be changed
Module/macro type
in this field.
Date created Displays the date when the module/macro was created.
Date updated Displays the date that the module/macro was last updated.
Date transfered Displays the date that the module/macro was last transferred to the CPU.
Date registered Displays that date that the module/macro was registered to the project.
Comment Enter the comment here.
Set password Sets a password to the macro.
When this checkbox is marked, the currently selected module or macro is
Disable module/macro
disabled. Disabled modules or macros are not transferred to the CPU.

TIP Macro property is only displayed when "KV-5500", "KV-5000", "KV-3000" or "KV-1000" is
selected.

■ Setting a password to a macro

Passwords can be set to macros. Limit the number of characters to six 1-byte characters.

TIP It is valid only when the models "KV-5500", "KV-5000", "KV-3000", "KV-1000" are selected.

Note
Once you have set a password, make a note of it and keep it in a safe place. If you
lose a password, you can no longer open the macro to which the password is set.

7-4 - KV STUDIO Ver.6 User’s Manual -

 7-1 About Module/Macro

Macro Argument Settings KV-5500/5000/3000 KV-1000 KV-700 KV-P16 KV-10/16/24/40

Modules/macros(M) Macro argument settings(Z)

From the menu, select "module / macro (M)" "macro argument setting (Z)", set operand No. etc.,
supporting macro operating instruction in "macro argument setting" dialog box.

MODULE/MACRO
Item Explanation
Specify argument setting macro. The macro registered to the currently editd
Macro name
project will be displayed on the dropdown menu.

Read argument message of the specified macro from Ladder.

Move up the selected argument display sequance number by 1.

Move down the selected argument display sequance number by 1.

Delete the selected argument.

Delete all unused arguments.

Create cross reference to the argument selected.

No. Display macro argument No..

Argument Display argument device used in macro.
Enter title of argument
Title
Macro template Setting range: maximal 12 half-width characters
display Operand Enter an explanation of the operand in the macro palette.
description Setting range: maximal 24 half-width characters
In the case of UR/UM, enter the type of unit, and in the case of P/V, enter the
Display format/Unit type
view mode on Editor.
Use "used / unused" form to display application status of every variable in
Use status in Ladder
Ladder.

TIP • Ladder can be edited when "macro argument setting" dialog box is displayed.
• Content feedback to "Instruction/macro pack pallet" setting. For macro pallet details,
please see "Macro pallet", (Page 6-15).

Note
2 arguments are used when argument unit specified.
2 arguments can also be used when unit device relay or DM is separately used as
argument device.

- KV STUDIO Ver.6 User’s Manual - 7-5

 7-1 About Module/Macro

Convert Unit Devices KV-5500/5000/3000 KV-1000 KV-700 KV-P16 KV-10/16/24/40

Modules/macros(M) Convert unit device(Q)

Select "Modules/macros(M)" "Convert unit device(Q)" from the menu. Unit devices currently used
in macros are converted to arguments.

Other procedure Select "Edit macro(M)" "Convert unit devices(Q)" from the menu that appears by right-
clicking the workspace.

For a detailed explanation on arguments and unit devices, KV-5500/5000/3000 Series

Programming Manual "3-2 Before You Start Using Macros" - "Argument Devices."
7
Module Execution Sequence Setting KV-5500/5000/3000 KV-1000 KV-700 KV-P16 KV-10/16/24/40
MODULE/MACRO

Module / macro (M) Setup module execution sequence(V)

From the menu, select "module / macro (M)" "Setup module execution sequence(V)" to set up
operation sequence of module in setting project.
For more information, please see "Execution sequence of modules setting", (Page 6-43).

7-6 - KV STUDIO Ver.6 User’s Manual -

8
CONVERT
The chapter describes various conversion functions and application methods.

CONVERT
8-1 About Conversion Functions•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• 8-2

- KV STUDIO Ver.6 User’s Manual - 8-1

 8-1 About Conversion Functions
This section describes each of the functions contained in the "Convert(A)" menu.

Conversion KV-5500/5000/3000 KV-1000 KV-700 KV-P16 KV-10/16/24/40

Convert(A) Convert(C) Ctrl + F9

Programs made using Editor cannot be transferred as they are to the PLC.
To transfer a ladder program to PLC, the program must be converted to machine code.

TIP When you select, "Monitor/Simulator(N)" "Transfer to PLC Monitor mode(C)", the ladder
program is converted to machine code and transferred to PLC without having to instruct
conversion.

Select "Convert(A)" "Convert(C)" from the menu.

8 The ladder program is converted, and the confirmation message is displayed.
CONVERT

KV-5500/5000/3000

When conversion ends successfully, the amount of memory that the converted ladder program will take
up on PLC memory is displayed.
• Program size ••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• Amount of memory used when the entire program including rung
comments is transferred to the unit
• Object size. ••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• Amount of memory used when the ladder program excluding
rung comments is converted to a format that can be executed on
the unit.
Click "Details" button to display steps of each module, and consumption of internal workspace (bit,
word).

TIP When an error occurs during conversion, the message "Conversion failed." is displayed. The
details of the error can be confirmed on the output window.
"Output Window", (Page6-12)

8-2 - KV STUDIO Ver.6 User’s Manual -

 8-1 About Conversion Functions

Converting Individual Modules and Macros KV-5500/5000/3000 KV-1000 KV-700 KV-P16 KV-10/16/24/40

Convert(A) Convert individual modules/macros(M) Ctrl + F10

Select "Convert(A)" "Convert individual modules/macros(M)" from the menu. The ladder program is
converted, and the confirmation message is displayed.
Only active modules/macros are converted.

TIP When an error occurs during conversion, the message "Specified module/macros convertion
fails" is displayed. The details of the error can be confirmed on the output window.
"Output Window", (Page6-12)
8

CONVERT
Check Device Confliction KV-5500/5000/3000 KV-1000 KV-700 KV-P16 KV-10/16/24/40

Covert (A) Check device confliction(B)

On the menu, select "Convert (A)" "Check device confliction(B)", switch race contention of testing
device checking Ladder conversion.
With check mark ON: Check device confliction
With check mark OFF: Not check device confliction

■ Device confliction
The race contention condition refers to the possibility for an instrution to use a device when same
devcie is used (rewritten) by multiple instructions.

Example
When next ladder program is written, DM3102/DM3103 will use race contention.

- KV STUDIO Ver.6 User’s Manual - 8-3

 8-1 About Conversion Functions

MR1000 FMOV
↑ DM1000 DM3000 #1000 …(1)
MR1001 MOV.D
↑ #12345678 DM3102 …(2)

Transfer target
(1) FMOV Operation
123 : DM3000
123 : DM3001

…
Transfer source
DM1000:
123 123 : DM3101
㧔Store #123㧕
16-bit 123 : DM3102
(1 word)
123 : DM3103
123 : DM3104

…
123 : DM3998
123 : DM3999
16-bit
(1 word) Conflict

8
CONVERT

（2）MOV.D Operation
Transfer source Transfer target
High bit Low bit DM3103 DM3102

㧏12345678 123 㧏12345678

32-bit
(2 word)

Note
Checking device confliction cannot be made for the device modified by index
registers and the command of the number of device cannot be specialized.

Clear Invalid Operands KV-5500/5000/3000 KV-1000 KV-700 KV-P16 KV-10/16/24/40

Convert(A) Clear invalid operands(I)

Invalid operands are sometimes generated when a unit setup is changed after the ladder program is made.
Select "Convert(A)" "Clear invalid operands(I)" from the menu. The confirmation message is displayed.

TIP Invalid operands

• When the Expansion Unit is in used, relays/DM are assigned from Unit Editor. The unit setup is
linked with the ladder program, and relays/DM Nos. on the ladder program are changed in an
interlocked manner with changes to the unit setup information. However, when a unit that is
assigned relays/DMs is deleted, the relays/DMs that were assigned to that unit will exist on the
ladder program even though that unit no longer exists.Relays/DMs whose association with a
unit has been discontinued in this way are called "invalid operands."
Ladder programs are not converted successfully when they contain invalid operands. To
delete invalid operands, either delete the invalid operands by the "invalid operand clear
function," or check and re-input each individual invalid operand.
• Can search invalid operand using search function.
"Search Device", (Page5-6)

8-4 - KV STUDIO Ver.6 User’s Manual -

 8-1 About Conversion Functions

Duplicate Coil Check KV-5500/5000/3000 KV-1000 KV-700 KV-P16 KV-10/16/24/40

Convert(A) Duplicate coil check(D)

Select "Convert(A)" "Duplicate coil check(D)" from the menu. test the Duplicate coil position in
Ladder.

TIP • The position where two-way coil exists, error prompt will not occur during conversion.
• When multiple OUT, OUB, DIFU, and DIFD instructions are used on the same output
relay, the last programmed instruction is given priority and output. (In both of the following
examples, output R00500 does not turn ON even if input relay R00000 turns ON.)

Ladder checked by the duplicate coil check Ladder not checked by the duplicate coil check

R000 R500 R000 R500

SET 8

CONVERT
R001 R500 R001 R500

• Duplicate coil locations are checked, and the results of the check are displayed on the
output window.

Note
• The duplicate coil check is judged by four instructions: OUT, OUB, DIFU, and DIFD.
• Even if an error is not discovered by the duplicate coil check, some ladder
programs function as if a duplicate coil has been programmed.
• After global device is used by output relay in macro, when macro is called for many
times, two-way coil error will appear.

- KV STUDIO Ver.6 User’s Manual - 8-5

 8-1 About Conversion Functions

Local Devices by Module/macro Setting KV-5500/5000/3000 KV-1000 KV-700 KV-P16 KV-10/16/24/40

"Convert(A)" "Set local devices by module/macro(S)"

On the menu, select "convert (A)" "Set local device by module / macro(s)", set the number of Local
Devices applied to every module / macro.
For detailed setting of different modules/ macros, please see "Setup module/macro device",
(Page6-52).
For details of Local Device, please see KV-5500/5000/3000 series User's Manual "3-10 Local
device".

8 Entire Assignments of Local Devices Setting KV-5500/5000/3000 KV-1000 KV-700 KV-P16 KV-10/16/24/40
CONVERT

Convert(A) Set entire assignments of local devices(A)

On the menu, select "conversion (A)" "Set entire assignments of local devices(A)", set the number
of Local Device used in whole projects.
For detailed assignment setting of whole Local Device, please see "Entire assignment of local
device", (Page6-48).
For details of Local Device, please see 《KV-5500/5000/3000 series User's Manual "3-10 Local
device".

8-6 - KV STUDIO Ver.6 User’s Manual -

9
MONITOR & SIMULATOR
The chapter describes function and application method of monitor/ simulator.

MONITOR AND SIMULATOR

9-1 About Monitor/Simulator Functions•••••••••••••••••••••••• 9-2
9-2 Monitor Function •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• 9-38
9-3 Register Monitor •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• 9-45
9-4 Batch Monitoring •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• 9-50
9-5 Custom Monitor ••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• 9-53
9-6 Real-time Chart Monitor ••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• 9-55
9-7 High-speed Time Chart Monitor•••••••••••••••••••••••••• 9-78
9-8 Unit Monitor •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• 9-86
9-9 Batch Change ••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• 9-88
9-10 Online Edit ••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• 9-97
9-11 Simulator ••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••9-101

- KV STUDIO Ver.6 User’s Manual - 9-1

 9-1 About Monitor/Simulator Functions
This section describes the functions in the "Monitor/Simulator(N)" menu.

Preparation Before Monitoring

Please prepare the following items in advance.

■ USB port
USB cable specification: OP-35331

KV-5500/5000/3000/1000/700

OP-35331
(Cable length 3m) To USB connector

PC
To USB connector KV STUDIO Ver.6
9
Note
MONITOR & SIMULATOR

• The special cables (OP-35331) must be used.Otherwise, it will not function correctly.
• KV STUDIO must be installed before KV-5500/5000/3000/1000/700 connected to PC USB
port.
"1-4 Software Installation", Page 1-9
• When the KV-5500/5000/3000/1000/700 PLC is connected to the PC for the first time,
the USB driver of KV-5500/5000/3000/1000/700must be installed on the PC.
"1-5 USB Driver Installation", Page 1-11

■ Connecting Ethernet port

PC
KV STUDIO Ver.6
KV-5500/5000/3000/1000/700

HUB

STP/UTP direct cable STP/UTP direct cable

Note
• When connecting Ethernet using 10BASE-T, please use CAT3 above STP/UTP cables.
• When connecting Ethernet using 100BASE-TX, please use CAT5 above STP/UTP cables.
• Ethernet connection of PLC can be set using the access window.
• Please use STP/UTP cross cable when connecting the PLC to a PC directly.

9-2 - KV STUDIO Ver.6 User’s Manual -

 9-1 About Monitor/Simulator Functions

■ Connection with D-Sub 9-pin serial port

Connection cable specification: OP-26487
D-sub 9-pin style conversion connector specification OP-26486

KV-5500/5000/3000/1000/700/10(16)/24(40)/P16

OP-26486
To D-SUB 9-pin
serial port
PC
To modular connector OP-26487 KV STUDIO Ver.6
(cable length: 2.5m)
KV side PC Side

RD 3 3 SD
SD 5 2 RD
4 DR
6 ER

2 3 4 5
7 RS
8 CS 9
SG 4 5 SG

MONITOR & SIMULATOR

KV side pin No. Dedicated connector 9-pin D-SUB connector

Caution Wrong connection to printer port of PC may damage PC or PLC. Special

attention should be paid.

Note
Please use the specified cables (OP-26487, OP-26486).Otherwise, it will not function
correctly.

„ Bluetooth unit Connection to KV-BT1

USB adapter for

Bluetooth connection
KV-BT1 ＋
K V- BT1

CONNECT

KV-5500, KV-5000 (above Ver.1.1), PC

KV-3000 (above Ver.2) KV STUDIO Ver.6

Note
• KV-BT1 can be connected with KV-5000 (above Ver.1.1) and CPU unit with CPU
function version above 2.0.
• For more information about USB adapter for Bluetooth connection, see operating
instructions of USB adapter for Bluetooth connection.

- KV STUDIO Ver.6 User’s Manual - 9-3

 9-1 About Monitor/Simulator Functions

Returning to Editor KV-5500/5000/3000 KV-1000 KV-700 KV-P16 KV-10/16/24/40

"Monitor/Simulator(N)" "Return to Editor(X)" Ctrl + F1

Select "Monitor/Simulator(N)" "Return to Editor(X)" from the menu.

• The current state (Editor, Monitor, Simulator, online editor) is displayed on the
KV STUDIO title bar.
• You can also return to Editor directly from mode bar.

Communication Setting KV-5500/5000/3000 KV-1000 KV-700 KV-P16 KV-10/16/24/40

To perform CPU unit and PLC communication setting.

Communication setting
9 "Monitor/Simulator(N)" "Setup communication(T)" "Setup communication(C)"
MONITOR & SIMULATOR

Various communication methods can be set.

"Monitor/Simulator(N)" "Setup communication(T)" "Setup communication(C)"

Communication
detailed setting

Item Description
PC communication port To select the communication port on PLC used in PLC communication.
USB*1 Selected by default when USB connection is used.
Selected when RS-232C connection is used.
Serial*2
Selected when the connection destination is KV-3000/1000/700 or KV-L20V, etc.
Selected when Ethernet connection is used.
Ethernet*1
Selected when the connection destination is the built-in Ethernet port of KV-5500/5000 and KV-LE20V.
Select it when executing Bluetooth connection for KV-BT1 connected with KV-
Bluetooth
5000 (above Ver.1.1) and CPU unit of CPU function version above 2.0.
Modem Selected during communication with remote KV-5500/5000/3000/1000/700 via modem.
(Communication
The displayed contents vary with different communication ports selected.
detailed setting)

9-4 - KV STUDIO Ver.6 User’s Manual -

 9-1 About Monitor/Simulator Functions

Item Description
Selected when connecting through the VT3/VT2 series connected to PLC, FL-net
Routing setting
and EtherNet/IP instead of directly connecting PLC to PC.
Enabled when the "Routing setting" checkbox is selected.
(Detailed setting)
"Routing detailed setting" dialog box is displayed.
Destination A pull-down menu pops up when this button is clicked.
Add to destinations list To add the connection destination to the connection destination list file.
To open the connection destination list file. When the file does not exist, a
Open destinations list
connection destination file can be created.
*1 It cannot be connected in the case of KV-P16 and KV-10/16/24/40.
*2 Connected using KV-L20V in the case of KV-5500/5000.

■ USB connection
USB is used to connect PLC to PC.
Select "USB" radio button in "PC comm port".No detailed setup is required.

Note
• USB hub cannot be used.
• USB connection cannot be used for KV-10(16), 0KV-24(40) and KV-P16.
9

MONITOR & SIMULATOR

■ Serial connection
RS-232C is used to connect PLC to PC.
Select "Serial" radio button in "PC comm port".

Item Description
To select the COM port for the connection cable. The default value is "COM1". COM
COM port interface is serial interface, can RS-232C interface can be adopted for communication;
The COM port No. that will be displayed according to the PC model used.
To select baud rate. The selection items and default values of baud rate are shown as follows.

Model Selection range Default

Baud rate KV-5500/5000*, 9600, 19200, 38400, 57600, 115200
KV-3000, KV-1000 115200
KV-700, KV-24 (40) 9600, 19200, 38400,
57600
KV-10 (16), KV-P16 57600
Unit No. Unit No. setting dialog box will be displayed when unit No. setting button is clicked.

*Serial communication unit KV- L20V is required when KV-5500/5000 connected by serial connection.
- KV STUDIO Ver.6 User’s Manual - 9-5
 9-1 About Monitor/Simulator Functions

Note
If the selected COM port is not displayed in the "Serial
port (COM) setting" dialog box, or the number of COM
ports displayed is less than the number of actual COM
ports, then Windows cannot correctly identify COM
port. Please set up correctly so as to be able to COM
port. Please refer to the User's Manual of PC or contact PC dealer.

● Unit No. setting

Using KV STUDIO, you can specify multiple KV-L20V/R station Nos in multi-station configuration, and
using 1 PC, you can transfer a ladder program to multiple KV-5500/5000/3000/1000/700 PLCs and to
monitor.

Note
• Not displayed then the supported models KV-10 (16), KV-24 (40) and KV-P16 are selected.
• Unit No. can be set when monitor is stopped (communication not in progress).

9 Station No.
2 1
F (when use port 1)
O (when use port 2)
KV STUDIO
MONITOR & SIMULATOR

KV-U7

CC

24V OUT

24VDC
1.8A
0V

N
INPUT
100-240VAC
50/60Hz
0.98A

Port 2: RS-422A RC-232C/RS-422A converter

Item Description
Set unit No. Sets the unit No. of communication destination KV-L20V.

TIP Unit No. refers to the No. set in KV-L20 V unit setup window in Unit Editor.
"KV-L20V User's Manual"
"Chapter 3 Overview"

Note
In "Unit No." setting, the unit No. can be specified to O-F. In Unit Editor, however, only
0 to 9 can be set.
If an unit is used in direct-connect mode, then the unit No. will be set to A.

9-6 - KV STUDIO Ver.6 User’s Manual -

 9-1 About Monitor/Simulator Functions

■ Ethernet connection
Ethernet is used to connect PLC to PC.
Select "Ethernet" radio button in "PC comm port".

Item
IP Address
Description
Enters the IP address for connecting KV-5500/5000/3000/1000/700 PLC.
9
(Search Searches for the KV-5500/5000/3000/1000/700 connected to Ethernet.

MONITOR & SIMULATOR

destination)
Port No. Enters the port No. for connecting KV-5500/5000/3000/1000/700 PLC.
(Connection Sends a Ping instruction to the port No. to which an IP address has been entered, and tests the
test) connection status.

TIP • Through connection destination editing, you can select the registered connection
destination from the menu.
• When KV-3000/1000/700 is connected using Ethernet, KV-EP21V/KV-LE21V/KV-LE20V is
required addionally.
KV-EP21V User's Manual, KV-LE21V User's Manual, KV-LE20V User's Manual

Note
• It can be set when monitor is stopped (communication not in progress). Ethernet
detailed setup cannot be performed when monitoring is in progress (in
communication).
• Ethernet connection is not possible for KV-10(16), KV-24(40) and KV-P16.

- KV STUDIO Ver.6 User’s Manual - 9-7

 9-1 About Monitor/Simulator Functions

● Searching connection destination

Connection destination of Ethernet communication will be searched.

9
MONITOR & SIMULATOR

Item Description
Select network card Select settings related with PC EtherNet port.
Display EtherNet port. Select the required EtherNet port from pull-down menu
Network card
when there are more than one ports.
IP address Display IP address setting of PC.
Subnet mask Display subnet mask setting of PC.
Port No. Specify port No. of KV-5500/5000 or the connected EtherNet unit.
(Execute) Search the PLC connected with EtherNet.
(Stop) Click this button to abort the search.
Result List the search result, and PLC confirmed for connection.
MAC address Display MAC address.
Display PLC model name (KV-5500/5000/3000/1000/700) or EtherNet unit name
Connected model
(KV-LE21V, KV-EP21V).
Display IP address of KV-5500/5000 or the connected EtherNet unit.
In case IP address setting method is "BOOTP", "auto switching of BOOTP°Ž
IP address fixed IP", if IP address is not assignd, unset will be displayed. "IP address
setting" dialog box will be displayed by clicking unset, in which IP address can be
set.
Project name Displays the project name stored in PLC.
Clicked when the PLC to communicate with from the search result is selected.
(Select)
The "Communication setting" dialog box will display IP address and port No.

9-8 - KV STUDIO Ver.6 User’s Manual -

 9-1 About Monitor/Simulator Functions

z IP address setting
Set up unset IP address.

Item Description
MAC address Display MAC address of KV-5500/5000 or KV-EP21V, and KV-LE21V.
Display PLC model name (KV-5500/5000/3000/1000/700) or unit name (KV-
Connected unit
EP21V, KVLE21V).
IP address (mandatory) Set up IP address.
Host name (optional)
Search free IP address
Set up host name.
Click it to display "Search free IP address" dialog box. 9

MONITOR & SIMULATOR

z Search free IP address
Search use condition of IP address in the network.

Item Description
Start IP address Set up the start address of the IP address range to be searched.
End IP address Set up the end address of the IP address range to be searched.
(Search) Click it to search the IP address within the specified range.
(Stop) Click this button to abort the search.
IP address Display the searched IP address.
Display search result of IP address. Unused IP address is displayed as "no
Use condition
response".
Connected model Display PLC model name (KV-5500/5000/3000/1000/700).
Select search result, and click "OK" button, then the selected IP address will be
(OK)
input to the "IP address setting" dialog box.

- KV STUDIO Ver.6 User’s Manual - 9-9

 9-1 About Monitor/Simulator Functions

● Connection test
For the KV-5500/5000/3000/1000/700 whose IP address and port No. have been specified, 揚ing" and"
Tracert" can be used to test whether the connection destination is in normal operation.
The functions of the Ping and Tracert instructions executed via "Communication test" dialog box are the
same as that of the Ping and Tracert instructions executed in MS-DOS program.

Ping: It means that IP data packet is sent to the specified IP address, and is returned by the
connected party normally. In addition, since time is required for response of Ping
instruction, and loss factor of data packet is also displayed, so connection speed can be
predicted from the result.
Tracert: Displays the routing between hosts. The routing status from host to connected router will
be verified, and routing bottleneck can be found according to the response time of each
router.
Execute Ping instruction for connection.

9
MONITOR & SIMULATOR

Display the execution result of Ping or Tracert. Execute Tracert instruction for connection.

„ Bluetooth connection
Establish Bluetooth connection between the KV-BT1 connected with KV-5000 (above Ver.1.1) and CPU
unit (CPU function version above 2.0) and PC.
Connect the USB adapter for Bluetooth connection with PC, and set to Bluetooth communication status.

Check "Bluetooth" radio button in "PC comm port".

9-10 - KV STUDIO Ver.6 User’s Manual -

 9-1 About Monitor/Simulator Functions

Item Description
Input identification name set for the connected KV-BT1. Register after
searching the connection destination. Identification name is "KV-5500/
Identification name 5000/3000 (half-width space) (identification name set via unit editor)".
Identification name can be checked in the access window of KV-5000 (above
Ver.1.1) and CPU unit (CPU function version above 2.0).
Input BD address of the connected KV-BT1. Register after searching the
BD address connection destination. BD address can be checked in the access window of
KV-5000 (above Ver.1.1) and CPU unit (CPU function version above V2.0).
Passkey Input the passkey set for the connected KV-BT1. (default value: 0000)
Display "Search connection destination" dialog box. Execute search to
"Search connection destination"
search the connectable KV-BT1.
The COM port No. used for Bluetooth adapter. Port No. It can also be input
Port No.
manually.
Manual assignment of serial port If checked, COM port No. for Bluetooth communication can be specified.

TIP • Even if KV-BT1 is in unset status in the unit editor, the passkey can still be set to default
value (0000), and Bluetooth connection can be established to do transfer/monitor from
KV STUDIO. Bluetooth communication can be designed at the beginning, even if KV-
9

MONITOR & SIMULATOR

BT1 is added, it is unnecessary to change the original set data, communication is
available via Bluetooth connection directly.

z Search connection destination

Search connection destination of Bluetooth communication.

Item Description
Search the PLC (KV-5000 above Ver.1.1, or KV-5500, KV-3000 above
(Execute search)
Ver.2) connected with KV-BT1.
result List the search result, and confirmed PLC.
Identification name Display the identification name set for KV-BT1.
BD address Display BD address of KV-BT1.
Select the searched PLC, and click "OK" button, "Attribute setting" dialog
OK
box is displayed.

Note
KV-BT1 set to "cannot be found" in the unit editor is not search object.
KV-5500/5000/3000 User Manual

- KV STUDIO Ver.6 User’s Manual - 9-11

 9-1 About Monitor/Simulator Functions

z Attribute setting

Item Description
Identification name Display the identification name set for the selected KV-BT1.
BD address Display BD address of the selected KV-BT1.
Passkey Input the passkey set for the selected KV-BT1. (default value: 0000)
Get from current project Input the passkey set for the KV STUDIO being edited.
Display identification name, BD address, and passkey in the
OK
"Communication setting"

■ Modem communication
9 In modem mode, remote KV-5500/5000/3000/1000/700 can be monitored.
Serial Communication Unit KV-L20V User's Manual
MONITOR & SIMULATOR

Note
Modem communication can not be used for KV-10(16), KV-24(40) and KV-P16.

● Modem transmission mode overview

In modem mode, PLC can be monitored through telephone lines using a modem.
To use modem communication, the modem should be connected to the PC installed with KV STUDIO;
PLC should also be connected to serial communication unit KV-L20V and modem.
Serial Communication Unit KV-L20V User's Manual
CPU unit
PC
KV STUDIO
KV-U7

Telephone line
CC

24V OUT

24VDC
1.8A
0V

N
INPUT
100-240VAC
50/60Hz
Modem Modem
0.98A

KV-5500/5000/3000/
KV-U7 KV-L20V
1000/700

● Modem Initialization
To communicate, you should first set the initialization instruction of modem and type of the telephone
line.
The should be set in "PC modem setting" and "KV-L20V/R modem setting" separately.
KV-L20V User's Manual

9-12 - KV STUDIO Ver.6 User’s Manual -

 9-1 About Monitor/Simulator Functions

PC modem setting
Click the "PC modem settingî button in the "Communication setting" dialog box.

Item Description
Select modem model.
• When registering a new initialization instruction, enter the initialization
instruction, and click the "Register" button.
Model

9
• If a modem is already registered, please select the modem that is connected.
Modem
• To delete a registered modem, select the modem to be deleted, and click
setting
the "Delete" button.

MONITOR & SIMULATOR

Initialization Enters the modem initialization instruction. The initialization instruction
command varies with the type of modem.
Register Registers the input model and initialization instruction.
Delete Deletes the selected model and initialization instruction.
"Pulse/Dial (pulse/tone)" can be selected for telephone line type.
Telephone line Pulse: To select pulse mode and ignore tone mode.
Tone: To select dial line and ignore pulse.
Outside line Select outside line dialing through "Yes/No".
Outside
Number for When outside line is used, a number should be appended to the number for
line dial
external dialing outside line dialing.
Modem
When dial connection is used, a wait time (0 to 120 seconds) should be set.
connection Dial wait time
Default is 60 seconds.
setting
COM port Sets communication interface No.
Sets the communication speed for communicating with the modem. 9600, 38400,
Baud rate
57600 and 115200 can be selected. The default is "38400".

Note
If the response time of the other party's modem is too long, but the dial wait time set
is too short, then wire-break will occur sometimes. Long wait time must be set
according to the response time of modem.

- KV STUDIO Ver.6 User’s Manual - 9-13

 9-1 About Monitor/Simulator Functions

TIP • About initialization command

The AT command can be used to control operation of the modem. All AT command are
entered with a prefix "AT".
KV STUDID and the KV-L20V use AT command to control a modem.
When using a modem, you can set it to correctly communicate with the other party's
modem using the AT command. This setting is called an "initialization command". The
initialization command varies with the modem settings.
• About the initialization command setting
Initialization command have been pre-registered for the following models. To set the
initialization command, you can simply select the model name from the "Models" pull-
down menu.
Type Vendor Model KV-L20V side PC side
AIWA PV-BW5610 O O
I/O Data Devices DFML-560E(MR) O O
Box PLC
OMRON ME5614D(2) O O
Melco IGM-B56KH O O
AIWA PV-JF56E6 - O
9 Card PLC
OMRON ME5614C/W - O

Initialization command should be registered for the models that not registered. It can be
MONITOR & SIMULATOR

registered through the following procedure.

Enter the "AT&F" command for returning the modem to its defaults, then check the details that
are different from the factory defaults, and enter the initialization command. Several initialization
command can be specified through entering desired command continuously.
Default settings "Echoback OFF", "CD normal ON", "Dial tone detection ON" are used in the
following example.
AT&FE0&C1X3

Busy tone
Turn on CD only when the carrier is detected.
Echoback OFF
Restore default setting

• General AT command
AT command vary with types of modem sometimes. Be sure to check the AT command
listed in the User's Manual of the modem you are using.
AT command Description
E0 Echoback OFF
Q0 Returns result code.
V1 Returns result code in English words.
&C1 Turns CD ON only when the carrier is detected.
&S0 DR normal ON.
&D2 Disconnect the line when ER changes ON -> OFF.
¥Q3 Performs flow control through RC-CS
¥N3 Sets to the auto-search mode.
X3 Detects busy tone (not dial detection)
¥J0 Sets to fixed terminal speed.
S0=2 Automatic message receiving after 2 calls
%C3 Automatically selects MNP Class 5, V.42bis.

9-14 - KV STUDIO Ver.6 User’s Manual -

 9-1 About Monitor/Simulator Functions

To set up KV-L20V/R modem setting

Note
Please confirm the state when monitor is stopped (non-communication state).

Click "KV-L20V/R modem setting" button in the "Communication setting" dialog box.

Item
Select modem model.
Description
9
• When registering a new initialization command, enter the initialization

MONITOR & SIMULATOR

command, and click the "Register" button.
Model
• If a modem is already registered, please select the modem that is connected.
Modem • To delete a registered modem, select the modem to be deleted, and click
setting the "Delete" button.
Initialization Enters the modem initialization command. The initialization command varies
command with the type of modem.
(Register) Registers the input model and initialization command.
(Delete) Deletes the selected model and initialization command.
"Pulse/Dial (pulse/tone)" can be selected for telephone line type.
Telephone line Pulse: To select pulse mode and ignore tone mode.
Tone: To select dial line and ignore pulse.
Outside line Select outside line dialing through "Yes/No".
Outside
Number for outside When outside line is used, a number should be appended to the number for
line dial
line dialing outside dialing.
Modem
When dial connection is used, a wait time (0 to 120 seconds) should be set.
connection Dial wait time
Default is 60 seconds.
setting
COM port Sets communication interface No.
Transfers the settings to KV-L20V/R.
(Transfer to KV-L20V/R)
After setup, you must transfer the setting to KV- L20V/R.

Note
The setting of serial communication unit KV-L20V is actually stored in KV-5500/5000/
3000/1000/700 PLC. If the preset combination of KV-L20V/R and KV-5500/5000/3000/
1000/700 PLC has been changed, then the modem on KV-L20V/R side must be set
again.

- KV STUDIO Ver.6 User’s Manual - 9-15

 9-1 About Monitor/Simulator Functions

● Communication with modem mode

If the PLC is to be monitored remotely via telephone line, then modem mode should be set, and the
modem connected with the other party should be in telephone communication state.
Be sure to select the "modem" radio button on the "PLC side communication port" tab in the
"Communication setting" dialog box.

Note
If modem communication mode is used, then the modem is connected to the serial communication
unit KV-L20V on the monitor PLC when the modem is connected to PC. In addtion, modem
initialization command and telephone line type, etc., must be also set in advance.
"Serial connection", Page 9-5
"Modem Initialization", Page 9-12

When communication is finished,

select "Monitor/simulator(N)" "Stop monitor(E)" or "Return to Editor(X)", from the menu, then
disconnect the telephone line and end communication.

9 Other procedure Stop monitor.

• (Red) button
MONITOR & SIMULATOR

• Press Shift key+ F4 key

Return to Editor
• Click button.
• Press Ctrl key+ F1 key

TIP When communication starts again, open the "Tel. No. setting" dialog box in the "Monitor/
Simulator(N)" "Monitor model(B)", and click the "Connect" button.

When other party's address is to be registered

The "Phone number setting" dialog box is displayed for the first time, there will be no dial destination in
the "Dial destination" pull-down list. The other party's address should be registered according to the
following procedure.

1 Enter other party's address in the "Destination" in "Tel No. setting" dialogue box, and enter
other party's phone number in "Telephone number".

Enter the name of the

connection partner.

Enter the phone number

of the connection partner.

Item Description
call to Enter the name of the connection partner. One phone number can be registered for 1 direction.
Enter the phone number of the connection partner.
Telephone
When outside line dialing mode is used, only the telephone number of other party needs to be
number
entered without entering the outside line number.

9-16 - KV STUDIO Ver.6 User’s Manual -

 9-1 About Monitor/Simulator Functions

2 Click the "Register" button.

The other party's address entered can be registered.

■ Routing setting
Set when connecting through the VT3/VT2 series connected to PLC and FL-net instead of directly
connecting PLC to PC.

Note
Routing connection mode cannot be used for KV-10(16), KV-24(40) and KV-P16.

In the "Communication setting" dialog box, select "Routing setting" checkbox, and click the "Detail"
button.

MONITOR & SIMULATOR

Item Description
Communication destination Selects the PLC model to be connected to PC.
Via VT/DT (2-port function) Selected when VT/DT routing (2-port function) is used.
VT/DT model Selects the model to be routed.
Connection to KV Selects the model to be routed and PLC connection method.
FL-net via Checked when connected through VT/DT routing.
Routing unit select Selects the unit to be routed.
Reads the unit list from the unit configuration KV-5500/5000/3000 to be
(Update list)
routed.
Communication destination Specifies the node No. of connection equipment (KV-5000 or KV-FL20V)
node No. to be routed.
EtherNet/IP Check it for EtherNet/IP connection.
Select route unit Select the unit routed.
"Update list" Read the unit list from the unit configuration of routed KV-5500/5000/3000.
Communication target IP
Specify IP address of the route connection unit (KV-5500 or KV-EP21V).
address
Communication route Displays the connection state of PLC connected to PC.
Selects the communication method for communicating with the directly
(Communication method)
connected equipment to be routed.
Under current setting condition, state of PLC to PLC connection can be tested.
(Connection test) If connection fails, please verify communication setting and cable
connection status.

- KV STUDIO Ver.6 User’s Manual - 9-17

 9-1 About Monitor/Simulator Functions

Global device comment transfer range setting

Monitor/Simulator(N) Setup communication(T) Setup transfer range of global device cmnts (T)

When supported model is KV-5500/5000/3000, you can set transfer range of global device comment
when a project is transferred.
From the menu, select "Monitor/Simulator(N)" "Setup communication(T)" "Setup transfer
range of global device cmnts(T)", the "Global device comment transfer range setting" dialog box pops
up.

9
MONITOR & SIMULATOR

Item Description
All range When this radio button is selected, all the global device comments will be transferred.
Selected range When this radio button is selected, you can select a range.
Device Specifies a device type in combination box. Types of all global devices can be specifed.
Start Specifies the leading No. of comment transfer device.
Finish Specifies the end No. of comment transfer device.
(Read setting
Reads the device range after "Save setting value".
value)
(Save setting
Saves the device range specified by "Specified range".
value)
(Clear setting
To clear all specified devices, select "full range" radio button.
value)

9-18 - KV STUDIO Ver.6 User’s Manual -

 9-1 About Monitor/Simulator Functions

Comment transfer setup

To set the comment range transferred to PLC.

Not displayed when "KV-5500", "KV-5000", "KV-3000", "KV-1000" KV-700/700+M" are

selected as the supported models.

Note
• When transferring program and comment to KV-10 (16), KV-24 (40), KV-P16, be sure
to set a comment transfer range.
• The number of comments that can be transferred are as follows.When the set
number of comments exceeds the number of comments that can be transferred,
the number of comments that can be transferred will be transferred to host
according to the set device list sequence.
Supported model Number of comments that can be transferred
KV-24(40)
KV-10(16) 1000
KV-P16 9
• Comment type is selected through "Select comment" under "Show mode setting"

MONITOR & SIMULATOR

in "Options", and the selected comment will be transferred to PLC.

From the menu, select "Monitor/Simulator (N)" "Setup communicationg(T)" "Setup cmnts
transfer(T)", the "Comment transfer range setting" dialog box pops up.

Specify the type and range of device

to be transferred.

Click to specify all comments that are

entered in the ladder program.

Display the number of comments set currently.

- KV STUDIO Ver.6 User’s Manual - 9-19

 9-1 About Monitor/Simulator Functions

Monitor Mode KV-5500/5000/3000 KV-1000 KV-700 KV-P16 KV-10/16/24/40

"Monitor/Simulator(N)" "Monitor model(B)" Ctrl + Shift + F3

The ladder program being edited is converted to monitor mode in stead of transferring to PLC. Before
operation, please connect PLC to PC, and set it to communication enabled mode.

For the monitor, see "9-2 Monitor Function", Page 9-38

.
From the menu, select "Monitor/Simulator (N)" "Monitor mode(B)", and switch to monitor mode.

Other procedure From the pull-down menu of the mode bar, select "Monitor".

9 ● When the project being edited is identical to that of PLC

MONITOR & SIMULATOR

Immediately switches to monitor mode.

● When the project being edited is different from that of PLC

The dialog box for confirming project transfer is
displayed.
It will switch to monitor mode when the ladder
program being edited is different from the ladder
program running on PLC after "Monitor mode" is selected.
When "PLC transfer monitor mode" is selected, the "Program transfer" dialog box will appear.
Please select the project to be transferred, then click the "Run" button.
"Transfer to PLC -> Monitor Mode", Page 9-20
Select "Cancel" to stop switching to monitor mode.

Note
For "Positioning parameter setting", even if project is different, confirmation dialog
box will not be displayed.

Transfer to PLC -> Monitor Mode KV-5500/5000/3000 KV-1000 KV-700 KV-P16 KV-10/16/24/40

"Monitor/Simulator(N)" "Transfer to PLC -> Monitor Mode(C)" Ctrl + F8

The ladder program generated from the Editor is transferred to PLC after being converted machine
code to PLC, then the unit switches to monitor mode. Before operation, please connect PLC to PC, and
set it to communication enabled mode.

For the monitor, see "Monitor Function", Page 9-38.

9-20 - KV STUDIO Ver.6 User’s Manual -

 9-1 About Monitor/Simulator Functions

1 From the menu, select "Monitor/Simulator(N)" "PLC transfer -> Monitor Model(C)".

When normal conversion fails, an error prompt message will be displayed.

Check error content displayed in the output window, correct ladder program, then transfer the
program again.
"Output Window", Page 6-12

2 Specify the program content to be transferred

"Transfer program" dialog box appears.

■ When CPU unit is KV-5500/5000/3000

Transfer project info

Display area

MONITOR & SIMULATOR

Item Description
The item selected by the checkbox is transferred to PLC.
Transfer item In addition, the detailed information of the selected item is displayed in transfer item
information area on the right side of dialog box.
Transfer item info Displays the detailed setting information of the selected transfer item.
display area Only item name will be displayed for the items for which detailed setting is not needed.
(select All) Deselect the checkbox of all transferred items.
Cancel all Deselect the checkbox of all transferred items.
Clear module/macro in After this checkbox is selected, the module/macro written into PLC will be cleared
PLC before transfer, then the project will be transferred.
Change to PROGRAM When this radio button is selected, PLC is temporarily switched to PROGRAM
mode and transfer mode, then the project will be transferred.
After this radio button is selected, RUN state will be kept, and a project will be
Transfer in RUN mode transferred to PLC.
When the program is transferred in RUN state, some contents of "Unit setting info"
and "CPU system setting" cannot be transferred*..

*In CPU system setting, the following items are not transferred.
• Module execution sequence setting
• Local/global assignment setting
• CPU unit buffer info setting
• Operation setting during error
"CPU System Setting", Page 6-43

- KV STUDIO Ver.6 User’s Manual - 9-21

 9-1 About Monitor/Simulator Functions

● Transfer item "Global device comment"

Item Description
All range When this radio button is selected, all global device comments will be transferred to PLC.

9 Selected range
When this radio button is selected, the range of the global device comments to be
transferred to PLC can be set.
When the cell is double clicked, a combo box will be displayed.
MONITOR & SIMULATOR

Device
Please directly enter device type or select from pull-down menu.
Start Specifies the leading No. of range specifying.
Finish Specifying the end No. of range specifying.
(Clear setting value) Clears all items entered through range specifying.

● Transfer item "Program"

Item Description
Transfers the module/macro of the selected checkbox to PLC.
(checkbox)
When "Clear module/ macro in PLC" is selected, then checkbox cannot be cancelled.
Module/macro name Displays all modules/macros registered to the item being edited.
Type Displays types of the modules/macros.
(select All) Selects checkbox of all items to be transferred.
(Cancel all) Deselect the checkbox of all items to be transferred.

9-22 - KV STUDIO Ver.6 User’s Manual -

 9-1 About Monitor/Simulator Functions

● Transfer item "Logging/tracing setting info"

Item Description
(checkbox) Transfers the logging/tracing setting with the ID No. of the selected checkbox to PLC.
ID
Type
Displays the ID No. of the registered logging/tracing setting.
Displays the type of the registered logging/tracing setting.
9

MONITOR & SIMULATOR

File Comments Displays file comment set via "logging/tracing setup" dialog box.
(select All) Select the checkbox for all items to be transferred.
(Cancel all) Deselects the checkbox for all the items to be transferred.

z Transfer item "EtherNet function setting information"

Item Description
(checkbox) For the unit with this checkbox checked, its mail setting, FTP client, and simple
PLC link are transferred to PLC.
Unit No. Display the unit No. with EtherNet function.
Unit name Display the unit name with EtherNet function.
(select All) Select the checkbox for all items to be transferred.
(Cancel all) Deselects the checkbox for all the items to be transferred.

- KV STUDIO Ver.6 User’s Manual - 9-23

 9-1 About Monitor/Simulator Functions

● Transfer item "File register setting"

Item Description
Setting of the file register with the No. selected in checkbox is transferred PLC
9 (checkbox)
memory card.
No. Displays file register setting No.
MONITOR & SIMULATOR

File Comments Displays the file comment set by "File register setting" dialog box.
(select All) Selects the checkbox for all items to be transferred.
(Cancel all) Deselects the checkbox for all the items to be transferred.

● Transfer item "Positioning unit parameter"

Item Description
(Select positioning unit) Displays the "Select unit" dialog box. *

*One of KV-H20G, K-VH20S and KV-H40S is connected to CPU unit.

9-24 - KV STUDIO Ver.6 User’s Manual -

 9-1 About Monitor/Simulator Functions

■ When CPU unit is KV-1000/700/700+M/P16/10/16/24/40

Check the checkbox of the item to be transferred to the PLC. If the PLC
to which the item is to be transferred is in RUN mode, whether to switch
to PROGRAM mode, or write under RUN should be selected.

• Select "Transfer in PROGRAM mode"

PLC operation is stopped, and program is written in PROG mode.
• Select "Transfer program in RUN mode"
Ladder program is written into PLC in RUN mode. Before transfer is
started, the program executed will be continued until writing is finished.

Caution
Writing in RUN will be under great risk due to connection of PLC controller. Be
careful during operation!
KV-5500/5000/3000 series User's Manual, "About writing in RUN mode"
9

MONITOR & SIMULATOR

3 After transfer is finished normally, the unit will return to monitor mode automatically.
When there is no difference between PLC program and the program to be transferred, writing will not
be performed, and the unit will directly switch to monitor mode.

Note
The disabled macros and the macros that are not called cannot be transferred to
PLC.

- KV STUDIO Ver.6 User’s Manual - 9-25

 9-1 About Monitor/Simulator Functions

Read from PLC -> Monitor mode KV-5500/5000/3000 KV-1000 KV-700 KV-P16 KV-10/16/24/40

"Monitor/Simulator(N)" "Read from PLC -> Monitor Model(M)" Ctrl + F1

Transfer ladder program in PC to PLC, then switch to monitor mode. This can be used to check
whether PLC is connected correctly. Perform the next operation from the Editor.

Once a ladder program is read, it will be read into a temporary job folder.
If exiting the Editor without saving, it will be deleted. To save a ladder program into PLC, you
should rename it, then save.

Note
When starting monitor, you should correctly set PLC communication parameters.
"Communication Setting", Page 9-4

9 1 Select "Monitor/Simulator(N)" "Read from PLC -> Monitor Model(M)" from the editing
program menu.
MONITOR & SIMULATOR

The "Transfer program" dialog box appears.

2 Select items to be read.

The "Read PLC" dialog box is displayed. Specify the items to be read
from PLC.

Note
• When "KV-5500", "KV-5000", "KV-3000", "KV-1000" or "KV-700/700+m" is selected
as the supported model, be sure to select the "Unit setting info" and "Program" in
the read items.
• When "KV-P16", "KV-10 (16)" or "KV-24(40)" is selected as the supported model, be
sure to select the "Program" in the read items.

3 After transfer is finished normally, the mode will return to monitor mode automatically.

9-26 - KV STUDIO Ver.6 User’s Manual -

 9-1 About Monitor/Simulator Functions

Transfer to PLC KV-5500/5000/3000 KV-1000 KV-700 KV-P16 KV-10/16/24/40

"Monitor/Simulator(N)" "Transfer to PLC(W)"

The ladder program written through the Unit Editor is transferred after being converted into mechanical
code. After transfer is finished, the unit will return to Editor. Before operation, please connect PLC to
PC, and set it to communication enabled mode.

1 From the menu, select "Monitor/Simulator(N)" "Transfer to PLC(W)"

TIP If a conversion error occurs, then "Conversion error" message will be displayed. Transfer will stop
abnormally.
Check error content displayed in the output window, correct ladder program, then transfer the
program again.
"Output Window", Page 6-12

2 Specify the program content to be transferred 9

The "Transfer program" dialog box is displayed.

MONITOR & SIMULATOR

Specify the items to transfer to the PLC. If PLC to
which a program is to be transferred is RUN mode,
then you should select whether to transfer in PROG
mode, or write the program during PLC operation.

• Select "Transfer in PROGRAM mode"

PLC operation is stopped, and ladder program is
written in PROG mode.
• Select "Transfer program in RUN mode"
In PLC operation state, "Writing in RUN" will be performed for writing ladder program only. Before
transfer is started, the program executed will be continued until writing is finished.

Caution
Writing in RUN will be under great risk due to connection of PLC controller. Be
careful during operation!Be careful during operation!
KV-5500/5000/3000 series User's Manual, "About writing in RUN mode"

Note
The disabled macros and the macros that are not called cannot be transferred to PLC.

3 Return to the Editor mode when transfer is finished normally.

- KV STUDIO Ver.6 User’s Manual - 9-27

 9-1 About Monitor/Simulator Functions

Read from PLC KV-5500/5000/3000 KV-1000 KV-700 KV-P16 KV-10/16/24/40

"Monitor/Simulator(N)" "Read from PLC(R)" Ctrl + F5

The ladder program transferred to PLC is read in to the Editor. Before operation, please connect PLC to
PC, and set to communication enabled state.

From the menu, select "Monitor/Simulator (N)" "Read from PLC (R)", and select the data to be read.

Verify/Synchronize PLC KV-5500/5000/3000 KV-1000 KV-700 KV-P16 KV-10/16/24/40

"Monitor/Simulator(N)" "Verify with PLC/sychronize(V)"

Verify the items currently stored in PLC and the items in the Editor.
Before operation, please connect PLC to PC, and set to communication enabled state.

9 From the menu, select "Monitor/Simulator (N)" "Verify with PLC/synchronize(V)", and verify the
item being edited and the item stored in PLC. The verification result will be displayed in the "Verify/
synchronize PLC" dialog box.
MONITOR & SIMULATOR

Item Description
Verifies the items checked in the "Items of current project" and the items in PLC, and
(Verify) displays the verification result.
Detailed verification result will be displayed in the output window.
(Write to PLC) Writes the items checked in "Items of current project" into PLC.
(Read from PLC) Reads the items checked in "Current project" to PLC.
Update all items displayed to the latest information. For the items with different final
(Obtain latest info)
updating times, verification result in the "verification" column will be cleared.
Displays every project currently edited using KV STUDIO.
Current project's
After the checkbox is selected, it will change to the operation object when "verify",
item
"Write PLC" or "Read PLC" button is clicked.

9-28 - KV STUDIO Ver.6 User’s Manual -

 9-1 About Monitor/Simulator Functions

Item Description
Displays the final updating time of every item currently edited using KV STUDIO.
Last update date When changed according to the content transferred last time, the cell of
corresponding item will change to red.
Displays the verification result. The items displayed as OK are matched through the
Verify project being edited in KV STUDIO and the project in PLC.
Double-click on the cell to be verified to verify the project on line double-clicked.
Items in PLC Displays every item of the project stored in PLC.
Displays the final updating time of every item of the project transferred to PLC.
When the content does not match the content last transferred, cell of corresponding item will change
Last update date
to red. (When several persons join in the design work, changes from different PCs will exist.)
In addition, when change is made in access window of CPU unit, "changed in PLC" is displayed.
(select All) Select all checkboxes in "Items of current project".
(Cancel all) Deselect all checkboxes in "Items of current project".
Hide verification OK After the checkbox is selected, the items whose verification column changes to OK is
rung not displayed.
Displays the space of PLC program memory area.
(Check program
Click the "Verify space of program memory area" button, the "Check program memory
memory capacity)
capacity" dialog box will pop up. 9

MONITOR & SIMULATOR

To edit using right-click menu
Through right-clicking the list in "PLC Verification/synchronization " dialog box, you can edit the
following items.
Item Description
Delite modules without execution Deletes operation sequence unassigned modules in PLC. (unassigned
sequence assigned* macros)
Captures and displays the final updating person of the data in the selected PLC.
Display the last user changed data Please set the final updating person in the sequence of "Options" -
of PLC "System setting" - "Set the sender of the transmission data when
sending to PLC".

* A right-clicked item, only displayed in the case of operation sequence unassigned module.
"Operation sequence unassigned module", Page 9-30

● Check program memory capacity

Click the "Check program memory capacity" button in the "PLC Verification/synchronization " dialog
box. The "Verify program capacity" dialog box will appear.

- KV STUDIO Ver.6 User’s Manual - 9-29

 9-1 About Monitor/Simulator Functions

Item Description
Before operation, please connect PLC to PC, and set to communication
Program memory capacity
enabled state.
Clears all contents stored in PLC connected (global device comments,
(Clear all program memory)
global labels, CPU system settings, ladder programs). *
(Close) Closes the "Verify program memory space" dialog box.
*After all contents of the program memory are cleared, a "no ladder programî error occurs in PLC.

■ Operation sequence unassigned module

When transferring different items to PLC with transferred items, if "Clear modules/macros in PLC" is not
checked in "Transfer program" dialog box, then original modules in PLC will be reserved in PLC as
"Operation sequence unassigned modules".

9
Transfer
MONITOR & SIMULATOR

Before transfer: Project 1

Project A ‫࡮ޓ‬Project 1
‫࡮ޓ‬Project A ‫࡮ޓ‬Project 2
‫࡮ޓ‬Project B ‫࡮ޓ‬Project 3

After transfer:
Project 1
‫࡮ޓ‬Project 1
‫࡮ޓ‬Project 2
‫࡮ޓ‬Project 3
‫࡮ޓ‬Project A
Operation sequence
‫࡮ޓ‬Project B
unassigned modules in PLC

● Deleting execution sequence unassigned module

"Operate sequence unassigned module" can be deleted only using one of the following methods.
• Check "Clear modules/macros in PLC" in the "Transfer program" dialog box, then transfer the items again.
• From the right-click menu on the list of "PLC Verification/synchronization" dialog box, select "Delite
modules without execution sequence assigned".

● Reading operation sequence unassigned module

The operation sequence unassigned module can be read only through the "PLC Verification/
synchronization" dialog box.
Select the checkbox for the operation sequence unassigned module to be read through the "PLC
Verification/synchronization" dialog box, then click then "Read from PLC" button.
The operation sequence unassigned module is read as a standby module.

9-30 - KV STUDIO Ver.6 User’s Manual -

 9-1 About Monitor/Simulator Functions

Verifying PLC KV-5500/5000/3000 KV-1000 KV-700 KV-P16 KV-10/16/24/40

"Monitor/Simulator(N)" "Verify with PLC(V)"

The ladder program currently stored in PLC and the program contents in the Editor are verified.
Before operation, please connect PLC to PC, and set to communication enabled state.

From the menu, select "Monitor/Simulator (N)" "Verify with PLC(V)" and select the items to verified
from the "Transfer program" dialog box.

The verification result will be displayed in the "Verify" dialog box.

In addition, the verification result of each item will be output to the
output window.

MONITOR & SIMULATOR

Start Monitor KV-5500/5000/3000 KV-1000 KV-700 KV-P16 KV-10/16/24/40

(green) "Monitor/Simulator(N)" "Start Monitor(S)" F4

From the menu, select "Monitor/Simulator (N)" "Start monitor(S)" to start communication with PLC.
The operation conditions will be displayed in various windows.

Other procedure From the pull-down menu of the mode bar, select "Monitor".

Note
In Monitor running process, PLC cable should not be disconnected. If communication
error occurs, PC operation may be unstable.

Stop Monitor KV-5500/5000/3000 KV-1000 KV-700 KV-P16 KV-10/16/24/40

(red) "Monitor/Simulator(N)" "Stop Monitor(E)" Shift + F4

From the menu, select "Monitor/Simulator(N)" "Stop monitor (E)' to stop PLC communication.

Online Edit KV-5500/5000/3000 KV-1000 KV-700 KV-P16 KV-10/16/24/40

*For details about online edit, see "9-10 Online Edit", Page 9-97.

- KV STUDIO Ver.6 User’s Manual - 9-31

 9-1 About Monitor/Simulator Functions

Simulator KV-5500/5000/3000 KV-1000 KV-700 KV-P16 KV-10/16/24/40

"Monitor/Simulator(N)" "Simulator(L)" Ctrl + F2

For details about simulator, see "9-11 Simulator", Page 9-101.

Set up Simulator KV-5500/5000/3000 KV-1000 KV-700 KV-P16 KV-10/16/24/40

"Monitor/Simulator(N)" "Set up simulator(A)"

"Simulator setting" can be selected only in simulator operation mode.

Scan time and waiting time of setting simulator operation are set.

9
MONITOR & SIMULATOR

Item Description
Simulator scan time can be freely set.
A scan period of Ladder can be simulated via pre-set scan time. Using the function,
actual device scan time, simulate execution or Ladder can be simulated with actual
device scan time.

Excute scan Please check "Set to fixed scanning" and specify scanning time in the 0- 5000 range.

Note If the above checkbox is not selected, the value set in "Execute
scan" will become actual scanning execution time.

Scan time of Simulator execution will vary with ladder program length and PC performance.
wait time If scanning time is too short, it is difficult to debug. This needs use of waiting time
setting to extend scanning time.
Using watchdog timer, you can monitor arithmetic operation blocking or program
WDT time execution time overtime due to PLC or program abnormity. Using monitor timer,
you can test infinite loop in the program. The default value is 3000s.

9-32 - KV STUDIO Ver.6 User’s Manual -

 9-1 About Monitor/Simulator Functions

Real-time Chart Monitor KV-5500/5000/3000 KV-1000 KV-700 KV-P16 KV-10/16/24/40

"Monitor/simulator(N)" "Real-time chart monitor(H)"

Real-time Chart Monitor can be started when KV STUDIO is in Editor mode/Monitor mode/Online editor
mode.
Besides, even if KV STUDIO is not started, real-time Chart Monitor can be also separately started.

● Start from KV STUDIO

From the menu, select "Monitor/Simulator (N)" "Real-time Chart Monitor (H)", and the real-time
Chart Monitor will be started.

Other procedure In Register Monitor window and monitor window, from the right-click menu, click "Real-time
Chart Monitor (H)", the device registered to Register Monitor window and monitor window is
started in the status of registering to real-time Chart Monitor.

9
● In the case of separate start

MONITOR & SIMULATOR

Install KV STUDIO (Ver.4.00 above).
Double click the shortcut icon of real-time Time Chart Monitor.

For details, see "9-6 Real-time Chart Monitor", Page 9-55

- KV STUDIO Ver.6 User’s Manual - 9-33

 9-1 About Monitor/Simulator Functions

High-speed Time Chart Monitor KV-5500/5000/3000 KV-1000 KV-700 KV-P16 KV-10/16/24/40

"Monitor/Simulator(N)" "High-speed Time Chart Monitor(H)"

When starting high speed Time Chart Monitor program, the "Register Monitor" window will be
displayed.So, the device monitored via high speed Time Chart Monitor program should be registered to
Register Monitor program in advance.

1 Display Register Monitor and register the device to be displayed.

"9-3 Register Monitor", Page 9-45

2 Select "Monitor/Simulator(N)" "High-speed Time Chart Monitor(H)" from the menu.

The devices registered to Register Monitor are automatically displayed according to register sequence
from list top, maximal 16 devices will be displayed.
9
MONITOR & SIMULATOR

TIP For High-speed Time Chart Monitor, see "9-7 High-speed Time Chart Monitor", Page 9-
78.

Register monitor window KV-5500/5000/3000 KV-1000 KV-700 KV-P16 KV-10/16/24/40

Monitor/Simulator(N) Registration monitor window (G)

Multiple devices can be registered in register monitor window, and current value and time curve of the
registered device can be displayed or its current value can be changed.

For device register methods and register monitor details, please see "9-3 Register
Monitor", Page 9-45.

Note
Register monitor window can be selected from the menu only in monitor, simulator or
online Editor.

From the menu, select "Monitor/Simulator (N)" "Register monitor window (G)" to display register
monitor window.

Every operation will open a new window.

9-34 - KV STUDIO Ver.6 User’s Manual -

 9-1 About Monitor/Simulator Functions

Batch Monitor Window KV-5500/5000/3000 KV-1000 KV-700 KV-P16 KV-10/16/24/40

Monitor/simulator(N) Batch monitor window (K)

For batch monitor operation details, see "9-4 Batch Monitoring", Page 9-50.

Note
Batch monitor window can be selected on the menu only in monitor, simulator or
online Editor.

When selecting "Monitor/Simulator(N)" "Batch monitor window (K)" from the menu, batch monitor
window will appear.

MONITOR & SIMULATOR

TIP Every operation will open a new window.

Batch Change Window KV-5500/5000/3000 KV-1000 KV-700 KV-P16 KV-10/16/24/40

Monitor/simulator(N) Batch change window (D)

You can specify a range, read in batch the current values of the devices registered to window from
PLC, make change and then write into PLC. You can also store the setting of the device read or read
the setting of the device stored.

For details, see "9-9 Batch Change", Page 9-88.

When selecting "Monitor/Simulator(N)" "Batch change window (D)" from the menu, batch change
window appears.

"Batch change" window only displays 1 screen.

- KV STUDIO Ver.6 User’s Manual - 9-35

 9-1 About Monitor/Simulator Functions

Display/hide Watch Window KV-5500/5000/3000 KV-1000 KV-700 KV-P16 KV-10/16/24/40

Monitor/Simulator(N) Display/hide monitor window(N) Alt + 3

Display current value of all devices contained in ladder program block of the selected cell selected via
editor.
When selecting other ladder program blocks, the device in monitor window will also be changed
accordingly, and the display will be updated.

Note
Watch window can be selected from the menu only in monitor, simulator or online
editor status.

When selecting multiple ladder program blocks, the current value of all devices will be also
displayed.

9
From the menu, select "Monitor/Simulator(N)" "Display /hide watch window (N)", to switch between
Display/Hide of the watch window.
When ID is selected : displayed
MONITOR & SIMULATOR

When ID is not selected : not displayed

WatchWindow

Unit Monitor KV-5500/5000/3000 KV-1000 KV-700 KV-P16 KV-10/16/24/40

Unlike the register monitor and batch monitor, Unit Editor will display the units that meet the values of
the relays and DMs to be monitored.
"9-8 Unit Monitor", Page 9-86

Custom Monitor KV-5500/5000/3000 KV-1000 KV-700 KV-P16 KV-10/16/24/40

This facilitates the user to freely display device Register Monitor window.
"9-5 Custom Monitor", Page 9-53

9-36 - KV STUDIO Ver.6 User’s Manual -

 9-1 About Monitor/Simulator Functions

Command monitor KV-5500/5000/3000 KV-1000 KV-700 KV-P16 KV-10/16/24/40

Monitor/simulator(N) Command monitor(Y) PIDAT(P)

PIDAT command selected in the editor can be used to monitor the device used. The used device can
be monitored after comments are added on PIDAT commands, such as the measured value, and set
value, so as to confirm the operating status.
PIDAT command can be used in CPU unit with CPU function version above 2.0.

Command monitor can be selected from the menu only in the monitor, simulator or online
edit process.

Select "Monitor/simulator(n)" "Command monitor(y)" "PIDAT(P)" from the menu, start PIDAT
monitor.

For more information about PIDAT command, see KV-5500/5000/3000/1000 Series Command MONITOR & SIMULATOR
Reference Manual.

- KV STUDIO Ver.6 User’s Manual - 9-37

 9-2 Monitor Function
This section describes the monitor functions and how to use these functions.

Function Overview

Monitor function allows to compile ladder programs made by Editor, transfer to PLC and check its
operation status.Ladder programs in PLC can be also transferred to PC to verify their operation status
by reserved compilation
Monitor function allows to execute the following operations.

• Real time verification of operation status of ladder programs via ladder or high speed Time Chart.
• Switching of PLC operation mode.
• Forced set/ reset of I/O contacts via Monitor.
• Easy to modify setting value and current value of device data and timer/counter.
• To save/read current value and range of the specified device to floppy disk or memory card.
• To restore part of devices to default value.

9 Restrictions ON Monitor

• After stopping Monitor, PLCs and PLCs displayed in other Monitor windows can not be connected.
MONITOR & SIMULATOR

Normal operation fails due to mismatched contents between ladder program monitor on PC and
ladder program on PLC side.
• If devices to be monitored are too many, operation will be slow.
• According to PLC scanning time, Time Chart in Register Monitor is not operated.
• During execution of high speed Time Chart Monitor, other windows cannot perform monitor function.

Communication with PLC

To communicate with PLC, COM interface and baud rate of PC to connect PLC must be set.

TIP The setting content is stored in KV STUDIO, and can be reflected during the next start of KV
STUDIO.
For communication with PLC, see "Communication Setting", Page 9-4.

Precautions when Using Serial Ports

• Before starting Monitor, you must connect PLC and PC with connection cables and then confirm whether
or not monitor port is set correctly. If incorrectly, error will be displayed during Monitor start, Monitor
function cannot be executed.
"Communication Setting", Page 9-4
• During Monitor execution, PLC cables can not be disconnected. Otherwise, communication error will
occur and PC operation is not stable.
• Communicate is not allowed in a place exposed to severe noise.Otherwise communication error will
occur.
• When writing program, pulling out connecting line will lead to communication abort.PLC program will
be destroyed. Keep in mind!
• When communication errors occur frequency, baud rate must be adjusted finely.

9-38 - KV STUDIO Ver.6 User’s Manual -

 9-2 Monitor Function

Precautions when Using USB Ports

• KV-5500/5000/3000/1000/700 PLC should be turned on when USB cable is connected.

• When using KV- 1000 PLC with USB interface, PLC can be inserted directly into USB port on PC.
Do not use USB HUB.
• For communication break caused by communication instability due to noise, you can pull out PLC
USB cable from PC and then insert again. For communication instability, freguent noise, ferrite core
should be wound on USB cables. Winding one circle of ferrite core on USB cable will bring a better
effect.

Various Monitor Functions

Register Monitor

Applied to register various devices, display current value and Time Chart of the device registered. This
Monitor can enable batch verification of various devices.
For Register Monitor, see "9-3 Register Monitor", Page 9-45.
9

MONITOR & SIMULATOR

Batch Monitor

Batch Monitor, can enable the batch display of current value, contact ON/ OFF status and comments
registered of all devices.
For Batch Monitor, see "9-4 Batch Monitoring", Page 9-50.

Batch Change

Batch Change can enable batch change of PLC device value, and to save them in a file.
For Batch Change, see "9-9 Batch Change", Page 9-88.

Watch Window

Watch window only displays current value of the device contained in the current selected ladder
program block. You can simply select a cell on Editor, switch the ladder program block to be displayed,
to only monitor current value.

Custom Monitor

This facilitates the user to freely display Register Monitor window for devices.
For Custom Monitor, see "9-5 Custom Monitor", Page 9-53.

Command monitor

If command monitor is used, current value of the used device can be monitored with PIDAT command,
which facilitates to monitor measured value, set value, and other parameters of PID.
For more information about command monitor, see "Command monitor", Page 9-37.
- KV STUDIO Ver.6 User’s Manual - 9-39
 9-2 Monitor Function

High-speed Time Chart Monitor

When the connected CPU unit is KV-1000/700, High-speed Time Chart Monitor can be used to monitor
external input/ output and device status according to scanning unit.
For High-speed Time Chart Monitor, see "9-7 High-speed Time Chart Monitor", Page 9-78.

Real-time Chart Monitor

When the connected CPU unit is KV-5500/5000/3000, to display Real-time Chart Monitor can be used,
the change of word devices that cannot be displayed in waveform mode by High-speed Time Chart
Monitor, enabling real-time monitoring.
For online edit function, see "9-6 Real-time Chart Monitor", Page 9-55

Unit Monitor

Different from Register Monitor and Batch Monitor Unit Monitor,, can display relay and DM value
matching the unit to be monitored.
9 For Unit Monitor, see "9-8 Unit Monitor", Page 9-86.
MONITOR & SIMULATOR

Online Edit Function

Using online edit function, PLC ladder program being monitored can be changed.
*For online edit function, see "9-10 Online Edit", Page 9-97.

Start and Exit Monitor

■ Transfer and monitor program

Programs made via Editor can be transferred to PLC for monitoring.For devices, see "Transfer to
PLC -> Monitor Mode", Page 9-20.

■ Read and monitor program

Ladder programs in PLC can be transferred to PC for monitoring.
For details, see "Read from PLC -> Monitor mode", Page 9-26.

9-40 - KV STUDIO Ver.6 User’s Manual -

 9-2 Monitor Function

Names and Functions of Monitor Screen

The following window can be displayed in Monitor mode. If opening Batch Monitor or Register Monitor
after exiting Monitor, these two windows are also automatically displayed.

Ladder program monitor

Register monitor window

Batch monitor window

Batch change window

"Change device value"

9
window

MONITOR & SIMULATOR

Watch Window

Every window function is described as follows.

"Ladder Program Monitor", Page 9-41
"Register Monitor", Page 9-45
"Batch Monitoring", Page 9-50
"Batch Change", Page 9-88
"Unit Monitor", Page 9-86
"Change device value" window, Page 9-43
" Watch Window", Page 9-36

Ladder Program Monitor KV-5500/5000/3000 KV-1000 KV-700 KV-P16 KV-10/16/24/40

How to start and stop ladder program Monitor and the screens displayed when executing of ladder
program Monitor are described as below.

■ Ladder Monitor overview

The functions of ladder program Monitor are as follows.
• To control bit device ON/OFF
• To modify current value via "Change device values" window, .
• To set up scan time

- KV STUDIO Ver.6 User’s Manual - 9-41

 9-2 Monitor Function

■ About screen display

Basic operations (device selection and display/hide of comment label, etc.) of ladder program Monitor
screen are identical to Editor.
The following describes specific screen of Ladder Monitor.

The display of title bar is switched to"KV STUDIO" - "Monitor: KV-****"-**….

"Monitor" will be Monitor can be

displayed on mode converted active button
column. via tool bar button.

9 To display status
MONITOR & SIMULATOR

bar.

Communication indicator Scan time Baudrate

Rotating indicates in communication in progress. It will To display scan Communication
rotate faster as soon as communication speed is faster. time, in "0.1ms". speed is displayed.

PLC mode Communication port

To display PLC operation mode. To display communication
port name.

■ ON/OFF state of bit device

To control bit device ON/OFFvia mouse or key.

Note
• Timer contact and external input relay cannot be ON/ OFF.
• ON/ OFF operation of external input relay can be disabled by disabling input refresh.

● Double click device OFF status ON status

To move mouse cursor to the device to be ON/ OFF and

double click.
Changed contact color indicates changed ON/ OFF status of device.

● Move cursor to device and press / key.

When the cursor is in green status, move the arrow key to device to be ON/ OFF and press. / key.
Changed contact color indicates changed ON/ OFF status of device.

9-42 - KV STUDIO Ver.6 User’s Manual -

 9-2 Monitor Function

■ Change current value/setting value

Using "correct device values" window, you can change current value and setting value.
Two display methods for "Change device values" window are available.

Select the cell of device containing current value / setting value to be changed, display "Correct value
change" window as follows.
• Press key.
• From right-click menu, select "Change device value (D)"

Double click on the item to be changed, enter the value. Click left key to display "Display format", select
from the display menu.
Item Description
9
Displays the device monitored currently.

MONITOR & SIMULATOR

Device By double clicking on the item, you can change from keyboard. If module / macro is not
registered, Local Device cannot be registered.
Reference If the registered device is indirect specified or index-modified reference destination
destination device will be displayed.
Displays the current value.
Current value By double clicking on the item, can change from keyboard.
For bit device, double-click allows to switch between ON/ OFF status.
Displays the display format of the current monitor value.
Display format
By selecting the item, you can change from the menu, and click
Displays setting value.
Set value
By double clicking on the item, you can change from keyboard.
Contact Displays contact status of timer/counter.

■ Jump and search

Using instruction or operand as keyword, you can jump to the rung NO. or step specified in ladder
program, or search instruction and device. Besides, rung comment can be also searched.
For jump, see "Jump", Page 5-15.
For search, see "Search Device", Page 5-6.

■ Start and stop monitor

To start/stop PLC communication.
For starting Monitor, see "Start Monitor", Page 9-31.
For stopping Monitor, see "Stop Monitor", Page 9-31.

■ Verify PLC error

In monitor process, error verification should be made frequently. When PLC error occurs, error
message is displayed.
"Error Message Lists", Page A-2

- KV STUDIO Ver.6 User’s Manual - 9-43

 9-2 Monitor Function

PLC Setting and Operation

■ Set up operation mode of PLC

To set PLC operation mode.
During initial start of Monitor, it is PLC operation mode when Monitor start.
To change operation mode, select from the "Dedug (D)" menu or click operation mode button.
For operation (RUN mode) / stop (PROG mode), see "Execute RUN/continuous Scan" please see
"PROGRAM/stop", Page 10-2.

■ Forced set/reset register

Unrelated to the program status, imperatively set/ reset the bit device registered.
For details of forced set/reset register, please see "Forced Set/reset Register", Page 10-12

■ Input refresh disable / output disable setting

Input refresh disable function and output disable function are available in PLC.
9 For input disable refresh and output disable, see "Inhibit Input Refreshing", Page 10-14, "Inhibit
Output", Page 10-15.
MONITOR & SIMULATOR

■ Scan time monitor

Display various messages such as the message related to scanning time of CPU monitored and the
number of interrupts, etc. For scan time Monitor, see "Scan Time Monitor", Page 10-15.

■ Set up calendar timer

Internal calendar timer is built in KV-5500/5000/3000/1000/700 PLC CPU.
For calendar timer setting, see "Calendar Timer Setting", Page 10-17.

■ Clear all PLC devices

Clearing all devices means initializing data memory (DM, EM, FM, W, ZF) the setting relay (RO1000-
R59915), link relay (B), latch relay (LR) and counter (C) set via Data Memory (DM, EM, FM, W, ZF),
power off hold function MEMSW instruction.
During monitor, if all devices are cleared, PLC device will be initialized.
For clearing all PLC devices, see "Clear All PLC Devices", Page 10-18.

■ Clear KV-D30 control memory (CM)

Control memory (CM) area used in operation panel KV-D30 will be initialized.
For clearing KV-D30 control memory(CM), see "Clear CMs For KV-D30", Page 10-19.

■ BREAK setting
A "break" is a function for stopping a ladder program at specified conditions during program operation.
For BREAK setting, see "Device Break Setting", Page 10-7.

9-44 - KV STUDIO Ver.6 User’s Manual -

9-3 Register Monitor
Via Register Monitor, you can register any device, display current value and Time Chart of the device
registered. By using this Monitor, batch verification of various devices can be enabled. This section
describes Register Monitor method and operating method.

Register Monitor overview

The Register Monitor has the following functions:

• Display the current value, setting value and contact (timer / counter contact status) and comment of
the device registered.
• Change current value and setting value of the device registered.
• Change the position of the device registered.
• Change display format.
• Display Time Chart of device registered (the bit device and word device)

Note
According to PLC scanning time, Time Chart in Register Monitor is not operated.
When displaying Time Chart Monitor with higher precision, please use Real-time
Time Chart Monitor or High-Speed Time Chart Monitor.
"9-6 Real-time Chart Monitor", Page 9-55
9

MONITOR & SIMULATOR

"9-7 High-speed Time Chart Monitor", Page 9-78

Display Register Monitor Window KV-5500/5000/3000 KV-1000 KV-700 KV-P16 KV-10/16/24/40

For how to display Register Monitor, see "Register monitor window", Page 9-34 .

- KV STUDIO Ver.6 User’s Manual - 9-45

 9-3 Register Monitor

Device Registration KV-5500/5000/3000 KV-1000 KV-700 KV-P16 KV-10/16/24/40

If using Register Monitor device, the device must be firstly registered with the following methods.
• Drag & register from ladder program Monitor window
• From ladder program Monitor window, click right-click register
• Right-click in Monitor window, then register
• Register the device in Register Monitor window

■ Drag, register from ladder program monitor window

To drag and register from ladder program Monitor window by the following procedures.

1 In Ladder Monitor window, select the cell including the

device to be registered.

2 Move mouse cursor on the range selection boundary. When

9 cursor changes to , click mouse (hold and freeze mouse).

3 Drag the device in register monitor window.

MONITOR & SIMULATOR

The mouse cursor will become when dragging.

Register the device in register monitor window

■ From ladder monitor window, click right-click register

1 In Ladder Monitor window, select the cell including the device to be registered.

2 From right-click menu, select "Register Monitor Window (R)".

■ Right-click in monitor window, then register

From right-click menu of monitor window, select "Register Monitor Window (G)".

■ Specify device and register

In Register Monitor window, you can directly enter the device from keyboard.
For how to operate and change, see "Change Current Value", Page 9-47

After device registration, move the cursor to the next rung in Register Monitor window. You
can continuously register device by pressing Ctrl + I keys. In which, argument device
function in macro is disabled.

9-46 - KV STUDIO Ver.6 User’s Manual -

 9-3 Register Monitor

Change Current Value KV-5500/5000/3000 KV-1000 KV-700 KV-P16 KV-10/16/24/40

Select the device in Register Monitor window, change ON/ OFF status and current value of the device.

By double clicking on the changed item, enter the value. The item that cannot be changed is displayed
in grey.
Click left key on ("Mod/mac (module / macro)" and "Display format (display format)" item, and select
from the popup menu).
Item Description
The device being monitored is global device or currently opened module or global
device displaying macro.
Module/macro*1
Global device of macro is displayed. 9
Select display project, click key, on the menu, select (change) value.

MONITOR & SIMULATOR

Displays the device monitored currently.
Device By double clicking on the item, you can change from keyboard. If module / macro is
not registered, Local Device cannot be registered.
If the registered device is indirectly specified or index-modified, reference
Reference destination
destination device will be displayed.
Displays the current value.(when CTC is selected, display the set value.)
Current value Double click on the project, you can change from keyboard.
For bit device, double-click allows to switch between ON/ OFF status.
Displays the display format of the current monitor value.
Display format
Select project, on the menu, change, click
Setting value display.
Set value
By double clicking on the item, change from keyboard.
Contact Displays contact status of timer/counter.
Comments Displays comments.
Time chart display
Displays time chart.
area

It is displayed only when the models KV-5500, KV-5000, KV-3000 or KV-1000 are selected.

• If many devices registered, they can be displayed via multiple windows opened.
• During execution of Register Monitor program, current value and Time Chart gradually change
at same operating speed.

Note
A scale of Time Chart, is not a scanning period. It refers to a monitor communication
time sequence.
To ensure correct time chart in every scanning, please use Real-time Time Chart
Monitor or High-speed Time Chart Monitor.
"9-6 Real-time Chart Monitor", Page 9-55
"9-7 High-speed Time Chart Monitor", Page 9-78

- KV STUDIO Ver.6 User’s Manual - 9-47

 9-3 Register Monitor

■ Sort device
The device should be sorted according to type and No.
From the right-click menu in Register Monitor window, select “Sort registered device".

■ Change display sequence of device by required

Drag the device selected at the current cursor position to other position, to change the device
sequence.

Move mouse cursor to mobile source

device, drag it into the device to be placed.
The mouse cursor where the device is
inserted.

9
MONITOR & SIMULATOR

■ Current value is restored to the default value

Right click device and select "Reset".

■ Delete the device from Register Monitor program

Select the cell to be deleted. Press Delete key.
Delete the device from register monitor window.

■ Switch comment display

In register monitor window, right-click, and select : "Display comment".
There are following 3 methods to display content.
• Display comments OFF
• Display comments 1
• Display comments 2
The project selected is enabled.

■ Display/hide the setting value and contact of timer / counter (status of

timer / counter contact)
In Register Monitor window, right-click and select "Display / hide timer counter setting value / contact".
The item selected is displayed, the item not selected is hidden.

9-48 - KV STUDIO Ver.6 User’s Manual -

 9-3 Register Monitor

■ Switch time chart display

In register monitor window, right-click, and select "Display Time Chart".
Select "Display chart". Content can be displayed using following 4methods.
• None
• Small scale
• Medium scale
• High scale
The item selected is enabled.

■ Display/hide device reference destination

In register monitor window, right-click, and select "Display / hide device reference destination".
The item selected is displayed, the item not selected is hidden.

■ Save as Custom Monitor

To set the window as Custom window, and register the window to non-default window.
"9-5 Custom Monitor", Page 9-53
9
■ Real-time Chart Monitor/High-speed Time Chart Monitor

MONITOR & SIMULATOR

Real-time Chart Monitor or High speed Time Chart Monitor can enable monitoring the status of external
I/O and device in every scanning period.
"9-6 Real-time Chart Monitor", Page 9-55
"9-7 High-speed Time Chart Monitor", Page 9-78

- KV STUDIO Ver.6 User’s Manual - 9-49

 9-4 Batch Monitoring
With the batch monitoring program, you can achieve the batch display of current values, contact ON/
OFF status and comments of all registered devices. This section describes the batch monitoring
operation.

Overview

Batch Monitoring can do the following:

• The current value, setting value, contact (contact status of timer / counter) and comment of the device
are batch displayed according to device type.
• Change the current/setting value of device.

For details, see "Batch Monitor Window", Page 9-35

Change Displayed Devices KV-5500/5000/3000 KV-1000 KV-700 KV-P16 KV-10/16/24/40

Can change the devices displayed in the Batch Monitoring window.

9 There are two device changing methods.
MONITOR & SIMULATOR

■ Drag & change from ladder program monitor window

Ladder Monitor allows to select the device to be displayed (mouse pointer shape changed.} Drag the
device in batch monitor window.

The selected device and equivalent device list can be displayed in "Batch Monitoring" window.
Select "Batch Monitoring" from the right-click menu on Ladder Monitor window, and start multiple Batch
Monitoring windows.

■ Change specified device

In "Batch Monitoring" window, directly enter the device using keyboard.
For how to operate, see "Change Current Value"

9-50 - KV STUDIO Ver.6 User’s Manual -

 9-4 Batch Monitoring

Change Current Value KV-5500/5000/3000 KV-1000 KV-700 KV-P16 KV-10/16/24/40

In "Batch Monitoring" window, you can select the device, and change the ON/OFF status and current
value of the device.

Double click on the changed item, enter the value. The item that cannot be changed is displayed in
gray.

Device(D)*1
Item Description
After selecting radio button, display batch monitor of global device / Local Device.
9
During batch monitor of global device, select "global".

MONITOR & SIMULATOR

Module/macro*2
During batch monitor of Local Device, select the module/ macro to be monitored.
Display the device monitored currently. The device can be changed in cell on
Device
starting line.
When selecting radio button, display batch monitor of buffer memory in
Unit expansion unit.
buffer memory (G)*1 When the unit that can be monitored is not connected to buffer memory in
expansion unit, the project changes to grey display.
Unit *1 Display the unit monitored. Can change the unit to be batch monitored via initial cell.
Display the offset to initial address of buffer memory in expansion unit.
Offset*1 Can change the initial address of the expansion unit buffer memory to be
displayed via initial cell.
Displays the current value.(when CTC is selected, display the set value.)
Current value Double click on the project, can change current value from keyboard.
For bit device, double click on it to switch between ON/ OFF status.
Can display the display format of the current batch monitor value.
Display format
Can change display format via initial cell.
Set value Setting value display.Can change setting value via value display cell.
Contact Display contact status of timer/counter.
Comments Display comments.

*1 It is displayed only when the models "KV-5500" "KV-5000" "KV-3000" are selected.
*2 It is not displayed when the models "KV-5500" "KV-5000", "KV-3000", "KV-1000" are selected

■ Making reference
Select "Cross reference" from the right-click menu in the "Batch Monitoring" window.
Right-click on the device to generate cross reference.

When selecting "Expansion unit buffer memory", cross reference cannot be generated.

- KV STUDIO Ver.6 User’s Manual - 9-51

 9-4 Batch Monitoring

■ Switch comment display

Select "Display comment" in right-click menu in the "Batch Monitoring" window, select the comment to
be displayed.
• Display comments OFF
• Display comments 1
• Display comments 2
The item with testing mark is valid.

When selecting "Expansion unit buffer memory", "Display comment 2" cannot be generated.

■ Current value is restored to the default value

Select "reset" from the right-click menu in the " batch monitor" window.
Right-click on current value of device and restore to initial value.
"Set Device Default Value", Page 11-4

9
■ Forced set/reset register
MONITOR & SIMULATOR

Select "Forcedly set/reset register" from the right-click menu of "Batch Monitoring" window, select set/
reset.
Right-click on the device to Force set/reset registration and remove.
"Forced Set/reset Register", Page 10-12

9-52 - KV STUDIO Ver.6 User’s Manual -

9-5 Custom Monitor
This facilitates the user to freely display Register Monitor window for devices. This section describes
Custom monitor.

Features of Custom Monitor

• If the directory of "Register Monitor" window is set in Custom Monitor registration folder, the window
can be easily called out from all ladder programs.
• Specific function monitor window is supplied in CPU unit by default, enabling simply monitor CPU.

Note
Custom Monitor can be selected only from Monitor, Simulator or online edit.

Display Custom Monitor KV-5500/5000/3000 KV-1000 KV-700 KV-P16 KV-10/16/24/40

Monitor/Simulator(N) Custom Monitor (P)

Select "KV-5500/5000/3000/1000/700" in "Unit Configuration" of workspace, from right-click menu,

select "Custom Monitor", open "Select Custom Monitor" dialog box.
9
Select the required window, click "Display".

MONITOR & SIMULATOR

Display the window
registered in "Monitor ".

• The following window is registered as "Custom Monitor" window by default.

• Some windows are not displayed when the model "KV-700" is selected.

Window name Function

ACCESS WINDOW Access window alarm function and User Message monitor, etc.
CPU built-in I/O CPU built-in I/O monitor.
CPU Frequency counter CPU Frequency counter monitor
CPU High-speed counter 0 CPU High-speed counter 0monitor
CPUHigh-speed counter 1 CPU High-speed counter 1 monitor.
CPU Interrupt CPU interrupt monitor.
CPU Positioning X axis monitor CPU has internal X axis monitor with simple locating function.
CPU Positioning Y axis monitor CPU has internal Y axis monitor with simple locating function.
CPU Specify frequency
CPU Specify frequency pulse output monitor
pulse output
Log ID monitor.
Logging ID 0 to 9
(under KV-700 Custom Monitor status, ID is not displayed)
Memory card To monitor Memory Card

- KV STUDIO Ver.6 User’s Manual - 9-53

 9-5 Custom Monitor

Registering Custom Monitors KV-5500/5000/3000 KV-1000 KV-700 KV-P16 KV-10/16/24/40

Via register "Custom Monitor" window, the window as default window can be registered.

1 Select "Monitor/Simulator(N)" "Registration Monitor Window (G)" from the menu.

Display "Register Monitor" window.

2 Register device.
"Device Registration", Page 9-46

3 Select the window that will be registered as "Custom Monitor" and click on right key.
A menu appears.

4 Select "Save as custom monitor" from the menu.

It displays "Save as" box.

9 5 Specify file name to be saved and save.

MONITOR & SIMULATOR

Specify the file name.

File type should be

specified as "KVS
monitor message file
(*.Kem)

Note
KVS Monitor information files (*.kem) in the "CpuMon" folder in the "Settings" folder
in the folder pre-installed with KV STUDIO are registered as Custom Monitor files.
These files cannot be registered as Custom Monitor files when "File name" and "File
type" are changed.

9-54 - KV STUDIO Ver.6 User’s Manual -

9-6 Real-time Chart Monitor
Real-time Chart Monitor can monitor the status of bit device and word device according to scanning unit and
various collecting cycles, etc. Here, we will describe the monitoring function of Real-time Chart Monitor.

Note
Real-time Chart Monitor, can be used only when "KV-5500/5000/KV-3000" models are
selected.

The Features of Real-time Chart Monitor

• Bit data/word data can be captured real time according to scanning time unit.
• Trigger conditions and simple debug traps can be set up.
• Read the traced data using the CPU tracing function, which is displayed in real time curve.
• When KV STUDIO is in editor/monitor/Online Editor mode, can be started. In addition, it can also
separately start under the status of KV STUDIO not started.

Display the Real-time Chart Monitor 9

MONITOR & SIMULATOR

For how to start Real-time Chart Monitor, please see "Real-time Chart Monitor", Page 9-33。

The Composition of Real-time Chart Monitor

Device List/Trigger Setting Area Time Chart Display Area

- KV STUDIO Ver.6 User’s Manual - 9-55

 9-6 Real-time Chart Monitor

■ Device List/Trigger Setting Area

Register the device to be monitored and set up triggers.

● "Device List" tab.

Register the device to be monitored and set up waveform display.

9
Item Description
MONITOR & SIMULATOR

(checkbox) Display the waveform of the device whose checkbox is selected.

No. Display the registration number of the currently monitored device.
Device Display the number of the currently monitored device.
The current values of all the traced devices are displayed in the column titled "Current Value".
These are displayed according to the display format set up in the "Device Setting"
Selected value/
dialog box. "●" is displayed when the bit device is ON, "O" when OFF.
current value
When tracing is stopped, "Selected Value" is displayed in the column title and the
cursor position value is displayed.
Display differential value between Cursor A and Cursor B.
A/B
"---" is displayed for bit device.

● Device registration/modification
Select the cell to be registered/ edited, then enter the device number.
The "Device Setup" dialog box is displayed.

Other procedure • Double click on the cell to be registered/ edited

• After this, press the Enter key
• From right-click menu, select "Register/Edit(R)"

9-56 - KV STUDIO Ver.6 User’s Manual -

 9-6 Real-time Chart Monitor

Item Description
No. Display the registration number of the current device.
Display the code number of the current device.
Device
To access the editing window, double click the cell or select the cell, and press the Enter key.
Select the display format of a registered device.
The displayed formats are as follows.
• Binary 1BIT
• Decimal 16BIT, unsigned
• Decimal 16BIT, signed
• Hex 16BIT
• Decimal 32BIT, unsigned
Display format
• Decimal 32BIT, signed
• Hex 32BIT
• FLOAT
When the registered device is bit device(R, B, MR, LR, CR, T, C, CTC), only the
"BIN 1BIT" option can be selected.
When the registered device is bit device (DM, W, EM, FM, ZF, TC, CC, Z, CM,
CTH, TM, TRM)，the "BIN 1BIT" option cannot be selected.
Display the color of the waveform.
9
Color
To edit a color, click the color cell.

MONITOR & SIMULATOR

When the display format is not" BIN 1BIT", you can select this checkbox.
Display in logic format
After selecting this checkbox, the waveform is displayed in the logic format.
When the display format is not "binary 1BIT", it is in active status.
Real time scaling If checked, the display range is adjusted to maximum data value and minimum
data value automatcially during sampling,then display is given.

Register from KV STUDIO

• Drag the compiled device to Ladder Editor of KV STUDIO for registration.
• When the programmed cell is selected by the device registered to Real-time Chart Monitor via
Ladder, start Real-time Chart Monitor.
• The device registered to registration monitor window and monitor window after started from right-click
menu of registration monitor window and monitor window is started under the status of registered to
Real-time Chart Monitor.

Note
During device registration/modification, all the waveforms displayed will be cleared.

● Delete device
Select the cell to be deleted, press Delete key.

Other procedure • From right-click menu, select the cell to be deleted, select "Selete (C)"

- KV STUDIO Ver.6 User’s Manual - 9-57

 9-6 Real-time Chart Monitor

● Increment registration of the device

Add (+1 or +2) Device Number of the device registered, then, add registration.
After selecting the next cell, press Ctrl + I key.

Other procedure • From right-click menu of the device to be registered, select "Increment registration (I)"

• When the display format of the device to be added is "BIN 1BIT" or "DEC 16BIT", "HEX 16BIT", add
1 to Device Number
• When the display format of the device to be added is "DEC 32BIT" or "HEX 32BIT", add 2 to Device Number

● Display device comments

Display the registered device in the comment form
From the right-click menu of the device whose device comment to be displayed, select "Display device
comments (C)".

9 Other procedure • From the menu, select "View (V)" "Display device comments (C)"

Note
MONITOR & SIMULATOR

This can be used when Real-time Chart Monitor is started by KV STUDIO .

During separate start, it cannot be selected.

● "Trigger setting" tab.

Setup trigger.

Item Description
Set the data size to be collected after trigger occurs.
Trigger After trigger Data size can be changed via left/right sliding bar.
Position data size Move leftwards to increase data size, move rightwards to reduce data size.
Besides, the proportion of data size that can be directly input (%).
Sampling period Select collecting cycle.
Trigger condition To set up triggering conditions.

9-58 - KV STUDIO Ver.6 User’s Manual -

 9-6 Real-time Chart Monitor

Item Description
(checkbox) To specify a device, please select the checkbox.
Specify the trigger based on bit device.
(Device Number)
This is only limited to the device registered in "List of Devices" tab.
Specify property of bit device.
Bit
(trigger attribute) ON : When bit device is ON, trigger is enabled.
Device
OFF : When bit device is OFF, trigger is enabled.
Specify trigger condition of bit device.
(Trigger condition) AND : When all conditions of bit device are matched, trigger occurs
OR : Trigger occurs when any one of conditions is TRUE.
Specify the trigger condition of bit device and word device.
(Trigger condition) AND : When all conditions of bit device/word device are matched, trigger occurs.
OR : Trigger occurs when any one of conditions is TRUE.

(checkbox) To specify a device, please select the checkbox.

Specify the trigger based on word device.
(Device Number)
This is only limited to the device registered in "List of Devices" tab.
Specify trigger condition of bit device.

Word
>=
>
: When the device value exceeds threshold, trigger occurs.
: When the device value exceeds threshold, trigger occurs.
9
Device (Trigger condition) <= : When the device value exceeds threshold, trigger occurs.

MONITOR & SIMULATOR

< : When the device value exceeds threshold, trigger occurs.
≠ : When the device value exceeds threshold, trigger occurs.
= : When the device value exceeds threshold, trigger occurs.
Enter the threshold which is used as the condition of comparison with word
(threshold)
device.

■ Set trigger type

Select the trace triggering mode.

● Trigger type "SINGLE"

Tracing is automatically stopped after the specified data size is traced.

● Trigger type "NORMAL"

Tracing is automatically stopped after the specified data size is traced.
In pause mode, Real-time Chart Monitor continues monitoring PLC, waiting for the next trigger.
After triggered again, the specified data size is traced and enter pause mode.
The status will last until tracing stop.
"Stop tracing", Page 9-76

- KV STUDIO Ver.6 User’s Manual - 9-59

 9-6 Real-time Chart Monitor

■ Time chart display area

Display the waveform and various information of the device to be monitored.

Cursor A Cursor B

Trigger point

9 Collected
information display
MONITOR & SIMULATOR

Cursor A, Cursor B
Can use the cursor to confirm the value of the selected position or use 2 cursors to confirm timing and
response delay, etc.
To move the cursor, move the pointer to the cursor position and then drag.
Use the cursor key on keyboard to trim cursor position.

Trigger point
Trigger point must be displayed during trigger collection.
Absolute position and application time of trigger point can be checked in "collection information display".

Collected information display

Can display message related to the Time Chart displayed.
Display the position*1 and time of trigger.
A : Represent the position*1 and time of Cursor A.
B : Represent the position*2 and time of Cursor A.
A-B : Represent distance and time between Cursor A and Cursor B.
100pts/Div : Display the current X frame unit *2 (the number of samples/Div) and average time
(ms/Div).

*1 Position 1, set leading data to 0.

*2 Unit, change will occur when zooming timer axis. (Default: 100pts/Div)

9-60 - KV STUDIO Ver.6 User’s Manual -

 9-6 Real-time Chart Monitor

"File (F)" Menu

■ Open file
Open real time curve file (*.rtc).
To select a real time curve file, click "File (F)" "Open file (O)" from the menu to display the "Open
file" dialog box.

Other procedure • Ctrl + O

•

■ Save
Save the timing curve monitor data.
From the menu, select "File (F)" "Save". In case of first time save, specify the file name in the
"Save as" dialog box before the file is saved. 9

MONITOR & SIMULATOR

Other procedure • Ctrl + S
•

■ Save as
Save the timing curve monitor data as …
Click "File (F)" "Save as (A)" from the menu, and specify the file name in the "Save as" dialog box.

Item Description
Save the address Select driving disk and folder to save the file.
File name Input the file name.
Select to save the file as either real-time image Ver.2 file (*.rtm) or real-time image
File type Ver.1 file (*.rtc).
Files saved in *.rtc format can be opened in real-time image monitor Ver.1.

- KV STUDIO Ver.6 User’s Manual - 9-61

 9-6 Real-time Chart Monitor

The following data will be deleted when the file is saved as rtc.
• FLOAT-displayed soft component or trigger setting
• XYM-display setting of soft component
• Comment-display setting of soft component
• Real-time zooming setting

■ Save CSV file

Save the timing curve monitor data in CSV format.
Click "File(F)" "Save as CSV file(C)" from the menu, and specify the file name in the "Save as"
dialog box.

■ Print setting
9 Timing curve monitor data print setup.
Click "File (F)" "Print setup (R)" from the menu, and set up the printer in the "Pinter setup" dialog
MONITOR & SIMULATOR

box.
For more information, please refer to respective printer user manuals.

9-62 - KV STUDIO Ver.6 User’s Manual -

 9-6 Real-time Chart Monitor

■ Print
Print Real-time Chart Monitor data.
Click "File (F)" "Print (P)" from the menu, and set up print in the "Print" dialog box.

Other procedure • Ctrl + P

•

MONITOR & SIMULATOR

Item Description
Select print object.
Print object
Print the project selected in checkbox.
Select the waveform range to be printed.
Waveform print range
Print within the range of radio button selected.
Number of layers of Specify the number of waveforms printed to 1 page.
wavegraphs The setting range is 1 to 8 segment/page.
(Printer setup) For printer setup.
Select the waveform color to be printed.
Waveform print color
This can be selected by selecting respective radio button.
After selecting checkbox, color is reversal printed.
Highlight
Displayed only when "Color (no background color)" is selected.
Size of lines for waveform Select the thickness of waveform line to be printed.
printing This can be set up by selecting respective radio button.
Print title Add the title on the printed article
Print comments Add comment on the thing to be printed.
(Print) Print.
"Cancel" When print is stopped, close "print" dialog box.
(Preview) Display print preview.

- KV STUDIO Ver.6 User’s Manual - 9-63

 9-6 Real-time Chart Monitor

■ Print preview
Display print preview of Real-time Chart Monitoring data.
Select "File(F)" "Print Preview(V)" from the menu. "Print Preview" window appears.

Other procedure •

■ Exit Real-time Chart Monitor

Exit Real-time Chart Monitor.
After selecting "File (F)" "Exit (X)" from the menu, "Real-time Chart Monitor"dialog box will exit.

"Edit(E)" Menu

■ Search
9 Search single wave form data after collecting.
To enable the wave pattern to be searched, from the menu, select "Edit (E)" "Fearch (F)", the
MONITOR & SIMULATOR

"Search" dialog box is opened.

Change wave form data to be enabled, switch the searched destination.

Other procedure • Ctrl + F

•

Cursor A will automatically move to the searched position.

● When search destination is bit device

Item Description
Select search mode from drop-down menu.
Search mode Up edge : search change point of OFF -> ON.
Down edge : search change point of ON -> OFF.
"Search Previous<-" Search Previous (left side) from Cursor A.
"Search Next->" Search Next (right side) from Cursor A.

9-64 - KV STUDIO Ver.6 User’s Manual -

 9-6 Real-time Chart Monitor

● When search destination is word device

Item Description
Select search mode from drop-down menu.
Maximum value : maximum value of device to be searched.
Minimum value : minimum value of device to be searched.
Search mode
Maximum value : maximum value of device to be searched.
Minimum value : minimum value of device to be searched.
Assigned value : selected when specified value is searched.
Can be entered only when "Specified values" is selected as search mode.
Specified values
Enter search value.
"search Previous <-" Search Previous (left side) from Cursor A. 9
"search Next ->" Search Next (right side) from Cursor A.

MONITOR & SIMULATOR

■ Combination search
Multiple wave form data after combination search and sample according to multiple conditions.
From the menu, select "Edit (E)" "Combine search (C)", open "Combination search" dialog box.

Cursor A will automatically move to the searched position.

Bit device
Bit device Combination condition
search condition

Bit device and

word device word device
search condition Combination condition

- KV STUDIO Ver.6 User’s Manual - 9-65

 9-6 Real-time Chart Monitor

Item Description
search condition, select specified bit device Combination condition.
Bit device
AND : Search keyword meeting all search condition of bit device.
Combination condition
OR : Search the keyword meeting one of bit device search condition.
Select The device selected in checkbox becomes the searched destination.
Bit device
Device Display the bit device registered by device.
Search condition
ON/OFF Specify status of bit device to be searched.
search condition, select specified bit device and word device combination condition.
Bit device and AND : Search keyword meeting all search condition of bit device
word device and word device.
Combination condition OR : Search the keyword meeting any one of bit device search
condition and word device search condition.
Select The device selected in checkbox becomes the searched destination.
From drop-down list, select word device whose device has been
Device
registered.
Specify searching condition of word device.
= : Search the position where device value is identical to
comparative value.
9 word device Cond > : Search the position of device value size comparative value.
Search condition (condition) < : Search the position where device value is less than
MONITOR & SIMULATOR

comparative value.
<> : Search the position where device value is different from
comparative value.
Value Specify word device to be searched and the value to be compared.
Display Display the display format of device registered to Real-time Chart
format Monitor.
"search previous ←" Search previous (left side) from Cursor A.
->"search next→" Search next (right side) from Cursor A.
(Close) Close "combination search" dialog box.

■ Search the next point.

Search downwards (right side) from Cursor A in active oscillogram.
Search according to the condition set in dialog box when "Search" dialog box is displayed.
From the menu, select "Edit (E)" "Search Next (N)", start search.

Other procedure • F3

■ Search previous
Search upwards (left side) from Cursor A in active oscillogram.
Search according to the condition set in dialog box when " Search" dialog box is displayed.
From the menu, select "Edit (E)" "Search previous (F)", start search.

Other procedure • Shift + F3

9-66 - KV STUDIO Ver.6 User’s Manual -

 9-6 Real-time Chart Monitor

■ Jumping to Cursor A
From the menu, select "Edit (E)" "Jump (J)" "Cursor A (A)", will jump to Cursor A.

Other procedure • Ctrl + A

•

■ Jumping to Cursor B
From the menu, select "Edit (E)" "Jump (J)" "Cursor B (B)", will jump to Cursor B.

Other procedure • Ctrl + B

•

■ Jump to triggered position

From the menu, select "Edit (E)" "Jump (J)" "Trigger position (T)", will jump to trigger.
9
Other procedure • Ctrl + T

MONITOR & SIMULATOR

•

■ Jump to the specified data number

From the menu, select "Edit (E)" "Jump (J)" "Specify data No. (N)", will jump to the specified
data number.
Specify data number via "data No." box on right side of toolbar.

Other procedure • Ctrl + N

•

- KV STUDIO Ver.6 User’s Manual - 9-67

 9-6 Real-time Chart Monitor

"View(V)" Menu

■ Device list display

From the menu, select "View (V)" "Device list(E)", and "Device list" tab will be displayed in device
register/trigger setting field. Besides, checkbox is also displayed on the menu.
Select "Device list (E)" under "Device list" tab, the "Device list" tab is hidden and the menu is
dechecked.

■ Trigger setting display

From the menu, select "View (V)" "Trigger setting (G)", and "trigger setting" tab will be displayed in
device register/trigger setting field. Besides, checkbox is also displayed on the menu.
Select "Trigger settings (G)" under "trigger settings" tab, the "trigger settings" tab is hidden and the
menu is dechecked.
9
MONITOR & SIMULATOR

■ Display device comments

From the menu, select "View (V)" "Device display comment (C)", Device Number registered to List
of Devices will be displayed in comment form. Besides, checkbox is also displayed on the menu.
When displaying using device comment method, select "Device display comment (C)", and Device
Number will be displayed, menu is unchecked.

• Comments are read from the KV STUDIO project

for which Real-time Chart Monitor is started up.
• When only Real-time Chart Monitor is started, "Device display comment (C)" cannot be
selected.

■ Set up View
From the menu, select "View (V)" "Display setting (S)", and the dialog box is popped up.
Complete setting related to monitor display of real-time Time Chart.

Other procedure • From right-click menu of timing curve field, select "Display setting (S)"
• Right-click on Device Number displayed on the right side of timing curve field.

Setting dialog box consists of three tabs: "Display range", "Scale" and "Common" tabs.

9-68 - KV STUDIO Ver.6 User’s Manual -

 9-6 Real-time Chart Monitor

● "Display range" tab.

MONITOR & SIMULATOR

Item Description
Display the list of device registered. Display device waveform of checkbox
Device List
selected.
"All devices ON/ OFF" Switch all device checkboxes between ON/ OFF.
Word (double word) device To display in Logic format, select the checkbox.
display set to logic mode This cannot be selected in case of bit device.
Display setting Set display position of waveform in timing curve field.
Clicking and set up waveform display area in the range of 0 to 100Div.
About display color of explanatory notes :
White : the waveform area of the selected device is not displayed
"Visible area " Light blue : the part that is not displayed on the waveform image of the
selected device
Blue : the part that is displayed on the waveform image of the selected device
Grey : the part of selected is not displayed in the part displayed on image
Click and set the range on "Y (↑↓) Div" setting of "share" tab to waveform
display area.
About display color of explanatory notes :
<Display range>
White : waveform range is not described
"Screen display area"
Grey : waveform range
< display position >
White : the waveform range of the selected device is not displayed
Light blue : the waveform range of the selected device is displayed
Red : partition line
Display range Set the upper and lower ends of the range to be displayed in collected data.
The number (of Set the number of partitions, and draw a red partition line. Clicking the position
partitions ) to be displayed and waveform display position is automatically set up.

- KV STUDIO Ver.6 User’s Manual - 9-69

 9-6 Real-time Chart Monitor

Item Description
Via upper end and lower end entry to set the display range.
Display position
Input range is 0 to 100Div, ensure upper end > lower end.
(Display range
Restore upper and lower value of display position to initial value.
initialization)
"Overlap on the screen" Clicking and all waveforms are overlapped.
"Parallel layout in area" Clicking and all waveforms are overlapped in parallel.
"Apply to all devices with The settings in the "Display range" tab are applied to all device waveforms
same data length" with the same data size.
"OK" Close the "Display setting" dialog box after application of the settings.
"Cancel" Cancel the settings and close the "Display setting" dialog box.
"Update" Close the "Display setting" dialog box after application of the settings.

● "Scale" tab.

9
MONITOR & SIMULATOR

Item Description
Scale Display/hide the scale on the left side of waveform.
Display The scale is always displayed.
Selecting waveforms Scale is displayed only for the selected waveform.
only
Hide Scale is not displayed.
Y-axis scale interval For the setup of scaling digit spacing.
"Apply to all waveforms" Clicking and the scale settings are applied to all the waveforms.
Scale within chart For the scaling of timing chart.
Display The scale is always displayed.
Selecting waveforms Scale is displayed only for the selected waveform.
only
Hide Scale is not displayed.
"apply to all waveforms" Clicking and the scale settings are applied to all the waveforms.

9-70 - KV STUDIO Ver.6 User’s Manual -

 9-6 Real-time Chart Monitor

Item Description
For the setup of display mode and spacing for scale overlap.
Scale shared within chart
A united scaling is adopted by all the waveform in the display area.
For all the waveforms, scaling is displayed at the same relative position. In case
Overlap display of
of waveform overlap, the waveform of the device selected is displayed on the top
scales
side (display spacing is set according to display spacing in X-direction).
Parallel display scale All the scales are displayed at the same time.
X-axis display interval Set display spacing on the scale in diagram.
"OK" Close the "Display setting" dialog box after application of the settings.
"Cancel" Cancel the settings and close the "Display setting" dialog box.
"Update" Close the "Display setting" dialog box after application of the settings.

● "Common" tab.

Item Description MONITOR & SIMULATOR

Sixe of thickness Set the line thickness of the waveform to be displayed.
All thin lines Use a thin line to display all waveforms.
Select only thick lines Only set the waveform line of the selected device to thick line.
All thick lines Display all waveforms with thick line.
The number of frames with time axis setting (horizontal) and the number of
X(←→) Div
frame unit samples.
Set the number of frames to be displayed along time axis (horizontal) in
The number of grids waveform display field.
Setting range: 10 to 100
Select the number of samples of every Div (1 frame).
pts/Div
Alternatively, you can click "Display" -> "Time axis zoom in"/"Time axis zoom out".
Y(↑↓) Div For the setup of number of frames on the vertical axis.
Set the number of frames displayed vertically in waveform display field.
The number of girds
Setting range: 10 to 100

- KV STUDIO Ver.6 User’s Manual - 9-71

 9-6 Real-time Chart Monitor

Item Description
Display/hide trigger Line of word device.
Trigger Line
This can be set up only when word device is set in trigger.
Display Display Trigger Line.
Hide Trigger Line is not displayed.
Color Display color other than waveform.
Background Set background color outside waveform display part.
Chart Set background color of waveform display part.
Grid Set frame color of waveform display field.
Character Set character color in timing curve display area.
"White background Set background of waveform display part to white, automatically set all
mode " waveform colors.
"Black background Set background color of waveform display part to black, automatically set all
mode " waveform colors.
"OK" Close the "Display setting" dialog box after application of the settings..
"Cancel" Cancel the settings and close the "Display setting" dialog box.
"update" Close the "Display setting" dialog box after application of the settings.

9
■ Overlap waveform display
MONITOR & SIMULATOR

From the menu, select "View (V)" "Cascade waveforms(O)" to display all device waveforms in
folding method.

■ Display waveform in parallel

From the menu, select "View (V)" "Tile waveforms (L)" to display all device waveforms in parallel
and vertical way.

■ Time scale zoom in

From the menu, select "View (V)" "Time scale zoom in (U)" to zoom in the waveform display along
time scale (horizontal).

Other procedure • Alt +→

•

■ Time scale zoom out

From the menu, select "View (V)" "Time scale zoom out (D)", to zoom out the waveform display
along time scale (horizontal).

Other procedure • Alt +←

•

9-72 - KV STUDIO Ver.6 User’s Manual -

 9-6 Real-time Chart Monitor

■ Number of grids zoom in/out

Set the number of vertical and lateral frames in waveform display field.

● Zoom in vertical grid

From the menu, select "View (V)" "Number of grids zoom in/out (V)" "Vertical zoom in(T)" to
zoom in the waveform display (reduce the number of grids displayed).

Other procedure • Ctrl + ↑

● Zoom out vertical grid

From the menu, select "View (V)" "Number of grids zoom in/out (V)" "Vertical zoom out (B)" to
zoom out vertical waveform grids.

Other procedure • Ctrl + ↓

● Zoom in horizontal grid

From the menu, select "View (V)" "Number of grids zoom in/out (V)" "Horizontal zoom in (R)" to 9
zoom in horizontal waveform grids.

MONITOR & SIMULATOR

Other procedure • Ctrl + →

● Zoom out horizontal grid

From the menu, select "View (V) "Number of grids zoom in/out (V)" "Horizontal zoom out (L)"
to zoom out horizontal waveform frames (increase the number of displayed grids).

Other procedure • Ctrl + ←

■ Zoom in/zoom out display range

Set display range of the waveform selected.

● Zoom in display range

From the menu, select "View (V)" "Display range zoom in/out (V)" "Display range zoom in (T)"
to zoom in the waveform display range (reduce display width).

Other procedure • Alt +↑

- KV STUDIO Ver.6 User’s Manual - 9-73

 9-6 Real-time Chart Monitor

● Zoom out display range

From the menu, select "View (V)" "Display range zoom in/out (V)" "Display range zoom out
(T)" zoom out the waveform display range (increase display width).

Other procedure • Alt +↓

● Move up display range

From the menu, select "View (V)" "Display range zoom in/out (V)" "Display range up (U)" to
move up the display range while the waveform display width is not changed.

Other procedure • Shift + ↑

● Move down display range

From the menu, select "View (V)" "Display range zoom in/out (V)" "Display range down (D)" to
move down the display range while the waveform display width is not changed.

9 Other procedure • Shift + ↓

MONITOR & SIMULATOR

■ Auto adjust display range

From the menu, select "View (V)" "Auto adjust display range (Q)" to optimize the display range of
selected device.

Note
Word device can only be optimized.

■ Display date and time on the horizontal axis.

From the menu, select "View (V)" "Display date and time on scale (Y)" to display date on the
horizontal axis.

Note
Only the data read from "Read tracking data in PLC" can display date.
"Read internal traced data in PLC", Page 9-76

■ Display cursor
The cursor is displayed in waveform display field.
Set the cursor in waveform display field, display the value and time, distance between Cursor A - B, etc.
on sample information display field.

9-74 - KV STUDIO Ver.6 User’s Manual -

 9-6 Real-time Chart Monitor

● Hide cursor
From the menu, select "View (V)" "Cursor (R)" "Hide cursor (N)", and the cursor will be hidden.

Other procedure •

● Show cursor
From the menu, select "View (V)" "Cursor (R)" "Show cursor (V)", and the Cursor A. B will be
displayed.

Other procedure •

● Select Cursor A
From the menu, select "View (V)" "Cursor (R)" Select Cursor A (A)", and the Cursor A will be
selected.

Other procedure •
9
● Select Cursor B

MONITOR & SIMULATOR

From the menu, select "View (V)" "Cursor (R)" "Select Cursor B (B)", and the Cursor B will be
selected.

Other procedure •

● Cursor A&B choice

From the menu, select "View (V)" "Cursor (R)" "Select Cursor AB (C)", and the Cursor A&B will
be selected.

Other procedure •

"Communications setting (C)" Menu

■ Communication setting
Monitor real-time timing curve and set PLC communication.
From the menu, select "Comm setting (C)" "Comm setting (T)", display communication setting
dialog box.
For details of communication setting, see "Communication Setting", Page 9-4。

- KV STUDIO Ver.6 User’s Manual - 9-75

 9-6 Real-time Chart Monitor

■ Start tracing.
Start tracing the registered device.
From the menu, select "Comm setting (C)" "Start tracing (S)", start communicating with PLC, start
tracing registration device.

Other procedure • F5
•

■ Stop tracing
From the menu, select "Comm setting (C)" "Stop tracing (E)" to stop tracing.

Other procedure • Shift + F5

•

9 ■ Pause tracing
From the menu, select "Comm setting (C)" "Pause tracing (I)" to pause tracing. To re-trace, select
MONITOR & SIMULATOR

"Start tracing (S)".

Other procedure • F6
•

■ Read internal traced data in PLC

Use Real-time Chart Monitor to read tracking data saved using trace function of KV-5500/5000/3000.
From the menu, select "Comm setting (C)" "Read traced data in PLC (P)", will read tracking data
from PLC.

For details of "KV-5500/5000/3000 trace function, please see "2-3 Logging/Tracing" in the "KV-
5500/5000/3000 Series User Manual".

Note
The tracing data read out cannot be traced via Real-time Chart Monitor.

9-76 - KV STUDIO Ver.6 User’s Manual -

 9-6 Real-time Chart Monitor

"Help (H)" Menu

■ Display user manual

From the menu, select "Help (H)" "User Manual (H)", Adobe Reader will start, display PDF manual
of Real-time Chart Monitor.

Other procedure • F1

■ Display version information of real-time chart monitor

From the menu, select "Help (H)" "Version information (A)", the "Version information" dialog box of
Real-time Chart Monitor is displayed.

MONITOR & SIMULATOR

- KV STUDIO Ver.6 User’s Manual - 9-77

 9-7 High-speed Time Chart Monitor
High-speed Time Chart Monitor is a function for monitoring the states of external I/O and bit devices in
individual scans. This section describes High-speed Time Chart Monitor functions.

Note
High-speed Time Chart Monitor can be used only when the model is "KV-1000" and "KV-700".

Features of High-speed Time Chart Monitor

• High-speed Time Chart Monitor display differs from the registration monitor time chart display in that
data can be collected in real time at almost the scan time of the PLC.
• Trigger conditions can be set to facilitate setting of traps during debugging.
• Up to 16384 data items can be collected and saved to file.
• The bit pattern search function enables searching in time charts by ON/OFF conditions.

Display High Speed Time Chart Monitor

9 The High-speed Time Chart Monitor is started up with Registration Monitor displayed. For details, see
"High-speed Time Chart Monitor", Page 9-34.
MONITOR & SIMULATOR

Names and Functions of Parts in High-speed Time Chart Monitor

(14)Trigger mode selection switch (4)Cursor A (6)Trigger point

(13)Trigger (2)Display ratio setting (5)Cursor B
(3)Monitor attribute guide
registration contact
(12)Trigger (21)Monitor start
attribute setup switch
(20)Recording cycle
(18)Sampling
condition setup
(22)Fixed scan time
(1)Chart diagram running setup
(16)Trigger condition (23)File save/
read switch
(15)Data size
trigger cursor (7)Sampling
information display
(17)Search trigger (24)Close switch
condition (19)Lost area (10)Scroll switch (9)Current position display

(11)Cursor jump switch (8)Cursor setup switch

(1) Time chart

The collected time chart is displayed as white lines. The lower line indicates OFF and the upper line indicates ON.
The time on the gradation varies according to the setting of (20) "Recording cycle" set in the pulldown list.

(2) Display ratio setting

Specify the dot width of the gradation that is displayed for the time chart.
The display ratio can be set within the range x1 to x9 (default: x2). Set a large value when the device to
be monitored is to be turned ON and OFF within a short time, and small value when the device is to be
turned ON and OFF within a long time to facilitate viewing of time charts.

9-78 - KV STUDIO Ver.6 User’s Manual -

 9-7 High-speed Time Chart Monitor

(3) Monitor registration contact

Indicates the contacts to be monitored on High-speed Time Chart Monitor.

Contacts to be monitored cannot be registered in the High-speed Time Chart Monitor window.
Contacts are registered in the Registration Monitor window. To change the details of
registered contacts, the High-speed Time Chart Monitor window must be closed, the contacts
to be monitored in the Registration Monitor window must be registered again, and the High-
speed Time Chart Monitor window must be opened again.

(4) Cursor A
This cursor is displayed in yellow.
By combining this cursor with Cursor B, you can check the timing between registered devices and response delay.
There are two ways of moving this cursor, by moving the mouse to the cursor position and dragging or
by turning (8) "Cursor setting switch" ON and clicking the move destination.
Set cursor setting switch to Move the mouse to the The cursor position and distance between cursors A and B
ON, move mouse and click. cursor position and drag. can be checked at (7) "Sampling information display" below.

MONITOR & SIMULATOR

(5) Cursor B
This cursor is displayed in blue.
By combining this cursor with Cursor A, you can check the timing between registered devices and response delay.
There are two ways of moving this cursor, by moving the mouse to the cursor position and dragging or
by turning (8) "Cursor setting switch" ON and clicking the move destination.
Set cursor setting switch to Move the mouse to the The cursor position and distance between cursors A and B
ON, move mouse and click. cursor position and drag. can be checked at (7) "Sampling information display" below.

(6)Trigger point
This point is displayed in white.
Trigger point must be displayed during trigger collection.
The absolute position of the trigger point and the date it was applied can
be checked at (7) "Sampling information display" below.

- KV STUDIO Ver.6 User’s Manual - 9-79

 9-7 High-speed Time Chart Monitor

(7) Collected information display

This displays the current time chart information.
Top :Expresses the position* at the left edge of the currently dis-
played time chart.*
A : Expresses the position* of Cursor A. *
B : Expresses the position* of Cursor B. *
|A-B| : Expresses the distance and time between Cursor A and Cursor B.
Lost : Displays the number of lost data from collected 32 collecting point data.
Max : Displays the maximum number of lost data.
CycleTime : Expresses the mean value of the scan time for each 32 collecting points.
TrigPoint : Displays the position where the trigger* was applied*.
"X/XX/XX XX : XX : XX": Displays the date that the trigger was applied.

* The position is displayed taking the point where the monitor start switch was pressed as position 0.

Note
An error of several ms occurs in the time displayed by |A-B| depending on the lost
collecting data and the display performance of the PC. Also, accurate times are not
displayed for roughly the first 30 scans' worth of data.

9
(8) Cursor setting switch
MONITOR & SIMULATOR

This switch sets display and movement of cursors A and B. Each press of this switch toggles between
ON and OFF.

Pressing switch A : Clicking on the chart display screen moves Cursor A to

that clicked point.

Pressing switch B : Clicking on the chart display screen moves Cursor B to

that clicked point.

Pressing switchesA+B : Clicking on the chart display moves cursors A and B

with the A-B distance intact.

No switch pressed : Clicking on the chart display screen does not result in any
change.

(9) Current position view

Displays the position of the currently displayed data in the overall collected chart. The display position
can be changed by using the scroll bar at the bottom of the view.

Band (gray): Currently displayed area

Line (yellow): Position of Cursor A
Line (blue): Position of Cursor B
Line (white): Trigger point

(10) Scroll switch

This switch scrolls the time chart screen. Move the selected cursor when (8) "Cursor setting switch" is ON.
: Scrolls the time chart screen one half screen to the left.
: Scrolls the time chart screen one dot to the left.
: Scrolls the time chart screen one dot to the right.
: Scrolls the time chart screen one half screen to the right.
9-80 - KV STUDIO Ver.6 User’s Manual -
 9-7 High-speed Time Chart Monitor

(11)Cursor jump switch

This switch jumps the cursor to the Cursor A, Cursor B or cursor trigger position.

The cursor cannot be made to jump if there is no cursor.

(12)Trigger attribute setup

Set the ON/OFF attributes when the trigger for a contact registered to a Monitor is used.
: Not set (not used as trigger condition)
: ON setting (Trigger is applied when ON)
: OFF setting (Trigger is applied when OFF)

(13)Trigger attribute guide

This is a guide for the trigger attribute switches set in (12) "Trigger attribute setup".

: Not set (not used as trigger condition)

: ON setting (Trigger is applied when ON)
: OFF setting (Trigger is applied when OFF)

(14)Trigger mode selection switch 9

This switch selects whether or not to apply a trigger. When the trigger condition matches with a trigger

MONITOR & SIMULATOR

applied, data collecting is automatically stopped after the data size specified with the (15) "Data after
trigger" cursor is reached.
A pressed button state indicates that a trigger is applied.
: Trigger is applied :Trigger is not applied.

(15) "Data after trigger" cursor

Set the data size to be collected after a preset trigger is applied.
When the cursor is at the right edge, collecting is automatically stopped after roughly 16000
data are collected.
When the cursor is at the left edge, collecting is automatically stopped after roughly 250
data are collected.
The default cursor position is the left edge.

Up to 16,384 data can be collected in a single trigger. The more the cursor closes to the right,
the less data collected,

(16) Trigger condition

Set the trigger conditions when (14) "Trigger mode selection switch" is set to ON.
AND : Trigger is applied when all conditions match.
OR : Trigger is applied when one of the condition is satisfied.

(17) Search trigger condition

Searches positions that match the conditions set at (12) "Trigger attribute setup" and (16) "Trigger conditions".

: Searches leftwards.

: Searches rightwards.

- KV STUDIO Ver.6 User’s Manual - 9-81

 9-7 High-speed Time Chart Monitor

(18) Set collecting conditions

• "Record failed area" button
When this button is set to ON, the range of lost data is displayed blank. When this button is set to OFF, the
time chart is displayed with lost data areas ignored.
With the High-speed Time Chart Monitor, data is sometimes lost due to the processing capabilities of the PC in
use or the scan time of the KV-1000/700. Use this button to set whether or not to display lost data on screen.

If lost areas are ignored, the number of valid data items increases as only data that could be
collected is displayed.

• "Disable waveform" button

When this button is set to ON, the waveform is not displayed during collecting. As the waveform is not drawn
on screen, PC performance increases, which results in less lost data compared with normal operation.

(19) Lost area

Displays the range of lost data as a blank when the "Record failed area" button is set to ON.

(20) Recording cycle

Sets the logging cycle of the time chart.
9 Select from one of seven cycles: SCAN, 1ms, 2ms, 5ms, 10ms, 20ms, and 50ms.
When "SCAN" is set, data is collected at the scan time of the KV-1000/700 that is being collected.
MONITOR & SIMULATOR

When a logging cycle other than "SCAN" is set, data is collected at the set time if the
set collecting time is longer than the actual scan time. If the set collecting time is shorter
than the actual scan time, data is collected at the scan time.

Example If "1ms" is set as the logging cycle when the scan time is 2ms, data is collected every
"2ms" scan time as the logging cycle set here is shorter than the scan time.

(21) Monitor start switch

This switch starts and stops monitoring. Each time pressing this switch toggles start
and stop.

(22) Set Fixed Scan Time Run

This setting runs the KV-1000/700 at a fixed scan time.
Normally, the scan time increases and decreases according to the execution state of
instructions and I/O ON/OFF states. When a time chart is displayed with the logging cycle
set to "SCAN", the time per gradation loses uniformity. So, to perform measurement at a
uniform time, set Fixed Scan Time Run to enabled. This ensures that the ladder program
is always executed at a uniform time with a wait applied even if the ladder execution time
is set to a fast value. Measurement is possible at equidistant intervals even if the logging
cycle is set to "SCAN" by setting fixed scan time running to enabled.
Set the fixedtime scan to a value faster than the actual scan time. If a lower value is set, the ladder program is
executed at the actual scan time. Also, if the processing speed of the PC used cannot keep up with the scan
time, resulting in lost data, data loss can be suppressed by applying a wait to the scan time in the fixed scan
time running setting.

Note
This setting is cleared by turning the KV-1000/700 ON and OFF, or by switching between
the Run and the PROG modes.
Also, this setting becomes invalid if the ladder program contained the fixed scan time setting.

9-82 - KV STUDIO Ver.6 User’s Manual -

 9-7 High-speed Time Chart Monitor

Enable Fixed Scan Time Run setting by the following procedure.

1 Click the "Fixed scan" button.

The "Set fixed scan" dialog box is displayed.

2 Mark the "Use fixed scan time func".

checkbox, and enter the scan time. Select this checkbox.

Enter the scan time in

ms.

3 Click the "Set to PLC" button. 9

This enables the fixed scan time function.

MONITOR & SIMULATOR

To disable the fixed scan time function, uncheck the "Use fixed scan time func" checkbox,
and click the "Set to PLC" button.

(23) File save/read switch

This switch can be used to save/read collected time charts.
For details on operation, "Saving Time Charts", "Reading time charts".

Note
Time charts cannot be saved or read while they are being recorded. Before saving or
reading a time chart, wait for execution of High-speed Time Chart Monitor to stop.

(24) Close switch

This switch closes the High-speed Time Chart Monitor window.

- KV STUDIO Ver.6 User’s Manual - 9-83

 9-7 High-speed Time Chart Monitor

■ Saving Time Charts

Save time charts by the following procedure.

1 Clicking the "Save" button.

and the "Save As" dialog box is displayed.

2 Specify the folder (directory) and file name.

Specify the folder

(directory).

Specify "KVS time

chart file(*.tcf)" as it is
as the file type.
Specify the file name.

9 Item Explanation
Specify the folder (directory) in which the time chart is saved. Normally, the project
Save in(I)
MONITOR & SIMULATOR

folder to which the currently monitored ladder is to be saved opens.

File name(N) Enter the name of the time chart to be saved.
Files of type(T) Specify "KVS time chart file(*.tcf)".

The file is automatically appended with the extension ".tcf" when the file name is set.

■ Reading time charts

Read time charts by the following procedure.

1 Clicking the "Read" button.

and the "Open" dialog box is displayed.

2 Can't read in file.

Specify the file in which

the time chart is saved.

Specify "KVS time

chart file(*.tcf)" as it is
as the file type.
Specify the file name.

Item Explanation
Save in(I) Specify the folder (directory) in which the time chart is to be saved. Normally, the
project folder to which the currently monitored ladder is to be saved opens.
File name(N) Enter the name of the time chart to be saved.
Files of type(T) Specify "KVS time chart file(*.tcf)".

9-84 - KV STUDIO Ver.6 User’s Manual -

 9-7 High-speed Time Chart Monitor

• Time charts can also be specified by entering the file name and by selecting the time
chart to read with the mouse from the file list.
• Time charts can be read even with Monitor offline.
• Registration Monitor must be opened before opening Time Chart Monitor to read a file
even if a time chart is being monitored.

■ Saving time charts as bitmaps

Save the currently displayed time chart in bitmap format by the following procedure.

Note
The time chart in the currently displayed range is saved in bitmap format. Time charts
outside the currently displayed range are not saved.

1 Click the file Save/Load "Save" button.

The "Save As" dialog box is displayed.

MONITOR & SIMULATOR

2 Specify the folder (directory) and file name to the save the time chart to.

Specify the folder (direc-

tory) to save to.

Select "bitmap file

(*.bmp) file" as the file
Specify the file name.
type.

Item Explanation
Save in(I) Specify the folder (directory) in which the bitmap file is to be saved. Normally, the
project folder containing the ladder program being monitored opens.
File name(N) Enter the name of the bitmap file to be saved.
Files of type(T) Specify "bitmap(*.bmp)".

- KV STUDIO Ver.6 User’s Manual - 9-85

 9-8 Unit Monitor
Unit Monitor differs from the Registration Monitor and Batch Monitor in that it displays relay and DM
values optimally matched to the unit to monitor. This section describes how to view Unit Monitor and
how to operate Unit Monitor.

Features of Unit Monitor

The Unit Monitor has the following functions:

• DMs and relays currently assigned to each unit can be displayed in the state that they were originally
registered.
• Each unit has provided display formats and layout templates for convenient monitoring.
• The selected unit can be monitored simply by selecting the unit to monitor without having to worry
about relay or DM assignment status.

Displaying Unit Monitor KV-5500/5000/3000 KV-1000 KV-700 KV-P16 KV-10/16/24/40

9 "Monitor/Simulator (N)" "Unit Monitor(U)"

• From the menu, select "Monitor/Simulator (N)" "Unit monitor (U)", select monitor unit, click
MONITOR & SIMULATOR

"display" button.
• In the "Unit settings" workspace, select the unit to be monitored, right click, and select Unit Monitorî from the
menu.

Note
Unit Monitor can only be selected from Monitor or edit menu.

About the "Unit Monitor" window KV-5500/5000/3000 KV-1000 KV-700 KV-P16 KV-10/16/24/40

The following describes the Unit Monitor windows for each of the 16-, 32- and 64-point I/O Units. For
details on unit functions and how to set these functions, refer to the User's Manual for the respective
unit.

9-86 - KV STUDIO Ver.6 User’s Manual -

 9-8 Unit Monitor

16-, 32- and 64-point Unit Monitor

(3)Comment display area (4)Unit information

(9)Channel selector tab

(8) Input time constant
(1) Start relay Number

(2) ON/OFF state display

(5) Relay Number

(7) "Display format

(6) Word display value
selector" button

Name
(1) Start relay Number
Function
Displays the leading relay Number assigned to the selected unit. The Number
9
reflects the content set on the Unit Editor.

MONITOR & SIMULATOR

The leading relay Number is displayed for each channel (16 points).
(2) ON/OFF state display Displays the ON/OFF state of the relay.
OFF: Gray
ON:Blue for an input area and green for an output unit
(3)Comment display area Displays the device comment of the relay. Only one comment is displayed as the type
of comment.
(4)Unit information Displays the information (unit connection Number and PLC name) of the selected unit.
(5) Relay Number Displays which relay Number (nth relay Number) the relay is starting from the
leading relay Number at "(1) Leading relay Number".
(6) Word display value This area is for displaying the value expressed in words for relays on each channel.
(7) "Display format This button selects one of three annotation formats for "word display value": "DEC
selector" button (unsigned)", "DEC (signed)" and "Hex".
(8) Input time constant This area displays the input time constant that has been set on Unit Editor.
When an output unit is being monitored, "---" is displayed for the output unit as an
input time constant does not exist.
(9)Channel selector tab This tab switches the channel to be monitored. For "00 to 31", the lower two
channels of a 64-point unit are displayed, and for "32 to 63" the upper two
channels are displayed.

For special unit monitor, please refer to every special unit manual.

Important
• The "(8) Input time constant" setting cannot be changed on Unit Monitor.
• When the "(8) Input time constant" setting has been changed while monitoring the
access window, the new setting will not be reflected in the Unit Monitor display. To
reflect the new setting in the Unit Monitor display, close and open the Unit Monitor
window again.

- KV STUDIO Ver.6 User’s Manual - 9-87

 9-9 Batch Change
Batch Change batch-rewrites device values on the PLC and saves them to file. This section describes
how to operate the Batch Change window.

About "Batch change" Window

For how to display "Batch change window", see "Batch Change Window", Page 9-35.

Create New CSV File KV-5500/5000/3000 KV-1000 KV-700 KV-P16 KV-10/16/24/40

9
File(F) New CSV File(N)
MONITOR & SIMULATOR

In "Batch change" window, create the CSV file to be used.

From the menu in "Batch change" window, select "File (F)" "New CSV file (N)" to create a CSV file.

Note
Before you create a new file, please save all the currently opened files

■ Limits for "Batch change" window

"Batch change" window with the following limits.
• Exponent and indirect reference device cannot be used.
• Timer (T), counter (C), high-speed counter (CTH) can only use current value (cannot use contact and
setting value).
• High-speed counter comparator (CTC) could only use the set value (contact cannot be used).
• Device is the model being edited, only the existent can become destination.
• For DM, EM, FM, W, ZF, C, T, CTH, CTC and CM devices, do not access using BIN 1BIT. Besides,
when display format is set to 32 bit, Device Number shall adopt even number.
• When saved to memory card, T/C/CTC/CTH cannot be used.

9-88 - KV STUDIO Ver.6 User’s Manual -

 9-9 Batch Change

Open CSV File KV-5500/5000/3000 KV-1000 KV-700 KV-P16 KV-10/16/24/40

"File(F)" "Open CSV File(O)"

From the menu in "Batch change" window, select "File (F)" "Open CSV file (O)" to display the
"Open file" dialog box.
Select CSV file, and click "Open".

MONITOR & SIMULATOR

Save CSV File KV-5500/5000/3000 KV-1000 KV-700 KV-P16 KV-10/16/24/40

"File(F)" "Save CSV file(S)"

From the menu in "Batch change" window, select "File (F)" "Save to CSV file (S)", will save the file
being edited.

Note
"Save to CSV file" cannot be selected when new file is being edited.

Save the CSV File by Another Name. KV-5500/5000/3000 KV-1000 KV-700 KV-P16 KV-10/16/24/40

File (F) Save the CSV file as.(A)

From the menu in "Batch change" window, select "File (F)" "Save CSV file as(A)", open "Save as"
dialog box.
Save the file being edited as.

- KV STUDIO Ver.6 User’s Manual - 9-89

 9-9 Batch Change

Read Memory Card KV-5500/5000/3000 KV-1000 KV-700 KV-P16 KV-10/16/24/40

File (F) Read memory card(R)

From the menu in "Batch change" window, select "File (F)" "Read memory card (R)", open
"Memory card" dialog box.
Specify driver and folder of CSV file saved in "Batch change" window.

9
MONITOR & SIMULATOR

Can't read CSV file that not stored in "Batch change" window.

Write Memory Card KV-5500/5000/3000 KV-1000 KV-700 KV-P16 KV-10/16/24/40

File (F) Write memory card(R)

From the menu in "Batch change" window, select "File (F)" "Write memory card (Z)", open "Memory
card" dialog box.
Specify the driver and folder where the destination memory card is saved.

When error appears in the data edited in "Batch change" window, the following dialog box appears.
When selecting "NO", will return to the edit image of "Batch change" window.

9-90 - KV STUDIO Ver.6 User’s Manual -

 9-9 Batch Change

Close File KV-5500/5000/3000 KV-1000 KV-700 KV-P16 KV-10/16/24/40

File(F) Close file(C)

From the menu in "Batch change" window, select "File(F)" "Close file (C)", close the file being
edited.

When changing the data being edited, following dialog box appears. Select "No", abandon current
data edited.

9
Exit KV-5500/5000/3000 KV-1000 KV-700 KV-P16 KV-10/16/24/40 .

MONITOR & SIMULATOR

File(F) Exit (X)

From the menu in "Batch change" window, select "File (F)" "Exit (C)", will exit window.

When changing the edited data, confirmation dialog box is displayed.

Cross Reference KV-5500/5000/3000 KV-1000 KV-700 KV-P16 KV-10/16/24/40

Edit (E) cross reference (F)

Select the device edited in "Batch change" window, from the menu, select "Edit (E)" "Cross
reference (F)", cross reference will be generated in the output window of KV STUDIO.

For details of verification, see "Cross Reference", Page 5-14.

- KV STUDIO Ver.6 User’s Manual - 9-91

 9-9 Batch Change

Undo KV-5500/5000/3000 KV-1000 KV-700 KV-P16 KV-10/16/24/40

Edit (E) Restore (U)

Cancel latest operation of "Batch change" window and return to original status.

Note
"Undo", "Redo" in "Batch change" window is initial state, fails to be selected.
To enable "Undo", "Redo", from the menu of KV STUDIO, select "Tool (T)" "Option
(O)", check the "Enable Undo/Redo in batch change dialog" checkbox in system
setting tab.

9
MONITOR & SIMULATOR

Redo KV-5500/5000/3000 KV-1000 KV-700 KV-P16 KV-10/16/24/40

"Edit(E)" "Redo(R)"

Use "Redo (U)" in "Batch change" window to redo the cancelled operation.

If cancel fails, the menu becomes grey, which means unselected.

Select All KV-5500/5000/3000 KV-1000 KV-700 KV-P16 KV-10/16/24/40

Edit (E) select all (A)

Select all cells in "Batch change" window.

From the menu, select "Edit (E)" "Select all (A)".

9-92 - KV STUDIO Ver.6 User’s Manual -

 9-9 Batch Change

Cut/Copy/Paste Selected Range KV-5500/5000/3000 KV-1000 KV-700 KV-P16 KV-10/16/24/40

Edit(E) Cut selected range(T)

Copy selected range(C)
Paste selected range(P)

"Cut" or "copy" the cell selected in "Batch change" window, execute "paste".

Delete Rung KV-5500/5000/3000 KV-1000 KV-700 KV-P16 KV-10/16/24/40

"Edit(E)" "Delete Rung(D)"

In "Batch change" window, delete the line containing the selected cell.
From the menu, select "Edit (E)" "Delete Rung (D)".
9

MONITOR & SIMULATOR

Delete Selected Range. KV-5500/5000/3000 KV-1000 KV-700 KV-P16 KV-10/16/24/40

Edit(E) Delete selected range(Y)

Delete the cell of the selected range via "Batch change" window.
From the menu, select "Edit (E)" "Delete selected range (Y)".

Sort by Device Sequence KV-5500/5000/3000 KV-1000 KV-700 KV-P16 KV-10/16/24/40

Edit (E) Sort by devices (S)

Via "Batch change" window, sort the data being edited according to the sequence of the device.
From the menu, select "Edit (E)" "Sort by devices(S)".

Before After

- KV STUDIO Ver.6 User’s Manual - 9-93

 9-9 Batch Change

Read All Items from PLC KV-5500/5000/3000 KV-1000 KV-700 KV-P16 KV-10/16/24/40

PLC (P) reads all items from PLC (R)

Read the current value of all data edited in "Batch change" window from PLC.
From the menu, select "PLC (P)" "Read all items from PLC (R)".

Note
Before operation, please set KV STUDIO and PLC to communication enabled status.

Read Selected Range from PLC KV-5500/5000/3000 KV-1000 KV-700 KV-P16 KV-10/16/24/40

PLC (P) Read selected range from PLC(P)

9 Read the current value of device containing the selected cell line in "Batch change" window from PLC.
From the menu, select "PLC (P)" "Read selected range from PLC (P)".
MONITOR & SIMULATOR

Note
Before operation, please set KV STUDIO and PLC to communication enabled status.

Write All Items to PLC KV-5500/5000/3000 KV-1000 KV-700 KV-P16 KV-10/16/24/40

PLC (P) Write PLC into all items (W)

Write the current value of all data edited in "Batch change" window into PLC.
From the menu, select "PLC (P)" "Write PLC into all items (W)".

Note
Before operation, please set KV STUDIO and PLC to communication enabled status.

Write Selected Range to PLC KV-5500/5000/3000 KV-1000 KV-700 KV-P16 KV-10/16/24/40

PLC(P) Write selected range to PLC(Q)

Write current device value on the line of the cell selected contained in "Batch change" window into PLC.
From the menu, select "PLC (P)" "Write the selected range into PLC (Q)".

Note
Before operation, please set KV STUDIO and PLC to communication enabled status.

9-94 - KV STUDIO Ver.6 User’s Manual -

 9-9 Batch Change

Batch Insert KV-5500/5000/3000 KV-1000 KV-700 KV-P16 KV-10/16/24/40

Add device(D) Batch insert (B)

Specify range and insert the device into "Batch change" window in batch.
From the menu, select "Add device(D)" "Batch insert (B)" to open the "Batch insertion" dialog box.

Item Explanation 9
Select the device type to be entered in batch. Click to display the drop-down

MONITOR & SIMULATOR

menu.
Selection of device
The type of selected devices varies with the model supported by the
project being edited.
Specify leading Number of devices entered in batch.
Leading Number Specify bit device, when display format is " BIN 1BIT", specify using bit
unit, specify using channel unit in other cases.
Specify the number of devices to be entered in batch.

number When the display formats "DEC 32bit" "±DEC 32bit" "HEX 32bit"
and "FLOAT" are selected, the number of devices to be inserted
equal to the number of devices *2 word units.
Maximal number of specified devices that can be inserted will be automatically
Max. number of data
stored into the number.
Specify display format of devices entered in batch. Click to display the
Display format
drop-down list.

Insert Rung KV-5500/5000/3000 KV-1000 KV-700 KV-P16 KV-10/16/24/40

Device add (D) Insert rung (L)

Insert a blank rung into the specified rung.

From the menu, select "Add device (D)" "Insert rung (L)".

- KV STUDIO Ver.6 User’s Manual - 9-95

 9-9 Batch Change

Increment Insert KV-5500/5000/3000 KV-1000 KV-700 KV-P16 KV-10/16/24/40

Add devices (D) Insert increment (L) Ctrl + I

Insert the device that adds +1 (or +2) to the previous Device Number
From the menu, select "Add devices (D)" "Insert increment (I)".

Item Description
Module/macro*2 Select the module/macro identical to the previous device.
Device Insert Device Number that adds +1 *1 to the previous Device Number
Current value Copy the value identical to the previous device.
Display format Select the display format identical to the previous device.

*1 When display formats of the previous device are "DEC 32bit" " ±DEC 32bit" "HEXDEC 32bit"
"float", add +2 to Device Number and insert.
*2 It is valid only when the models "KV-5500", "KV-5000", "KV-3000", " KV-1000 " are selected.

9
MONITOR & SIMULATOR

9-96 - KV STUDIO Ver.6 User’s Manual -

9-10 Online Edit
This section describes the Online Edit feature for changing thePLC ladder program during monitoring.

Overview

Online Edits allow you to change the ladder program directly on the KV STUDIO monitor screen. These handy
functions allow you to change simple programs or perform site adjustment during final debugging during programming.

Online Edit Features

The features of line edit are as follows:

• The ON/OFF states of devices and changes in values can be checked in real time in the same way
as the monitor screen even while in the Online Edit.
-> Debugging while checking the operating status of devices is possible in real time.
• The background of the positions where editing is required is marked blue, allowing you to identify the
problematic cells at a glance.
-> Changes can be performed easily, for example, if devices are found not to be operating normally
as a result of a change.
• All screens can be edited while in Online Edit. 9
-> Even when setting interlocks to two or more circuits, editing is possible as if you are in the Editor

MONITOR & SIMULATOR

mode without switching the edit circuit.

Cautions Upon Using the Online Edit Function

Caution As the Online Edit function changes the program while the PLC is in the Run mode,
equipment may be seriously damaged or personnel may be seriously injured if Online
Edit is used in the wrong way. Ensure the following to be checked before you start.
• Before using Online Edit, ensure no injury or damage takes place even if an accident occurred.
• Do not add circuits (e.g. Execution Condition B contact circuit) immediately after a
program is transferred. Otherwise, the machine may be broken.
• Do not delete ON outputs. Otherwise, the output may be kept in the ON state.

Import
• If monitoring is forcibly ended due to a PC error during Online Editing or transfer of the ladder
program, the ladder programs cannot be transferred to PLC
• The ON/OFF states and values of devices currently monitored in Online Edit are displayed
based on the ladder program (programs currently running on) before Online Edit is started.
Before transfer, the operation is such that program states currently being edited by Online
Editing are not reflected.
To run on a program after adding or changing by Online Editing, transfer must be performed.
• Writing in the RUN mode cannot be performed when macro instructions are added or deleted
during Online Editing.
• Local device assignment cannot be performed with Online Edit. Instead, you need to return to
the edited program and assign again.

- KV STUDIO Ver.6 User’s Manual - 9-97

 9-10 Online Edit

Start Online Edit KV-5500/5000/3000 KV-1000 KV-700 KV-P16 KV-10/16/24/40

"Monitor/Simulator(N)" "Start Online Edit(O)" F10

1 Select "Monitor/Simulator(N)" "Start Online Edit(O)" from menu.

The title bar on KV STUDIO changes to "Online Edit" from "Edit" to indicate that Online Edit is active.

Other procedure From drop-down list of mode column, select "Online edit".

9 Note
When the project being edited is different from the project stored in PLC, fail to transfer
from editor mode to direct Online Editor mode. Please transfer the project being
MONITOR & SIMULATOR

edited or temporarily switch to monitor mode, then switch to Online Editor mode.

Continual real-time monitoring can be made on ON/ OFF status and value of every device in
Online Edit.

2 Creating the Ladder Program

About creating the Ladder Program, see "EDIT", Page 5-1.
The background color of the cell added or changed is displayed in light blue, which means program
change.
"Clear Changed Background Color", Page 6-32

9-98 - KV STUDIO Ver.6 User’s Manual -

 9-10 Online Edit

Transfer Online Edit KV-5500/5000/3000 KV-1000 KV-700 KV-P16 KV-10/16/24/40

"Monitor/Simulator(N)" "Transfer Online Edit(F)" F11

Transfer Online Edit Ladder to PLC.

From the menu, select "Monitor/Simulator (N)" "Online Editor transfer (F)", the Ladder will be
transmitted to PLC body.

Other procedure Select "Online edit transfer(E)"from the right-click menu of ladder edit window.

If an error is found in the program during program conversion, the message "Conversion
error" is displayed, and transfer is aborted. Check the details of the error displayed on the
output window, correct the ladder program, and transfer the ladder program again.

Caution Writing in RUN will be under great risk due to connection of PLC controller. Be
careful during operation! 9
KV-5500/5000/3000 series User's Manual, "About writing in RUN mode"

MONITOR & SIMULATOR

- KV STUDIO Ver.6 User’s Manual - 9-99

 9-10 Online Edit

Setup Online Edit KV-5500/5000/3000 KV-1000 KV-700 KV-P16 KV-10/16/24/40

"Monitor/Simulator(N)" "Setup Online Edit(J)" F12

The background of the cell added or changed via Online Edit is displayed in light blue, indicating that a
change needs to be made. Set time and display using auto clear change specification.

Note
Online editor setting can be set only when KV STUDIO is in monitor mode or Online
Editor mode.

1 Select "Monitor/Simulator(N)" "Setup online edit(J)" from the menu.

It displays "Setup option" dialog box.

2 Select change program, display background color, clear timing.

9 Clear background color according to the timing indicted by the selected checkbox.
MONITOR & SIMULATOR

Item Explanation
Change to monitor mode after online edit Transfer Ladder edited using Online Editor, will automatically
transfer. switch to monitor mode.
When Monitor mode is switched to Online Edit mode, clear
Auto(Monitor -> Online Edit)*
background color.
When Monitor mode is switched to Editor mode, the
Auto(Monitor -> Edit)*
background color is cleared.
When Online Edit mode is switched to Monitor mode, the
Auto(Online Edit -> Monitor)*
background color is cleared.
Display confirmation dialog box during Display confirmation dialog box when transferring the ladder
online edit transfer program edited using online editor.

* This cannot be selected when the model is "KV-5500", "KV-5000" and "KV-3000".

Note
If the checkbox is not selected, the background color of program cannot be cleared.
So, background color shall be manually cleared. To manually clear setting, select
"View (V)" "Clear background color (H)" from the menu.
"Clear Changed Background Color", Page 6-32

3 After setting up, click "OK".

Close "Setup option" dialog box.
9-100 - KV STUDIO Ver.6 User’s Manual -
9-11 Simulator
The chapter describes application method of simulation program and these functions.

Overview

"Simulator" simulates operation of ladder programs you create on Editor without actually connecting to
a PLC. Simulator allows you to perform the following operations:

• Check the operating status of ladder programs in the Ladder Monitor or Registration Monitor
(time chart) or in real time in the Batch Monitor.
• Simulate continuous scan/continuous step or single step/single scan by various execution
methods
• Undo functions such as reverse step and reverse continuous step are available to enable
efficient debugging.
• Easily change the setting values or current values of timers, counters or devices.

Simulator Restrictions KV-5500/5000/3000 KV-1000 KV-700 KV-P16 KV-10/16/24/40

9
■ Common restrictions

MONITOR & SIMULATOR

• Extension Unit operations cannot be simulated.
• The high-speed counter is not supported on Simulator.
• The direct clock pulse function is not supported on Simulator.
• The positioning control function is not supported on Simulator.
• The RCOM instruction is not supported on Simulator.
• After executing WTIME instruction, error is also detected. But timer of PLC don't change.
• Operation of the interrupt program is subject to the following restrictions:
Item Explanation
INT CTC0, INT CTC3
Interrupt program does not run.
INT CR3013, INT CR3113
Interrupt is enabled, and is executed by END processing at the scan
INT R00000 to INT R00003
where the interrupt was generated.
• The scan time is longer than in actual operation as simulation is performed on Windows.
Attention should be paid to this when setting up Timer.
• The scan time display varies depending on the type of PC even when running the same ladder
program as the same operation as the PLC is simulated internally on the PC you are using.

- KV STUDIO Ver.6 User’s Manual - 9-101

 9-11 Simulator

■ Control relays and control memories supported by Simulator

The table below summarizes the control relay and control memories that run on Simulator.

● Supported control relays (CR)

Device Status
CR2002 Normal ON
CR2003 Normal OFF
CR2004 10ms clock pulse (duty cycle 50%)
CR2005 100ms clock pulse (duty cycle 50%)
CR2006 1s clock pulse (duty cycle 50%)
CR2007 A scanning cycle is cut off when running is started
CR2008 A scanning cycle is initiated when running is started
CR2009 ON when the operation result is negative or overflow
CR2010 ON when the operation result is 0
CR2011 ON when the operation result is positive
CR2012 ON when operation error

CR2600 Rising edge Falling edge Both edges

INT0 interrupt polarity CR2600 OFF ON OFF ON
CR2601 CR2601 OFF OFF ON ON

9 CR2602
INT1 interrupt polarity CR2602
Rising edge
OFF ON
Falling edge
OFF
Both edges
ON
CR2603 CR2603 OFF OFF ON ON
MONITOR & SIMULATOR

CR2604 Rising edge Falling edge Both edges

INT2Interrupt polarity CR2604 OFF ON OFF ON
CR2605 CR2605 OFF OFF ON ON

CR2606 Rising edge Falling edge Both edges

INT3Interrupt polarity CR2606 OFF ON OFF ON
CR2607 CR2607 OFF OFF ON ON

CR2608 Rising edge Falling edge Both edges

INT4Interrupt polarity CR2608 OFF ON OFF ON
CR2609 CR2609 OFF OFF ON ON

CR2610 Rising edge Falling edge Both edges

INT5Interrupt polarity CR2610 OFF ON OFF ON
CR2611 CR2611 OFF OFF ON ON

CR2612 Rising edge Falling edge Both edges

INT6Interrupt polarity CR2612 OFF ON OFF ON
CR2613 CR2613 OFF OFF ON ON

CR2614 Rising edge Falling edge Both edges

INT7Interrupt polarity CR2614 OFF ON OFF ON
CR2615 CR2615 OFF OFF ON ON

CR2700 Rising edge Falling edge Both edges

INT8Interrupt polarity CR2700 OFF ON OFF ON
CR2701 CR2701 OFF OFF ON ON

CR2702 Rising edge Falling edge Both edges

INT9Interrupt polarity CR2702 OFF ON OFF ON
CR2703 CR2703 OFF OFF ON ON

CR2814 Zero suppress setting for the DASC, FASC instructions

CR2815 Omission of the "+" sign in setting up the DASC, FASC instructions
* CR devices other than the above are the same as internal auxiliary relays on the Simulator.

9-102 - KV STUDIO Ver.6 User’s Manual -

 9-11 Simulator

● Supported control memories (CM)

Device Function
CM00700 (year)
CM00701 (month)
CM00702 (day)
Reading of calendar timer (PC
CM00703 (hour)
setting date/time)
CM00704 (Minute)
CM00705 (s)
CM00706 (week)
* CM devices other than the above do not function even if used on Simulator.

■ Device states when Simulator is stopped

Stopping continuous scanning in Simulator means that PLC is switched over from RUN mode to PROG
mode.
Each of the devices operate as follows when Simulator is stopped.
State
Device KV-1000/700/700+M/
KV-5500/5000/3000

R (Relay) Power-off hold setting *1

P16/10/16/24/40
MEMSW instruction setting *2 9
B Power-off hold setting *1 -

MONITOR & SIMULATOR

MR Reset
LR State holding.
CR2002 : ON
CR CR2003 to CR2008 : State holding.
Other : OFF
DM/EM/FM State holding.
ZF State holding. -
W State holding. -
TM 0
Contacts : OFF
T Register end :Current value is same as setting value.
Unregistered : The current value is 0
C Hold contact and current value
CTH State holding.
CTC State hold
Z State holding
CM State holding

*1 Set up Power-off Hold via the CPU system. "CPU System Setting", Page 6-43
*2 For details on the MEMSW instruction, please see KV-5500/5000/3000/1000 Series
Instruction Reference Manual.

- KV STUDIO Ver.6 User’s Manual - 9-103

 9-11 Simulator

■ Device states when reset

Resetting Simulator clears all devices.
Each of the devices operate as follows when Simulator is stopped.
Device State
RRelay OFF
B OFF
MR OFF
LR OFF
CR2002 : ON
CR
Other : OFF
DM/EM/FM 0
ZF 0
W 0
TM 0
Contact : OFF
T Registration end :Current value is same as setting value.
Unregistered : Current value is 0
Contact : OFF
C
current value : 0
9 CTH current value :0
CTC Contacts : OFF
MONITOR & SIMULATOR

Z 0
CM 0

Starting Up and Exiting Simulator KV-5500/5000/3000 KV-1000 KV-700 KV-P16 KV-10/16/24/40

"Monitor/Simulator(N)" Simulator(L)" Ctrl + F2

■ How to start Simulator

1 From the menu, select "Monitor/Simulator (N)" "Simulator (L)".
Display Simulator image, and display the Ladder displayed in Editor.

Other procedure From the drop-down list of mode column, select simulator.

Note
When a conversion error occurs, Simulator cannot be started. Please correct Ladder
error and start Simulator again.

■ How to exit Simulator

According to following steps, exit Simulator, and return to Editor.
Due to device value cleared, return to Editor. When Simulator is started again, device default value will
be restored.
1 Select "Monitor/Simulator(N)" "Return to Editor(X)" from menu.

Other procedure • Click button.

• Pres key+ F1 key
• From the drop-down list of mode column, select editor.

9-104 - KV STUDIO Ver.6 User’s Manual -

 9-11 Simulator

Starting up and Stopping Simulator KV-5500/5000/3000 KV-1000 KV-700 KV-P16 KV-10/16/24/40

For details on continuous scan and stopping Simulator, "Execute RUN/continuous Scan",
"PROGRAM/stop", Page 10-2

Names and Functions of Screen Parts KV-5500/5000/3000 KV-1000 KV-700 KV-P16 KV-10/16/24/40

When Simulator is started up, the screen moves to the Simulator screen of the ladder program that was
being edited on Editor.
The Batch Monitor window and Registration Monitor window are also displayed if these monitor
windows were previously displayed.

mnemonics list

Batch monitor window

9

MONITOR & SIMULATOR

Register monitor window

"Change device value"

window

The function for windows are as follows.

"Mnemonics List", Page 6-29
"Batch Monitoring", Page 9-50
"Register Monitor", Page 9-45
"Change device value" window, Page 9-43

Executing Simulator KV-5500/5000/3000 KV-1000 KV-700 KV-P16 KV-10/16/24/40

This section describes how to execute Simulator.

Scan Execution

This section describes scan execution.

■ Outline of scan execution function

"Scan execution" refers to executing a program in single scans (cycles) at a time from initialization
There are two scan execution modes, "Continuous scanning" and "1 scan execution." Of these,
"Continuous scanning" is the same operation as "RUN" on a Monitor program.
The scan time or watchdog timer can be set, and current values or setting values can be changed.
Rung breaks are not applied during scan execution. Device breaks are applied only when conditions
are established in END processing.
- KV STUDIO Ver.6 User’s Manual - 9-105
 9-11 Simulator

■ Continuous scanning
Execute the program continuously.
The state is same as the RUN mode of
PLC.Continuous scanning is normally used for
debugging and troubleshooting. Execute program
For details on the Continuous scanning procedure, Repeated
scan once Scan once
"Execute Continuous Step", Page 10-3.

End process

■ Single scanning
Only one scanning cycle is performed by the ladder
program. When a single scanning is executed in the
continuous scanning mode, operation is stopped.
Execute program
Executing a single scanning enables you to check
9 operation involving detailed timing operation so Scan once
that ladder functions can be checked the moment
MONITOR & SIMULATOR

that specific relays turn ON.

For details on the single scanning execution End process

procedure, please refer to the "Execute 1

Scan", Page 10-3.

■ BREAK setting
A "BREAK" is a function for stopping a ladder program at specified conditions during program operation.
Device BREAK is used to partially verify the state of operation or to discover buggy locations. About
BREAK, see "Device Break Setting", Page 10-7.

■ Setting the wait time

The scan time during execution of Simulator changes according to the length of the ladder diagram and
the performance of the PC.
A too-short scanning time makes it difficult to perform debugging, and the scan time can be lengthened
by using the set wait time feature.

■ Setting the scan time

The scan time during Simulator execution can be set to any time.
The ladder program is simulated for each single scan by the preset scan time. This feature allows you
to simulate execution of ladder programs at a timing close to that of actual operation as simulation is
performed using the scan time of an actual device.

■ Setting the watchdog timer

A "watchdog timer" is for detecting arithmetic calculation blockages caused by PLC or program
abnormalities or when long programs are executed. Watchdog timers allow you to discover infinite
loops in ladder programs.

9-106 - KV STUDIO Ver.6 User’s Manual -

 9-11 Simulator

Watchdog timer is set via simulator setting dialog box.

"Set up Simulator", Page 9-32

Step execution

This section describes step execution.

■ Overview
"Step execution" is the simulation of the ladder program one instruction at a time. During step execution,
the mnemonic list is displayed, and you can check the currently executing rung of the ladder program.
You can also view the operating status of programs from a specified input through to output by
specifying break conditions or setting breakpoints together with step execution. With programs
comprising a combination of multiple arithmetic operation instructions, this is useful for finding the
cause when results are in error even though correct values have been entered.
There are four execution modes: "continuous step," "1 step," "reverse continuous step," and "reverse 1 step."
The function for windows are as follows.
"Execute Continuous Step", Page 10-3
"Execute 1 Block", Page 10-4
9

MONITOR & SIMULATOR

"Execute 1 Step", Page 10-4
"Execute Reverse Continuous Step", Page 10-5
"Execute Reverse 1 Block", Page 10-5
"Execute reverse 1 step", Page 10-6

■ About the Mnemonic List window

When step execution is performed, the current position is scrolled and displayed matched to the step
execution speed as the values and ON/OFF states of devices successively change in the Ladder
Monitor window. The Mnemonic List window is also displayed, and the currently executing mnemonic
rung is displayed reversed.

Value of internal register at cursor position ON/OFF state of cursor position :

ON status: OFF status

Execution rung cursor (yellow)

Displays the currently executing rung
in green.

Current cursor position

Displays the currently executing rung
reversed in green.

Break point (purple)

Displays the break point.

- KV STUDIO Ver.6 User’s Manual - 9-107

 9-11 Simulator

■ Pausing/stopping program execution

Pause/stop scan execution and step execution.
About Pausing/stopping, see "Pause", Page 10-6.

■ Reset
Return current values to their defaults.

9
MONITOR & SIMULATOR

9-108 - KV STUDIO Ver.6 User’s Manual -

10
DEBUG
This chapter describes the functions of debug and how to use.

DEBUG
10-1 About Debugging Functions •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• 10-2

- KV STUDIO Ver.6 User’s Manual - 10-1

 10-1 About Debugging Functions
This sectifon describes each of the functions contained in the "Debug(D)" menu.
The functions are different under different KV STUDIO modes.
Please read "KV-5500/5000/3000 series user manual", 3-12 programming skill.

Warning
Debugging during monitoring may involve a considerable amount of danger
depending on the status of the control devices that are currently connected to
the PLC. Take sufficient care when executing debugging!

Execute RUN/continuous Scan KV-5500/5000/3000 KV-1000 KV-700 KV-P16 KV-10/16/24/40

Monitor Simulator Online edit Debug(D) RUN/cont. scan(R)

In this mode, the program is being executed.

Select "Debug(D)" "RUN/cont. scan(R)" from menu. The mode changes to the run/continuous scan
execution mode.
10 TIP When a single scan is executed in the continuous scan execution mode on Simulator,
DEBUG

program execution is paused.

Note
On Monitor, the mode cannot be set to the Run mode when the RUN/PROG selector
switch on the CPU Unit is set to PROG.
"KV-5500/5000/3000 series Users Manual"

PROGRAM/stop KV-5500/5000/3000 KV-1000 KV-700 KV-P16 KV-10/16/24/40

Monitor Simulator Online edit Debug(D) Program/stop(P)

In this mode, program execution is stopped.

Select "Debug(D)" "Program/stop(P)" from menu. In this mode, program execution is stopped.

TIP When a single scan is executed in the stop mode on Simulator, program execution is paused.

10-2 - KV STUDIO Ver.6 User’s Manual -

 10-1 About Debugging Functions

Execute 1 Scan KV-5500/5000/3000 KV-1000 KV-700 KV-P16 KV-10/16/24/40

Monitor Simulator Debug(D) Execute 1 scan(T) F9

Executes the ladder program for one scan only. When a single scan is executed in the continuous scan
execution mode, operation is paused.
This mode is handy for confirming operation one scan at a time.

Note
• Only valid in interruption status.
• When 1 scan is executed during step execution, the program is executed until
"END" or "ENDH" is found programmed in the final module of the execution
sequence from the current step.
• When scan execution is performed, reverse step execution is no longer possible.
(when Simulator is executed)
"Execute reverse 1 step", Page 10-6, "Execute Reverse Continuous Step",
Page 10-5
• When selecting "KV-700/700+M" "KV-P16" "KV-10(16)" "KV-24(40)", one single scan
is not possible in the monitor mode.
10

DEBUG
Execute Continuous Step KV-5500/5000/3000 KV-1000 KV-700 KV-P16 KV-10/16/24/40

Simulator Debug(D) Execute continuous step(S) Shift + F8

Single instructions are

executed continuously.

Select "Debug(D)" "Execute continuous step(S)" from menu. The Mnemonic List window is
displayed, and the currently executing rung is displayed highlighted by a background color.
In the Ladder Monitor window screen, the currently executing section is scrolled matched to the speed
of program operation.
"About the Mnemonic List window", Page 9-107

TIP When the screen is displayed split, only the bottom half of the screen is scrolled matched to
the speed of program operation.
To confirm only the behavior of a specific section of the ladder program, use the upper half of
the screen.

- KV STUDIO Ver.6 User’s Manual - 10-3

 10-1 About Debugging Functions

Execute 1 Block KV-5500/5000/3000 KV-1000 KV-700 KV-P16 KV-10/16/24/40

Monitor Simulator Debug (D) Execute 1 Block (J)

Every Ladder block must operate.

On the menu, select "debug (D)" "Execute 1 Block (J)". During continuous scanning, if operating a
block, the operation will be paused.

1 Ladder block is executed when the key

is operated once.

10
Execute 1 Step KV-5500/5000/3000 KV-1000 KV-700 KV-P16 KV-10/16/24/40
DEBUG

Monitor Simulator Debug(D) Execute 1 step(W) F8

The ladder program is executed one step at a time. When 1 step execution is performed during step
execution, program execution is stopped.

1 step = instruction

1 command is executed when

the key is operated once.

Select "Debug(D)" "Execute continuous step(S)" from menu. The Mnemonic List window is
displayed, and the currently executing rung is displayed highlighted by a background color.
"About the Mnemonic List window", Page 9-107

Note
• It is valid only in interruption status.
• 1 step cannot be executed in monitor, unless break is set in program.
• When selecting "KV-700/700+M""KV-P16""KV-10(16)""KV-24(40)", 1 block is not
possible in monitor mode.

10-4 - KV STUDIO Ver.6 User’s Manual -

 10-1 About Debugging Functions

Execute Reverse Continuous Step KV-5500/5000/3000 KV-1000 KV-700 KV-P16 KV-10/16/24/40

Simulator Debug(D) Execute reverse cont. step(Y). Shift + F7

Debug(D) Execute reverse cont. step

Executed steps are executed by step execution continuously in the reverse direction after 1 step
execution or continuous step execution is performed.

Single instructions are

executed continuously.

Execute Reverse 1 Block KV-5500/5000/3000 KV-1000 KV-700 KV-P16 KV-10/16/24/40 10

DEBUG
Simulator Debug (D) Execute Reverse 1 Block (K)

Every Ladder block, inverted running.

On the menu, select "Debug (D)" "Execute Reverse 1 Block(K)".

1 Ladder block is executed when the key

is operated once.

- KV STUDIO Ver.6 User’s Manual - 10-5

 10-1 About Debugging Functions

Execute reverse 1 step KV-5500/5000/3000 KV-1000 KV-700 KV-P16 KV-10/16/24/40

Simulator Debug(D) Execute reverse 1 step(G) F7

Select Debug(D) Execute reverse 1 step(G) from the menu.

Executed steps are executed by step execution one step at a time in the reverse direction after 1 block
execution or continuous step execution is performed.

1 command is executed when

the key is operated once.

10
TIP When reverse 1 step is executed, the values of devices that changed as a result of program
DEBUG

execution return to their original statuss

This mode allows you to perform debugging efficiently as you can verify the action (changes
in action caused by contact ON/OFF switching or word device values) of the ladder program
you have made and restore the result of the action of each instruction.

Pause KV-5500/5000/3000 KV-1000 KV-700 KV-P16 KV-10/16/24/40

Monitor Simulator Debug(D) Pause(I) F6

Select Debug(D) Pause(I) from the menu.

Pause continuous scan execution or continuous step execution.

Note
Operation can be paused in Monitor when all of the following conditions are satisfied:
• RUN break
• A break is set
• A break is not being performed.
• When selecting "KV-700/700+M""KV-P16""KV-10(16)""KV-24(40)", can not be paused
in monitor mode.

10-6 - KV STUDIO Ver.6 User’s Manual -

 10-1 About Debugging Functions

Reset KV-5500/5000/3000 KV-1000 KV-700 KV-P16 KV-10/16/24/40

Simulator Debug(D) Reset(A)

Select Debug(D) Reset(A) from the menu.

This stops operation that is currently in progress.
Operation is the same turning the PLC OFF then back ON again.
To cancel a reset, click "No".

Device Break Setting KV-5500/5000/3000 KV-1000 KV-700 KV-P16 KV-10/16/24/40

Monitor Simulator Debug(D) Set device break(B)

A "break" is a function for stopping a ladder program at specified conditions during program operation.
There are two types of break settings described as follows:
• Device break •••••••••••••Program execution is stopped at conditions specified to devices in the
"Device break settings" dialog box.
• Rung break •••••••••••••••Program operation is stopped at the rung specified in the "Mnemonic list"
10
window.

DEBUG
Note
When selecting "KV-700/700+M""KV-P16""KV-10(16)""KV-24(40)", can not be paused
in monitor mode.

■ Operation according to the maximum number of break conditions setting

and debugging functions
O •••••• Program is stopped. × .Program is not stopped
Device breaks Rung breaks
Monitor Simulator Monitor Simulator
Maximum number of set breaks 1* 16 4 16
Execute RUN/continuous scan O O O X
Execute 1 scan O O O X
Execute continuous step - O - O
Execute reverse
- O - O
continuous step

* AND or OR cannot be set in combined conditions.

- KV STUDIO Ver.6 User’s Manual - 10-7

 10-1 About Debugging Functions

Device Break

A "device break" is a function for stopping a ladder program at conditions specified to a device during
program operation. Device breaks are used to partially verify the status of operation or to discover
buggy locations. Also, when device breaks are used in combination with the step execution function,
operation can be verified in a shorter time, and programs can be stopped by multiple OR and AND
conditions.

1 Select "Debug(D)" "Setup device break(B)" from the menu.

10 Item Explanation
*
Module/macro Specifies modules/macros.
DEBUG

Device Sets device type and No.

Cond (condition) Set up Conditions
Device/value Sets the device or constant.
Add conds (Add condition) Add condition.
Change conds Changes the currently selected conditions.
Calculation error CR2012 (calculation error) is registered in the setting list.
When the device to which conditions are to be set is a bit device, select "Bit", when
Compave type the device is a word device, select "Word", and when the device is a 32-bit device,
select "Double-word".
Displays currently registered device breaks.Only items whose checkbox is marked
Setup list
are enabled.
Combined Select "OR/AND" as the combine break condition. (when Simulator is executed)

*It is displayed only when the models "KV-5500", "KV-5000", "KV-3000", "KV-1000" are selected

10-8 - KV STUDIO Ver.6 User’s Manual -

 10-1 About Debugging Functions

2 Specify the device and conditions. When the device is a word or a double-word device, specify the
condition in a compare operation.

When the device is a bit device

Item Explanation
Device Specify the device name.
ON Sets contact ON as the condition.
Cond (condition)
OFF Sets contact OFF as the condition.

When the device is a word device or double-word device

Item Explanation
Device Specify the device name.
<*1 Sets an instance where the left side is greater than the right side as the condition.
= Sets an instance where the right side is equal to the left side as the condition.
*3 Sets an instance where the right side is different from the left side as the condition.
Compare condition
>*1 Sets an instance where the right side is greater than the left side as the condition.
*1 Sets an instance where the left side is greater than or equal to the right side as the condition.
<=
>=*1 Sets an instance where the right side is greater than or equal to the left side as the condition.
*2 Sets the device or constant.
Device/value

*1
*2
Cannot be used on Monitor.
Only constants can be set on Monitor.
10
*3 Cannot be used on Simulator.

DEBUG
3 When the device to which conditions are to be set is a bit device, select "Bit", when the device
is a word device, select "Word", and when the device is a 2-word device, select "Double-word".

4 Click the "Add conds" button.

This adds the specified conditions, and the details are displayed in Settings.

5 To register to or more conditions, repeat steps 2 to 4.

6 When you have finished registering all conditions, click the "Apply" button and the "OK" button.
The "Device break settings" dialog box is closed.

■ Changing registered conditions

Select the condition to change in Settings.Set the new conditions, and click the "Chng conds" button.
This changes the conditions on the rung where the cursor is located.

TIP If clicking "add conds" button, can register new device interrupt condition.

■ Deleting registered conditions

Select the condition to delete in Settings. Click the "Delete" button.
This deletes the conditions on the rung where the cursor is located.

■ Disabling registered conditions

Select the condition to disable in Settings. Unmark the checkbox on the left side.

- KV STUDIO Ver.6 User’s Manual - 10-9

 10-1 About Debugging Functions

Rung break

Monitor Simulator

A "rung break" is a function for stopping program execution at a rung specified on the Mnemonic List
window. When a rung break is used, program execution is automatically stopped in the execute
continuous scan, execute 1 scan, execute continuous step, and execute 1 step modes.
For example, if a rung break is set to investigate in detail ladder operation at a particular step in the
ladder program, program execution stops at the preset step, which makes it easier to verify program
operation.

Move the cursor to the rung to specify in the Mnemonic list window and double-click.
is displayed to the left of the specified rung.

TIP Multiple rung breaks can be set.

"Operation according to the maximum number of break conditions setting and debugging
functions", Page 10-7

10
DEBUG

■ To execute operation again

Operate the following function to execute operation again:
• Execute continuous scan : "Execute RUN/continuous Scan", Page 10-2
• Execute 1 scan: "Execute 1 Scan", Page 10-3
• Continuous scan control: : "Execute Continuous Step", Page 10-3 "Continuous scan
control" page10-2
• Execute continuous reverse step: "Execute Reverse Continuous Step", Page 10-5

■ To cancel a rung break setting

Move the cursor to the rung that is set with a rung break and double-click.
That indicates the rung break disappears.

10-10 - KV STUDIO Ver.6 User’s Manual -

 10-1 About Debugging Functions

Derivation monitor KV-5500/5000/3000 KV-1000 KV-700 KV-P16 KV-10/16/24/40

Monitor Simulator Online edit Debug(D) Derivation monitor(N)

Monitor rising edge/falling edge times of the specified bit device. Up to 4 devices can be monitored.
Derivation monitor function can be used in the CPU unit with CPU function version above 2.0.

Note
Word device can be registered only during bit processing.
Within one scanning, rising edge/falling edge is not detected when this value
changes as per ON -> OFF -> ON.

10

DEBUG
Item Explanation
Device Specify the device to be monitored.*1
Edge Select the detection method of rising edge/falling edge.
Ringing The buzzer rings when rising edge/falling edge is detected.
Count Display the detected rising edge/falling edge times.
Reset Reset the accumulated value.
Start Start derivation monitor.

*1 Timer/counter nonexistent in the ladder program cannot be registered.

Add device by dragging and dropping the device described on the ladder editor.
TIP
Note
The following device cannot execute derivation monitor.
• Indirect reference
• Index modification
• Index register Z
• Current value/set value of the timer/counter
• High-speed counter
• Trimmer (TRM)
• V/UV macro argument (word)

- KV STUDIO Ver.6 User’s Manual - 10-11

 10-1 About Debugging Functions

Forced Set/reset Register KV-5500/5000/3000 KV-1000 KV-700 KV-P16 KV-10/16/24/40

Monitor Online edit Debug(D) Forced set/reset register(X)

Ignore refresh status and Ladder Forced set/reset specifying device.

On the menu, select "Debug (D)" "Forced set / reset register (X)".

Note
• The bit device can be only Forced set/ reset, registered.
• Can not register R000 to R915.

Input frame

10
DEBUG

Item Explanation
(Input frame) Input the device which is forced set/reset.
(Add device) Force set/reset register to the device which has entered box.
After selecting checkbox, the device registered is forced set/ reset.
(checkbox) For the device whose checkbox is ON, its cell changes to red, which indicates forced set/ reset.
After removing checkbox, forced remove set / reset.
The device which is forced set/reset register shows in ascending order.
Device
Click title cell to arrange in descending order.
Display register category (setting / reset).
Set Double click on the cell, switch between set/rest.
You can also change by using "setting register" button, "reset register" button.
Display the status of device registered.
Current value ●: ON status
―: OFF status
Display device comments.From right-click menu, select the comment category to be
Comments
switched.
(Register set) The "settings" of all selected devices are set, the checkbox changes to ON.
(Register reset) The "settings" of all selected devices are reset, the checkbox changes to ON.
(Cancel) All checkboxes of the selected devices are changed to OFF.
(Register) All checkboxes of the selected devices are changed to ON.
(Delete) Delete selected device.
Registered devices Display the number of devices forced set / reset registered to CPU unit.
count For the device being registered, its cell is displayed in red.

* Can also add device by dragging the compiled device to Ladder editor.

10-12 - KV STUDIO Ver.6 User’s Manual -

 10-1 About Debugging Functions

TIP • Can create cross reference of the registered device from right-click menu.
• After imperative register set / reset, the cell in
"imperative set / reset" dialog box is displayed in
red, KV STUDIO tool bar will give blinking display
of "imperatively register setting/ resetting"
prompting message.

Error Monitor KV-5500/5000/3000 KV-1000 KV-700 KV-P16 KV-10/16/24/40

Monitor Editor Debug(D) Error monitor(E)

Online edit Simulator

Monitor current status and error record of KV-5500/5000/3000.

Select "Debug (D)" "Error monitor(E)" from the menu.
10

DEBUG

Item Explanation
PLC status Current PLC status is displayed.
Mode PLC operation mode is displayed.
Switch status Display PLC unit switch status.
Calendar timer Display the time of acquiring action mode and on/off status message.
Display PLC error occured. Click error content, the pointer will move to the error
Current error
position on Ladder editor.
Display error category in icon form.
Type : Warning
: Error
No. Display error No.
Information Display error content, error occurrence module / macro, error occurrence position (step No.).
Date/time Display error occurrence time.
(Clear) Clear project displayed on "current error".

- KV STUDIO Ver.6 User’s Manual - 10-13

 10-1 About Debugging Functions

Item Explanation
Display error occurrence record. Click error content, the pointer will move to the
error position on Ladder editor.
The numbers can be recorded is different according to the wrong styles.
Error log Alarm : PLC shutdown error occurs in record.
Warning : the error of PLC continue RUN status appears in the record.
Power ON/ OFF : record power ON/ OFF.
Alarm relay : record OFF/ON change of alarm relay (CR3300 to CR3415).
Display error category in icon form.
: Warning
Type
: Error
: Power ON/OFF
No. Display error No.
Information Display error content, error occurrence module / macro, error occurrence position (step No.).
Error occurrence time is displayed as per ascending sequence. Click title cell to
Date/time
arrange in descending order.
(Update) Acquire the latest error message from PLC
(Clear log) Clear error record.
(Save to file) Save error record in CSV formatted file.
(Close) Close error monitor window
10 * Maximal number of records as follows.
Error category The number of logs
DEBUG

Error 32 pieces
Warning 32 pieces
Power ON/OFF Power ON: 20 pieces, power OFF: 20 pieces
Alarm relay 64 pieces

Inhibit Input Refreshing KV-5500/5000/3000 KV-1000 KV-700 KV-P16 KV-10/16/24/40

Monitor Online edit Debug(D) Inhibit input refresh(F)

KV series has an input refreshing inhibit function.

When input refreshing is set to inhibited, reading (input refreshing) if input relays on the PLC is stopped.
On Monitor, external input relays can be forcibly turned ON/OFF, and debugging while verifying output
on an actual device becomes possible.

Select "Debug(D)" "Inhibit input refresh(F)" from the menu with Monitor started up.
When inhibit input refreshing is set, the checkbox is marked.
Selecting this item again cancels inhibit input refreshing, and the checkbox is unmarked.

TIP • The inhibit input refreshing setting is enabled on all external input relays.
• When set, the inhibit input refreshing setting is disabled when the PLC operation mode is
changed from PROG to Run, or the PLC is turned OFF then back ON again.

10-14 - KV STUDIO Ver.6 User’s Manual -

 10-1 About Debugging Functions

Inhibit Output KV-5500/5000/3000 KV-1000 KV-700 KV-P16 KV-10/16/24/40

Monitor Online edit Debug(D) Inhibit output(O)

When output is set to inhibited, there is not output from the external output terminals even if the ladder
program is executed.
Select "Debug(D)" "Inhibit output(O)" from the menu in Monitor.
When inhibit input refreshing is set, the checkbox is marked.
Selecting this item again cancels inhibit input refreshing, and the checkbox is unmarked.

TIP • The inhibit output setting is enabled on all external outputs.

• When set, the inhibit output setting is disabled when the PLC operation mode is changed
from PROG to Run, or the PLC is turned OFF then back ON again.

Scan Time Monitor KV-5500/5000/3000 KV-1000 KV-700 KV-P16 KV-10/16/24/40

Monitor Editor Online edit Debug(D) Scan time monitor(H)

Monitor the items related to KV-5500/5000/3000 scanning time, the number of breaks. 10
Select "Debug (D)" "Scan time monitor(H)" from the menu.

DEBUG

Item Explanation
Scan time Display the monitor information related with scanning time.
Current value Display the current value of scanning time.
Display maximum value of scanning time from start of operation
Max
(PROGÆRUN switching) up to now.
Display minimum value of scanning time from start of operation
Min
(PROGÆRUN switching) up to now.
"Clear Max/Min" Reset maximum/minimum value.
Fixed Scan time operation Display monitor information related with fixed scanning time operation.
State Display enable/disable of fixed scanning time operation.*2
Setting Display the set value of fixed scanning time operation.
END processing time specified Display monitor information related with END processing time.
State Display enable/disable of END processing time*3
Setting Display the set value of END processing time.

- KV STUDIO Ver.6 User’s Manual - 10-15

 10-1 About Debugging Functions

Item Explanation
Fixed period module
Display monitor information related with fixed period module processing time.
processing time
Current value Display the current value of fixed period module processing time.
Max Display maximum processing time from starting to execute fixed period module up to now.
"Clear Max" Reset maximum value of fixed period module processing time.
Display times of interruption occurred from start of operation (PROG -> RUN
Interrupt counts
switching) up to now.
Interruption processing
Display the processing time of the last executed interrupt processing.
time*1
Interruption Max*1 Display the maximum processing time of interruption.
"Clear Interrupt counts/Max"*1 Clear all Interrupt counts and maximum value.
Performance monitor*1 Display performance monitor window.
*1 It is displayed only when CPU function above Ver.2 of KV-5500/5000/3000 is used. If"Enable
performance monitor" check box in "CPU system setting"is checked, this window is not displayed
when not transferred to PLC.
*2 In "Scanning time related setting" of "CPU system setting", if"Execute fixed scanning time
operation" check box is checked, enable is displayed, if not checked, disable is displayed.
"CPU System Setting", Page 6-43
*3 In "Scanning time related setting" of "CPU system setting", if"Enable END processing time
setting"check box, enable is displayed, if not checked, disable is displayed.

10 "CPU System Setting", Page 6-43

Performance monitor
DEBUG

KV-5500/5000/3000 KV-1000 KV-700 KV-P16 KV-10/16/24/40

Monitor Editor Online edit Debug(D) Performance monitor(Q)

Monitor the module/macro unit execution time of KV-5500/5000/3000.

Select [Debug(D)] [Performance monitor(H)] from the menu.
Performance monitor can be used in CPU unit with CPU function version above 2.0.

Item Explanation
No Display the execution sequence of modules.*1
Module name/macro name Display the name of the module/macro to be monitored.
Processing time Display execution time of the module/macro.
Percentage Display the proportion of this module in total processing time.*2
Max Display maximum value of processing time.*3
*1 Display the execution sequence of modules, so No. is not displayed for macro.
*2 Display the processing time proportion of module, so proportion is not displayed for macro.
*3 It is initialized to 0 during PROG -> RUN switching
10-16 - KV STUDIO Ver.6 User’s Manual -
 10-1 About Debugging Functions

Note
After performance monitor is executed, scanning time of CPU unit is extended.
KV-5500/5000/3000 Series User Manual

Caution
• In order to use performance monitor, select "CPU system setting" "Scanning
time related setting" from the menu, and check "Enable performance monitor".
• If using macro to disable the module, the macro name displayed in performance
monitor can be different from the macro name displayed in"monitor" tab of
workspace in KV STUDIO monitor mode or online edit mode.

Calendar Timer Setting KV-5500/5000/3000 KV-1000 KV-700 KV-P16 KV-10/16/24/40

Monitor Online edit Debug(D) Setup calendar timer(C)

Set the KV-5500/5000/3000/1000/700 PLC's internal calendar timer.

There are two ways of setting the calendar timer.
10

DEBUG
Note
The range that the calendar timer can be set on KV STUDIO is 2000, January 1,
00:00:00 to 2037, December 31, 23:59:59.

■ By matching to the PC's clock

1 Select "Debug(D)" "Setup calendar timer(C)" from the menu.

The "PLC calendar timer settings" dialog box is displayed.

2 Check that the "Match to PC clock" checkbox is marked, and click the "OK" button.
This changes the PLC's calendar timer to match the PC's clock.

- KV STUDIO Ver.6 User’s Manual - 10-17

 10-1 About Debugging Functions

■ By entering the date and time

1 Select "Debug(D)" "Setup calendar timer(C)" from the menu.

The "PLC calendar timer settings" dialog box is displayed.

2 Unmark the "Match to PC clock" checkbox, set the data

and time.
Enter the date.

Clear All PLC Devices KV-5500/5000/3000 KV-1000 KV-700 KV-P16 KV-10/16/24/40

10
Monitor Online edit
DEBUG

Debug(D) Clear all PLC devices(L) Clear all DMs(D)

Clear all EMs(E)
Clear all FMs(F)
Clear all W(W)
Clear all ZF(Z)
Clear all Rs (hold)
Clear all Rs (R)
Clear all Bs (B)
Clear all LRs(L)
Clear all counters(C)

"Clear all PLC devices" initializes data memories (DM, EM, FM), relays (R01000 to R59915) set to be
held by the MEMSW instruction, latch relays (LR), and counters (C).
When Clear all devices is executed in Monitor, the devices registered on the PLC are initialized.

Select "Debug(D)" "Clear all PLC devices(L)" from the menu, and specify the device to be
initialized. specify the device to be reset

TIP • All devices can be clearly only when PLC is in PROG mode.
• "Clear all EMs (E)" "clear all FMs (F)" "clear all LR (L)", only displayed when KV-5500/
5000/3000/ 1000 is selected.
• "Clear all Ws (W)" " clear all ZFs (Z)" " clear all B (B)", only displayed when KV-5500/
5000/3000 is selected.

10-18 - KV STUDIO Ver.6 User’s Manual -

 10-1 About Debugging Functions

Clear CMs For KV-D30 KV-5500/5000/3000 KV-1000 KV-700 KV-P16 KV-10/16/24/40

Monitor Online edit Debug(D) Clear CMs for KV-D30(D)

Select "Debug(D)" "Clear CM for KV-D30(D)" from menu. display operation status in diagram form.
The area of control memory (CM) used by operating panel KV - D30 is initialized.

10

DEBUG

- KV STUDIO Ver.6 User’s Manual - 10-19

 10-1 About Debugging Functions

MEMO

10
DEBUG

10-20 - KV STUDIO Ver.6 User’s Manual -

11
TOOL
This chapter describes each of the tool functions.

11-1 About Tool Functions ••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• 11-2

TOOL

- KV STUDIO Ver.6 User’s Manual - 11-1

 11-1 About Tool Functions
This section describes each of the functions contained in the "Tool(T)" menu.

Unit Editor KV-5500/5000/3000 KV-1000 KV-700 KV-P16 KV-10/16/24/40

"Tool(T)" "Unit Editor(U)" Ctrl + U

With KV-5500/5000/3000/1000/700, connected units must be registered in advance to the CPU before
a ladder pro-gram is executed. Connected units are selected on Unit Editor to create a unit
configuration, and once the unit configuration is created it is transferred to the PLC.
As for unit editor, please refer to "Chaper 3 UNIT EDITOR", Page 3-1.

11
TOOL

Switch Unit Configuration KV-5500/5000/3000 KV-1000 KV-700 KV-P16 KV-10/16/24/40

Tool(T) Unit config switch(N)

Select "Tool(T)" "Unit config switch(N)" from the menu. The "Swith unit configuration" dialog box is
displayed.

Other procedure Double click on the "Unit configuration switching" in workspace.

11-2 - KV STUDIO Ver.6 User’s Manual -

 11-1 About Tool Functions

Item Description
Display multiple unit compositions in library form.
Unit configuration library
and the configuration differs according different units.
Create unit configuration file.
(New) After the name registered to library is specified, Unit Editor will start, so, set unit
composition to be registered.

(Edit) Start Unit Editor.Change unit composition file registered.

(Delete) Delete unit configuration file. The deleted file cannot be restored.

(Rename) Change name of unit composition file registered.

(Save with other

Copy unit composition file selected, rename and save.
name)
Overwrite the selected unit composition file to "current unit composition". In this case,
Set to current unit
the confirmation message registering "current unit composition" to library is
configuration
displayed.
(save current unit
Name current unit composition and then register to library.
configuration)

Note
Switch unit composition via "Unit composition switch" dialog box, the device used
by Ladder will be not automatically converted.

11

TOOL
Logging/tracing Setting KV-5500/5000/3000 KV-1000 KV-700 KV-P16 KV-10/16/24/40

Tools (T) Setup logging(L)

"Logging" refers to the recording of what kind of states devices are in at a certain timing. The
information of devices or triggers to be recorded is set on KV STUDIO, and records are saved to the
Memory Card. This logging data is saved in CSV format so it can be imported to Excel or other
spreadsheet software for analysis.

For log, please see KV-5500/5000/3000 series

PLC User's Manual, "2-3 logging / tracing".

- KV STUDIO Ver.6 User’s Manual - 11-3

 11-1 About Tool Functions

Set Device Default Value KV-5500/5000/3000 KV-1000 KV-700 KV-P16 KV-10/16/24/40

"tools(T)" Setup device defaults(V)

Set the device default value which is to be read when operating CPU unit,
Choose "Tool(T)" from the menu "Setup device defaults(V)".

Other procedure Double click "device default" in work area.

Default value list

11
TOOL

Item Explanation
Default enable device Set effective range of the device to whcih the default value is entered.
Device Display the device and range to enable default setting *.
Number of points Display the number of devices to enable default setting *.
Display "Set Device" dialog box.
(Set)
Set the device and range that enable default value setting.
(Delete) Delete the valid device which set default value already.
Device Select the type of device setting default value.
Display format Select display format of the value displayed in the default value list.
Display defaults After selecting checkbox, only the valid device among the devices with valid default
enable device only value is displayed.
Display the default to be set. Initial Device No. is vertical, offset to initial Device No.
(Default value list ) is horizontal.
The valid device cell which was changed by the default value, display in green.
Select the cell to be entered, directly enter the value.
(Input method) Double click on the cell, open "SJIS character string setting" dialog box, enter
character string.
CSV Import Read the device default file saved as CSV format.
CSV export Save the default device value that has been set in CSV format.
Read value from PLC Read current value from PLC to default data.

*Double click, and the "device set" dialog box pops up.

11-4 - KV STUDIO Ver.6 User’s Manual -

 11-1 About Tool Functions

TIP Complete default value setting, click "OK" button, save as device default value setting file
(filename: DevInit.dvi). Via "file (F)" "import (I)" "import device default value (D)"
step, can import device default value setting file from other projects.

■ "Setup device" dialog box

Click " setup" button in "device default value setup" dialog box, to open "device setup" dialog box.

Item Explanation
Select device Select the device type making the default setting of the device valid.
Leading No. Specify device initial No. that enables default device value.
number Specify the number (range) which start from valid device default value.
(Max. number) The number calculated from start No. to end of Device No. is displayed as "number".

File Register Add / change Setting KV-5500/5000/3000 KV-1000 KV-700 KV-P16 KV-10/16/24/40
11
Tools (T) Setup File Register (F) Add (A)

TOOL
Tools (T) Setup File Register (C) Change (C)

Add / change File Register setting.

On the menu, select "tools (T)" "File Register setting (F)" "add (A)" or "change (C)".
When selecting "Add (A)", display "File Register setting No." dialog box,
please specify setting No. as '0 to 999'.

TIP Without File Register setting, fail to select [change (C)].

- KV STUDIO Ver.6 User’s Manual - 11-5

 11-1 About Tool Functions

File Register setting list

Item Explanation
Setup No. If multiple File Registers (setting No.) are set, can be switched.
Comments Add comment to File Register No. setting edited currently.
Display format Select display format of the value displayed in File Register setting list.
Display the default to be set. Initial Device No. is vertical, offset to initial
(File Register setting list)
11 Device No. is horizontal.
Select the cell to be entered, directly enter the value
(Input method) Double click on the cell, open "SJIS character string setting" dialog box, enter
TOOL

character string.
CSV Import Read the File Register setting file saved as CSV format.
CSV export Save the File Register that has been set in CSV format.
Read value from PLC Read FM current value from PLC as File Register and set constant.

TIP After File Register setting, click "OK" button, save as File Register setting file (filename: FR
(setting no.).dvi,). File Register setting file can be imported from other projects via "file (F)"
"import (I)" "import File Register setting (F)" steps.

Mail Setting KV-5500/5000/3000 KV-1000 KV-700 KV-P16 KV-10/16/24/40

Tools(T) Setup mail(E)

For mail setting method, please see 'KV-LE21V User's Manual'.

Mail Command Maker KV-5500/5000/3000 KV-1000 KV-700 KV-P16 KV-10/16/24/40

Tools(T) Mail command maker(R)

For application method of mail communication command Maker, please see "KV-LE21V user
manual".

11-6 - KV STUDIO Ver.6 User’s Manual -

 11-1 About Tool Functions

Simple PLC link setting KV-5500/5000/3000 KV-1000 KV-700 KV-P16 KV-10/16/24/40

Tools(T) Simple PLC link setting(G)

For the setting method of simple PLC link function, see 'KV-LE21V User's Manual'.
Simple PLC link function can be used in KV-EP21V, KV-LE21V, KV-5500, and KV-5000 (above Ver.1.1).

FTP client setting KV-5500/5000/3000 KV-1000 KV-700 KV-P16 KV-10/16/24/40

Tools(T) Simple PLC link setting(G)

For the setting method of FTP client, see 'KV-LE21V User's Manual'.
FTP client can be used in KV-EP21V, KV-LE21V, KV-5500, and KV-5000 (above Ver.1.1).

CPU Positioning Parameter KV-5500/5000/3000 KV-1000 KV-700 KV-P16 KV-10/16/24/40

"Tool(T)" "Edit CPU positioning parameters(I)"

CPU positioning parameter
The KV-5500/5000/3000/1000/700 PLC has a pulse output function for position/speed control. This function
enables you to control stepping motors and pulse type AC servo motors. Use the "Edit CPU positioning
parameters" to set startup speed, operating speed, acceleration/deceleration time, and other parameters for
trapezoidal control. There are two types of parameters: point parameters and system parameters. 11
Point parameters •••••••••These parameters are the basic parameters for trapezoidal control as they

TOOL
set movement destination points (positions), operating/startup speed, and
acceleration/deceleration time.
System parameters ••••••These parameters are for setting sensor input, pulse output, comparators,
zero return, and jog operation.
Main Functions
• Point parameters for 32 points can be set in advance on KV STUDIO. f more than 32 points are set,
the ladder program overwrites the contents of control memory (CM).
• You can choose from two control modes: positioning control and speed control. Both incremental
values and absolute values can be set for target values/travel amounts.
• Pulses can be output for two axes and each of their frequencies can be set within the range 50 Hz to 100000 Hz.
• Both 1-pulse mode and 2-pulse mode are supported as pulse output modes. Select the output mode
best suited to the type of motor driver that is connected.
Start up Edit CPU positioning parameters by the following procedure.
1 Select "Tool(T)" "Edit CPU positioning parameters (I)" from the menu.
This starts up "Edit CPU positioning params".

- KV STUDIO Ver.6 User’s Manual - 11-7

 11-1 About Tool Functions

2 Edit the parameters.

Sets the point parameters and systems parameters.
Parameters to Set Description
Point parameter To set up operation mode.
Set input settings such as sensor and Z-phase, and pulse output
I/O setting
method.
Comparator
System parameter Set operation of comparator 0 to 2.
setting
Origin returning Set origin returning
JOG Set jog operation.
For setting methods of every parameter, please refer to 'KV-5500/5000/3000 series user manual' 2-12
Motor (positioning) control.

3 When you have finished editing parameters, close "Edit CPU positioning params."
The point parameters and system parameters that you set are saved to file.
Use positioning instructions to program the ladder program.

CPU High-speed Counter Setting Wizard KV-5500/5000/3000 KV-1000 KV-700 KV-P16 KV-10/16/24/40

Tools (T) CPU high-speed counter setting wizard (H)

Start CPU internal high-speed counter settings guide Wizard.

11 For concrete operation methods of CPU high-speed counter setting guide, please refer to
5500/5000/ 3000 series user manual" 2-8 high-speed counter ".
"KV-
TOOL

KV-DN20 Setup KV-5500/5000/3000 KV-1000 KV-700 KV-P16 KV-10/16/24/40

Tools (T) Setting KV-DN20 (D)

Start device network element KV-DN20 setting tools.

For concrete operations of "KV-DN20 settings tools", please see 'KV-DN20 user manual'.

KV-CL20 Setup KV-5500/5000/3000 KV-1000 KV-700 KV-P16 KV-10/16/24/40

Tools (T) SettingKV-CL20 (C)

Start CC-Link unit KV-CL20 settings tools.

For concrete operations of "KV-CL20 settings tools", please see 'KV-CL20 User's Manual'.

KV-L20 Setting(Protocol Builder) KV-5500/5000/3000 KV-1000 KV-700 KV-P16 KV-10/16/24/40

Tools (T) KV-L20 Setting(Protocol Builder)(B)

Start KV-L20 protocol macro setting software PROTOCOL BUILDER.

For detailed operating method of PROTOCOL BUILDER, please see "PROTOCOL BUILDER User's
Manual".

11-8 - KV STUDIO Ver.6 User’s Manual -

 11-1 About Tool Functions

KV-H20S/40S/20G Setting (Motion Builder) KV-5500/5000/3000 KV-1000 KV-700 KV-P16 KV-10/16/24/40

Tool(T) KV-H20S/40S/20G Setting(MOTION BUILDER)(M)

Start positioning unit parameter setting software MOTION BUILDER.

For detailed operating method of MOTION BUILDER, please see "MOTION BUILDER User's
Manual".

Note
• When using MOTION BUILDER, the MOTION BUILDER should be setup, and set
positioning unit KV-H20/H20S/H40S/H20G with unit editor .
"Chaper 3 UNIT EDITOR", Page 3-1

KV-H20S/40S/20G Setting(Simple Settings) KV-5500/5000/3000 KV-1000 KV-700 KV-P16 KV-10/16/24/40

Tools (T) KV-H20S/40S/20G Setting(Simple setting) (S)

Use simple setting function of the positioning unit, can set the parameter of positioning unit KV- 20 /
H20S / H40S / H20G. Positioning unit parameters include major parameters and common parameters;
can simply set on the Ladder compilation image.
Simple setting and edit contents as follows. 11

TOOL
• Point parameters . . . . .Set action mode, target position / travel motion, operating speed at all
points, stop sensor, stop standard pulse number of sensor.
• System parameters About setting I/O, reverting origin,/JOG and running speed.
Universal operational parameters.
• Speed parameter . . . . .Setting speed No.1 to 16.

For detailed operating method of simple setting of positioning unit, please see "KV-700 series
positioning unit simple setting software User's Manual".

Note
• If the positioning unit parameters software MOTION BUILDER(KV-H1HW)Ver.2 is
setup, and the positioning unit KV-20/H20S/H40S/H20G is chosen, then this
function can be used.
• Simple setting function fails to use positioning high-speed counter unit KV-H20.
• Parameter transfer can not be made via modem mode.

KV-ML/MC setting (KV MOTION+) KV-5500/5000/3000 KV-1000 KV-700 KV-P16 KV-10/16/24/40

Tools (T) KV-ML/MC setting (KV MOTION+)(T)

Start positioning/motion unit parameter setup software KV MOTION+.

For how to operate KV MOTION+, please see "KV-ML/MC setup tool (KV MOTION+) User's Manual".

- KV STUDIO Ver.6 User’s Manual - 11-9

 11-1 About Tool Functions

Note
It is necessary to preset-config positioning/motion unit KV-ML16V/MC40V/MC20V by
Unit Editor when KV-ML/MC setup tool(KV MOTION+) is used.
"Chapter 3 Unit Editor",Page 3-1

KV-L20V Setting(PROTOCOL STUDIO) KV-5500/5000/3000 KV-1000 KV-700 KV-P16 KV-10/16/24/40

Tool(T) KV-L20V setting(PROTOCOL STUDIO)(P) Shift + F12

Start KV-l20V / R communication macro support software PROTOCOL STUDIO.

For detailed operating method of PROTOCOL STUDIO, please see "KV-L20V User's Manual".

Note
• Please separately purchase communication macro support software PROTOCOL
STUDIO (KV- H1RW), install and use.
• If using PROTOCOL STUDIO, configure KV-l20 V / R, on unit editor program, and
set action mode to PROTOCOL STUDIO mode.
• When starting PROTOCOL STUDIO, the ladder program can aslo be edited.But if
the setting information in the unit is modified when starting PROTOCOL STUDIO,
the communication protocols will not be performed normally.Only after

11 PROTOCOL STUDIO is finished ,can the unit setting information be modified.

TOOL

MV-L40 Setting(MV LINK STUDIO) KV-5500/5000/3000 KV-1000 KV-700 KV-P16 KV-10/16/24/40

Tools (T) MV-L40 setting(MV LINK STUDIO)(Y)

Start MV-L40 parameter setting software MV LINK STUDIO.

For detailed operating method of MV LINK STUDIO, please see "parameter settings monitoring
software MV LINK STUDIO User's Manual".

Note
• Please separately purchase parameter setting monitor software MV LINK STUDIO
(MV- H2), install and use.
• If needing MV LINK STUDIO, MV-L40 should be configured in the unit edit program
in advance.

11-10 - KV STUDIO Ver.6 User’s Manual -

 11-1 About Tool Functions

KV-EP21V setting (EtherNet/IP setting) KV-5500/5000/3000 KV-1000 KV-700 KV-P16 KV-10/16/24/40

Tools (T) KV-EP21V setting(EtherNet/IP setting)(W)

Start EtherNet/IP setting for EtherNet/IP unit.

EtherNet/IP function can be used in KV-EP21V and KV-5500.
For the setting method, see KV-EP21V User Manual.

KV-EP21V setting (KV DATALINK+ for EtherNet/IP) KV-5500/5000/3000 KV-1000 KV-700 KV-P16 KV-10/16/24/40

Tools (T) KV-EP21V setting(KV DATALINK+ for EtherNet/IP)(Q)

Start the setting software KV DATALINK+ for EtherNet/IP unit.

EtherNet/IP function can be used in KV-EP21V and KV-5500.
For the setting method, see KV-EP21V User Manual.

Panel Editor KV-5500/5000/3000 KV-1000 KV-700 KV-P16 KV-10/16/24/40

Tools (T) Panel editor(N) 11

TOOL
For concrete operation methods of panel editor, please refer to '"Display internal panel installation
PLC KV-P series User's Manual".

KV-N20V Setting (KL Address Setting) KV-5500/5000/3000 KV-1000 KV-700 KV-P16 KV-10/16/24/40

Tools (T) KV-N20V setting (KL address setting)(A)

Start KV series address setup software.

For concrete operation methods of "KL series address setting software", please refer to "KL
Master Station unit KL-N20V User's Manual".

KV STUDIO RECORDER KV-5500/5000/3000 KV-1000 KV-700 KV-P16 KV-10/16/24/40

Tools (T) KV STUDIO RECORDER(A)

When KV STUDIO RECORDER is used to record KV STUDIO operations and monitor content on PC,
maximum recording time is 1 hour. The recorded content is saved upon stop, and KV STUDIO
PLAYER can be used for playing.

- KV STUDIO Ver.6 User’s Manual - 11-11

 11-1 About Tool Functions

Note
• KV STUDIO RECORDER is the best tool to record display content of KV STUDIO. In
the recording process, display content on the top of the PC will be recorded, while
the display content other than KV STUDIO may show decreased image quality, or
file size becomes larger.
• More than one KV STUDIO RECORDER cannot be started.
• The following functions will be disabled in the recording process.
Screen protection program start/desktop wallpaper/full drag setting/aero
function (in case of Windows 7/Vista)
• In case of Windows7/Vista, user can log on only with authority above "Administrator".
• Image quality of the recorded file may decrease depending on performance and
other factors of the selected PC.
• When negative value is used in the display coordinate other than main display,
KV STUDIO RECORDER cannot be used.

1 Select "Tool(T)" "KV STUDIO RECORDER(A)" from the menu.

After starting KV STUDIO RECERDER, "Video recording frame" and "KV STUDIO RECORDER" dialog
box are displayed.

2 Use mouse to adjust the position and size of "Video recording frame" according to the video
recording area.

11
TOOL

"Video recording
frame"

[KV STUDIO RECORDER]

Dialog box

3 Use "KV STUDIO RECORDER" dialog box to start/stop video recording.

The recorded content is saved in a file upon stopping video recording.

Exit KV STUDIO RECODER

Video recording time

Video recording size

Pause Video recording setting

Start (restart) Stop

11-12 - KV STUDIO Ver.6 User’s Manual -

 11-1 About Tool Functions

z Video recording setting

Item Explanation
Set up maximum video recording time within the range of 1 to 60 (min).
Max. recording time(min) In the video recording process, video recording is stopped automatically at
maximum video recording time.
Update Set up update period of video recording as high, medium, or low. (default
Picture quality frequency value: high)
adjustment Colors Set up chromatic number of video recording as full color, or 256 color.
(default value: full color)
Initialize Click it to restore the video recording setting to initial setting.

KV STUDIO PLAYER KV-5500/5000/3000 KV-1000 KV-700 KV-P16 KV-10/16/24/40

11

TOOL
Tools (T) KV STUDIO PLAYER(B)
Any file recorded using KV STUDIO RECORDER can be played with KV STUDIO PLAYER.

Note
• 400MB or more free space must be available on the hard disk when KV STUDIO
PLAYER is used.
• Multiple KV STUDIO PLAYER cannot be started.

1 Select "Tool(T)" "KV STUDIO PLAYER(B)" from the menu.

After starting KV STUDIO PLAYER, "KV STUDIO PLAYER" window is displayed.

Other procedure It is started separately when selecting "Program" "KEYENCE Applications" "KVS
Ver.6 tool" "KV STUDIO PLAYER" from the "Start" menu of Windows.

- KV STUDIO Ver.6 User’s Manual - 11-13

 11-1 About Tool Functions

2 Use KV STUDIO RECORDER to open and play the recorded file.

Back Next Pause Stop Display/hide menu(only

for full screen display)

Play (restart)
Slide bar

11 Open a file Adjust animation size

according to the window size
TOOL

Note
• "Back", "Next", and "Slide bar" are valid only for the read video recording data
(green bar).

CPU functional version validation KV-5500/5000/3000 KV-1000 KV-700 KV-P16 KV-10/16/24/40

Tools CPU functional version validation PLC

Tools CPU functional version validation Project

Display the CPU function version of currently connected CPU unit and the project being edited.

In case of PLC
Display the model and function version of the connected CPU.

11-14 - KV STUDIO Ver.6 User’s Manual -

 11-1 About Tool Functions

In case of project
Display whether the function of CPU function version above 2 is used in the output window.

Customize KV-5500/5000/3000 KV-1000 KV-700 KV-P16 KV-10/16/24/40

Tools (T) Customize(K)

You can customize shortcut keys and the tool bars.

1 Select "Tool(T)" "Customize(K)" from the menu.

The "Customize" dialog box is displayed.

2 Select the tab of the desired customize method.

For details on the settings of each setup tab, refer to the following:

Shortcut keys
11

TOOL

Item Explanation
Batch-changes shortcut keys to initial format, GPPQ format,
(Batch change)
GPPA format and CX format.
(Read) Reads saved setup files (*.key) for shortcut keys.
Shortcut key
(Save) Saves the settings of customized shortcut keys.
create
(Initialize) Returns shortcut key settings to their defaults.
(Register/delete
Registers/deletes shortcut keys.
keys)

- KV STUDIO Ver.6 User’s Manual - 11-15

 11-1 About Tool Functions

■ Batch-change keys
Batch-changes keys to initial format, GPPQ format, GPPA format and CX format.
"GPPQ/GPPA Mode Shortcut Key List", Page A-19

Click "btch chng" button.

Select key form via the "Batch change key" dialog box.

■ Registering/deleting keys
Select the command to register/delete, and click the "Reg/delete key" button.
The "Register/delete key" dialog box is displayed.

11
TOOL

Item Explanation
(Select assigned (Assigned keys) Selects the key to assign from the pulldown menu.
keys) Ctrl/ Shift/ Alt Selects the key to be pressed simultaneously when using shortcut keys.
Delete Deletes the shortcut key settings.

Toolbar

The tool bar can be customized. Mark the checkbox of items to display on the tool bar.
To display all, click "all ON" button, to hide all tool bars, click "All OFF".

11-16 - KV STUDIO Ver.6 User’s Manual -

 11-1 About Tool Functions

Option KV-5500/5000/3000 KV-1000 KV-700 KV-P16 KV-10/16/24/40

Tool(T) Option(O)

■ Ladder diagram color setting

Set the layout of the colors on the KV STUDIO screen.

1 Select "Tool(T)" "Option(O)" from menu. and select " Ladder color setting" tab.

2 To change color, click "Color" button.

TIP • The colors that you set here are saved to KV STUDIO and are enabled when KV STUDIO
is next started up.
• To return saved colors to their defaults, click the "Initialize" button.
11

TOOL
• To set the background color of the ladder program edit window to black, click the "Black
background mode" button.

3 Select color

TIP If you cannot find the color you want, click the Define Custom Colors>> button.
Specify the hue and brightness of the color, and add the color to the custom colors by the
"Add to Custom Colors". The color that you added is added to "Custom colors".

- KV STUDIO Ver.6 User’s Manual - 11-17

 11-1 About Tool Functions

■ Unit color setting

Set the color of each unit that is displayed on Unit Editor. When a relay/DM is assigned from Unit
Editor, the corresponding device on the ladder diagram is displayed in the color that you set.

TIP Unit display colors can be change from either Editor or Unit Editor.
Newly set unit colors are reflected in both of these.
For details on how to set colors in Unit Editor, see "Set unit color", Page 3-43

1 Select "Tool(T)" "Option(O)" from the menu. and select "Set unit color" tab.

2 Select the item to change color, and click the "Color" button.

11
TIP • The colors that you set here are saved to KV STUDIO and are enabled when KV STUDIO
TOOL

is next started up.

• To return saved colors to their defaults, click the "Initialize" button.

3 Select color

TIP If you cannot find the color you want, click the Define Custom Colors>> button.
Specify the hue and brightness of the color, and add the color to the custom colors by the
"Add to Custom Colors".

■ Online edit setting

Cells that have been edited by online edit are displayed with a light blue background. This indicates that
the program has been changed. Set the timing that indication of changes to the pro-gram is
automatically cleared.
For details, Please see "Setup Online Edit", Page 9-100.

11-18 - KV STUDIO Ver.6 User’s Manual -

 11-1 About Tool Functions

■ System setting
Select "Tool" "Option(O)" from menu.and select the System setting tab.

Item Explanation
The title screen is displayed when KV STUDIO is started up.
Display start title To disable display of the title screen when KV STUDIO is started up, unmark this
checkbox. The title screen will not be displayed when KV STUDIO is next started up.
KV STUDIO has a "device auto-convert function." This function automatically
replaces device Nos. on the ladder program to match any changes that are made to

11
devices assigned to units that have already been assigned a device on Unit Editor.
When this checkbox is marked, the device auto-convert function is enabled.
Device auto-convert mode by

TOOL
changes to unit configu Note
When the device auto-convert function is not used, manually
change device Nos. on the ladder program after changing
assigned devices that were set on Unit Editor.

IME auto matic ON When this checkbox is marked, IME automatically turns ON.
Change ladder set value at Under monitor status, when setting value of timer / counter, etc. is changed,
monitor set value change Ladder setting is also changed.
Allow the operation of relay
If you do not want to set relay ON/OFF by double clicking on the Ladder in
status on aladder diagram
monitor, uncheck it.
being monitored
When operating relay under monitor status, confirmation dialog box will be
Confirm to change relay
displayed.
status on a ladder diagram
Cancel check, immediately operate relay.
Show confirm dialog for After checked, confirm dialog box wiil be displayed during the switch from
PROGRAM mode switching monitor status to PROGRAM status.
During Ladder entry, if entering (except copy, paste) duplicate coil command
Check duplicate coil
operand, the alarm dialog box will pop up.
Use return Ladder insert in edit menu, execute return symbol ( ) insert. If
dechecking, the action identical to original return will be executed.

Note If using the edition lower than Ver.2 of KV STUDIO to read ladder
Enable folding symbol of
diagram which is established by the edition higher than Ver.3, (open
ladder
the file, open the memorizer datas, read fromPLC, PLC noumenal
monitor), the editions before Ver.2 do not support the echo symbol,
so sometimes the ladder diagram can not be read.

- KV STUDIO Ver.6 User’s Manual - 11-19

 11-1 About Tool Functions

Item Explanation
Enable Undo/Redo in batch Make Undo and Redo functions of the batch-change menu valid.
change dialog After removing check, cannot select "Undo" "Redo".
Check device confliction when After checking, when converting Ladder, test the device using race
converting contention, output result to output window.
(Setup) Display "Device application status option setting" dialog box * 2 .
Set sender's name in the
When tansmitting items to PLC, set the name of the sender.
transfering data
(Setup) Display "final addresser settings" dialog box *3 .
Compare project name when
After checking, PLC verification, set project name to comparison target.
verifying
Disable hyperlink jump If checked, hyperlink becomes invalid.
Disable hyperlink jump when When reading transferred project from PLC in checked status, read
reading from PLC automatically with "disable hyperlink jump" checked.
In case the unit configuration contains KV-LE21V (KV-LE20V), if checked,
Display info dialog box when
log setting exit, and "jump to EtherNet relevant function" dialog box is
logging/trace setting is ended
displayed.
Set up the format of adapter Click "Setting(M)" to display "Adapter comments format setting" dialog box.
comments Device comments item automatically assiged to the adapter can be set.
*1 It can be set only when models KV-5500/5000/3000/1000 are selected.
*2 Can set via "Ignore ZRES command", "The device application status option setting" dialog box.
*3 Can set the name of final addresser via "Final addresser setting" dialog box.

11 ■ Script setting
Select "Tool(T)" "Option(O)" from menu. and select the script setting tab.
TOOL

Make script-related settings.

11-20 - KV STUDIO Ver.6 User’s Manual -

 11-1 About Tool Functions

■ Set display modes

Select "Tool(T)" "Option(O)" from menu. and select the set display modes tab.

Item Explanation
Auto According to Ladder edit window size, the displayed size is automatically changed.
Displays at the largest size, twice the standard size. Select this item when
200%
small characters are difficult to read, for example.
150% Displays at 1.5 times the standard size.
Display size
120% Displays at 1.2 times the standard size.
100%(Standard) This is the standard size.
11
Displays at the smallest size. This size displays the maximum number of

TOOL
80%
cells that can be displayed on screen. Select this size to check overall action.
Display by XYM Displays device name by XYM.
Display labels Displays each of the devices by label name.
Display label device Record label name and device No. for each device simultaneously.
Display unit device Display device name for ladder by unit device.
Display local assignment During monitor, simulator, global device mark is used to display Ladder Local
devices during monitor Device and assignment target of local label.
Display Ladder Monitor values The current values on the ladder diagram are displayed in HEX in the
in HEX Monitor or Simulator mode.
Suppresses the display of zeros in device No. and numerical values on ladder diagrams.
Zero-suppress display ladder
Example)do not perform zero suppress processing: R00500
device No.
Zero suppress processing: R500
Display devices when expand When expanding PACK command contained in KV-700 Ladder, use CM bit
pack-instruction OUT command to display PACK command symbol
Display comment Displays comments on ladder diagrams.
Number of comment lines Select from 2 to 4 as the number of display digits in comments.
Display the comments by white- Display in line feed when white-space characters (both full-width and half-
space characters in line feed. width) are included in the soft component comments.
Display comments with line
Display in a new line when the device comments contain periods.
break by period
Device No. Select the size of fonts to be displayed on device Nos.
Font size
Device comment Select the size of fonts to be displayed on device comments.
Specification
Rung cmnt/ Script Select the size of fonts to be displayed on rung comments and scripts.
Select Comment 1 Display comments 1.
comments Comment 2 Display comments 2.

- KV STUDIO Ver.6 User’s Manual - 11-21

 11-1 About Tool Functions

■ Setup edit/key
Select "Tool(T)" "Option(O)" from menu. and select the setup editing/key tab.

Item Explanation
Displays the operand edit dialog box with Type List and
Zoom-out operand dialog box
Explanation of operands omitted.
Displays the direct entry dialog box with the comment field and
Zoom-out direct entry dialog box
"Insert" button omitted.
Startup entry by Enter key Start up srch dialog box during monitoring by Enter key.
11 Start up direct entry dialog box by ESC key Set up to start up the direct entry dialog box by Esc key.
Startip search dialog box during Enables the search dialog box to be started up by the key during
TOOL

monitoring by Enter key monitoring.

Continuously entry comments in Can use direct entry dialog box, continue entering comment after
directentry dialog box command and operand entry.
Search relay in the same CH for cross When establishing a reference, other CH relays of the same number
refence with the specified will also be searched.
When creating cross reference, in addition to the devices used in the
Including application range of the
operand, all devices used by the command also displayed.
Instruction for cross reference
However, except index device specified or indirectly referenced devices.
Display candidate operand Use each input box to display the candidate operand.
RT edit* Input operand into device comments, label, and unit information.

* If the data quantity of device comments,and label is large, edit operation may become slow. In this
case, please set RT edit to OFF.

The content set in the option can be read/saved. Readable files are shown below.
TIP
• KV STUDIOVer.5 option setting file(KVS.ini)*
* Only reading supported
• KV STUDIOVer.6 option setting file(.kop)
Reading method
1 Select "Tool(T)" "Option(O)" from the menu, and click "Read"
2 Read option setting file (*.kop).
Save method
1 Select "Tool(T)" "Option(O)" from the menu, and click "Save".
2 Save option setting file (*.kop).

11-22 - KV STUDIO Ver.6 User’s Manual -

12
SCRIPT
This chapter describes how to input and edit scripts.
For script, please see KV-5500/5000/3000/1000 Series Script Programming
Manual.

12-1 Insert Script •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• 12-2

12-2 Convert Script ••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• 12-4
12-3 Display Converted Ladder Program••••••••••••••••••••• 12-5
12-4 Input Auxiliary Function•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• 12-8

SCRIPT

- KV STUDIO Ver.6 User’s Manual - 12-1

 12-1 Insert Script
This section describes how to insert scripts.
For script, please see KV-KV-5500/5000/3000/1000 Series Script Programming Manual.

Insert Area Script KV-5500/5000/3000 KV-1000 KV-700 KV-P16 KV-10/16/24/40

"Script (S)" "Insert area script (A)" +

When using field scripts, the entire rung can be programmed as script.

1 Click the cell (rung) for which script is to be programmed.

2 Select "Script (S)" "Insert area script (A)" from the menu.

Other procedure Select "Edit script (X)" "Insert area script (A)" from the menu that appears by right-
clicking in the ladder edit window.

3 input the script.

4 After inputing the script, press the key.

12 Other procedure • Click the ladder edit window outside the script programming area.
• Press key+ key
SCRIPT

Insert Box Script KV-5500/5000/3000 KV-1000 KV-700 KV-P16 KV-10/16/24/40

"Script(S)" "Insert box script(B)" +

Box scripts have ladder execution condition. These scripts can specify when and in which ladder program
defined by the script is to be executed.

1 Program the execution conditions in ladder edit program, and click the cell for which the box
script is to be programmed.

2 Select "Script (S)" "Insert box script (B)" from menu.

Other procedure Select "Script" "Insert box script" from the menu that appears by right-clicking in the
ladder edit window.

3 input the script.

12-2 - KV STUDIO Ver.6 User’s Manual -

 12-1 Insert Script

4 After inputing the script, press the key.

Other procedure • Click the ladder edit window outside the script programming area.
• Press key+ key

Change Edit Method KV-5500/5000/3000 KV-1000 KV-700 KV-P16 KV-10/16/24/40

"Script (S)" "Change edit method (N)" "Direct input (D)"

"Window (W)"

Select the method for editing scripts. Program directly in script editor or open a window to program.

1 Select "Script (S)" "Change edit method (N)" "Direct input (D)" or "Window (W)" from
the menu.

Direct input (script edit program)

12

SCRIPT
Window (script edit window)

- KV STUDIO Ver.6 User’s Manual - 12-3

 12-2 Convert Script
Convert inputted script .

Convert Selected Script Only KV-5500/5000/3000 KV-1000 KV-700 KV-P16 KV-10/16/24/40

"Script (S)" "Convert selected script (S)" +

Select "Script (S)" "Convert selected script (S)" from converted script.
The selected script is converted, and button appears on the converted rung
When an error exists in script, the error message is displayed, and the error location is displayed in the output
window.

Convert All Scripts KV-5500/5000/3000 KV-1000 KV-700 KV-P16 KV-10/16/24/40

"Script (S)" "Convert all scripts (C)"

Select "Script (S)" "Convert all scripts (C)" from the menu.
The scripts are converted, and button appears on the converted rung.
When an error exists in script, the error message is displayed, and the error location is displayed in the output
window.

Set Warning Level of Script Conversion Error KV-5500/5000/3000 KV-1000 KV-700 KV-P16 KV-10/16/24/40

"Script (S)" "Set script warning level (W)"

12 Set the level of warnings that are displayed during script conversion.
SCRIPT

Note
This function can be used for setting the script warning level, and the script can be
effectively converted without displaying normally displayed warnings. Program and
convert scripts carefully.

1 Select "Script (S)" "Set script warning level (W)" from menu.
"Script warning level setting" dialog box appears.

The warning when a suffix different from the data type defined for global label is specified is not outputted.
After selecting, when specifying the suffix other than data type defined during all labels registration, warning is
not outputted.
Example) when "1 word unsigned integer: UINT" is specified in global label definition, and suffix .L etc. is
specified in script

2 Select warning level, click "OK" button.

Set warning level.

12-4 - KV STUDIO Ver.6 User’s Manual -

12-3 Display Converted Ladder Program
This section describes how to display scripts after ladder conversion.
The edited script is displayed or verified as conversion ladder.

Display Converted Ladder KV-5500/5000/3000 KV-1000 KV-700 KV-P16 KV-10/16/24/40

"Script (S)" "Display/hide converted ladder (V)" +

Display the content of converted ladders according to following procedures.

1 Select desired script.

2 Select "Script (S)" "Display/hide converted ladder (V)" from the menu. When "Display/hide
converted ladder (V)" is selected again after a ladder is displayed, the converted ladder is
closed and only the script is displayed.
Display converted ladder program.

The programmed
script is displayed.
12

SCRIPT
The converted ladder
is displayed.

Other procedure Click button on the rung to be displayed.

- KV STUDIO Ver.6 User’s Manual - 12-5

 12-3 Display Converted Ladder Program

Display Entire Content of Converted Ladder KV-5500/5000/3000 KV-1000 KV-700 KV-P16 KV-10/16/24/40

"Script (S)" "Display entire content of converted ladder (X)"

Display entire content of a folded converted ladder in the ladder program converted ladder displayed by
"Display/hide converted ladder," .

1 Select the ladder or script in the converted ladder to be displayed.

2 Select "Script (S)" "Display entire content of converted ladder (X)" from menu.
The entire content of converted ladder is displayed.

12
SCRIPT

Right-click on the converted

ladder, and the right-click menu
for the script is displayed.

TIP Rungs can be displayed or hidden by clicking a ladder in the converted ladder or button on
script.

Other procedure From right-click menu of converted adder, select "Script edit (X)" "Display all converted
ladder（X）".

12-6 - KV STUDIO Ver.6 User’s Manual -

 12-3 Display Converted Ladder Program

Fold Entire Content of Converted Ladder KV-5500/5000/3000 KV-1000 KV-700 KV-P16 KV-10/16/24/40

"Script (S)" "Fold entire content of converted ladder (O)"

Fold part of ladder in ladder program displayed by "Display/hide converted ladder," and only rung comments
with script is displayed.

1 Select the ladder or script in the converted ladder to be folded.

2 Select "Script (S)" "Fold entire content of converted ladder (O)" from menu.
For the converting ladder displayed in "display/hide converting ladder", only line comments recorded with
folding script is displayed. 12

SCRIPT
Right-click on the converted
ladder, and the right-click menu
for the script is displayed.

TIP Rungs can be displayed or hid in rung units by clicking a ladder in a converted ladder or the
button on the line of script.

Other procedure From right-click menu of converted ladder, select "Script edit (X)" "Display all converted
Ladder (O)".

- KV STUDIO Ver.6 User’s Manual - 12-7

 12-4 Input Auxiliary Function
This chapter describes input auxiliary function of script.

Display Script Function List KV-5500/5000/3000 KV-1000 KV-700 KV-P16 KV-10/16/24/40

"Script(S)" "Script function list (F)" + (SPACE)

Display function list when the name of a function or input function is unknown.

1 Input part of the function name, and select "Script (S)" "Script function list (F)" from the menu.
The script function list is displayed.

2 Select the desired function, andpress key or double-click the function.

The selected function is inserted at the current cursor location.

Display Simple Format KV-5500/5000/3000 KV-1000 KV-700 KV-P16 KV-10/16/24/40

+ Shift + (SPACE)
12
"Script (S)" "Script function tip (H)"

Display simple information such as whether arguments and return values are to be programmed as script
SCRIPT

function tips when inputting.

1 Place the "|" mouse cursor to the right of the "(" , and select "Script (S)" "Script function tip
(H)" from the menu.
A script function hint is displayed in a simple format.

Other procedure A script function hint is automatically displayed when inputting "Function name".

12-8 - KV STUDIO Ver.6 User’s Manual -

APPENDICES
Refer to error message tables if trouble occurs during use, or if you want to
know to remedy errors that occur during programming.
A list of shortcut key commands is also provided as a quick reference.

1 Error Message Lists •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••A-2

2 List of Unavailable Characters •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• A-11
3 Shortcut Key List••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• A-13
4 Remedies for Frequently Occurring Communications Errors ••• A-25
5 Index ••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• A-27

APPENDICES

- KV STUDIO Ver.6 User’s Manual - A-1

 1 Error Message Lists
The following describes error messages and remedies to take when an error message is displayed.

Errors That Occur on Editor

The following error messages are displayed on Editor.

Error Message Cause Remedy
Dialog box
"Unusable text string is included at the "_" is used at the start of the module Use characters that are permitted in
beginning." name, macro name, etc. module names and macro names
A forbidden character is used in the Use characters that are permitted in
"Contain unusable text string." project name, macro name, label module names, macro names, label
name, etc. names, etc.

"Invalid file."
Check the disk using scandisk, etc.,
A probable cause is that data is
"Failed to open file. " and fix the file if it is abnormal. Then,
corrupted.
re-install KV STUDIO.
"File reading fails."

Please enter project name and then

"Project name invalid." Empty project name
save.
"Script information reading fails."
"Module information reading fails."
"Macro information reading fails."
A probable cause is that data is Use scandisk, etc. to check for disk
"LD rung information reading fails."
corrupted. errors.
"Rung comment information reading fails."
"Invalid comment/tab file."
"Undefined module/macro type."
"Device comment cannot set for this device A probable cause is that the device Change to a device to which a
category." is an argument device. comment can be set.
A probable cause is that data is Use scandisk, etc. to check for disk
"No mnemonics information."
corrupted. errors.
APPENDICES

Output window
Change the ID No. of the duplicated
"Duplicate identification No. of macro." The ID No. of the macro is duplicated.
macro.
"No relay in the specified unit, fail to use UR." The type of unit currently registered
by the macro argument setting Check the unit No.
differs from the type of unit (unit No.) Check the unit configuration.
"No DM in the specified unit, fail to use UM."
currently specified by a macro Check the macro argument setting.
instruction.
"Device assigned to label is illegal. Fail to A text string that cannot be used for Use characters that can be used for
reading [XXX]." the label is used. labels.
A syntax error occurred when the
"Disconversion processing failure." Change the program.
ladder was converted.

A-2 - KV STUDIO Ver.6 User’s Manual -

Errors/Warnings That Occur in Conversion

The following error messages are displayed during conversion.

Eliminate the cause of the error before performing conversion.
Error message Cause Remedy
There is no more memory left for Please check whether the space of
"Will abort due to insufficient memory"
performing conversion. memory and hard disk is enough.
"llegal N operand " (N: numerical value) The mnemonic for the instruction is
"Nth operand type error" wrong. (This error often occurs when
the mnemonic list is edited after Check the instruction specifications in
"llegal N operand value"(N: numerical value)
opening a third-party editor or a file the manual or in Help.

"Nth operand type error" created on a word processor is

opened.)
An instruction that can be used only
"Instruction duplicate" Change the program so that the
once has been used twice.
instruction is used only once.
"Operand duplicate" Duplicate operands
An instruction that cannot be used in Change the program and process by
"Cannot be used in interruption"
an interrupt has been used. another means.
A sub-routine or interrupt program is
Program between the END and ENDH
"Instruction position error" programmed before the END
instructions.
instruction.
The program ended with the called Change the program so that the number
"Subroutine nesting overflow"
sub-routine undefined. of nested programs is under the limit.
The program ended with the called Program the sub-routine program between
"Undefined subroutine"
sub-routine undefined. the END and ENDH instructions
The sub-routine of the same No. cannot be
Two or more of the sub-routine of the
"Subroutine No. duplicate" duplicated. Change the program so that
same No. have been defined.
the sub-routine is not duplicated.
Nesting of instructions used in a pair Change the program so that the number of
"Pair instruction nest overflow"

APPENDICES
has exceeded the limit. nested programs is within the limit range.
Instructed used in a pair are not in a Change the program so that the
"Pair instruction corresponding error"
pair. instructions are in a pair.
There is a block OR (parallel) Do not OR (parallel) connect the STG
"STG instruction parallel"
connected to the STG instruction. instruction.
The END instruction could be found in the Program the END instruction in the
"END instruction exists"
program up to the ENDH instruction. program up to the ENDH instruction.
The is no ENDH instruction on the final Program the ENDH instruction on the
"ENDH instruction exists"
rung of the program. final rung of the program.
The STG instruction is not at the start Program the STG instruction at the
"STG instruction position error"
of the block. start of the block.
The SFT instruction operand is outside Change the operand to the settable
"SFT instruction operand error"
the settable range. range.
The program does not contain the Program the corresponding CTH
"No corresponding CTH instruction" corresponding CTH instruction even instruction in the program up to the
though the CTC instruction is used. END instruction.
The program does not contain the Program the corresponding instruction
Corresponding instruction undefined corresponding instruction even though in the program up to the END
timer, counter or other contacts are used. instruction.
An illegal instruction has been Change the program and process by
Cannot be used in subroutine
programmed to the sub-routine. another means.

- KV STUDIO Ver.6 User’s Manual - A-3

 Error message Cause Remedy
Model code error
1st rung error The mnemonic for the instruction is
wrong. LD diagram can not be
The mnemonic symbol is wrong.
changed into.(This error often occurs
1st operand incorrect Check the instruction specifications in
when the mnemonic list is edited after
No need after the mnemonic symbol. the manual or in Help.
opening a third-party editor or a file
Operand the Nth line is not needed created on a word processor is
(N:numerical value) opened.)
Code file is not created.
"Not ladder"
"Too many instructions"
"No connected block on front side"
"No connected block on rear side"
"Instruction not paired"
"CON instruction usage error" Check the specifications of the
"Connection error of multiple input instruction, and rewrite the program.
Cannot be converted to a ladder
elements" drawing as the alignment of
"Output element cannot be paralleled" instructions is incorrect.
"Input element connected to output rung"
"Output element connected to power rail"
"Terminal element not connected to output rung"
"Please set the length of parallel block to
below 9 when parallel block starts from The parallel connection block contains Change the network to reduce the
power rail or terminates on output line. too many instructions and cannot be number of instructions in the parallel
Please set parallel data block to below 8 converted to a ladder drawing. connection block.
except this. "
A single block exceeds 100 rungs in Change the program so that the number
"Exceed max. rung"
the ladder drawing. of rungs in a single block is within 100.
There is no instruction symbol on the Program instruction symbols on the
"Not connected"
APPENDICES

route between the power rails. route between the power rails.
There is a short-circuit between two
"Invalid short circuit" Do not short between the two points.
points that must not be shorted.
The connection between blocks is not Change the network so that a normal
"Invalid parallel connection"
a normal parallel connection. parallel connection is formed.
The instruction symbol connection Change the network so that a correct
"Invalid connection"
method is in error. connection is formed.

Warning Messages Cause Remedy

"The 1st operand of ADRSET instruction is
used to set automatic assignment of local
device. Shall confirm assignment range of We recommend checking the
Automatic assignment of the local
local device. " specifications of the instruction and
device has been set even though there
"Index assignment is used in the local device manually setting the assignment range
is the possibility that the range of use
set to automatic assignment. Shall confirm of the local device.
of the local device in question exceeds
assignment range of local device." The alarm is no longer generated
the assignment range during ladder
"The numeral change operand of device is when the automatic assignment
operation.
used, local device with automatic setting is canceled.
assignment is used. Shall confirm
assignment range of local device."

A-4 - KV STUDIO Ver.6 User’s Manual -

Errors at Start of Monitoring and Communications Errors

These error messages are displayed at start of monitoring or during communications.

Error Message Cause Remedy
"The item mismatches the PLC model The model set in LD program is not conformable Shall set correct model again via "
connected to the target." to communication destination model. model setting".
"Password error." The password you entered is wrong. Enter the correct password.
"LC status changes in transfer, Ladder The state of the PLC changed during Return to editing again, and transfer the
conversion interrupted." program transfer processing. program again.
End monitor, communicate after
"Unstable USB communications." USB communication becomes instable. reconnecting USB cable. In case of frequent
occurrence, shall reinstall USB driver.
Via equipment manager of control celll,
"USB cannot be opened." Cannot open COM port. confirm whether USB driver is correctly
installed.
Check the USB cable connection. Use
"USB port disconnected" Fail to use USB port. Device Manager to make sure that the
USB driver has been installed.
The information of the PLC could not be Check the communications cable
"Fail to acquire PLC info."
got at the start of communications. connection and communications setup.
Make sure that the COM port selected
The communications port (COM port) can in Device Manager can be used.
"COM port cannot be opened."
no longer be used. Make sure that the COM port is not being
used by another application.
"Modem not connected, or not powered Check the communications cable
The modem did not return a response.
on." connection and power supply.
The connection destination is currently Wait a while before trying the
"Connection session."
communicating. connection again.
"NO CARRIER" Communications between the modem and
the connected device is not being

APPENDICES
Check the connection.
"NO DIAL" performed
successfully.

- KV STUDIO Ver.6 User’s Manual - A-5

 Errors During Ethernet Communications

The following error messages are displayed during Ethernet setup or when communications using the
Ethernet port are performed.
Error Message Cause Remedy
Check the connection settings,
connection path, connector cables, and
Cannot establish the connection with the
"Cannot open COM port." each of the port settings and states for
set port.
devices connected to the personal
computer.
An illegal value was entered for the device
"Device no. is incorrect." Please input correct value.
No.
A value has not been entered to the IP
"Enter address." Enter the IP address.
address during the Ethernet connection.
An illegal value was entered to the IP
"llegal address settings" Enter the correct IP address.
address during the Ethernet connection.
An illegal value was entered for the port Enter a value within the range 0 to
"Illegal Port No."
No. during the Ethernet connection. 65535 for the port No.
"**(File name)
Either there is no connection destination Either make a new connection
This file does not exist.
list file to reference, the file is already destination list file, or retry the operation
Either open existing file, or create new
opened, or the file is read-only. after eliminating the cause on the left.
file."
Text strings containing "=" cannot be
Connection destination name contains Enter a text string that does not contain
entered for the connection destination
illegal characters. "=".
name.
An illegal value was entered for the IP
Illegal address specification Enter the correct IP address.
address during the Ethernet connection.
An illegal value was entered to the IP
Illegal Port No. Enter the correct port No.
address during the Ethernet connection.
APPENDICES

Connection destination name does not The connection destination list file to Correctly set the file to reference in the
exist. reference does not exist. connection destination list.
Set the Network setting on the Control celll
to Write.
The above error message sometimes is
The network adapter does not exist on
Failed to get network settings. displayed when Windows is unstable. If the
the PC you are using.
above error messages are not remedied
by the above remedies, exit KV STUDIO
and reboot Windows.

A-6 - KV STUDIO Ver.6 User’s Manual -

PLC Unit Errors

These errors are displayed when an error occurs on the KV-5500/5000/3000/1000/700 CPU unit.
Error Message Cause Remedy
Nesting of subroutine (nest) exceeds the Occur during the execution of ladder. Please note
CALL nesting error
limit. application method of subroutine, correct ladder.
Occur during the execution of ladder. Please
FOR- NEXT instruction nest exceeds the
FOR nesting error note the application method of FOR- NEXT
limit.
instruction, correct ladder.
Occur during the execution of ladder.
INT nesting error The interrupt concurrently exceeding the limit. Please note application method of INT
instruction, correct.
Occur during the execution of ladder.Please note
The nest of MPS-MPP instruction exceeds
MPS nesting error the application method of MPS-MPP instruction,
the limit.
and correct ladder.
Occur during conversion. Limit the number of
The number of BREAK instructions exceeds
BREAK error BREAK instructions between FOR to NEXT to
the limit.
within the specified limit.
Please connect power again after
Convert error A system error occurred. troubleshooting.Please contact the nearest
office in case of frequent occurrence.
Object size overflow error The object size of the ladder is exceeded. Please reduce the size of Ladder program.
The size of the ladder program can be
Code size overflow error The code size of ladder exceeds the limit.
checked on KV STUDIO.
Occur during the execution of ladder. Please
The number of macros exceeds the nesting
Macro nest error note the application method of macro
level.
instruction, correct ladder.
Invalid interrupt error
Macro error invalid Please connect power again after
Indirect specifying error A system error occurred. troubleshooting. Please contact the nearest
Address error invalid office in case of frequent occurrence.

APPENDICES
Object invalid
Please correct Ladder program according
to the following conditions, check whether
exceeding scanning time.
·FOR-NEXT instructions, etc., performed repeatedly.
·Jump processing instructions such as the
CJ/NCJ-LABEL instructions, etc.
Scan time over error Scan time is 300 ms or more.
·Program calling instructions such as
CALL, MCAL instructions, etc.
·The instructions with longer processing
time such as FMOV, WSR and MAX
instructions.
·Frequently interrupt program or not.
Please connect power again after
Ladder stack overflow error A system error occurred. troubleshooting. Please contact the nearest
office in case of frequent occurrence.
Transfer ladder programs to the PLC before
No Ladder error The ladder program is not registered.
operation.

Unit setting info. error Expansion/special unit setting damaged. Please use ladder support software or
memory card to transfer the unit setting
Unit setting info. lost error Unit setting information not set. information to the PLC.

Expansion/special unit exists under unit setting Turn the CPU unit OFF, then connect the
Unit unconnected error
information status, but not connected actually. Expansion or Special Unit set in Unit Editor.

- KV STUDIO Ver.6 User’s Manual - A-7

 Error Message Cause Remedy
Please remove noise source. Please
Unit BSI timeout error Bus communication may stop due to noise. contact the nearest office in case of
frequent occurrence.
The actual number of connected units
Unit number differs from the number of expansion/
Turn the CPU unit OFF, then connect the
special units set in Unit Editor.
Expansion or Special Unit set in Unit Editor.
The actual unit type differs from the type of
Unit type error
expansion/special units set in Unit Editor.
Remove any sources of noise. Please
Expansion bus communication
Bus communication may stop due to noise. contact the nearest office in case of
error
frequent occurrence.
Turn the CPU unit OFF, and connect the
End unit unconnected error End unit not connected.
End Unit.
FROM abnormal Flash ROM abnormality
Contact your agent.
SRAM abnormal Hardware fault.
Backup battery voltage drop error Backup battery voltage lower. Please replace backup battery.

The content (CM，M，W，EM，ZF，FM， Replace the backup battery, and execute

R， B， CR， LR， T， C， CTH and CTC an SRAM clear. Only the device values and
SRAM abnormality
current values) of RAM is corrupted as the alarm values are cleared. The ladder
voltage of the backup battery has dropped. program is not cleared.
The clock value may be damaged due to Replace the backup battery, check the clock
RTC voltage low error
the drop in the backup battery voltage. value, and set the clock again as required.
Check the file system of the Memory Card.
The Memory Card may be damaged. Check the file system using the chkdsk at the
Memory card abnormal Communications may be down due to Windows command prompt.
electromagnetism or noise. (Ex) When Memory Card is the E: drive
C:￥WINDOWS>CHKDSK E:
Please remove memory card according to
The card is pulled out during memory card correct operation steps.
Memory card pulled out in access
accessing. KV-5500/5000/3000 Series User's
Manual "2-2 Memory Card"
Please use memory card according to
APPENDICES

Power is disconnected during memory card correct operation steps.

Memory card close in access
accessing. KV-5500/5000/3000 Series User's
Manual "2-2 Memory Card"
Multiple operations were executed before Wait until the Memory Card has finished
Memory card waiting completed
accessing of the Memory Card was completed. being accessed.
Transfer data invalid
Monitor timer error
Stack overflow
A system error occurred. Clear the error, and turn the unit ON again.
System error
Please contact the nearest office in case of
Device range error
frequent occurrence.
Resource error
Error buffer area overflow System errors exceed the limit.
Error buffer abnormal A system error occurred.
Automatic reading from Memory card fails ·Cancel write protection, and transfer the
due to the following reasons. autoload files to the main unit from the
Automatic reading error · Write protect is set by the MEMSW Memory Card.
instruction in the unit program.
· There is a problem in the details stored to Transfer files matched to the main unit's
·
files on the Memory Card. configuration.

Clear the error, and turn the unit ON again.

No Error Message A system error occurred. Please contact the nearest office in case of
frequent occurrence.

A-8 - KV STUDIO Ver.6 User’s Manual -

 Errors That Occur on Unit Editor

These errors are displayed when an error occurs during operation of Unit Editor.
Explanations are omitted for errors that do not require an explanation excluding serious errors. Detailed
explanations are displayed in the message area. Follow the instructions of these descriptions to
remedy the error.

■ Errors that are displayed when KV STUDIO is started up

Error Message Cause Remedy
The PLC Link must be reset as there is PLC Link information could not be To save the unit setup information, the PLC
no data in the unit setup information. acquired from the unit setup information. link and addresses must be set again.

■ File access errors

Error Message Cause Remedy
Failed to read xxx information.
The file is damaged or an attempt was Either open the correct file, or make the
made to open another file. file in Unit Editor again.
Failed to write xxx information.

■ Operation messages
These messages are displayed when an error occurs during setting up of units.
Error Message Cause Remedy
Adderss cannot be entered, since no Relays, DMs, etc. were set without a
Place the CPU Unit first.
CPU is found. CPU Unit placed.
The Clipboard is in use by other
Could not open Clipboard. processes when Copying KL address Wait a while before trying again.
information.

APPENDICES
Unit setting file not opened. Need verify The file specified in the previous import
Enter the name of the new file.
the file name. dialog box is deleted.
Check the detailed message in the
Cannot open unit setup file. Verify The unit setup information file could not
message display area, and remove the
detailed message? be opened.
cause of the error.
Cannot input due to slave registration. An attempt was made to directly enter
Delete all slave setups before directly
Delete slave, or change the setting of the addresses without the slave device
entering the addresses.
slave. setup deleted.
An attempt was made to manually enter
If the slave address is to be entered, the Determine the relay/DM Nos. of the
the address of the slave device before
leading relay/DM No. of master needs to master before manually entering the
determining the relay/DM Nos. of the
be entered. address of the slave device.
master.
Cannot select due to slave setting.
Close slave setup window, or set in An attempt was made to change the
slave setup window. Change and save the settings on the
settings in the main window on a KL Unit
master
Cannot change as slave is being setup. on which the slave is currently being
in the slave setup window.
Either close slave setup window, or set edited.
in slave setup window.
KL connection setup is already started The address setup software is already Use the address setup software that is
up. started up. started up to set the addresses.
Cannot save this unit setup information as
The unit setup information file is too
setup information of unit is too large. The unit configuration must be reduced.
large.
Reduce the number of units and try again.

- KV STUDIO Ver.6 User’s Manual - A-9

 ■ Unit configuration error check
These errors occur during execution of relay/DMs assignments and address checks.
Error Message Cause Remedy
Install the CPU Unit.
Check the placed state of the Extension
Unit.
The error might occur when the
The CPU Unit does not exist or the
Cannot find CPU. Extension Unit is connected when the
Extension Unit is incorrectly configured.
auto-layout function is turned OFF. This
error is not displayed when operations
are performed with the auto-layout
turned ON.
Lower limit value of scaling setup is upper Entered values exceed the upper/lower Specify a value smaller than the upper
limit value or higher. limit value range. limit value as the lower limit value.
Check the placed state of the Extension
Unit.
The error might occur when the
Connection information of unit from xxx
The Extension Unit is incorrectly Extension Unit is connected when the
rung onwards is illegal. Check
configured. auto-layout function is turned OFF. This
connection state.
error is not displayed when operations
are performed with the auto-layout
turned ON.
Input address and output address Input address areas overlap output Set the areas so that input address areas
crossed. address areas. do not overlap output address areas.
When inter-PLC communications is set
to "ON", the number of relays is
Inter-PLC communications is not set to calculated from the number of
"ON". So, the number of relays might addresses. For this reason, when the 8- Pay attention to the number of relays in
not match the actual number of used point I/O Unit is in use, the number of use.
relays. relays might not match the actual
number of used relays.
APPENDICES

(This is not an error.)

■ Printing-related errors
These errors occur when an attempt is made to execute printing.
If these messages are displayed, re-install the latest printer driver, and executing printing again. If this
does not remedy the error, change the printer.
Error Message
As this printer does not support clipping, it might not print out correctly.
As this printer cannot plot rectangles, it can not print correctly.
As this printer cannot plot lines, it can not print correctly.

A-10 - KV STUDIO Ver.6 User’s Manual -

 2 List of Unavailable Characters
This section gives a list of characters that are not available for project names, module names, macro names, labels, and device comments.

● Characters not available for project names and module/macro names

When choosing KV-5500/5000/3000/1000

Unavailable characters
(space) (underline x 2)

When choosing KV-1000

Unavailable characters
(space) (underline x 2)
Characters that cannot be used at the beginning

Characters that cannot be used at the end

Unusable character string Global

When choosing KV-700/700+M,KV-P16,KV-10(16),KV-24(40)

Unavailable characters

● Characters that cannot be used for labels

Unavailable characters
(space)
*
Characters that cannot be used at the beginning
Global * (case insensitive)
(same name as instruction)
(device name )

APPENDICES
· alphabet character + or + number
· alphabet character + number
· +( to )
· +( to )
· The following key words are specified in KV script
·IF, THEN, ELSE, END, SELECT, CASE, IS, TO, MC, MCR, FOR,
NEXT, WHILE, DO, UNTIL, TYPE
· The following key words specified in IEC61131- 3
TRUE, FALSE
Unusable character string TIME, DATE,TIME_OF_DAY, TOD, DATE_AND_TIME, DT
BOOL, SINT, INT, DINT, LINT, USINT, UINT, UDINT, ULINT,
REAL, LREAL, STRING, WSTRING, BYTE, WORD,
DWORD, LWORD
ANY, ANY_DERIVED, ANY_ELEMENTARY, ANY_MAGNITUDE,
ANY_NUM, ANY_REAL, ANY_INT, ANY_BIT, ANY_STRING,
ANY_DATE
ACTION, END_ACTION,
ARRAY, OF,
AT,
CASE, END_CASE,
CONFIGURATION, END_CONFIGURATION,
CONSTANT,
EN, ENO,
EXIT,

- KV STUDIO Ver.6 User’s Manual - A-11

 · F_EDGE,
FOR, TO, BY, DO, END_FOR,
FUNCTION, END_FUNCTION,
FUNCTION_BLOCK, END_FUNCTION_BLOCK,
IF, THEN, ELSIF, ELSE, END_IF,
INITIAL_STEP, END_STEP,
NOT, MOD, AND, XOR, OR,
PROGRAM, WITH, END_PROGRAM, R_EDGE,
READ_ONLY, READ_WRITE,
REPEAT, UNTIL, END_REPEAT,
RESOURCE, END_RESOURCE,
RETAIN, NON_RETAIN,
RETURN,
Unusable character string
STEP,
STRUCT, END_STRUCT,
TASK,
TRANSITION, FROM, END_TRANSITION,
TYPE, END_TYPE,
VAR,VAR_INPUT, VAR_OUTPUT, VAR_IN_OUT, VAR_TEMP,
VAR_EXTERNAL, VAR_ACCESS,
VAR_CONFIG,VAR_GLOBAL,
END_VAR,
WHILE, DO, END_WHILE
· Other (IEC61131-3 standard)
· 2 above continuous " _ " are not allowed in label forename.
"a_b_c" can be used, but, "a_bc" is forbidden.

* Unusable character (character string) only when the model is KV-1000.

APPENDICES

● Characters that cannot be used for device comments

Unavailable characters

A-12 - KV STUDIO Ver.6 User’s Manual -

 3 Shortcut Key List
The following table present shortcut key combinations that are used for executing various functions.

Shortcut Keys Valid on Unit Editor

● File ● Window
Import + Unit placement area +
Close + Select unit +
Unit Setup +
● Edit
Refresh setting +
Cut +
Message area +
Copy +
Paste + ● Help
Delete How to use Unit Editor
Unit comments + +
● Operations in unit placement area
Block comment + +
Move cell • • •
System comments + +
Move cell to start of rung
Unit preset +
Move cell to end of rung
Batch input relay No. +
Delete placed units
● Convert +
Multiple selection
Jump to error rung • • •
Auto-assign relay/DM
● Operations in unit selection window
Device check
Move cell • • •
● Slave device setup Add selected unit
Setup slave +
● Operations in unit setup window
Import slave information +

APPENDICES
Move cell •
KL Unit information copy + +
+
Paste KL unit information + + display move module
• • •
KL address setting +
Input
● View Input/confirm

View Unit setup Cancel

Unit Monitor + +
● Operations in message area
Customize monitoring + +
Move cell •
Buffer memory monitor + +

Shortcut Keys Valid on Unit Editor "Slave Setup Screen"

● File Paste +

Import slave information + Delete

Close + Input unit/slave comment + +
Reserve unit slave +
● Edit
Cut +
Copy +

- KV STUDIO Ver.6 User’s Manual - A-13

 ● Convert ● Operation in slave configuration area
Jump to error rung Move cell •
Auto Address Assignment The Unit Setup window of the
Check addresses selected unit is displayed.
Delete configured unit
● View
Unit/slave setting content ● Operations in unit selection window
Move cell • • •
● Window
Add selected unit
Slave Configuration Area +
Unit Selection window + ● Operations in unit setup window
Unit Setup window +
Move cell •
Address Setup window +
Input
Message area +
Input/confirm
● Help Cancel

How to use Unit Editor

● Operations in address setup window
Move cell •

Shortcut Keys Valid on KV STUDIO

For ‹ project, shortcut keys can be set to change.
"Customize", Page 11-15

Shortcut keys valid in the initial screen

● File ● Monitor/simulator
APPENDICES

New project + PLC Monitor +

Open project + Read from PLC +

● View
Workspace +
Output window +

Shortcut keys valid in the Editor mode

● File ● Edit
New project + Undo +
Open project + Redo +
Save project + Cut +
Print + Copy +
Paste +
Multiple paste + +
Search +
Replace operand +

A-14 - KV STUDIO Ver.6 User’s Manual -

 New cross-reference Delete vertical
+
Make list of cross-reference connection line‹
+
rung comments Delete horizontal
+ ( )
"Previous cross-reference(Z)" ‹
+ connection line‹
Next cross-reference‹ vertical + /

Line/line step No. + + connection line +

Top + Input/delete
+ /
Bottom + horizontal
+
connection line
Previous block +
display the device cross
Next block +
datum mark of cell location
Previous symbol +
Jump Delete instruction to the
Next symbol
left of cell position
Home
Delete instruction at cell position
End
Directly enter
Change previous block + +
instruction at cell position
Change next block + +
Right-shift cursor position
Contact/Coil
Enter NO contact‹
Cell
Enter NC contact‹ +
+ /
Rung Enter NO contact OR‹
Insert +
Enter NC contact OR‹ +
Rung comment +
Enter NO contact coil‹
Loopback ladder + +
Enter NC contact coil‹ +
Delete rung +
SET‹ +
Disable rung - Settings +
RES‹ +
Disable rung - Cancel +
TMR‹ +
Insert + +
‹
TMS +

APPENDICES
Set + +
Bookmark C‹ +
+ +
Release DIFU ‹ +
DIFD‹ +
+
‹
Select rung ( + )*1 MOV +

( + )*2 LDA‹ +

Arrange ladder + + STA‹ +

Edit list + LDP‹ +

‹
Change operand LDF + +

Change device comment + ORP‹ + +

‹
Input vertical ORF + +

connection line‹ MEP‹ + +

Edit
Input horizontal MEF + +
connecti ( )
connection line‹ INV + +
on line
Input horizontal connection + Change NO-NC contact,
line to end of rung + change suffix, enter NC contact
Change rise/fall +
*1 Only valid when the cell is on the left (the first line)
*2 Only valid when the cell is on the right (the tenth line)

- KV STUDIO Ver.6 User’s Manual - A-15

 Direct input/current value change‹ ● Script
+ + Insert area script +
Next cell‹ *
+ Insert box script +

+ + Convert selected script +

Previous cell‹ *
+ display/not display the
+
increment of the device number + + converted ladder diagram
Decrement of the device number + + Script function list +

* Only valid when displaying the edit window of divided ladder diagram + +
Script tip
● View
Workspace + ● Convert
Output window + Convert‹ +
Instruction/macro + + Convert individual
+
palette‹ ( )* modules/macros‹
Comment edit window +
● Monitor/Simulator
Device use list +
Monitor mode‹ + +
Enlarge display +
PLC transfer -> Monitor mode‹ +
Reduce display +
PLC Read-> Monitor mode +
+Wheel
Enlarge/Reduce display Read from PLC‹ +
+Wheel
Online edit Start‹
display labels +
Simulator +
display comments‹ +
display devices for unit + ● Tool
Edit window switching + Unit Editor +

* Only valid when no instruction is input in chosen cell. ● Help

Instruction help
Instruction Reference Manual +
APPENDICES

Shortcut keys valid in the Monitor mode

● Edit Previous cross-reference +

Search + + Next cross-reference
Line/line step No. + + Make list of cross-
+
Top + reference rung comments
Bottom + Select rung +
Previous block +
Contact ON/OFF switching
Next block +
Set register + + J
Previous symbol +
Jump Reset register + +
Next symbol
Cancel + +
Home
End
Change previous block + +
Change next block + +
Contact/Coil
New cross-reference

A-16 - KV STUDIO Ver.6 User’s Manual -

● View End Monitor +
Workspace + Online edit start
Output window + Simulator +
Enlarge display + Display/hide
+
Reduce display + observation window
Enlarge/Reduce +Wheel
display +Wheel ● Debug
Display labels + Execute 1 scan
Execute 1 step
Display comments‹ +
Display devices for unit + ● Help
Change device value Instruction help
Edit window switching + Instruction Reference
+
Manual
● Monitor/Simulator
Return to Editor‹ +
Start Monitor

Shortcut keys valid in the Simulator mode

● Edit Enlarge/Reduce +Wheel

Search + + display +Wheel
Select rung + display labels +
‹
Top + display comments +
Bottom + display devices for unit +
Previous block + Change device value
Next block +
● Monitor/Simulator

APPENDICES
Previous symbol +
Return to Editor‹ +
Jump Next symbol
‹
Monitor mode + +
Home
Online edit Start
End
Display/hide watch window +
Change previous block + +
Change next block + +
● Debug
Contact/Coil
Execute 1 scan
New cross-reference
Execute continuous step +
Previous cross-reference +
Execute 1 step
Next cross-reference
Execute reverse
Make list of cross-reference +
+ consecutive steps
rung comments
Execute continuous
Contact ON/OFF switching
reverse step

● View Pause

Workspace + ● Help
Output window + Instruction help
Enlarge ladder display + Instruction Reference Manual +
Reduce ladder display +

- KV STUDIO Ver.6 User’s Manual - A-17

 Shortcut keys valid during online editing

● Edit Input/delete vertical + /

Undo + Edit connection line +
connection Input/delete
Redo + + /
line horizontal
Cut + +
connection line
Copy +
Insert a loopback ladder + +
Paste +
Verify Ladder + +
Multiple paste + +
Edit list +
Search +
Change operand
Replace operand +
Change device comment +
Line/line step No. + +
Delete instruction to the
Top +
left of cell position
Bottom +
Delete instruction at cell position
Previous block +
Directly enter
Next block + instruction at cell position
Previous symbol + Enter NO contact‹
Jump
Next symbol Enter NC contact‹ +
Home Enter NO contact OR‹
End Enter NC contact OR‹ +
Change previous block + + Enter NO contact coil ‹

Change next block + + Enter NC contact coil‹ +

Contact/Coil SET‹ +
New cross-reference RES‹ +
"Previous cross-reference(Z)"‹ + TMR‹ +
‹
Next cross-reference TMS‹ +
Make list of cross-reference rung comments + C‹
APPENDICES

+
Insert cell LDP‹ +
+ / DIFU‹ +
Insert empty rung
+ DIFD‹ +
Delete rung + LDF‹ + +
Insert rung comments + ORP‹ + +
Disable rung - Settings + ORF‹ + +
Disable rung - Cancel + MOV‹ +
Insert + + LDA‹ +
Bookmark Set + + STA ‹ +
Release + + MEP‹ + +
Select rung + MEF + +
Input vertical INV + +
connection line‹
Change NO-NC contact, change
Input horizontal
( ) suffix, enter NC contact
connection line‹
Edit + Change rise/fall +
Input horizontal connection
connection
line to end of rung + Direct input/current value change
line
Delete vertical Set register + + J
+
connection line‹ Reset register + +
Delete horizontal Cancel + +
+ ( )
connection line‹
A-18 - KV STUDIO Ver.6 User’s Manual -
● View ● Script
Workspace + Insert area script +
Output window + Insert box script +
+ + Convert selected script +
Instruction/macro palette‹
( )*
Comment edit window + ● Monitor/Simulator
Device use list +
Return to Editor‹ +
Enlarge display +
Monitor mode‹ + +
Reduce display +
Transfer online edit
Enlarge/Reduce +Wheel
Simulator +
display +Wheel
display labels + Display/hide watch
+
window
display comments‹ +
display devices for unit + ● Help
* Only valid when no instruction is input for chosen cell. Instruction help
Instruction Reference Manual +

GPPQ/GPPA Mode Shortcut Key List

Changeable shortcut keys setting.
"Customize", Page 11-15

Enter NO contact ORP +

GPPQ mode ORF +

Enter NC contact
GPPA mode + DIFU Not assigned

GPPQ mode + DIFD Not assigned

Enter NO contact OR

APPENDICES
GPPA mode MOV Not assigned

Enter NC contact OR + LDA Not assigned

Coil input STA Not assigned

Enter NC contact coil Not assigned MEP +

Input vertical GPPQ mode + Mark/unmark

+
connection line GPPA mode connecting line (right)

Delete vertical Mark/unmark

+ +
connection line connecting line (left)

Input transverse Mark/unmark

+
connecting line connecting line(down)

Delete transverse Mark/unmark

+ +
connecting line connecting line (up)

SET Not assigned Convert + +

RES Not assigned Convert individual

modules/macros
TMR Not assigned
Direct input/change
TMS Not assigned Not assigned
current value
C Not assigned
LDP +
Previous cross-reference Not assigned
LDF +

- KV STUDIO Ver.6 User’s Manual - A-19

 Next cell + + +
Previous cross-reference Not assigned
Previous cell + + +
Move to next cross-
Not assigned Monitor mode
reference
Display comments +
PLC transfer ->
Instruction/
Monitor mode + +
macro input celll
Read from PLC Not assigned
Start online edit +
Returning to Editor

CX Mode Shortcut Key List

Changeable shortcut keys setting.

"Customize", Page 11-15
Convert
Enter NO contact
Convert individual
Enter NC contact Not assigned +
modules/macros
Enter NO contact OR
Direct input/change
Enter NC contact OR
current value
Coil input
Previous cross-
Enter NC contact coil
reference
SET + Move to next cross-
RES + reference
TMR + + PLC transfer ->
TMS Not assigned Monitor mode
C Not assigned Read from PLC +
APPENDICES

LDP Not assigned Start online edit

LDF Not assigned Returning to Editor
ORP Not assigned Next cell + + +
ORF Not assigned Previous cell + + +
DIFU Not assigned Monitor mode + +
DIFD Not assigned display comments +
MOV Not assigned Instruction/macro
+ +
LDA Not assigned pack pallet
STA Not assigned
MEP + +
Mark/unmark
connecting line(right)
Mark/unmark
Not assigned
connecting line (left)
Mark/unmark
connecting line(down)
Mark/unmark
connecting line (up)

A-20 - KV STUDIO Ver.6 User’s Manual -

How to use " / " key KV-5500/5000/3000 KV-1000 KV-700 KV-P16 KV-10/16/24/40

● Cursor position setting will be displaced after pressing / or Ctrl + / .

Settings may be changed are as below.
• N.O./N.C. Up/Down

+ /

+ / + /

/ / /

+ / + /

+ /

Note
Change status are as below when pressing " Ctrl + / " in line position using KV-
5500/5000/3000.

APPENDICES
+ /

+ / + /

• SET/RSET

- KV STUDIO Ver.6 User’s Manual - A-21

 • Suffix
/

/
/

/
/

● Press on the cell without command, contact b will be entered.

/
APPENDICES

A-22 - KV STUDIO Ver.6 User’s Manual -

Input Instruction by Omission Method

Partial instruction entry can adopt omission method.

Input character string after omission
Instruction KV-10(16)/
KV-5500/5000/3000 KV-1000 KV-700/700+M
24(40),KV-P16
LD A,X,AND,OR
LDB B,LDI,LDNOT,ANI,ANDNOT,ANB,/
Contact
ORB ORI,ORNOT
Instructions
LDP,ANP P
LDF,ANF F
Bit contact BLD,BAND BA
instructions BLDB,BANB BB
LD=,AND= =
LD<,AND< <
Compare LD>,AND> >
instruction LD<=,AND<= <=
LD>=,AND>= >=
LD<>,AND<> <>
OUT O,Y
OUB OB
Output SET S
instructions RES R,RST
DIFU PLS,U
DIFD PLF,D
BOUT BO
Bit output BOUB BOB
instructions BSET BS
BRES BR
TMR T,TIM,OUTT T,TIM
TMH TH,TIMH,OUTH TH,TIMH
Timer/counter
TMS TS,OUTS TS
instructions*1
C CNT
UDC CNTR

APPENDICES
Connection/end END E,FEND
Instruction ENDH H
W-ON WON
W-OFF WOFF
Stage instruction
W-UE WUE,WU
W-DE WDE,WD
MC IL
Flow instructions
MCR ILC
Buffer memory UREAD FROM
instructions UWRIT TO
ADD +
SUB -*2
Arithmetic/ MUL *
comparison DIV /*3
instructions INC ++
DEC －-
ROOT SQRT
Logical Operation EORA XORA,XOR
Instructions ENRA XNORA
DASC DSTR
RDASC DVAL
Text Processing HASC HSTR
Instructions RHASC HVAL
FASC FSTR
RFASC FVAL

- KV STUDIO Ver.6 User’s Manual - A-23

 Input character string after omission
Instruction KV-10(16)/
KV-5500/5000/3000 KV-1000 KV-700/700+M
24(40),KV-P16
CAL+ +
CAL- -*2
CAL* *

Simple CAL/ /*3

CAL& &,WAND
Operation
CAL I I,WOR
Instructions
CAL~ ~
CAL＾ ＾,NOT,CML
CAL>> >>,SFR
CAL<< <<,SFL
FLTD, DFLTD, DBL,
DFLOAT
DBLL
Floating INTD, DINTD,
DINTG
Instructions FIXD, FIXLD
FTODF ECON
DFTOF EDCON
High-speed INT I
Processing
RETI IRET
Instructions

*1 Timer / counter instructions, can be entered even if there no space between command and Device No.

*2 "-" directly entered in "Ladder edit" window, will become horizontal connecting line.
Input "-" in the "input directly" dialog box( ), will become "CAL- instrution."

*3 "/" directly entered in "Ladder edit" window, will become LDB instruction.
Input "/" in the "input directly" dialog box( ), will become "CAL/ instruction."
APPENDICES

A-24 - KV STUDIO Ver.6 User’s Manual -

 4 Remedies for Frequently Occurring Communications Errors
This appendix describes the items to check and how to remedy frequently occurring communications
errors when monitoring KV-1000 on KV STUDIO.

Note
The items that need to be set vary according to the PC you are using. For details on how
to set items, refer to the User's Manual provided with the PC you are using, or directly
contact your PC manufacturer.

● Is the communications port available on Windows?

In the Device Manager on Windows, check whether or not use of the communications port specified in
KV STUDIO is enabled.
First inspect from device management.
To do this, select "Settings" -> "Control celll" from the
Start menu to open the Control celll. Next, double-click
the "System" icon to open the "System Properties"
window, and click the "Device Manager" tab. This
displays the Device Manager. Make sure that nothing is
assigned to the communications port.

● Is the modem assigned to the

communications port?
On some PCs, a modem might already be assigned to the communications port. If it is assigned, either
disable the modem connection, or set a different communications port.

● Is the serial mouse assigned to the communications port?

When using a serial mouse on a notebook PC, the communications port will not be enabled even if the

APPENDICES
mouse and communications cable are swapped only during communications. When communications is
performed, specify the port in the communications setup if there are any available communications
ports. If there are no available communications ports, the serial mouse must be disconnected and the
PC rebooted.

● Has infra-red communications been set?

On some PCs, infrared communications is sometimes assigned to the communications port. In this
case, specify the port in the communications setup if there are any available communications ports. If
there are no available communications ports, setting of infrared communications must be disabled.

● Has the USB driver been correctly installed?

If communications errors frequently occur in USB communications, turn the KV-1000 and PC OFF and
then back ON again. If this does not rectify the problem, delete the USB driver from the Device
Manager, and then re-install the USB driver.

- KV STUDIO Ver.6 User’s Manual - A-25

 ● Are many other applications running in addition to KV STUDIO?
If communications is interrupted by processing by other applications, communications will be
discontinued for the duration of the interrupt, and time-out error will sometimes occur. If time-out errors
frequently occur, quit all applications except KV STUDIO, and then retry communications.

● Set the Save Power mode on the PC to OFF.

On some PCs, processing to save power is executed periodically, which causes applications including
KV STUDIO to sometimes pause. The time-out error will sometimes occur as KV STUDIO no longer
functions during power save processing. If time-out errors frequently occur, set the Power Save mode
on the PC to OFF referring to the User's Manual provided with the PC.

● Is Ethernet set up correctly?

When communications errors frequently occur on Ethernet, check the following points. If this does not
remedy the error, contact your network administrator.
• Are the correct cables being used?
• Are the Link indicators on the personal computer and Ethernet Unit lit?
• Is the IP address correctly entered?
• Issue a ping to the communications destination IP address, and check that the IP address exists or
packet loss is occurring?

● When the message "USB cannot be used" is displayed

Disconnect and then reconnect the USB cable to see if it
is recognized on Windows. If this does not remedy the
problem, select "KEYENCE KV-1000 (USB)" at "System
Properties" -> "Device Manager" -> "Universal Serial
APPENDICES

Bus", and click the "Update Driver" button on the "Driver"

tab. This displays the device driver update wizard. Re-
install the driver. For details on installing the driver,
"1-5 USB Driver Installation", Page 1-11.

For KV-5500/5000/3000/1000

A-26 - KV STUDIO Ver.6 User’s Manual -

 5 Index
Save the CSV file by another name ............... 9-84
Number New CSV File ................................................ 9-83
Open CSV file ................................................ 9-84
Read all projects (P) from PLC ...................... 9-89
"Device setup" dialog box .................................... 11-5 Read selected range from PLC ..................... 9-89
"Project" tab ........................................................... 6-5 Write all projects to PLC ................................ 9-89
1 Execute 1 Block ............................................... 10-4 Write selected range to PLC .......................... 9-89
16-, 32- and 64-point Unit Monitor ...................... 9-82 Batch insert .................................................... 9-90
Limits for "Batch change" window................... 9-83
Insert increment ............................................. 9-91
A Exit window .................................................... 9-86
Delete rung .................................................... 9-88
Insert rung ...................................................... 9-90
About "batch change"window .............................. 9-83
Verification ..................................................... 9-86
About basic operation .......................................... 1-14
Cut selected range/Copy/Paste ..................... 9-88
About Conversion Functions.................................. 8-2
Delete selected range .................................... 9-88
About Debugging Functions................................. 10-2
Rearrange as per device sequence ............... 9-88
About Edit Functions.............................................. 5-2
Close file ......................................................... 9-86
About Editor ........................................................ 1-19
Save to memory card ..................................... 9-85
Names and Functions of Editor Screen .......... 1-20
Read memory card ........................................ 9-85
Editor function overview ................................. 1-19
Batch change window ......................................... 9-32
Limit when editing .......................................... 1-19
Batch monitor ............................................. 9-35, 9-46
About ladder editing window .......................... 1-22
Change current value .................................... 9-47
About Help ........................................................... 1-16
Current value is restored to the default value 9-48
Select menu of KV-1000 ................................. 1-17
Change displayed device ............................... 9-46
Select menu of KV-10(16)/KV-24(40) ............ 1-17
Batch monitor overview ....................................... 9-46
Select menu of KV-5500/5000/3000 ............... 1-16
Batch monitor window ......................................... 9-32
Select menu of KV-700/KV-700+M................. 1-17
Batch replace ...................................................... 5-13
Select menu of KV-P16................................... 1-18
Block comment ................................................... 3-26
About Monitor/Simulator Functions........................ 9-2
By matching to the PC's clock ........................... 10-15
Return to Editor ................................................ 9-3
High-speed time chart monitor ....................... 9-31
Set simulator .................................................. 9-29
Monitor mode ................................................. 9-17
C
About project folder ............................................... 2-2
About Screen ....................................................... 1-15 Change device comment .................................... 5-30
About screens of modes ................................. 1-15 Change device value window ............................. 9-39

APPENDICES
About current window .................................... 1-15 Change model...................................................... 4-15
About the data compatibility .................................. 1-5 Change previous / next block .............................. 5-17
Ladder program generated by using KV BUILDER 1-5 Change the display mode of bitmap .................... 3-30
KZ Ladder program .......................................... 1-8 Changing Operands ............................................ 5-29
Read Precautions ............................................. 1-5 Check address assignment of system ................ 3-36
About Tool Functions ........................................... 11-2 Check the Package Contents ................................ 1-2
About user data file ............................................... 2-3 Clear all PLC devices ........................................ 10-16
About View Functions ............................................ 6-2 Clear all PLC devices .......................................... 9-40
Access window displays comments ............... 4-2, 4-5 Clear CMs for KV-D30 ...................................... 10-17
Add / change File Register setting ...................... 11-5 Clear changed background color ......................... 6-31
Address setup icon ............................................. 3-33 Clear invalid operands .......................................... 8-4
Assign addresses automatically .......................... 3-35 Clear KV-D30 control memory (CM) ................... 9-40
Assign addresses manually ................................ 3-35 Close module/macro ............................................. 7-3
Auto-hide function ............................................... 1-21 Close project ......................................................... 4-3
Auto-load ............................................................. 4-17 Combination search ............................................ 9-60
Automatic multiplying power ............................... 6-29 Comment 2 ...................................................... 11-17
Auto-save ............................................................ 4-16 Comment 1 ....................................................... 11-17
Comment transfer setup ..................................... 9-16
Comments input .................................................. 3-37
B Communication setting ................................ 9-4, 9-70
Compress/save project ......................................... 4-4
Connect Ethernet .................................................. 9-7
Backup ................................................................ 4-16
Searching connection destination .................... 9-8
Basic operation of Unit Editor ............................. 3-13
Connection test ................................................ 9-9
System configuration flow ............................... 3-13
Connection line edit mode ................................... 5-25
Batch change ............................................. 9-35, 9-83
Connection with D-Sub 9-pin serial port ............... 9-3
Save CSV file ................................................. 9-84
Control bit device ON/OFF................................... 9-38
- KV STUDIO Ver.6 User’s Manual - A-27
 APPENDICES

Control relays and control memories supported by Display ...........................................................3-5, 3-7

Simulator ..................................................... 9-97 Display "Slave setup screen" ....................3-28, 3-33
Supported control memories （CM） ............. 9-98 Display by XYM ................................................. 11-16
Supported control relays （CR） .................... 9-97 Display comment ............................................... 11-17
Convert ...................................................3-4, 3-7, 8-2 Display converted ladder program ...................... 12-5
Convert NO/NC Contacts .................................... 5-10 Fold entire content of converted ladder .......... 12-7
Convert result ........................................................ 7-2 Display entire content of converted ladder ..... 12-6
Convert unit device ............................................... 7-6 Display ladder conversion ............................... 12-5
Converting Individual Modules and Macros .......... 8-3 Display CPU system setting ................................ 6-27
Copy ...................................................................... 5-4 Display device comments ................................... 9-63
Copy ...................................................................... 5-4 Display help information .............................3-30, 3-38
Copy KL Unit information .................................... 3-29 Display instruction / macro / pack pallet ............... 6-14
Copy/move configured slave................................ 3-35 Display Ladder Monitor values in Hex................ 11-17
CPU system setting ..................................... 6-6, 6-42 Display range is automatically adjusted .............. 9-69
System setting .................................................. 6-7 Display registration monitor window..................... 9-41
Program settings .............................................. 6-6 Display size ....................................................... 11-16
CPU unit buffer capacity setting .......................... 6-52 Display startup title ............................................ 11-15
Create project folder ............................................. 2-2 Display time on scale of lateral axis .................... 9-69
CSV formatted file output (browse message) ..... 4-14 Display use status ............................................... 6-26
Cursor display ..................................................... 9-69 Display version information of real-time timing curve
Cursor A&B choice ......................................... 9-70 monitor ......................................................... 9-72
Select Cursor A .............................................. 9-70 Display/hide monitor window ............................... 9-33
Cursor B choice ............................................. 9-70 Displaying Comments ..............................6-29, 11-17
Hide cursor ..................................................... 9-70 Displaying Devices for Units ....................6-30, 11-17
Cursor display ................................................ 9-70 Displaying Labels .............................................. 11-17
Customize ......................................................... 11-11 Displaying Labels ................................................ 6-29
Customize monitoring .................6-5, 9-33, 9-35, 9-49 Displaying the Comment Edit Window ................ 6-17
Registering Custom Monitors ......................... 9-50 Displaying the Label Edit Window ....................... 6-20
The features of customize monitoring ............ 9-49 When support model is KV-1000/700 / 700+M / P16
Display customize monitor ............................. 9-49 / 10 / 16 / 24 / 40 ..................................... 6-22
Cut ........................................................................ 5-4 When support model is KV-5500/5000/ 3000 6-20
Cut/Copy/Paste...................................................... 5-2 Docking Navigator ............................................... 1-21
Connect Ethernet port ........................................... 9-2 Drag, change from Ladder monitor window ........ 9-46
Drag, register from Ladder monitor window ........ 9-42
Duplicate coil check .............................................. 8-5
D
APPENDICES

Delete all device comments ................................ 5-30 E

Delete configured slave ...................................... 3-34
Delete module/macro............................................. 7-3
Deleting Rungs ................................................... 5-19 Edit .................................................................3-4, 3-7
Deveice search/replace ....................................... 5-12 Edit connection line ............................................. 5-26
Device break ........................................................ 10-8 Deleting connection lines ............................... 5-26
Delete registered contents .............................. 10-9 Inputting connection lines ............................... 5-26
Change registered contents ........................... 10-9 Edit CPU positioning parameters .................6-5, 11-7
Disabling registered conditions ....................... 10-9 Edit device comment ............................................ 5-30
To execute operation again ......................... 10-10 Edit list ................................................................. 5-27
Operation according to the maximum number of set break Displaying and editing mnemonic list .............. 5-27
conditions and debugging functions ............. 10-7 Mnemonic list format ...................................... 5-28
Device Comment .................................................. 6-6 Edit mode ............................................................ 5-24
Device default value .............................................. 6-9 Empty rung .......................................................... 5-18
Device list display ................................................ 9-63 Enlarging/Reducing Displays .............................. 6-29
Device list/setting trigger area ............................. 9-52 Enter the date and time manually ..................... 10-16
"Device List" icon ............................................ 9-52 Entering and Deleting Instructions ....................... 6-32
Device registration/setting trigger area Entering CPU positioning instructions ................. 6-39
Display device comments .............................. 9-53 Entering from the Instruction/Macro/Palette ........ 6-33
Increment registration of the device................ 9-53 Changing operands ........................................ 6-34
Device registration/change mode .................. 9-52 Entering set, reset, time, count, differential contacts,
Delete device ................................................. 9-53 differential output, and data transfer instructions 6-38
"Set trigger" icon ............................................. 9-54 Entire assignments settings of local devices ......... 8-6
Device use list ..................................................... 6-25 Environment setting ............................................ 3-39
Directly Entering Instructions Using Mnemonics . 6-35 Color setup ..................................................... 3-40
Correcting/changing an entered instruction .... 6-35 Other Settings ................................................ 3-43
A-28 - KV STUDIO Ver.6 User’s Manual -
 APPENDICES

Device assignment setting ............................. 3-41

View setup ..................................................... 3-39 H
About environment setting of unit editor ......... 3-39
Set unit color ................................................... 3-42
Error Message Lists ............................................... A-2 Help ................................................................3-6, 3-8
PLC Unit Errors.................................................A-7 High-speed time chart monitor ...................9-36, 9-73
Errors During Ethernet Communications ..........A-6 Names and Functions of Parts in High-speed Time
Errors That Occur on Editor ..............................A-2 Chart Monitor .......................................... 9-73
Errors/Warnings That Occur in Conversion ..... A-3 Features of High-speed Time Chart Monitor .. 9-73
Errors at Start of Monitoring and Communications Errors .A-5 Display high speed time chart monitor ........... 9-73
Errors That Occur on Unit Editor ......................A-9 Saving time charts as bitmaps ........................ 9-80
Error monitor window ........................................ 10-12 Saving Time Charts......................................... 9-79
Errors that are displayed when KV STUDIO is started Reading time charts ....................................... 9-79
up .................................................................. A-9
Execute 1 scan .................................................... 10-3
Execute 1 step .................................................... 10-4 I
Execute continuous step ..................................... 10-3
Execute Reverse 1 Block .................................... 10-5
ID No.("bit in executing") ...................................... 6-15
Execute reverse 1 step ....................................... 10-6
IME auto-ON ..................................................... 11-15
Execute reverse consecutive step ...................... 10-5
Import comments/labels ........................................ 4-7
Execute RUN/continuous scan ........................... 10-2
Import CPU locating parameter ............................. 4-9
Execution sequence unassigned module ........... 9-27
Import default value of device ............................... 4-8
Delete execution sequence unassigned module ... 9-27
Import logging info.................................................. 4-8
Operation sequence unassigned module ...... 9-27
Import modules/macros ......................................... 4-7
Exit real-time Time Chart Monitor ........................ 9-59
Import settings of file register ................................ 4-8
Exit ....................................................................... 4-17
Import Slave Information ............................3-28, 3-36
Expanded Ladder Mode....................................... 5-24
Inhibit input refreshing ........................................ 10-13
Inhibit output....................................................... 10-14
Initialize module .................................................... 7-2
F Input auxiliary function ........................................ 12-8
Display simple format ..................................... 12-8
File ................................................................. 3-4, 3-7 Display script function list ............................... 12-8
File access errors ..................................................A-9 Input refresh disable / output disable setting ....... 9-40
File operation of project folders ............................. 2-4 Insert Script ......................................................... 12-2
File register setting ................................................ 6-9 Insert area script ............................................ 12-2
Fixed cycle execution and user interrupt setting . 6-43 Switch edit method ......................................... 12-3

APPENDICES
Flow and mode of creating Ladder Program ....... 1-14 Insert box script .............................................. 12-2
Folding Ladder .................................................... 5-19 Insert .................................................................... 5-18
Forced set/reset register .......................... 9-40, 10-11 Inserting Empty Rungs ........................................ 5-18
Forced set/reset register ..................................... 9-48 Install in Windows XP .......................................... 1-11
Frame magnify, reduce ....................................... 9-68 Install Software....................................................... 1-9
Magnify vertical frame .................................... 9-68 Uninstall KV STUDIO ..................................... 1-10
Reduce vertical frame .................................... 9-68 RS-232C （serial port) ..................................... 1-9
Magnify horizontal frame ................................ 9-68 USB （USB port）............................................. 1-9
Reduce horizontal frame ................................ 9-68 Precautions on Windows XP/2000 ................... 1-9
From Ladder monitor window, click right-click register 9-42 Windows Environment and Installation Directory ..... 1-9
Outline of step execution function ................ 9-102 Ethernet (Ethernet card port) ........................... 1-9
Common restrictions ...................................... 9-96 Installation ...................................................... 1-10
Device states when Simulator is stopped ...... 9-98 Preparing for Installation ................................... 1-9
About the Mnemonic List window ................. 9-102 Free Space Available on Hard Disk ................. 1-9
Setting breaks .............................................. 9-101 Install the USB Driver ........................................... 1-11
Reset ............................................................ 9-103 Instruction search/replace ..................................... 5-8
Device states when operation is reset ........... 9-99 Deleting instructions ....................................... 6-41
Continuous-scan execution .......................... 9-101 Instruction input .............................................. 6-32
Instruction selection panel.................................... 6-14
Interrupt setting ................................................... 9-40
G Invalid operands .................................................... 8-4

Global device comments transfer range setting .. 9-15 J

Globally annotate local devs during monitor ..... 11-17

Jump and search ................................................. 9-39

- KV STUDIO Ver.6 User’s Manual - A-29

 APPENDICES

Jump to bottom ................................................... 5-16 Start Unit Editor .............................................. 3-15

Jump to error rung ............................................... 3-37 Exit Unit Editor ............................................... 3-15
Jump to the specified data No. ........................... 9-62 Import unit setting info and unit comments .... 3-25
Jump to triggered position.................................... 9-62 Detail setting of display unit ........................... 3-22
Jump .................................................................... 5-15 Display unit monitor ........................................ 3-23
Jumping to cursor A ............................................ 9-62 Unit configuration ........................................... 3-16
Jumping to cursor B ............................................ 9-62 Reserve unit/dereserve .................................. 3-27
Jumping to the end of a rung .............................. 5-17 Moving units with relays/DMs assigned ......... 3-18
Jumping to the next network block ...................... 5-16
Jumping to the next program changed block ...... 5-17
Jumping to the next symbol ................................ 5-16
Jumping to the previous network block ............... 5-16 M
Jumping to the previous program changed block 5-17
Jumping to the previous symbol ......................... 5-16
Jumping to the start of a rung ............................. 5-17 Macro .................................................................... 6-9
Jumping to the top rung ...................................... 5-16 Right-click menu in macro................................. 6-9
Macro argument setting ........................................ 7-5
Macro selection board .......................................... 6-15
K Macro type ............................................................. 7-3
Mail communication instruction Maker ................ 11-6
Mail setting .......................................................... 11-6
KL connection setting ........................................ 11-11 Making reference ................................................ 9-48
KV STUDIO brief introduction ............................... 1-3 Menu list in Unit Editor .......................................... 3-4
KV STUDIO functionality .................................. 1-4 Mnemonics list .................................................... 6-28
Editor function .................................................. 1-4 Rung interrupt setting ..................................... 6-28
simulation function ........................................... 1-4 Modem communications ....................................... 9-9
Operating Environment and System Configuration Modem Initialization ........................................ 9-10
1-3 Communication with modem mode................. 9-13
Monitoring function............................................ 1-4 Modem transfer mode overview........................ 9-9
Unit Editor function ........................................... 1-4 Module library....................................................... 6-13
KV STUDIO Ver.4 Major CD ................................. 1-2 Display/hide module library ............................. 6-13
KV-CL20 setting .................................................. 11-8 Module register and call ...................................... 6-14
KV-DN20 setting ................................................ 11-8 Module type............................................................ 7-2
Module/macro ....................................................... 7-2
Module/macro properties ....................................... 7-4
L Monitor mode
When the project being edited is identical to that of
APPENDICES

PLC ......................................................... 9-17

Label ..................................................................... 6-6 When the project being edited is different from that
Ladder arrangement ........................................... 5-27 of PLC...................................................... 9-17
Ladder diagram color setting ............................. 11-13 Monitor register ...........................................9-35, 9-41
Ladder program ........................................... 6-8, 6-11 Save as customize monitor ............................ 9-45
Right click on menu in Ladder ................. 6-8, 6-11 Change current value ..................................... 9-43
Ladder program monitor brief introduction........... 9-37 Current value is restored to the default value 9-44
Library ................................................................. 6-10 Switch comment ............................................. 9-44
Right-click the menu in system ....................... 6-10 Display/hide the setting value and contact of timer /
User ............................................................... 6-10 counter (status of timer / counter contact) .... 9-44
Local comment 1 ................................................. 6-17 Switch time chart ............................................ 9-45
Local comment 2 ................................................. 6-17 Display/hide device reference destination....... 9-45
Local devices settings by module/macro .............. 8-6 Device registration ......................................... 9-42
Local/whole assignment setting .......................... 6-47 Sort device ...................................................... 9-44
Window display .............................................. 3-16 Change display sequence of device by required
Jump to error rung .......................................... 3-27 ........................................................................ 9-44
Customize monitoring .................................... 3-23 Delete the device from register monitor program.... 9-44
Comments input ............................................. 3-26 Real-time chart monitor/high-speed time chart
Check relay/DM assignment of system .......... 3-21 monitor .................................................... 9-45
Delete configured unit .................................... 3-17 Monitor window ................................................... 9-35
Copy/move configured unit ............................. 3-17 Monitoring function ............................................... 9-34
Assign automatically relay/DM of unit ............. 3-18 Communication with PLC................................ 9-34
Assign manually relay/DM of unit ................... 3-18 PLC setting and operation .............................. 9-40
Relay No. of configuration unit can be assigned in Precautions when using USB port ................. 9-35
batch ....................................................... 3-20 About screen display ...................................... 9-37
Set up configuration unit ................................ 3-22 Change current value/setting value ................ 9-39
Display buffer memory monitor ...................... 3-24 Precautions when using serial port ................ 9-34
A-30 - KV STUDIO Ver.6 User’s Manual -
 APPENDICES

Control bit device ON/OFF.............................. 9-38 Operation in slave configuration area .................A-14
Various monitor functions .............................. 9-35
Monitor limit..................................................... 9-34
Names and functions of monitor screen ........ 9-37
Ladder monitor ............................................... 9-37 P
MOTION BUILDER ...................................... 6-5, 11-9
Moving the unit by preserving the existing address
setting .......................................................... 3-35 Precautions when changing KV-700 to KV-5500/5000/
MV LINK STUDIO ............................................. 11-10 3000/1000 ...................................................... 1-7
Precautions on Windows XP/2000 ........................ 1-9
Preparing for Installation ........................................ 1-9
N Precautions when editing Ladder Program ......... 1-19
Project management .............................................. 2-2
Preset unit / preset client / remove preset ........... 3-37
Names and Functions of Editor Screen ............... 1-20 Project-project verify ............................................. 4-4
New a project ......................................................... 2-4 Project properties ................................................... 4-5
Names and Functions of Different Parts of Unit Editor Project ID .............................................................. 4-5
3-9 Print ............................................................4-18, 9-58
Names and functions of different parts of slave setup Print preview ........................................................ 4-20
screen .......................................................... 3-31 Printer setting ...................................................... 4-20
New a project ........................................................ 4-2 Paste ...................................................................... 5-4
New module ........................................................... 7-2 Previous /next block ............................................ 5-16
New macros ........................................................... 7-2 Previous/next symbol .......................................... 5-16
Names and functions of monitor screen ............. 9-37 "Project" tab............................................................ 6-5
Names and Functions of Parts in High-speed Time Program settings ................................................... 6-6
Chart Monitor ............................................... 9-73 Pack pallet ........................................................... 6-16
New CSV File ...................................................... 9-83 Program settings ................................................. 6-42
Names and Functions of Screen Parts ............. 9-100 Protection setting ................................................ 6-46
PLC transfer -> Monitor mode ............................. 9-17
PLC read -> Monitor mode .................................. 9-23
PLC transfer ......................................................... 9-24
O PLC verify/synchronize ........................................ 9-25
Program memory space confirm ......................... 9-26
PLC verification ................................................... 9-28
Operating Environment and System Configuration 1-3 Precautions when using serial port ..................... 9-34
Option ........................................................ 3-5, 11-13 Precautions when using USB port ...................... 9-35
Operation of Unit Editor ...................................... 3-15 PLC error verification .......................................... 9-39

APPENDICES
Other Settings ..................................................... 3-43 PLC setting and operation ................................... 9-40
Open project ......................................................... 4-3 Power OFF hold setting ...................................... 6-53
Outputting CSV Files (Unit Specifications) ......... 4-14 Print setting ......................................................... 9-57
Output window .................................................... 6-12 Print preview ........................................................ 9-59
Operation setting during error ............................. 6-54 Pausing/stopping program execution ................. 9-103
Open Module/macro ............................................. 7-3 PROGRAM/stop .................................................. 10-2
Operation sequence unassigned module ........... 9-27 Pause .................................................................. 10-6
Online edit............................................................ 9-28 PROTOCOL BUILDER ....................................... 11-8
Online edit function .................................... 9-36, 9-92 PROTOCOL STUDIO ....................................... 11-10
Open file .............................................................. 9-57 Panel editor ....................................................... 11-10
Overlay waveform display ................................... 9-67 PLC Unit Errors ......................................................A-7
Open CSV file ..................................................... 9-84 Printing-related errors .........................................A-10
Online Edit Features ........................................... 9-92
Overview ............................................................. 9-96
Outline of scan execution function .................... 9-100 R
Outline of step execution function ..................... 9-102
Operation according to the maximum number of set break
conditions and debugging functions .................. 10-7 Read Precautions................................................... 1-5
Only convert selected script ................................ 12-4 RS-232C （serial port) .......................................... 1-9
Operation messages.............................................. A-9 Refresh setting tab ............................................... 3-11
Operations in message area................................A-13 Relay No. of configuration unit can be assigned in batch
Operations in unit setup window ..........................A-13 3-20
Operations in unit selection window.....................A-13 Read unit configuration from PLC ....................... 3-26
Operations in unit placement area ....................... A-13 Reserve unit/dereserve ....................................... 3-27
Operations in unit setup window ..........................A-14 Reading Text Format Comments ........................ 4-11
Operations in unit selection window.....................A-14 Read mnemonics list ........................................... 4-13
Operations in address setup window ..................A-14 Redo....................................................................... 5-2
- KV STUDIO Ver.6 User’s Manual - A-31
 APPENDICES

Replace.................................................................. 5-7 Save project as ..................................................... 4-3

Replace.................................................................. 5-9 Set password ......................................................... 4-6
Rung/step No. ..................................................... 5-15 Save/Read memory card ....................................... 4-9
Rung comment..................................................... 5-18 Save in text format ............................................... 4-11
Rung settings ....................................................... 5-21 Save mnemonic list ............................................. 4-12
Right-click menu for unit setup............................... 6-5 Selecting by the mouse ......................................... 5-3
Right click on menu in Ladder ...................... 6-8, 6-11 Selecting a range .................................................. 5-3
Right-click menu in macro...................................... 6-9 Search ................................................................... 5-6
Right-click the menu in system ............................ 6-10 Search ...................................................5-6, 5-8, 9-59
Right-click the menu in system ............................ 6-10 Search Rung Comments ...................................... 5-11
Right-click menu in module library ....................... 6-13 Select the next verification .................................. 5-14
Right-click menu for comment1/2 and local comment1/ 2 6-18 Select previous Verification ................................ 5-14
Replacing text strings .......................................... 6-19 Setting Disabling Rungs and Canceling Disabled Rungs5-20
Right click on the menu in label edit window ...... 6-22 Switch shortcut column ......................................... 6-3
Replacing text strings........................................... 6-24 Set logging ...................................................6-5, 11-3
Rung interrupt setting .......................................... 6-28 System setting........................................................ 6-7
Return to Editor ..................................................... 9-3 Switch the display of tab ...................................... 6-13
Route setup ......................................................... 9-14 Searching for text strings .................................... 6-18
Read PLC ........................................................... 9-25 Searching for text strings .................................... 6-23
Real-time chart monitor .....................9-30, 9-36, 9-51 Specifying the default suffix ................................ 6-41
Register monitor window ..................................... 9-31 Set module execution order ................................. 6-42
Read and monitor program ................................. 9-36 Settings of fixed cycle module ............................. 6-43
Real-time chart monitor/high-speed time chart monitor Setting of interrupt priority ................................... 6-44
9-45 Set related scan .................................................. 6-45
Registering Custom Monitors .............................. 9-50 System setting...................................................... 6-47
Real-time chart monitor display .......................... 9-51 Setup module/macro device................................. 6-51
Reduce vertical frame ......................................... 9-68 Standby module .................................................... 7-2
Reduce horizontal frame ..................................... 9-68 Subroutine macro .................................................. 7-3
Read PLC internal trace data............................... 9-71 Self-hold macro ..................................................... 7-3
Reading time charts ............................................ 9-79 Setting a password to a macro............................... 7-4
Read memory card ............................................. 9-85 Set execute sequence of module ........................... 7-6
Rearrange as per device sequence .................... 9-88 Serial connection ................................................... 9-5
Read all projects (P) from PLC ........................... 9-89 Set up unit No. ....................................................... 9-6
Read selected range from PLC ........................... 9-89 Searching connection destination ......................... 9-8
Reset.................................................................. 9-103 Stop monitoring .................................................... 9-28
Reset.................................................................... 10-7 Start monitor......................................................... 9-28
Rung break ....................................................... 10-10 Set simulator ....................................................... 9-29
APPENDICES

Register/delete keys .......................................... 11-12 Simulator ............................................................. 9-29

Remedies for Frequently Occurring Communications Start from KV STUDIO ........................................ 9-30
Errors ...........................................................A-24 Start and Exit Monitor........................................... 9-36
Start and stop monitor .......................................... 9-39
Set up operation mode of PLC ............................ 9-40
S Scan time monitor ....................................9-40, 10-14
Set up calendar timer ...............................9-40, 10-15
Specify device and register ................................. 9-42
Simulation function ................................................ 1-4 Switch comment .................................................. 9-44
Switch model.......................................................... 1-7 Sort device ........................................................... 9-44
Safety Precautions............................................... 1-13 Switch time chart ................................................. 9-45
Select menu of KV-5500/5000/3000 .................... 1-16 Save as customize monitor ................................. 9-45
Select menu of KV-1000 ...................................... 1-17 Specify device and change ................................ 9-46
Select menu of KV-10(16)/KV-24(40) ................. 1-17 Switch comment display ...................................... 9-48
Select menu of KV-700/KV-700+M ...................... 1-17 "Set trigger" icon................................................... 9-54
Select menu of KV-P16........................................ 1-18 Set trigger type .................................................... 9-55
Set password ........................................................ 2-4 Save ..................................................................... 9-57
Set slave ............................................................... 3-5 Save As ................................................................ 9-57
System configuration flow .................................... 3-13 Save CSV file ...................................................... 9-57
Start Unit Editor ................................................... 3-15 Search the up point ............................................. 9-61
Set up configuration unit ..................................... 3-22 Search the next point .......................................... 9-61
System comments .............................................. 3-27 Set display............................................................ 9-63
Start KL Address Setup Software ....................... 3-30 "Scale" icon ......................................................... 9-65
Slave Configuration Area ..................................... 3-31 Select Cursor A ................................................... 9-70
Switch cursor position ......................................... 3-34 Start tracing ......................................................... 9-71
Switch cursor position ......................................... 3-34 Saving Time Charts.............................................. 9-79
Save project .......................................................... 4-3
A-32 - KV STUDIO Ver.6 User’s Manual -
 APPENDICES

Saving time charts as bitmaps ............................. 9-80 The features of customize monitoring ................. 9-49
Save CSV file ...................................................... 9-84 The features of real-time chart monitor ................ 9-51
Save the CSV file by another name .................... 9-84 The Composition of Real-time Chart Monito ....... 9-51
Save to memory card .......................................... 9-85 Trigger type "NORMAL" ....................................... 9-55
Start online edit ................................................... 9-93 Trigger type "SINGLE" 9-55Time chart display area 9-
Set online edit ..................................................... 9-95 56
Simulator ............................................................. 9-96 Trigger setting display .......................................... 9-63
Simulator Restrictions ......................................... 9-96 Time axis zoom in ............................................... 9-67
Supported control relays （CR） ......................... 9-97 Time axis reduce ................................................. 9-67
Supported control memories （CM） .................. 9-98 Tracing stop ........................................................ 9-71
Starting Up and Exiting Simulator ....................... 9-99 Tracing pause ..................................................... 9-71
Scan Execution ................................................. 9-100 Transfer online edit ............................................. 9-94
Starting up and stopping Simulator ................... 9-100 To cancel a rung break setting ........................... 10-10
Setting the scan time ........................................ 9-101 To execute operation again ............................... 10-10
Setting the wait time .......................................... 9-101 Toolbar .............................................................. 11-12
Setting the watchdog timer ................................ 9-101 Through change of unit configuration, the device
Setting breaks ................................................... 9-101 converts its mode automatically ................. 11-15
Step control ....................................................... 9-102 Tool ......................................................................A-16
Set device break .................................................. 10-7
Switch unit configuration ...................................... 11-2
Set device default value ...................................... 11-4 U
Shortcut keys ..................................................... 11-11
Setting online edit ............................................. 11-14
Setting the unit color .......................................... 11-14 Unit Editor function ................................................ 1-4
System setting .................................................. 11-15 User Rights ........................................................... 1-9
Script setting ..................................................... 11-16 USB （USB port）.................................................. 1-9
Set display modes.............................................. 11-16 Uninstall KV STUDIO .......................................... 1-10
Setting editing/key ............................................. 11-17 Unit selection icon ............................................... 3-10
Switch edit method .............................................. 12-3 Unit configuration area ........................................ 3-10
Script conversion ................................................ 12-4 Unit setup icon ..................................................... 3-11
Setting the Warning Level of Script Conversion Errors 12-4 Unit configuration ................................................ 3-16
Shortcut Key List..................................................A-13 Unit comments .................................................... 3-26
Shortcut Keys Valid on Unit Editor ...................... A-13 Use slave setup screen ....................................... 3-31
Shortcut Keys Valid on Unit Editor Window .........A-13 Unit selection icon ............................................... 3-32
Slave setup .........................................................A-13 Undo....................................................................... 5-2
Shortcut Keys Valid on Unit Editor "Slave Setup Screen" . A-13 Unit setup ............................................................... 6-5
Shortcut Keys Valid on KV STUDIO ...................A-14 Unit Monitor ................................ 6-5, 9-33, 9-36, 9-81

APPENDICES
Shortcut keys valid in the initial screen ................A-14 Unit configuration switching ................................... 6-6
Shortcut keys valid in the Editor mode ................A-14 User ..................................................................... 6-10
Script....................................................................A-16 Upper value setting of digital trimmer .................. 6-55
Shortcut keys valid in the Monitor mode ..............A-16 USB port................................................................. 9-2
Shortcut keys valid in the Simulator mode ..........A-17 USB connection .................................................... 9-5
Shortcut keys valid during online editing .............A-18 "Universal"icon ..................................................... 9-66
Script....................................................................A-19 Unit Editor ............................................................ 11-2
Set the Power Save mode on the PC to OFF ......A-25 Unit configuration error check ..............................A-10
Unusable character list.........................................A-11

T
V
To cancel the auto-save function ........................ 4-16
To cancel the auto-load function.......................... 4-17 View setup ........................................................... 3-39
Top/bottom .......................................................... 5-17 Various file commands ........................................... 4-2
Top/bottom .......................................................... 5-16 Verification .......................................................... 5-14
Toolbar/Status bar ................................................ 6-2 Various monitor functions .................................... 9-35
Test race contention of device .............................. 8-3 "View(V)"menu .................................................... 9-63
Test race contention of device .............................. 8-3 Verification .......................................................... 9-86
Transfer item "global device comment" ............... 9-19
Transfer item "program" ....................................... 9-19
Transfer item "Mail setting message" .................. 9-20 W
Transfer item "Logging/tracing setting message" 9-20
Transfer item "positioning unit parameter" ........... 9-21
Windows Environment and Installation Directory .......... 1-9
Transfer item "File Register setting" .................... 9-21
When CPU unit is KV-5500/5000/3000 ............... 9-18
Transfer and monitor program ............................ 9-36
- KV STUDIO Ver.6 User’s Manual - A-33
 APPENDICES

Window display ................................................... 3-16

Width.................................................................... 5-21
Workspace ............................................................ 6-3
Witch the display of tab ......................................... 6-3
When support model is KV-5500/5000/ 3000 ..... 6-20
When support model is KV-1000/700 / 700+M / P16 / 10
/ 16 / 24 / 40 ................................................ 6-22
Whole setting of fixed cycle module and interrupt
priority .......................................................... 6-44
When support model is KV-5500/5000/ 3000 ..... 6-47
When the model is KV-1000 ............................... 6-50
When the project being edited is identical to that of PLC
..................................................................... 9-17
When the project being edited is different from that of
PLC .............................................................. 9-17
When search target is bit device ......................... 9-59
When search target is word device ..................... 9-60
Waveform display in parallel ............................... 9-67
Write all projects to PLC ..................................... 9-89
Write selected range to PLC ............................... 9-89
Window ................................................................ A-14
When the message "USB cannot be used" is displayed
A-25

Zoom in/ zoom out indicating range .................... 9-68

Zoom out indicating range ................................... 9-69
APPENDICES

A-34 - KV STUDIO Ver.6 User’s Manual -

 MEMO

- KV STUDIO Ver.6 User’s Manual -

Revision History
Printing Date Version Details of Revision

Jan 2011 4th version Official release

- KV STUDIO Ver.6 User’s Manual -

 WARRANTIES AND DISCLAIMERS

(1) KEYENCE warrants the Products to be free of defects in materials and workmanship for a period of one (1)
year from the date of shipment. If any models or samples were shown to Buyer, such models or samples were
used merely to illustrate the general type and quality of the Products and not to represent that the Products
would necessarily conform to said models or samples. Any Products found to be defective must be shipped to
KEYENCE with all shipping costs paid by Buyer or offered to KEYENCE for inspection and examination. Upon
examination by KEYENCE, KEYENCE, at its sole option, will refund the purchase price of, or repair or replace
at no charge any Products found to be defective. This warranty does not apply to any defects resulting from
any action of Buyer, including but not limited to improper installation, improper interfacing, improper repair,
unauthorized modification, misapplication and mishandling, such as exposure to excessive current, heat,
coldness, moisture, vibration or outdoors air. Components which wear are not warranted.
(2) KEYENCE is pleased to offer suggestions on the use of its various Products. They are only suggestions, and it
is Buyer's responsibility to ascertain the fitness of the Products for Buyer’s intended use. KEYENCE will not be
responsible for any damages that may result from the use of the Products.
(3) The Products and any samples ("Products/Samples") supplied to Buyer are not to be used internally in
humans, for human transportation, as safety devices or fail-safe systems, unless their written specifications
state otherwise. Should any Products/Samples be used in such a manner or misused in any way, KEYENCE
assumes no responsibility, and additionally Buyer will indemnify KEYENCE and hold KEYENCE harmless from
any liability or damage whatsoever arising out of any misuse of the Products/Samples.
(4) OTHER THAN AS STATED HEREIN, THE PRODUCTS/SAMPLES ARE PROVIDED WITH NO OTHER
WARRANTIES WHATSOEVER. ALL EXPRESS, IMPLIED, AND STATUTORY WARRANTIES, INCLUDING,
WITHOUT LIMITATION, THE WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR
PURPOSE, AND NON-INFRINGEMENT OF PROPRIETARY RIGHTS, ARE EXPRESSLY DISCLAIMED. IN
NO EVENT SHALL KEYENCE AND ITS A FFILIATED ENTITIES BE LIABLE TO ANY PERSON OR ENTITY
FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, PUNITIVE, SPECIAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES
(INCLUDING, WITHOUT LIMITATION, ANY DAMAGES RESULTING FROM LOSS OF USE, BUSINESS
INTERRUPTION, LOSS OF INFORMATION, LOSS OR INACCURACY OF DATA, LOSS OF PROFITS,
LOSS OF SAVINGS, THE COST OF PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTED GOODS, SERVICES OR
TECHNOLOGIES, OR FOR ANY MATTER ARISING OUT OF OR IN CONNECTION WITH THE USE OR
INABILITY TO USE THE PRODUCTS, EVEN IF KEYENCE OR ONE OF ITS AFFILIATED ENTITIES WAS
ADVISED OF A POSSIBLE THIRD PARTY’S CLAIM FOR DAMAGES OR ANY OTHER CLAIM AGAINST
BUYER. In some jurisdictions, some of the foregoing warranty disclaimers or damage limitations may not
apply.

BUYER'S TRANSFER OBLIGATIONS:

If the Products/Samples purchased by Buyer are to be resold or delivered to a third party, Buyer must provide
such third party with a copy of this document, all specifications, manuals, catalogs, leaflets and written
information provided to Buyer pertaining to the Products/Samples.

E 1110-2
Copyright (c) 2010 KEYENCE CORPORATION. All rights reserved. 084225E 1011-4a 96121E Printed in Japan